《锯喻经》的注释巴利
1. Kakacūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
222 222.“如是我闻”这句,说的是《锯喻经》。其中,“摩离亚·帕古那”里的“牟利”,是指顶髻。正如所说的——巴利
222.Evaṃme sutanti kakacūpamasuttaṃ. Tattha moḷiyaphaggunoti moḷīti cūḷā vuccati. Yathāha –
“ 斩断那用殊胜香料熏染过的顶髻,
释迦族中的雄牛把它抛向空中。
婆娑婆天王,以殊胜宝箧,
千眼之尊,俯首顶受。”巴利
‘‘Chetvāna moḷiṃ varagandhavāsitaṃ, Vehāyasaṃ ukkhipi sakyapuṅgavo; Ratanacaṅkoṭavarena vāsavo, Sahassanetto sirasā paṭiggahī’’ti.
他在家时,那个顶髻很大,因此就得了“髻发破群那”这个名字。即使出了家,人们还是用这个名字认他。“Ativelaṃ”的意思是超过了适当的时机。这里说的“时机”有三种:时间上的时机、界限上的时机、戒律上的时机。比如“在那个时机,说了这段优陀那”(《法句》品目、偈目;《大品》1-3),这说的是时间上的时机。“安住于法的人不越过时机”(《小品》384;《优陀那》45;《增支部》8.19),这说的是界限上的时机。“不越时机就是断桥”(《法集》299-301),以及“这就是戒的时机,以不逾越为义”,这说的是戒律上的时机。这三种时机,他全都逾越了。教诫比丘尼是有固定时间的,他甚至在太阳落山之后还去教诫,这就逾越了时间上的时机。教诫比丘尼的内容也有一个限度、一个界限,他却用超过五六句的方式去教诫,这就逾越了界限上的时机。而在说法的时候,他还夹杂玩笑,甚至讲到能导致粗重犯戒的内容,这样就逾越了戒律上的时机。巴利
Sā tassa gihikāle mahatī ahosi, tenassa moḷiyaphaggunoti saṅkhā udapādi. Pabbajitampi naṃ teneva nāmena sañjānanti. Ativelanti velaṃ atikkamitvā. Tattha kālavelā, sīmavelā, sīlavelāti tividhā velā. ‘‘Tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesī’’ti (dhammapade vaggānamuddānaṃ, gāthānamuddānaṃ; mahāva. 1-3) ayaṃ kālavelā nāma. ‘‘Ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattatī’’ti (cūḷava. 384; udā. 45; a. ni. 8.19) ayaṃ sīmavelā nāma. ‘‘Velāanatikkamo setughāto’’ti (dha. sa. 299-301) ca, ‘‘velā cesā avītikkamanaṭṭhenā’’ti ca, ayaṃ sīlavelā nāma. Taṃ tividhampi so atikkamiyeva. Bhikkhuniyo hi ovadituṃ kālo nāma atthi, so atthaṅgatepi sūriye ovadanto taṃ kālavelampi atikkami. Bhikkhunīnaṃ ovāde pamāṇaṃ nāma atthi sīmā mariyādā. So uttarichappañcavācāhi ovadanto taṃ sīmavelampi atikkami. Kathento pana davasahagataṃ katvā duṭṭhullāpattipahonakaṃ katheti, evaṃ sīlavelampi atikkami.
“混杂”是指混在一起,彼此同甘共苦。“当面”是指在面前。“说非难”是指:看到那些比丘尼在煮饭、捣磨等,就说“这些比丘尼根本没有不犯戒这回事,这些比丘尼行为不端、难以教导、厚颜无耻”,这样讲她们的坏话。“又制造诤事”是指:说“这些比丘从见到这些比丘尼那时候起,眼睛就像被烧灼一样;在这座精舍里,供花、洗座、整理杂物等事都靠她们来做。她们是良家女儿,有羞耻心,你们却对她们说这说那,这就是你们的犯戒;你们到持律者那里去,给我一个裁决”,这样把诤事拉扯起来。巴利
Saṃsaṭṭhoti missībhūto samānasukhadukkho hutvā. Sammukhāti purato. Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti tā pana pacanakoṭṭanādīni karontiyo disvā natthi imāsaṃ anāpatti nāma, imā bhikkhuniyo anācārā dubbacā pagabbhāti aguṇaṃ katheti. Adhikaraṇampi karotīti imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ imā bhikkhuniyo diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya akkhīni dayhanti, imasmiṃ vihāre pupphapūjā vā āsanadhovanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇādīni vā imāsaṃ vasena vattanti. Kuladhītaro etā lajjiniyo , tumhe imā idañcidañca vadatha, ayaṃ nāma tumhākaṃ āpatti hoti, vinayadharānaṃ santikaṃ āgantvā vinicchayaṃ me dethāti adhikaraṇaṃ ākaḍḍhati.
说“摩离亚·帕古那的不是”,意思就是:说这个比丘没有所谓的无犯。他一直在说:这个比丘的精舍门口从来不会没有比丘尼。这是在讲他的过失。“还制造诤事”,意思是:这些比丘从见到摩离亚·帕古那长老那时候起,眼睛就像被烧灼一样。在这座精舍里,连看看别人住的地方都做不到。来到精舍的比丘尼们,不管是接受教诫、受到接待,还是学习诵句,都只能依靠这位长老才能得到。他是良家子弟,有惭耻心,有悔愧心,你们竟然说这说那,来吧,到持律者面前去裁决吧!就这样把诤事拉扯起来。巴利
Moḷiyaphaggunassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti natthi imassa bhikkhuno anāpatti nāma. Niccakālaṃ imassa pariveṇadvāraṃ asuññaṃ bhikkhunīhīti aguṇaṃ katheti. Adhikaraṇampi karontīti imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ moḷiyaphaggunattherassa diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya akkhīni dayhanti. Imasmiṃ vihāre aññesaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ oloketumpi na sakkā. Vihāraṃ āgatabhikkhuniyo ovādaṃ vā paṭisanthāraṃ vā uddesapadaṃ vā therameva nissāya labhanti, kulaputtako lajjī kukkuccako, evarūpaṃ nāma tumhe idañcidañca vadatha, etha vinayadharānaṃ santike vinicchayaṃ dethāti adhikaraṇaṃ ākaḍḍhanti.
那位比丘对世尊说这些话,并不是出于讨好,也不是想挑拨离间,而是出于想利益他。据说他心里这样想:“这位比丘这样与人杂处而住,会招来坏名声,那对教法也是一种损害。如果别人跟他说,他不会停下来;但世尊为他说法、教诫之后,他就会停下来了。”出于想利益他的心,他对世尊说了“尊者……”等话。巴利
Sobhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti neva piyakamyatāya na bhedādhippāyena, atthakāmatāya avoca. Ekaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘imassa bhikkhussa evaṃ saṃsaṭṭhassa viharato ayaso uppajjissati. So sāsanassāpi avaṇṇoyeva. Aññena pana kathito ayaṃ na oramissati, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desetvā ovadito oramissatī’’ti tassa atthakāmatāya bhagavantaṃ etaṃ, ‘‘āyasmā, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
223 Āmantehi 的意思是让人知道。Āmanteti 的意思是召唤。巴利
223.Āmantehīti jānāpehi. Āmantetīti pakkosati.
224 信,就是信心。因此:因为你是良家子,又是因信而出家;又因为,当你和她们交往而住在一起时,如果有人骂她们、打她们,你就会生起忧恼;一旦断除了交往,就不会生起,所以说“因此”。在那里,就是指在被非难的时候。世俗的,是指依附于五欲的。欲,是指贪欲,也是指嗔欲。变异的:被染着的心是变异的,嗔心、痴心也是变异的。不过在这里,依贪欲来说,染着的心也成立;依嗔欲来说,嗔怒的心也成立。以利益悲悯:就是以利益来悲悯,以利益来遍满。不怀嗔心:我不会成为心怀嗔心的人。巴利
224.Saddhāti saddhāya. Tasmāti yasmā tvaṃ kulaputto ceva saddhāpabbajito ca, yasmā vā te etāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaṭṭhassa viharato ye tā akkosissanti vā, paharissanti vā, tesu domanassaṃ uppajjissati, saṃsagge pahīne nuppajjissati, tasmā. Tatrāti tasmiṃ avaṇṇabhāsane. Gehasitāti pañcakāmaguṇanissitā. Chandāti taṇhāchandāpi paṭighachandāpi. Vipariṇatanti rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ. Duṭṭhampi, mūḷhampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ. Idha pana taṇhāchandavasena rattampi vaṭṭati, paṭighachandavasena duṭṭhampi vaṭṭati. Hitānukampīti hitena anukampamāno hitena pharamāno. Na dosantaroti na dosacitto bhavissāmi.
225 那么,世尊为什么又开始这次开示呢?据说,帕古那即使听了这一番教诫,心里也根本没有生起“我要从与比丘尼的交往中退出来、远离”的念头,反而与世尊对立、抵触而住。于是,就像饥饿的人对食物、口渴的人对饮水、受冻的人对温暖、受苦的人对安乐会生起渴望一样,世尊见到这个难以调教的比丘时,初成正觉时那些容易受教的比丘们便浮现在眼前。于是,世尊想要称扬他们的功德,便开始了这次开示。巴利
225.Atha kho bhagavāti kasmā ārabhi? Phaggunassa kira ettakaṃ ovādaṃ sutvāpi, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṃsaggato oramissāmi viramissāmī’’ti cittampi na uppannaṃ, bhagavatā pana saddhiṃ paṭāṇī viya paṭiviruddho aṭṭhāsi, athassa bhagavato yathā nāma jighacchitassa bhojane, pipāsitassa pānīye, sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhe dukkhitassa sukhe patthanā uppajjati. Evameva imaṃ dubbacaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā paṭhamabodhiyaṃ subbacā bhikkhū āpāthaṃ āgamiṃsu. Atha tesaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathetukāmo hutvā imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
这里,“他们取悦了”意思是他们接受、他们圆满。“一时”就是某一个时候。“一座食”是指只吃一顿饭前食。因为从日出到正午,即使吃了七次,在这里也算作“一座食”。“少病”就是没有病。“少恼”就是没有苦。“起身轻快”就是身体轻松地起身。“力”就是体力。“安住轻利”就是身体安乐地安住。这些话说明了什么?说明了让比丘们断除白天非时食的时机。而在《跋达离经》里,说的是让比丘们断除夜间非时食的时机。因为世尊并不是一次性就让弟子们断除这两种饮食。为什么?因为众生在轮回中早已习惯了这两种饮食。有些善男子出身娇贵,如果一下子断除两种饮食,就会感到疲惫。所以世尊没有让他们一次全断,而是分不同时候:一个时候让断白天非时食,一个时候让断夜间非时食。其中,这里说的是让断白天非时食的时机。再者,因为诸佛不是靠显示恐怖、呵责来让人断除,而是靠显示功德来让人断除,这样众生才能欢喜地断除。所以世尊显示功德,举出这五种好处。“应当进行的教诫”意思是,不需要在教法上反复交代了。只是“这个要做,这个不要做”这样提醒一下就够了。仅仅凭这一点,他们就做了该做的,舍弃了该舍弃的。在初成正觉时,比丘们是容易受教的、听话的、能照教诫去做的。巴利
Tattha ārādhayiṃsūti gaṇhiṃsu pūrayiṃsu. Ekaṃ samayanti ekasmiṃ samaye. Ekāsanabhojananti ekaṃ purebhattabhojanaṃ. Sūriyuggamanato hi yāva majjhanhikā sattakkhattuṃ bhuttabhojanampi idha ekāsanabhojananteva adhippetaṃ. Appābādhatanti nirābādhataṃ. Appātaṅkatanti niddukkhataṃ. Lahuṭṭhānanti sarīrassa sallahukaṃ uṭṭhānaṃ. Balanti kāyabalaṃ. Phāsuvihāranti kāyassa sukhavihāraṃ. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ? Divā vikālabhojanaṃ pajahāpitakālo kathito. Bhaddālisutte pana rattiṃ vikālabhojanaṃ pajahāpitakālo kathito. Imāni hi dve bhojanāni bhagavā na ekappahārena pajahāpesi. Kasmā? Imāneva hi dve bhojanāni vaṭṭe sattānaṃ āciṇṇāni. Santi kulaputtā sukhumālā, te ekato dvepi bhojanāni pajahantā kilamanti. Tasmā ekato apajahāpetvā ekasmiṃ kāle divā vikālabhojanaṃ, ekasmiṃ rattiṃ vikālabhojananti visuṃ pajahāpesi. Tesu idha divā vikālabhojanaṃ pajahāpitakālo kathito. Tattha yasmā buddhā na bhayaṃ dassetvā tajjetvā pajahāpenti, ānisaṃsaṃ pana dassetvā pajahāpenti, evañhi sattā sukhena pajahanti. Tasmā ānisaṃsaṃ dassento ime pañca guṇe dassesi. Anusāsanī karaṇīyāti punappunaṃ sāsane kattabbaṃ nāhosi. ‘‘Idaṃ karotha, idaṃ mā karothā’’ti satuppādakaraṇīyamattameva ahosi. Tāvattakeneva te kattabbaṃ akaṃsu, pahātabbaṃ pajahiṃsu, paṭhamabodhiyaṃ, bhikkhave, subbacā bhikkhū ahesuṃ assavā ovādapaṭikarāti.
现在,为了说明这些人容易受教的情况,举出譬喻,说了“譬如”等话。其中,“在好地上”指在平坦的地上。不过,在“在好地、良田、已清除残桩的地方播下种子”这句话里,“好地”指的是平整的地面。“四衢道”指两条大路交叉穿过的地方。“良马之车”指由调驯好的马所拉的车。“已放下的刺棒”指刺棒横放在旁边,使登上车站着的人能够拿到。“调马师”指驯马师。他本人能调伏未驯之马,所以叫“调伏未驯之马的御者”。“随所欲”指想走哪条路就走哪条路。“随意所至”指想到哪个去处就到哪个去处。“令前进”指令径直向前驱赶。“令退回”指令折返。巴利
Idāni nesaṃ subbacabhāvadīpikaṃ upamaṃ āharanto seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha subhūmiyanti samabhūmiyaṃ. ‘‘Subhūmyaṃ sukhette vihatakhāṇuke bījāni patiṭṭhapeyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.438) ettha pana maṇḍabhūmi subhūmīti āgatā. Catumahāpatheti dvinnaṃ mahāmaggānaṃ vinivijjhitvā gataṭṭhāne. Ājaññarathoti vinītaassaratho. Odhastapatodoti yathā rathaṃ abhiruhitvā ṭhitena sakkā hoti gaṇhituṃ, evaṃ ālambanaṃ nissāya tiriyato ṭhapitapatodo. Yoggācariyoti assācariyo. Sveva assadamme sāretīti assadammasārathi. Yenicchakanti yena yena maggena icchati. Yadicchakanti yaṃ yaṃ gatiṃ icchati. Sāreyyāti ujukaṃ purato peseyya. Paccāsāreyyāti paṭinivatteyya.
就像这样,那位调马师想让马走哪条路,那些马就已经被套好、准备好了;他想让它们以哪种步态走,那种步态就已经被它们掌握了。把车放出去之后,那些马既不需要被拦住,也不需要被鞭打,只需要在平坦的地面上,在马蹄上做个标记,看着它们走就行了。同样地,我对那些比丘也不需要一次又一次地反复叮嘱。只要让他们提起正念,说“这个该做,这个不该做”,就够了。他们当下就把该做的做了,把不该做的舍弃了。因此——因为他们容易受教,就像已经被调顺的车乘一样,仅仅靠提起正念就能断除烦恼,所以你们也应当断除,这就是这里的含义。蓖麻等:据说蓖麻会损害沙拉树,所以这样说。应清除:就是把蓖麻和其他藤蔓砍掉,搬到外面去,让那里变干净。善生:就是长得很好、很端正。正确地培护:就是围好边界,用水浇灌,按时在根部周围松土,砍掉藤蔓和灌木丛,清除蚁丘,去掉蜘蛛网和枯枝,好好地培育养护。增长等部分,和前面已经说过的意思一样。巴利
Evameva khoti yathā hi so yoggācariyo yena yena maggena gamanaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ assā āruḷhāva honti. Yāya yāya ca gatiyā icchati, sā sā gati gahitāva hoti. Rathaṃ pesetvā assā neva vāretabbā na vijjhitabbā honti. Kevalaṃ tesaṃ same bhūmibhāge khuresu nimittaṃ ṭhapetvā gamanameva passitabbaṃ hoti. Evaṃ mayhampi tesu bhikkhūsu punappunaṃ vattabbaṃ nāhosi. Idaṃ karotha idaṃ mā karothāti satuppādanamattameva kattabbaṃ hoti. Tehipi tāvadeva kattabbaṃ katameva hoti, akattabbaṃ jahitameva. Tasmāti yasmā subbacā yuttayānapaṭibhāgā hutvā satuppādanamatteneva pajahiṃsu, tasmā tumhepi pajahathāti attho. Elaṇḍehīti elaṇḍā kira sāladūsanā honti, tasmā evamāha. Visodheyyāti elaṇḍe ceva aññā ca valliyo chinditvā bahi nīharaṇena sodheyya. Sujātāti susaṇṭhitā. Sammā parihareyyāti mariyādaṃ bandhitvā udakāsiñcanenapi kālenakālaṃ mūlamūle khaṇanenapi valligumbādicchedanenapi kipillapūṭakaharaṇenapi makkaṭakajālasukkhadaṇḍakaharaṇenapi sammā vaḍḍhetvā poseyya. Vuddhiādīni vuttatthāneva.
226 226. 现在,为了显示不能忍耐的过失,开始说“过去曾有”等语。其中,“韦迭希咖”:是韦德希国居民的儿女,也就是那个地方人的女儿。或者也可以说,“veda”指智慧,因为她凭智慧而行、凭智慧而运作,所以叫“韦迭希咖”,意思是贤慧的人。“家主妇”:就是家里的女主人。“名声”:就是名誉之声。“柔和”:具备柔和。“稳重”:行为稳重。“寂静”:内心止息。“能干”:在做饭、铺床、点灯等事情上很灵巧。“不懒惰”:勤快,努力。她把事情安排得很好:就是把事务妥善地安排妥当。有的人虽然不懒惰,但拿起什么器皿,就会打碎或弄破;她不是那样的人。这里正是在说明这一点。巴利
226. Idāni akkhantiyā dosaṃ dassento bhūtapubbantiādimāha. Tattha vedehikāti videharaṭṭhavāsikassa dhītā. Atha vā vedoti paññā vuccati, vedena īhati iriyatīti vedehikā, paṇḍitāti attho. Gahapatānīti gharasāminī. Kittisaddoti kittighoso. Soratāti soraccena samannāgatā. Nivātāti nivātavutti. Upasantāti nibbutā. Dakkhāti bhattapacanasayanattharaṇadīpujjalanādikammesu chekā. Analasāti uṭṭhāhikā, susaṃvihitakammantāti suṭṭhu saṃvihitakammantā. Ekā analasā hoti, yaṃ yaṃ pana bhājanaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ taṃ bhindati vā chiddaṃ vā karoti, ayaṃ na tādisāti dasseti.
白天才起床,是说清晨该做的挤牛奶等活儿都没做,太阳升得很高了才起来。喂,黑女!就是喂,黑女。你为什么白天才起床?意思是:你是不是哪里不舒服,为什么白天才起床?没有啊,我没什么。喂,你要是没有什么不舒服,头也不疼,背也不痛,那你这恶婢为什么白天才起床?她这样怒气冲冲、满心不快,皱起了眉头。第二天她起得更晚,太阳升得更高了才起来。不悦的言语,是说她气呼呼地骂:喂,你这恶婢,不知道自己几斤几两,你以为火是凉的吗?现在我就要教训教训你!诸如此类,说出了愤怒的话。巴利
Divā uṭṭhāsīti pātova kattabbāni dhenuduhanādikammāni akatvā ussūre uṭṭhitā. He je kāḷīti are kāḷi. Kiṃ je divā uṭṭhāsīti kiṃ te kiñci aphāsukaṃ atthi, kiṃ divā uṭṭhāsīti? No vata re kiñcīti are yadi te na kiñci aphāsukaṃ atthi, neva sīsaṃ rujjhati, na piṭṭhi, atha kasmā pāpi dāsi divā uṭṭhāsīti kupitā anattamanā bhākuṭimakāsi. Divātaraṃ uṭṭhāsīti punadivase ussūrataraṃ uṭṭhāsi. Anattamanavācanti are pāpi dāsi attano pamāṇaṃ na jānāsi; kiṃ aggiṃ sītoti maññasi, idāni taṃ sikkhāpessāmītiādīni vadamānā kupitavacanaṃ nicchāresi.
“对邻居们”是指住在附近的人。“她使人指责”是指她使人轻视。“凶暴”是指不柔和、有恶行。就这样,有多少优点,就生起了两倍的过失。优点是一点一点慢慢来的,过失却一天之内就传开了。“柔和,极其柔和”是指极其柔和,以至于会让人说:“他是不是入流者、一来者、不来者、阿拉汉呢?”“触犯”是指碰触、冲撞,进入视野。巴利
Paṭivisakānanti sāmantagehavāsīnaṃ. Ujjhāpesīti avajānāpesi. Caṇḍīti asoratā kibbisā. Iti yattakā guṇā, tato diguṇā dosā uppajjiṃsu. Guṇā nāma saṇikaṃ saṇikaṃ āgacchanti; dosā ekadivaseneva patthaṭā honti. Soratasoratoti ativiya sorato, sotāpanno nu kho, sakadāgāmī anāgāmī arahā nu khoti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Phusantīti phusantā ghaṭṭentā āpāthaṃ āgacchanti.
这时,应当知道“比丘是柔顺的”:也就是说,安住在忍耐、承受之中的比丘,应当被理解为柔顺的。“若为衣……资具之故”:如果有人得到这些上等再上等的衣等资具时,只凭一句话就去做洗脚、擦背等服务;如果得不到时,就像以前能得到、现在却得不到那样。“只尊重法”:就是只对法作恭敬、作善敬。“尊重”:当作重大、厚重。“恭敬”:以心意令其欢喜。“供养”:以资具作供养。“敬奉”:就是只对法表示敬奉,表现出谦卑的行为。巴利
Athabhikkhu soratoti veditabboti atha adhivāsanakkhantiyaṃ ṭhito bhikkhu soratoti veditabbo. Yo cīvara…pe… parikkhārahetūti yo etāni cīvarādīni paṇītapaṇītāni labhanto pādaparikammapiṭṭhiparikammādīni ekavacaneneva karoti. Alabhamānoti yathā pubbe labhati, evaṃ alabhanto. Dhammaññeva sakkarontoti dhammaṃyeva sakkāraṃ sukatakāraṃ karonto. Garuṃ karontoti garubhāriyaṃ karonto. Mānentoti manena piyaṃ karonto. Pūjentoti paccayapūjāya pūjento. Apacāyamānoti dhammaṃyeva apacāyamāno apacitiṃ nīcavuttiṃ dassento.
227 227. 这样显示了不能忍耐的过失之后,现在要说明能忍耐的人是怎样忍耐的,于是开示五种说话方式,说出“比丘们,有这五种……”等话。其中,“适时”是指在合适、恰当的时候。“真实”是指真实存在的、确实有的。“柔和”是指言语温和平顺。“与义相应”是指与义利相关、有道理作依据。“非时”等则应当从它们的反面来理解。“以慈心”是指生起慈心之后。“内有嗔”是指内心有污染、生起嗔恚之后。“于彼处”是指在那些说话方式当中。“遍满”是指彻底确定、扩展。“以彼为所缘”是指怎样以彼为所缘而遍满整个世间呢?先以那位用五种说话方式对待自己的人作为慈心的所缘,再把这份慈心的所缘扩展到其他一切众生,这样就叫作以彼为所缘而遍满整个世间。这里词语的含义是:“以彼为所缘”是指以这份慈心作为所缘;“一切”是指一切众生;“世间”是指有情世间;“以广大”是指以众多众生为所缘;“以殊胜”是指属于殊胜层次的;“以无量”是指已善加修习的;“无怨”是指没有过失;“无害”是指没有痛苦。“愿我以这样的心遍满而住”是指:以这样与慈俱行的心,把那个人以及整个世间都作为这份心的所缘,确定之后而住。巴利
227. Evaṃ akkhantiyā dosaṃ dassetvā idāni ye adhivāsenti, te evaṃ adhivāsentīti pañca vacanapathe dassento pañcime, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha kālenāti yuttapattakālena. Bhūtenāti satā vijjamānena. Saṇhenāti sammaṭṭhena . Atthasañhitenāti atthanissitena kāraṇanissitena. Akālenātiādīni tesaṃyeva paṭipakkhavasena veditabbāni. Mettacittāti uppannamettacittā hutvā. Dosantarāti duṭṭhacittā, abbhantare uppannadosā hutvā. Tatrāti tesu vacanapathesu. Pharitvāti adhimuccitvā. Tadārammaṇañcāti kathaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ sabbāvantaṃ lokaṃ karoti? Pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgataṃ puggalaṃ mettacittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā puna tasseva mettacittassa avasesasatte ārammaṇaṃ karonto sabbāvantaṃ lokaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ karoti nāma. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho. Tadārammaṇañcāti tasseva mettacittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Sabbāvantanti sabbasattavantaṃ. Lokanti sattalokaṃ. Vipulenāti anekasattārammaṇena. Mahaggatenāti mahaggatabhūmikena. Appamāṇenāti subhāvitena. Averenāti niddosena. Abyābajjhenāti niddukkhena. Pharitvā viharissāmāti evarūpena mettāsahagatena cetasā tañca puggalaṃ sabbañca lokaṃ tassa cittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā adhimuccitvā viharissāma.
228 228. 现在,为了说明这个道理而举出譬喻,所以说了“譬如”等话。其中,“使大地不成其为大地”的意思是“我要让它没有大地”。“于处处”就是在各个地方。“散播”就是像从筐里取出土来撒种子那样撒开。“吐唾”就是吐出口水。“能使大地不成其为大地”是说,通过身体和言语这样去做,就能让大地变成没有大地吗?“甚深”是指它的厚度达到二十万由旬再加四那由他那么深。“不可量”是指横向没有边际。同样地,这里譬喻与所喻的对应是:大地应当看作慈心,拿着锄头和筐子来的人应当看作带着五种语道来的人。就像那个人没法用锄头和筐子让大地变成没有大地,同样,带着五种语道来的人也无法改变你们的慈心。巴利
228. Idāni tadatthadīpikaṃ upamaṃ āharanto seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha apathavinti nippathaviṃ karissāmīti attho. Tatra tatrāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne. Vikireyyāti pacchiyā paṃsuṃ uddharitvā bījāni viya vikireyya. Oṭṭhubheyyāti kheḷaṃ pāteyya. Apathaviṃ kareyyāti evaṃ kāyena ca vācāya ca payogaṃ katvāpi sakkuṇeyya apathaviṃ kātunti? Gambhīrāti bahalattena dviyojanasatasahassāni cattāri ca nahutāni gambhīrā. Appameyyāti tiriyaṃ pana aparicchinnā. Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – pathavī viya hi mettacittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kudālapiṭakaṃ gahetvā āgatapuriso viya pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo. Yathā so kudālapiṭakena mahāpathaviṃ apathaviṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ vo pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo mettacittassa aññathattaṃ kātuṃ na sakkhissatīti.
229 229. 在第二个譬喻中,“姜黄”指任何一种黄色的东西。“青”指铜青色或叶青色。“无色”就是没有色。有人问:经里不是说过“两根木头之间、两棵树之间、两张床之间或两块石头之间的空间是有限虚空”吗?那为什么这里说“无色”呢?因为要否定它是可见的。所以接着说“不可见”。因为在虚空中没办法描画色相、没办法让色相显现出来,所以说“无色”。“不可见”就是眼识看不到它。配合譬喻来说:虚空好比慈心,以画笔为第五的四种颜料好比五种语道,拿着以画笔为第五的四种颜料来的人好比带着五种语道来的人。就像那个人没办法用以画笔为第五的四种颜料在虚空中画出颜色来,同样,带着五种语道来的人也没办法让慈心改变,没办法显示出嗔恨的生起。巴利
229. Dutiyaupamāyaṃ haliddinti yaṃkiñci pītakavaṇṇaṃ. Nīlanti kaṃsanīlaṃ vā palāsanīlaṃ vā. Arūpīti arūpo . Nanu ca, dvinnaṃ kaṭṭhānaṃ vā dvinnaṃ rukkhānaṃ vā dvinnaṃ seyyānaṃ vā dvinnaṃ selānaṃ vā antaraṃ paricchinnākāsarūpanti āgataṃ, kasmā idha arūpīti vuttoti? Sanidassanabhāvapaṭikkhepato. Tenevāha ‘‘anidassano’’ti. Tasmiñhi rūpaṃ likhituṃ, rūpapātubhāvaṃ dassetuṃ na sakkā, tasmā ‘‘arūpī’’ti vutto. Anidassanoti dassanassa cakkhuviññāṇassa anāpātho. Upamāsaṃsandane panettha ākāso viya mettacittaṃ. Tulikapañcamā cattāro raṅgajātā viya pañca vacanapathā, tulikapañcame raṅge gahetvā āgatapuriso viya pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo. Yathā so tulikapañcamehi raṅgehi ākāse rūpapātubhāvaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ vo pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo mettacittassa aññathattaṃ katvā dosuppattiṃ dassetuṃ na sakkhissatīti.
230 第三喻中,“燃烧的”指正在熊熊燃烧。“深不可量”:这条恒河,深处有的地方有一俱卢舍,有的地方半由旬,有的地方一由旬。宽度也是这样,长度则达五百由旬。那它怎么会是“深不可量”呢?因为用这种方式翻搅之后,没办法像在灶上烧水那样把它加热。如果是一潭静止的水,或许还能用某种办法加热到一指或半指的程度,但这条恒河做不到,所以才这么说。配合譬喻来说:恒河如同慈心,手持草火炬走来的人,如同带着五种语道而来的补特伽罗。就像那个人没办法用燃烧的草火炬把整条恒河烧热,同样,带着五种语道而来的补特伽罗,也绝不可能让慈心发生改变。巴利
230. Tatiyaupamāyaṃ ādittanti pajjalitaṃ. Gambhīrā appameyyāti imissā gaṅgāya gambhīraṭṭhānaṃ gāvutampi atthi, aḍḍhayojanampi, yojanampi. Puthulaṃ panassā evarūpaṃyeva, dīghato pana pañcayojanasatāni. Sā kathaṃ gambhīrā appameyyāti? Etena payogena parivattetvā uddhane udakaṃ viya tāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyato. Ṭhitodakaṃ pana kenaci upāyena aṅgulamattaṃ vā aḍḍhaṅgulamattaṃ vā evaṃ tāpetuṃ sakkā bhaveyya, ayaṃ pana na sakkā, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Upamāsaṃsandane panettha gaṅgā viya mettacittaṃ, tiṇukkaṃ ādāya āgatapuriso viya pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo. Yathā so ādittāya tiṇukkāya gaṅgaṃ tāpetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ vo pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo mettacittassa aññathattaṃ kātuṃ na sakkhissatīti.
231 第四譬喻中,所谓“猫皮袋”,就是用猫皮做的袋子。“善揉”,就是揉得很充分。“极善揉”,就是从里到外、四面八方都揉得极透。“如棉絮”,就是像木棉絮一样。“断嘶声”,就是不再发出沙沙的响声。“断叭声”,就是不再发出啪啪的响声。配合譬喻来说,这里的猫皮袋好比慈心,拿着木柴或瓦片来的人,好比带着五种语道来的人。就像那个人没法用木柴或瓦片让猫皮袋发出沙沙声、啪啪声,同样,带着五种语道来的人,也绝不可能让你们那慈心发生变异,变成带有嗔恨的状态。巴利
231. Catutthaupamāyaṃ biḷārabhastāti biḷāracammapasibbakā. Sumadditāti suṭṭhu madditā. Suparimadditāti anto ca bahi ca samantato suparimadditā. Tūlinīti simbalitūlalatātūlasamānā. Chinnasassarāti chinnasassarasaddā. Chinnabhabbharāti chinnabhabbharasaddā. Upamāsaṃsandane panettha biḷārabhastā viya mettacittaṃ, kaṭṭhakaṭhalaṃ ādāya āgatapuriso viya pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo. Yathā so kaṭṭhena vā kaṭhalena vā biḷārabhastaṃ sarasaraṃ bharabharaṃ saddaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ vo pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalo mettacittassa aññathattaṃ katvā dosānugatabhāvaṃ kātuṃ na sakkhissatīti.
232 “卑劣者”:指行为低下、做贱业的人,意思就是干低贱活计的人。“若染污心意”:如果有比丘或比丘尼,被人用锯子切割时染污了心意、不能安忍,他便不是奉行我教法的人。因为不能安忍,所以他就不算遵从我的教导。不过,在这种情况下并不构成犯戒。巴利
232.Ocarakāti avacarakā heṭṭhācarakā, nīcakammakārakāti attho. Yo mano padūseyyāti yo bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā mano padūseyya, taṃ kakacena okantanaṃ nādhivāseyya. Na me so tena sāsanakaroti so tena anadhivāsanena mayhaṃ ovādakaro na hoti. Āpatti panettha natthi.
233 “微细或粗重”:指小过失或大过失。“若你们不能忍受”:意思是,凡是你们不该忍受的。“尊者,不会的”:意思是,尊者,我们看不出有什么言语是不能忍受的。“长久利益与安乐”:世尊就这样以阿拉汉果为顶点,顺着开示的脉络,把这次说法作了总结。巴利
233.Aṇuṃ vā thūlaṃ vāti appasāvajjaṃ vā mahāsāvajjaṃ vā. Yaṃ tumhe nādhivāseyyāthāti yo tumhehi adhivāsetabbo na bhaveyyāti attho. No hetaṃ, bhanteti, bhante, anadhivāsetabbaṃ nāma vacanapathaṃ na passāmāti adhippāyo. Dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyāti iti bhagavā arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto yathānusandhinā desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
2. 《蛇喻经》的注释巴利
2. Alagaddūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
234 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《蛇喻经》。其中,“杀鹫者”指杀鹫的人;“杀鹫者的先人”是说这个人的祖先是杀鹫的,也就是出身于杀鹫家族、承袭捕杀秃鹫等生计的人家。那些障碍生天与解脱的,叫“障碍法”。这些障碍按业、烦恼、果报、诽谤、违犯教令分为五种。其中,五种无间业叫业障。同样,污辱比丘尼的业也属于业障,不过它只障碍解脱,不障碍生天。决定性的邪见叫烦恼障。黄门、畜生、两性人的结生法叫果报障。诽谤圣者的法叫诽谤障,不过这种诽谤障只在还没向那位圣者求得原谅之前才算,之后就不算了。故意违犯的七种罪聚叫违犯教令障。这些也一样,只在比丘还自认是比丘,或还没出罪,或还没发露忏悔期间才算,之后就不算了。巴利
234.Evaṃme sutanti alagaddūpamasuttaṃ. Tattha gaddhe bādhayiṃsūti gaddhabādhino, gaddhabādhino pubbapurisā assāti gaddhabādhipubbo, tassa gaddhabādhipubbassa, gijjhaghātakakulappasutassāti attho. Saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā. Te kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhā. Tattha pañcānantariyadhammā kammantarāyikā nāma. Tathā bhikkhunīdūsakakammaṃ, taṃ pana mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassa. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā kilesantarāyikā nāma. Paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakānaṃ paṭisandhidhammā vipākantarāyikā nāma. Ariyūpavādadhammā upavādantarāyikā nāma, te pana yāva ariye na khamāpenti, tāvadeva, na tato paraṃ. Sañcicca vītikkantā satta āpattikkhandhā āṇāvītikkamantarāyikā nāma. Tepi yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ vā paṭijānāti, na vuṭṭhāti vā, na deseti vā, tāvadeva, na tato paraṃ.
这里有一位比丘,他博学多闻,善于说法,能识别其他种类的障碍,但因为不精通律藏,所以不知道违犯戒律这一类障碍。因此,他独自静处时这样想:这些在家者享受五种感官欲乐,也能成为入流者、一来者、不来者。比丘们也会看到悦意的、眼所识别的色……乃至触到身所识别的触,使用柔软的被褥、衣服等,这一切都是允许的。为什么唯独女人的色、声、香、味、触就不允许呢?这些也应该允许。他这样把一种欲乐和另一种欲乐混在一起,把带着贪欲的享受和没有贪欲的享受当成一回事,就像把极细的丝线和粗麻绳搓在一起,又像把一粒芥子跟须弥山相提并论。他生起了邪恶的见解,说:世尊何必费那么大力气,像要把大海捆住一样,来制定第一条巴拉基格呢?这里面根本没有过错。他这样跟一切知智对立,阻碍无畏智,把树桩和荆棘扔到圣道上,宣称淫欲之法没有过失,等于给了胜者的教令之轮一记重击。因此经文才说:我这样了知世尊所说的法……巴利
Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu bahussuto dhammakathiko sesantarāyike jānāti, vinaye pana akovidattā paṇṇattivītikkamantarāyike na jānāti, tasmā rahogato evaṃ cintesi – ime āgārikā pañca kāmaguṇe paribhuñjantā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi honti. Bhikkhūpi manāpikāni cakkhuviññeyyāni rūpāni passanti…pe… kāyaviññeyye phoṭṭhabbe phusanti, mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni paribhuñjanti, etaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā itthīnaṃyeva rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā na vaṭṭanti? Etepi vaṭṭantīti. Evaṃ rasena rasaṃ saṃsandetvā sacchandarāgaparibhogañca nicchandarāgaparibhogañca ekaṃ katvā thūlavākehi saddhiṃ atisukhumasuttaṃ upanento viya, sāsapena saddhiṃ sineruṃ upasaṃharanto viya, pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvā, ‘‘kiṃ bhagavatā mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya mahatā ussāhena paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, natthi ettha doso’’ti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīni pakkhipanto methunadhamme doso natthīti jinassa āṇācakke pahāraṃ adāsi. Tenāha – ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādi.
“就像这样”就是“正如这样”。在“审问”等词中,问“你持什么见解?说出你的见解”,这叫审问。让对方确立见解,这叫认可。追问“你凭什么这样说”,问理由,这叫盘问。在“骸骨喻”等譬喻中(《中部》2.42-48):骸骨喻是从少乐味的角度说的;肉块喻是从众人共有的角度说的;草炬喻是从不断烧灼的角度说的;火坑喻是从极大逼恼的角度说的;梦喻是从短暂显现的角度说的;借物喻是从暂时拥有的角度说的;树果喻是从毁坏一切肢节的角度说的;屠刀砧板喻是从宰割的角度说的;矛枪喻是从刺穿的角度说的;蛇头喻是从有危险、有恐怖的角度说的。“以力”是指以见解之力;“执取”是指对见解的执取。“执持而说”是指确立之后而说,或者是指明说。巴利
Evaṃbyā khoti evaṃ viya kho. Samanuyuñjantītiādīsu kiṃ laddhiko tvaṃ, laddhiṃ vadehīti pucchamānā samanuyuñjanti nāma. Diṭṭhiṃ patiṭṭhāpentā samanuggāhanti nāma. Kena kāraṇena evaṃ vadasīti kāraṇaṃ pucchantā samanubhāsanti nāma. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamātiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.42-48) aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā appassādaṭṭhena. Maṃsapesūpamā bahusādhāraṇaṭṭhena. Tiṇukkūpamā anudahanaṭṭhena. Aṅgārakāsūpamā mahābhitāpanaṭṭhena. Supinakūpamā ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Yācitakūpamā tāvakālikaṭṭhena. Rukkhaphalūpamā sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena. Asisūnūpamā adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena. Sattisūlūpamā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena. Sappasirūpamā sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena. Thāmasāti diṭṭhithāmena. Parāmāsāti diṭṭhiparāmāsena. Abhinivissa voharatīti adhiṭṭhahitvā voharati dīpeti vā.
235 “Yato kho te bhikkhū”这句话的意思是“当那些比丘……的时候”。“Evaṃbyā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā”这一句:他本来想按自己心里的想法说“根本没有这回事”,但因为世尊的威神力,他还是承认了。据说,在佛陀面前,没有人能说出两种互相矛盾的话。巴利
235.Yato kho te bhikkhūti yadā te bhikkhū. Evaṃbyā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatāti idaṃ esa attano ajjhāsayena natthīti vattukāmopi bhagavato ānubhāvena sampaṭicchati, buddhānaṃ kira sammukhā dve kathā kathetuṃ samattho nāma natthi.
236 “愚人,你到底认为我曾对哪个刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗,哪个在家人、出家人,哪个天人、人,宣说过这样的法呢?”接着,世尊对比丘们说——这是一处特别的连结。据说阿利塔这样想:“世尊说我是愚人,但仅仅被称为愚人,并不就意味着与道果无缘。世尊也曾用‘愚人’这个说法来教导旺甘德之子伍巴塞那:‘愚人,你太快就转向放逸了。’那位长老后来精勤努力,证得了六种神通。我也要像那样提起精进,证得道果。”于是,世尊为了显示阿利塔就像一片已经脱离捆绑的枯黄叶子,再也没有生长的可能,便开始了这段开示。巴利
236.Kassa kho nāma tvaṃ moghapurisāti tvaṃ moghapurisa kassa khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā vessassa vā suddassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā devassa vā manussassa vā mayā evaṃ dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāsi. Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti ayaṃ pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Ariṭṭho kira cintesi – ‘‘bhagavā maṃ moghapurisoti vadati, na kho pana moghapurisāti vuttamattakena maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo na hoti. Upasenampi hi vaṅgantaputtaṃ, ‘atilahuṃ kho tvaṃ, moghapurisa, bāhullāya āvatto’ti (mahāva. 75) bhagavā moghapurisavādena ovadi. Thero aparabhāge ghaṭento vāyamanto cha abhiññā sacchākāsi. Ahampi tathārūpaṃ vīriyaṃ paggaṇhitvā maggaphalāni nibbattessāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā bandhanā pavuttassa paṇḍupalāsassa viya aviruḷhibhāvaṃ dassento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
比丘们,你们怎么想?这个持这种见解的阿利塔,违逆一切知智,阻碍无畏智,对如来的教诫之轮加以打击,难道他在这个法与律中还有一点智火余温吗?就像一堆大火已经熄灭,却还留着像萤火虫那么小的火星,靠着它还能再烧起一大片火。那么,这个人是否还有极微细的智火余温,能让他靠它努力修行,生起道与果呢?比丘们回答:没有,尊者。意思是:尊者,对持这种见解的人,哪里还会有这样的智火余温呢?他们这样说,是在否定那种能作为道与果之条件的智火余温。“Maṅkubhūto”即变得沮丧无光;“Pattakkhandho”即双肩低垂;“Appaṭibhāno”即哑口无言、辩才全失,他领受了这样殊胜的、能导出的教法,却未能令法生长,成了被彻底摧毁了条件的人,于是省察自己的无能为力,用脚大拇指挖着地面坐着。巴利
Usmīkatopīti , bhikkhave, tumhe kinti maññatha, ayaṃ ariṭṭho evaṃladdhiko sabbaññutaññāṇena paṭivirujjhitvā vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhitvā tathāgatassa āṇācakke pahāraṃ dadamāno api nu imasmiṃ dhammavinaye usmīkatopi? Yathā nibbutepi mahante aggikkhandhe khajjupanakamattāpi aggipapaṭikā hotiyeva, yaṃ nissāya puna mahāaggikkhandho bhaveyya. Kiṃ nu kho evaṃ imassa appamattikāpi ñāṇusmā atthi, yaṃ nissāya vāyamanto maggaphalāni nibbatteyyāti? No hetaṃ, bhanteti, bhante, evaṃladdhikassa kuto evarūpā ñāṇusmāti? Maggaphalānaṃ paccayasamatthāya ñāṇusmāya usmīkatabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipantā vadanti. Maṅkubhūtoti nittejabhūto. Pattakkhandhoti patitakkhandho. Appaṭibhānoti kiñci paṭibhānaṃ apassanto bhinnapaṭibhāno evarūpampi nāma niyyānikasāsanaṃ labhitvā aviruḷhidhammo kiramhi samugghātitapaccayo jātoti attano abhabbataṃ paccavekkhanto pādaṅguṭṭhakena bhūmiṃ khaṇamāno nisīdi.
“你将会被认出来”这一句也是一个独立的连结段落。据说阿利塔当时这样想:“世尊说我的道果因缘已被切断,可是诸佛并不只是为有因缘的人说法,也为没有因缘的人说法。我要从大师那里得到善逝的教导,然后去修习能带来自己成就的善业。”于是世尊为了打消他这个念头,便说了“你将会被认出来”等话。它的意思是:愚人,正因为这个邪恶的恶见,你将会在地狱等处被人认出来;从我这里,你根本得不到什么善逝的教导,我也不需要你。我现在要在这里反问诸比丘。巴利
Paññāyissasikhoti ayampi pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Ariṭṭho kira cintesi – ‘‘bhagavā mayhaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo pacchinnoti vadati, na kho pana buddhā saupanissayānaṃyeva dhammaṃ desenti, anupanissayānampi desenti, ahaṃ satthu santikā sugatovādaṃ labhitvā attano sampattūpagaṃ kusalaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā ovādaṃ paṭipassambhento ‘‘paññāyissasī’’tiādimāha. Tassattho, tvaṃyeva, moghapurisa, iminā pāpakena diṭṭhigatena nirayādīsu paññāyissasi, mama santikā tuyhaṃ sugatovādo nāma natthi, na me tayā attho, idhāhaṃ bhikkhū paṭipucchissāmīti.
237 “Atha kho bhagavā”这里又是一个独立的连结段落。在这个地方,世尊是在净化在场的大众,把阿利塔从僧团中清除出去。因为如果在场大众中有人这样想:“这个阿利塔怎么能讲出世尊没说过的话呢?该不会是刚才大众聚集、世尊正在说法时,他贸然插嘴说出来的吧?”而这样说出的并非只有阿利塔听到,别人也会听到。或者他又会这样想:“正如导师呵责阿利塔,也会同样呵责我”,听后便会陷入沉默。为了不让大众产生这些想法,也为了说明“我并没有说过那些话,别人也没有听到过那些话”,世尊才用“诸比丘,你们自己……”等话,来净化大众的见解。而通过净化大众的见解,阿利塔也就等于被从僧团中清除出去了。巴利
237.Atha kho bhagavāti ayampi pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne bhagavā parisaṃ sodheti, ariṭṭhaṃ gaṇato nissāreti. Sace hi parisagatānaṃ kassaci evaṃ bhaveyya – ‘‘ayaṃ ariṭṭho bhagavatā akathitaṃ kathetuṃ kiṃ sakkhissati, kacci nu kho parisamajjhe bhagavatā kathāya samāraddhāya sahasā kathita’’nti. Evaṃ kathitaṃ pana na ariṭṭhova suṇāti, aññenapi sutaṃ bhavissati. Athāpissa siyā ‘‘yathā satthā ariṭṭhaṃ niggaṇhāti, mampi evaṃ niggaṇheyyāti sutvāpi tuṇhībhāvaṃ āpajjeyyā’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ sabbaṃ na karissantī’’ti. Mayāpi na kathitaṃ, aññena sutampi natthīti ‘‘tumhepime, bhikkhave’’tiādinā parisāya laddhiṃ sodheti. Parisāya pana laddhisodhaneneva ariṭṭho gaṇato nissārito nāma hoti.
现在,为了揭示阿利塔的执见,世尊说了“诸比丘,他确实……”等话。其中,“除了欲之外”等句的意思是:诸比丘,如果有比丘持这样的执见——“即使享用那些,也不足以构成障碍”,那么他舍弃了烦恼欲以及与烦恼欲相应的想和寻之后,没有这些法,却将去享用事欲、将行淫欲之事,这是绝不可能的。这样的道理根本不存在,这是无此理,绝无可能。巴利
Idāni ariṭṭhassa laddhiṃ pakāsento so vata, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha aññatreva kāmehītiādīsu yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘‘te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti evaṃladdhiko, so vata kilesakāmehi ceva kilesakāmasampayuttehi saññāvitakkehi ca aññatra, ete dhamme pahāya, vinā etehi dhammehi, vatthukāme paṭisevissati, methunasamācāraṃ samācarissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Idaṃ kāraṇaṃ nāma natthi, aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāsoti.
238 238. 世尊这样指出:阿利塔的见解,就像洗衣匠把香的、臭的、旧的、新的、干净的、脏的衣服统统混在一起打成一包。同样地,他也把三类情况完全混同:一类是已离欲贪、享用殊胜衣等的比丘们;一类是不持戒的在家人,带着欲贪享用资具,这会障碍修行;还有持戒的比丘们,带着欲贪享用资具,这也会造成障碍。他把这一切全都看成一样的。世尊先揭示了阿利塔的邪见,接着为了说明错误掌握教法的过患,说了“诸比丘,在此,有一类人……”等话。其中,“pariyāpuṇanti”的意思是学习。关于“经”等类别:两部分别、义释、犍度、附随,以及经集中的吉祥经、宝经、那拉咖经、妥瓦陀迦经,还有其他以“经”为名的如来语,应当知道这些就是“经”。一切含有偈颂的经典应知为“应颂”,特别是相应部中整个有偈品。整部阿毗达摩藏、不含偈颂的经典,以及其他未被八支所摄的佛语,应知为“解释”。法句、长老偈、长老尼偈、经集中那些不以“经”命名的纯粹偈颂,应知为“偈颂”。与喜悦和智慧相应的偈颂相关的八十二部经,应知为“自说”。以“这是世尊所说”等方式展开的一百一十部经,应知为“如是语”。无碍本生等五百五十部本生,应知为“本生”。以“诸比丘,有四种稀有、不可思议的法存在于阿难身上”等方式展开的、一切与稀有不可思议法相关的经典,应知为“稀有法”。小分别、大对问、正见、帝释问、行分别、大满月经等,一切在获得智与满足之后所问的经典,应知为“方广”。巴利
238. Evaṃ bhagavā ayaṃ ariṭṭho yathā nāma rajako sugandhānipi duggandhānipi jiṇṇānipi navānipi suddhānipi asuddhānipi vatthāni ekato bhaṇḍikaṃ karoti, evameva bhikkhūnaṃ nicchandarāgapaṇītacīvarādiparibhogañca anibaddhasīlānaṃ gahaṭṭhānaṃ antarāyakaraṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogañca nibaddhasīlānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āvaraṇakaraṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogañca sabbaṃ ekasadisaṃ karotīti ariṭṭhassa laddhiṃ pakāsetvā idāni duggahitāya pariyattiyā dosaṃ dassento idha, bhikkhave, ekaccetiādimāha. Tattha pariyāpuṇantīti uggaṇhanti. Suttantiādīsu ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārā, suttanipāte maṅgalasuttaratanasuttanālakasuātuvaṭṭakasuttāni, aññampi ca suttanāmakaṃ tathāgatavacanaṃ suttanti veditabbaṃ. Sabbampi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyanti veditabbaṃ, visesena saṃyuttake sakalopi sagāthāvaggo. Sakalaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ, yañca aññampi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ, taṃ veyyākaraṇanti veditabbaṃ. Dhammapadaṃ, theragāthā, therigāthā, suttanipāte nosuttanāmikā suddhikagāthā ca gāthāti veditabbā. Somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā dveasītisuttantā udānanti veditabbā. ‘‘Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādinayappavattā (itivu. 1,2) dasuttarasatasuttantā itivuttakanti veditabbā. Apaṇṇakajātakādīni paṇṇāsādhikāni pañcajātakasatāni jātakanti veditabbāni. ‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande’’tiādinayappavattā (a. ni. 4.129) sabbepi acchariyaabbhutadhammappaṭisaṃyuttā suttantā abbhutadhammanti veditabbā. Cūḷavedallamahāvedallasammādiṭṭhisakkapañhasaṅkhārabhājaniyamahāpuṇṇamasuttādayo sabbepi vedañca tuṭṭhiñca laddhā laddhā pucchitasuttantā vedallanti veditabbā.
他们不审察义理,就是看不到、也把握不住其中的含义和道理。“不审察”指的是那些不审察的人。“不能忍受深入渗透”是说这些法义不能现起在他们心中,不能进入他们的认知范围。也就是说,在这个地方讲的是戒、定、观、道、果、流转、还灭,他们无法这样了知。这是这段话的意思。“怀着从他人言论中挑剔过失的心态”是说,他们是为了从别人的言论中找过失来学习。“为了从论争中解脱”是说,为了这样从论争中解脱——当别人在自己的见解中指出过失时,就用这个方法摆脱——仅仅以这个理由来学习。“他们不能体证那个义利”是说,善男子们是为了道或果的义利而学习正法,而这些不善巧执取的人,并不能体证那个法的义利。再者,即使他们无法从别人的言论中找出过失,也无法让自己的见解解脱,他们同样不能体证那个义利。巴利
Atthaṃ na upaparikkhantīti atthatthaṃ kāraṇatthaṃ na passanti na pariggaṇhanti. Anupaparikkhatanti anupaparikkhantānaṃ. Na nijjhānaṃ khamantīti na upaṭṭhahanti na āpāthaṃ āgacchanti, imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ samādhi vipassanā maggo phalaṃ vaṭṭaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti evaṃ jānituṃ na sakkā hontīti attho. Te upārambhānisaṃsā cevāti te paresaṃ vāde dosāropanānisaṃsā hutvā pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Itivādappamokkhānisaṃsā cāti evaṃ vādapamokkhānisaṃsā, parehi sakavāde dose āropite taṃ dosaṃ evaṃ mocessāmāti imināva kāraṇena pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Tañcassa atthaṃ nānubhontīti yassa ca maggassa vā phalassa vā atthāya kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, tañcassa dhammassa atthaṃ ete duggahitaggāhino nānubhonti. Apica parassa vāde upārambhaṃ āropetuṃ attano vādaṃ mocetuṃ asakkontāpi tañca atthaṃ nānubhontiyeva.
239 “Alagaddatthiko”的意思是想要毒蛇的人。“Gada”是毒的名称,因为毒充分圆满地存在于那条蛇身上,所以叫“alagaddo”(有毒的蛇)。“Bhogeti”指的是身体。不过在这里,比丘们,有些善男子学习法,是抱着“度脱”的目的来学的。学习教法有三种:蛇喻学、度脱学、库藏学。巴利
239.Alagaddatthikoti āsivisaatthiko. Gadoti hi visassa nāmaṃ, taṃ tassa alaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ atthīti alagaddo. Bhogeti sarīre. Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti nittharaṇapariyattivasena uggaṇhanti. Tisso hi pariyattiyo alagaddapariyatti nittharaṇapariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīti.
在这里,有人学了佛语之后,心里想:“这样我就能得到衣服等供养”,或者“四众之中会认识我”,他为了利养和恭敬而学习,他的这种学习就叫蛇喻学。因为对这样学习的人来说,不学佛语而去睡觉更好。巴利
Tattha yo buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā evaṃ cīvarādīni vā labhissāmi, catuparisamajjhe vā maṃ jānissantīti lābhasakkārahetu pariyāpuṇāti, tassa sā pariyatti alagaddapariyatti nāma. Evaṃ pariyāpuṇato hi buddhavacanaṃ apariyāpuṇitvā niddokkamanaṃ varataraṃ.
如果有人学了佛陀的教法之后,在讲到戒的地方把戒修圆满,在讲到定的地方让定在心中扎下根,在讲到观的地方把观建立起来,在讲到道与果的地方发愿“我要修道,我要证果”,那他这种学习就叫度脱学。巴利
Yo pana buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā samādhissa āgataṭṭhāne samādhigabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā maggaphalānaṃ āgataṭṭhāne maggaṃ bhāvessāmi phalaṃ sacchikarissāmīti uggaṇhāti, tassa sā pariyatti nittharaṇapariyatti nāma hoti.
但对漏尽者来说,他的学习称为库藏学。因为对他来说,没有什么法还未被遍知、还未被断除、还未被修习、还未被实证。他已经遍知了五蕴,断除了烦恼,修习了道,实证了果,所以他在学习佛语时,就像持守教法、守护传统、延续法脉的人那样去学。因此,他的这种学习就称为库藏学。巴利
Khīṇāsavassa pana pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma. Tassa hi apariññātaṃ appahīnaṃ abhāvitaṃ asacchikataṃ vā natthi. So hi pariññātakkhandho pahīnakileso bhāvitamaggo sacchikataphalo, tasmā buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanto tantidhārako paveṇipālako vaṃsānurakkhakova hutvā uggaṇhāti. Itissa sā pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma hoti.
如果有个凡夫,在饥荒、恐怖等时期,那些持诵经典的人没法在一个地方安稳住下来,而他自己不辞托钵乞食的辛苦,心想:“这无比甜美的佛语可不能消失,我要受持教法,建立传承,延续传统”,于是去学习——他的这种学习算是库藏学吗?不算。为什么不算?因为他不是立足于自己的本位而学的。凡夫的学习,要么是蛇喻式的学习,要么是度脱式的学习;七类有学圣者的学习,一定是度脱式的;漏尽者的学习,才是纯粹的库藏学。而在这里所说的,指的是度脱式的学习。巴利
Yo pana puthujjano chātabhayādīsu ganthadharesu ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasituṃ asakkontesu sayaṃ bhikkhācārena akilamamāno atimadhuraṃ buddhavacanaṃ mā nassatu, tantiṃ dhāressāmi, vaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmi, paveṇiṃ pālessāmīti pariyāpuṇāti, tassa pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Na attano ṭhāne ṭhatvā pariyāputattā. Puthujjanassa hi pariyatti nāma alagaddā vā hoti nittharaṇā vā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ nittharaṇāva, khīṇāsavassa bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattiyeva. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne nittharaṇapariyatti adhippetā.
他们能领会、能接受“观照”这件事:在讲到戒等法义的地方,他们心里清楚显现——这里是讲戒,这里是讲定,这里是讲观,这里是讲道,这里是讲果,这里是讲轮回流转,这里是讲还灭解脱。他们体会、受用那个法义,即那些为了道与果而学习的人。依靠学得扎实的教法,修习道,证得果,他们便真正体验到那个法的利益。即使他们有能力指出别人言论中的过失,也有能力在自宗受到责难时,抓住要点为自己解围,他们仍然同样在体验法益。这样的学习能长久带来利益和安乐:无论是对在讲到戒等法义之处就圆满修持戒等的人,还是对以正法指出他人言论过失的人,还是对消除自宗过失的人,还是对证得阿拉汉果之后在大众中说法、并受用信众因闻法生信而供养的四种资具的人,都是如此。巴利
Nijjhānaṃ khamantīti sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhānesu idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha vipassanā, idha maggo, idha phalaṃ, idha vaṭṭaṃ, idha vivaṭṭanti āpāthaṃ āgacchanti. Tañcassa atthaṃ anubhontīti yesaṃ maggaphalānaṃ atthāya pariyāpuṇanti. Suggahitapariyattiṃ nissāya maggaṃ bhāvetvā phalaṃ sacchikarontā tañcassa dhammassa atthaṃ anubhavanti. Paravāde upārambhaṃ āropetuṃ sakkontāpi sakavāde āropitaṃ dosaṃ icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā mocetuṃ sakkontāpi anubhontiyeva. Dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne sīlādīni pūrentānampi, paresaṃ vāde sahadhammena upārambhaṃ āropentānampi, sakavādato dosaṃ harantānampi, arahattaṃ patvā parisamajjhe dhammaṃ desetvā dhammadesanāya pasannehi upanīte cattāro paccaye paribhuñjantānampi dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanti.
世尊这样开示了善持佛语的功德之后,现在为了把大家引导到这件事上,就说了“因此,诸比丘……”等话。这里“因此”的意思是:因为不善持教法,就会像抓毒蛇抓错了地方一样,长久带来祸害和痛苦;善持教法则像抓毒蛇抓对了地方一样,长久带来利益和安乐,所以用“因此”这个词。“你们应当那样持受它”意思是:你们应当照它本来的样子持受,按它本来的意义来领受。“如果还有其他贤能的比丘”是说:如果还有其他像舍利弗、目犍连、大迦叶、玛哈咖佳亚那那样聪慧、有智慧的比丘,就应当去问他们。但千万不要像阿利塔比丘那样,在我的教法里丢进污泥、倒进垃圾。巴利
Evaṃ suggahite buddhavacane ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni tattheva niyojento tasmā tiha, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha tasmāti yasmā duggahitapariyatti duggahitaalagaddo viya dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati, suggahitapariyatti suggahitaalagaddo viya dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattati, tasmāti attho. Tathā naṃ dhāreyyāthāti tatheva naṃ dhāreyyātha, teneva atthena gaṇheyyātha. Ye vā panāssu viyattā bhikkhūti ye vā pana aññe sāriputtamoggallānamahākassapamahākaccānādikā byattā paṇḍitā bhikkhū assu, te pucchitabbā. Ariṭṭhena viya pana mama sāsane na kalalaṃ vā kacavaraṃ vā pakkhipitabbaṃ.
240 240.“像筏子一样”就是如同筏子。“为了度脱”是为了渡过四种暴流。“水海”:如果水很深却不宽广,或者宽广却不深,那就不叫“海”;只有既深又宽广的水,才叫“海”。所以“大水海”就是广大、宽广又深的水,这是这里的含义。“有怖畏”是指能看到盗贼居住的地方,能看到他们站立、坐下、躺卧的地方。“有恐惧”是指能看到人被盗贼杀害、抢劫、殴打的地方。“水上的桥”是架在水海上面的桥。“编好筏子后”:所谓筏子,是为了渡水而把木材捆扎起来;而把木板、瓮等绑在一起铺开,则叫“浮囊”。“放下后”就是搁置之后。“做事的人”是指做所应做、做适当之事的人,这是其含义。“连那些法也应当被你们舍断”:这里“法”指止与观。世尊让人舍断对止的欲贪,也让人舍断对观的欲贪。在哪里让人舍断对止的欲贪?在《中部》“如是,伍达义,我说非想非非想处的舍断。伍达义,你可见任何粗细的结缚,而我不说应当舍断吗?”这一段中,即让人舍断了对止的欲贪。又在《中部》“比丘们,若你们对如此清净、如此光明的见,不执著、不耽玩、不贪求”这一段中,让人舍断了对观的欲贪。而在这里,则让人舍断对这两者的欲贪。巴利
240.Kullūpamanti kullasadisaṃ. Nittharaṇatthāyāti caturoghanittharaṇatthāya. Udakaṇṇavanti yañhi udakaṃ gambhīraṃ na puthulaṃ. Puthulaṃ vā pana na gambhīraṃ, na taṃ aṇṇavoti vuccati. Yaṃ pana gambhīrañceva puthulañca, taṃ aṇṇavoti vuccati. Tasmā mahantaṃ udakaṇṇavanti mahantaṃ puthulaṃ gambhīraṃ udakanti ayamettha attho. Sāsaṅkaṃ nāma yattha corānaṃ nivutthokāso dissati. Ṭhitokāso, nisinnokāso, nipannokāso dissati. Sappaṭibhayaṃ nāma yattha corehi manussā hatā dissanti, viluttā dissanti, ākoṭitā dissanti. Uttarasetūti udakaṇṇavassa upari baddho setu. Kullaṃ bandhitvāti kullo nāma taraṇatthāya kalāpaṃ katvā baddho. Pattharitvā baddhā pana padaracāṭiādayo uḷumpoti vuccanti. Uccāretvāti ṭhapetvā. Kiccakārīti pattakārī yuttakārī, patirūpakārīti attho. Dhammāpi vo pahātabbāti ettha dhammāti samathavipassanā. Bhagavā hi samathepi chandarāgaṃ pajahāpesi, vipassanāyapi. Samathe chandarāgaṃ kattha pajahāpesi? ‘‘Iti kho, udāyi, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanassapi pahānaṃ vadāmi, passasi no tvaṃ, udāyi, taṃ saṃyojanaṃ aṇuṃ vā thūlaṃ vā, yassāhaṃ no pahānaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.156) ettha samathe chandarāgaṃ pajahāpesi. ‘‘Imaṃ ce tumhe, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ na allīyetha na kelāyetha na dhanāyethā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.401) ettha vipassanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahāpesi . Idha pana ubhayattha pajahāpento ‘‘dhammāpi vo pahātabbā, pageva adhammā’’ti āha.
这里的意思是:比丘们,对于这样殊胜、精妙的法,我都说要舍断欲贪,更何况在这种不是正法、是凡俗法、是卑劣法、是粗恶的、只到水边而已的法上呢?而那个叫阿利塔的愚痴人,却认为这五种欲乐没有过失,还说对它们的欲贪不足以成为障碍。世尊就以这番教诫,单单呵责阿利塔一个人,意思是:你们不该像阿利塔那样,在我的教法里丢烂泥、扔垃圾。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – bhikkhave, ahaṃ evarūpesu santappaṇītesu dhammesu chandarāgappahānaṃ vadāmi, kiṃ pana imasmiṃ asaddhamme gāmadhamme vasaladhamme duṭṭhulle odakantike, yattha ayaṃ ariṭṭho moghapuriso niddosasaññī pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgaṃ nālaṃ antarāyāyāti vadati. Ariṭṭhena viya na tumhehi mayhaṃ sāsane kalalaṃ vā kacavaraṃ vā pakkhipitabbanti evaṃ bhagavā imināpi ovādena ariṭṭhaṃyeva niggaṇhāti.
241 241. 现在,为了说明:凡是有人在五蕴上以三种执取方式执取“我”和“我所”,这个人就像这个阿利塔一样,在我的教法里丢进污泥和垃圾——于是世尊开示说“诸比丘,有这六种”等等。其中,“见处”是指:见本身就是见处,见的所缘也是见处,见的缘也是见处。在“这色是我所”等说法中,“这(色)是我所”是渴爱执;“我是这(色)”是慢执;“这是我的自我”是见执。这样就是以色为所缘,说明了渴爱、慢、见三种执取。然而,不应说“色是我”。在受等(诸蕴)中也是同样的道理。所见是色处,所闻是声处,所觉是香处、味处、触处,因为那(香、味、触)是接触之后才能执取的,所以说为“所觉”。其余七处名为所识。所得,是指寻求或未寻求而得到的。所寻求,是指已得或未得的(对象)被寻求。以心随寻,是指以心随行。因为在世间,有寻求后得到的,也有寻求后未得到的;有未寻求而得到的,也有未寻求而未得到的。其中,寻求后得到名为“所得”;寻求后未得到名为“所寻求”;未寻求而得到以及未寻求而未得到,名为“以心随寻”。巴利
241. Idāni yo pañcasu khandhesu tividhaggāhavasena ahaṃ mamanti gaṇhāti, so mayhaṃ sāsane ayaṃ ariṭṭho viya kalalaṃ kacavaraṃ pakkhipatīti dassento chayimāni, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhiṭṭhānānīti diṭṭhipi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhiyā ārammaṇampi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhiyā paccayopi. Rūpaṃ etaṃ mamātiādīsu etaṃ mamāti taṇhāggāho. Esohamasmīti mānaggāho. Eso me attāti diṭṭhiggāho. Evaṃ rūpārammaṇā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo kathitā honti. Rūpaṃ pana attāti na vattabbaṃ. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Diṭṭhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, sutaṃ saddāyatanaṃ , mutaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ, tañhi patvā gahetabbato mutanti vuttaṃ. Avasesāni sattāyatanāni viññātaṃ nāma. Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ. Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ. Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti cittena anusañcaritaṃ. Lokasmiñhi pariyesitvā pattampi atthi, pariyesitvā nopattampi. Apariyesitvā pattampi atthi, apariyesitvā nopattampi. Tattha pariyesitvā pattaṃ pattaṃ nāma. Pariyesitvā nopattaṃ pariyesitaṃ nāma. Apariyesitvā pattañca, apariyesitvā nopattañca manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma.
或者换个说法:通过寻求而得到的,以及没有通过寻求而得到的,从“得到”这个意义上都叫“所得”。通过寻求而没有得到的,叫“所寻求”。没有通过寻求也没有得到的,叫“以心随寻”。又或者,这一切都是因为被心随寻过,所以都叫“以心随寻”。在这里,说明了以识为所缘的渴爱、慢、见。从说法善巧的角度来说,下面则是通过所见等所缘来显示识。而那种“见处”,就是指按“他是世间”等这种方式生起的见处。巴利
Atha vā pariyesitvā pattampi apariyesitvā pattampi pattaṭṭhena pattaṃ nāma. Pariyesitvā nopattaṃ pariyesitaṃ nāma. Apariyesitvā nopattaṃ manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma. Sabbaṃ vā etaṃ manasā anuvicaritattā manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma. Iminā viññāṇārammaṇā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo kathitā, desanāvilāsena heṭṭhā diṭṭhādiārammaṇavasena viññāṇaṃ dassitaṃ . Yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānanti yampi etaṃ so lokotiādinā nayena pavattaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ.
那个认为“世间就是自我”的观点,就是按照“把色看作是我”这类方式生起的邪见,它把世间和自我当成一回事,这段话就是针对它说的。“我死后将会存在”的意思是:那个“我”死后前往来世,将会是恒常的、不变的、永恒的、不会变质的,会像须弥山、大地、大海这些恒常之物一样,保持原样不动。他还把那见解也看作“这是我的”,把那个见解执取为“这是我的,这就是我,这是我的自我”。通过这一点,说明了以见解为对象的渴爱、我慢和邪见。就像在修观和对观进行再观的时候一样,后起的邪见执取先前的邪见时,情形就是如此。巴利
So loko so attāti yā esā ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena pavattā diṭṭhi loko ca attā cāti gaṇhāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. So pecca bhavissāmīti so ahaṃ paralokaṃ gantvā nicco bhavissāmi, dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo bhavissāmi, sinerumahāpathavīmahāsamuddādīhi sassatīhi samaṃ tatheva ṭhassāmi. Tampi etaṃ mamāti tampi dassanaṃ etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attāti samanupassati. Iminā diṭṭhārammaṇā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo kathitā. Vipassanāya paṭivipassanākāle viya pacchimadiṭṭhiyā purimadiṭṭhiggahaṇakāle evaṃ hoti.
在白分(清净分)里,“这色不是我的”这句话,否定了以渴爱、慢、邪见来执取色。对受等其余诸蕴,也是同样的道理。“他观”这个词,则有四种观:以渴爱而观、以慢而观、以邪见而观、以智而观。在黑分(染污分)里,应当知道是指前三种观;在白分里,则是指以智而观。“不存在时不战栗”的意思是:当所执取的对象不存在时,他不因恐惧而战栗,也不因渴爱而战栗。世尊借此开示了内在五蕴灭尽时毫不战栗的漏尽者,把这次说法推到了圆满的顶点。巴利
Sukkapakkhe rūpaṃ netaṃ mamāti rūpe taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhā paṭikkhittā. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Samanupassatīti imassa pana padassa taṇhāsamanupassanā mānasamanupassanā diṭṭhisamanupassanā ñāṇasamanupassanāti catasso samanupassanāti attho. Tā kaṇhapakkhe tissannaṃ samanupassanānaṃ, sukkapakkhe ñāṇasamanupassanāya vasena veditabbā. Asati na paritassatīti avijjamāne bhayaparitassanāya taṇhāparitassanāya vā na paritassati. Iminā bhagavā ajjhattakkhandhavināse aparitassamānaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassento desanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpesi.
242 世尊这样说完之后,有一位比丘——这位比丘善于把握教法的前后关联——他心里想:“世尊已经开示了内在五蕴坏灭时毫不恐惧的漏尽者,说法到此结束。可是,既然有内在不恐惧的情况,就应该也有内在恐惧的情况,以及外在资具坏灭时恐惧和不恐惧的情况。综合这四种情况,这个问题应该提出来。”于是他偏袒右肩,合掌向世尊这样问道。
“外部不存在时”,指的是外在的资具等坏灭的时候。“这些确实曾经为我所有”,意思是:我曾经拥有好的象乘、车乘、金银财宝。“那些如今都不复存在”,意思是:那些东西现在对我来说已经没有了——或是被国王、盗贼夺走,或是被火烧毁,或是被水冲走,或是因为使用而老旧坏掉了。“这些或许将来会有”,意思是:我将来或许会拥有象乘、车乘、金银财宝、稻米、谷子、大麦、小麦。“而我却得不到那些”,意思是:我得不到那些东西,因为没有做与之相应的业,只是坐在那里空想,所以现在得不到,因此悲伤。这是在家人的悲伤;出家人的悲伤,则应从衣钵等资具方面来理解。巴利
242.Evaṃvutte aññataro bhikkhūti evaṃ bhagavatā vutte aññataro anusandhikusalo bhikkhu – ‘‘bhagavatā ajjhattakkhandhavināse aparitassantaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetvā desanā niṭṭhāpitā, ajjhattaṃ aparitassante kho pana sati ajjhattaṃ paritassakena bahiddhā parikkhāravināse paritassakena aparitassakena cāpi bhavitabbaṃ. Iti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ pañho pucchitabbo’’ti cintetvā ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā añjaliṃ paggayha bhagavantaṃ etadavoca. Bahiddhā asatīti bahiddhā parikkhāravināse. Ahu vata meti ahosi vata me bhaddakaṃ yānaṃ vāhanaṃ hiraññaṃ suvaṇṇanti attho. Taṃ vata me natthīti taṃ vata idāni mayhaṃ natthi, rājūhi vā corehi vā haṭaṃ, agginā vā daḍḍhaṃ, udakena vā vuḷhaṃ, paribhogena vā jiṇṇaṃ. Siyā vata meti bhaveyya vata mayhaṃ yānaṃ vāhanaṃ hiraññaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ sāli vīhi yavo godhumo. Taṃ vatāhaṃ na labhāmīti tamahaṃ alabhamāno tadanucchavikaṃ kammaṃ akatvā nisinnattā idāni na labhāmīti socati, ayaṃ agāriyasocanā, anagāriyassa pattacīvarādīnaṃ vasena veditabbā.
在“不战栗”这一段里,“不会这样”的意思是:因为那些会让人这样的烦恼已经被断除,所以不会这样。“见、见处、见的立足处、见的缠缚、邪执与随眠”是指种种邪见、种种见处、种种见的立足处、种种见的缠缚,以及种种邪执与随眠。“为了诸行止息”就是为了涅槃。因为依靠涅槃,一切行的摇动、一切行的动荡、一切行的挣扎都止息、平息下来,所以涅槃被称为“诸行止息”。同样,依靠涅槃,蕴的依着、烦恼的依着、行的依着、五种欲乐的依着,这些依着都被彻底舍弃,渴爱被耗尽、褪去、息灭,所以涅槃被称为“一切依着的舍弃、渴爱的耗尽、褪去、息灭”。“为了涅槃”则是直接指明涅槃本身。这样,通过这些词句,就说明了说法者是为了亲自证得涅槃而说法。“他会这样想”是指那个持邪见的人会这样想:“我可能会断灭,我可能会毁灭,我可能将不复存在。”因为持邪见的人,在听闻依三相安立、与空性相应而宣说的法时,就会生起恐惧。这确实已经说过:“比丘们,这正是未闻法的凡夫的恐惧——‘我可能不存在,我可能不再有’。”巴利
Aparitassanāvāre na evaṃ hotīti yehi kilesehi evaṃ bhaveyya, tesaṃ pahīnattā na evaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānapariyuṭṭhānābhinivesānusayānanti diṭṭhīnañca diṭṭhiṭṭhānānañca diṭṭhādhiṭṭhānānañca diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānānañca abhinivesānusayānañca. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathāyāti nibbānatthāya. Nibbānañhi āgamma sabbasaṅkhārāiñjitāni, sabbasaṅkhāracalanāni sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā taṃ, ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamatho’’ti vuccati. Tadeva ca āgamma khandhūpadhi kilesūpadhi abhisaṅkhārūpadhi, pañcakāmaguṇūpadhīti ime upadhayo paṭinissajjiyanti, taṇhā khīyati virajjati nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ, ‘‘sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho’’ti vuccati. Nibbānāyāti ayaṃ panassa sarūpaniddeso, iti sabbeheva imehi padehi nibbānassa sacchikiriyatthāya dhammaṃ desentassāti ayamattho dīpito. Tassevaṃ hotīti tassa diṭṭhigatikassa ucchijjissāmi nāmassu, vinassissāmi nāmassu, nāssu nāma bhavissāmīti evaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhigatikassa hi tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ katvā desiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantassa tāso uppajjati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tāso heso, bhikkhave, asutavato puthujjanassa no cassaṃ, no ca me siyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.55).
243 到这一步为止,依据外在资具坏灭时有恐惧者和无恐惧者,以及内在诸蕴坏灭时有恐惧者和无恐惧者,按这几种情况说了四种空性。现在,把外在资具说为“占有”,把以二十种事为基础的身见说为“我论取”,把以身见为首的六十二种邪见说为“见依处”,为了显示三种空性,于是说出“诸比丘,那个占有”等话。其中,“占有”指外在资具。“你们应占有”的意思是:像有智慧的人会占有那样。“诸比丘,我也不见”是说:诸比丘,你们不见有,我也不见有,这样就显示那样的占有并不存在。一切处都应这样理解其含义。巴利
243. Ettāvatā bahiddhāparikkhāravināse tassanakassa ca notassanakassa ca ajjhattakkhandhavināse tassanakassa ca notassanakassa cāti imesaṃ vasena catukkoṭikā suññatā kathitā. Idāni bahiddhā parikkhāraṃ pariggahaṃ nāma katvā, vīsativatthukaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiṃ attavādupādānaṃ nāma katvā, sakkāyadiṭṭhipamukhā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhinissayaṃ nāma katvā tikoṭikaṃ suññataṃ dassetuṃ taṃ, bhikkhave, pariggahantiādimāha. Tattha pariggahanti bahiddhā parikkhāraṃ. Pariggaṇheyyāthāti yathā viññū manusso pariggaṇheyya . Ahampi kho taṃ, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, tumhepi na passatha, ahampi na passāmi, iti evarūpo pariggaho natthīti dasseti. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.
244 244. 这样显示了三种空性之后,现在要显示两种空性:把内在的诸蕴当作“我”,把外在的资具当作“我所”。于是世尊说:“诸比丘,若于内有我……”等语。其中,简要的含义是:诸比丘,如果内有我,那么这些资具就应当成为“我所有”;或者,如果于外在资具有我所,就会有“这个我,是这些资具的主人”的想法。如此,就是“有我”。有“我”时,就应当有“我所”;有“我所”时,就应当有“我”,这样才合理。“真实”即如实,“确实”即如真,或坚固不变。巴利
244. Evaṃ tikoṭikaṃ suññataṃ dassetvā idāni ajjhattakkhandhe attāti bahiddhā parikkhāre attaniyanti katvā dvikoṭikaṃ dassento attani vā, bhikkhave, satītiādimāha . Tattha ayaṃ saṅkhepattho, bhikkhave, attani vā sati idaṃ me parikkhārajātaṃ attaniyanti assa, attaniyeva vā parikkhāre sati ayaṃ me attā imassa parikkhārassa sāmīti, evaṃ ahanti. Sati mamāti, mamāti sati ahanti yuttaṃ bhaveyya. Saccatoti bhūtato, thetatoti tathato thirato vā.
现在,为了指出:如果不以这三种方式——无常、苦、无我——来把握这五蕴,那么这个人就会像阿利塔一样,在我的教法里投入污泥垃圾。于是世尊开示说:“比丘们,你们怎么想?色是常还是无常?”等等。
其中,“无常,尊者”的意思是:尊者,因为曾经生起之后就不再存在,所以是无常。或者从四种理由来说是无常:因为生灭性,因为变易性,因为暂时性,因为否定常。
“苦,尊者”的意思是:尊者,以逼迫的方式来说是苦。或者从四种理由来说是苦:因为热恼,因为苦,因为非苦所依,因为否定乐。
“变易法”是指:以转变和趣向为本性,以舍弃原有状态为本性。
“适合把它看作‘这是我的,我是这个,这是我的我’吗?”意思是:以渴爱执、慢执、见执这三种执取,把它执为“我”或“我所”,这样合适吗?
“不是这样的,尊者。”比丘们以不能自主的方式承认:“尊者,色是无我。”或者从四种理由来说无我:因为空,因为无主,因为无宰,因为否定有我。巴利
Idāni ime pañcakkhandhe aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti evaṃ tiparivaṭṭavasena aggaṇhanto ayaṃ ariṭṭho viya mayhaṃ sāsane kalalaṃ kacavaraṃ pakkhipatīti dassento taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vātiādimāha. Tattha aniccaṃ, bhanteti, bhante, yasmā hutvā na hoti, tasmā aniccaṃ. Uppādavayavattito vipariṇāmatāvakālikaniccapaṭikkhepaṭṭhena vāti catūhi kāraṇehi aniccaṃ. Dukkhaṃ, bhanteti, bhante, paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhaṃ, santāpadukkhamadukkhavatthukasukhapaṭikkhepaṭṭhena vāti catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhaṃ. Vipariṇāmadhammanti bhavasaṅkantiupagamanasabhāvaṃ pakatibhāvavijahanasabhāvaṃ. Kallaṃ nu taṃ samanupassituṃ etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attāti yuttaṃ nu kho taṃ imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhānaṃ vasena ahaṃ mamāti evaṃ gahetuṃ. No hetaṃ, bhanteti iminā te bhikkhū avasavattanākārena rūpaṃ, bhante, anattāti paṭijānanti. Suññaassāmikaanissaraattapaṭikkhepaṭṭhena vāti catūhi kāraṇehi anattā.
世尊确实有时从无常的角度来显示无我,有时从苦的角度,有时则从这两者一起入手。在《六六经》里就是这样说的:“如果有人说‘眼是我’,这种说法站不住脚,因为眼的生起和灭去都能被看到。凡是生起和灭去都能被看到的东西,人们就会这样想:‘我生起来了,我又消失了。’所以,‘眼是我’这种说法站不住脚。因此,眼是无我的。”在这部《六六经》里,世尊就是从无常的角度来显示无我。在《无我相经》里则说:“诸比丘,如果色是我,色就不会导致病痛,而且对于色应该能够做到‘愿我的色是这样,愿我的色不要这样’。然而,诸比丘,正因为色是无我的,所以色会导致病痛,对于色也无法做到‘愿我的色是这样,愿我的色不要这样’。”在这部《无我相经》里,世尊是从苦的角度来显示无我。在《阿拉汉经》里又说:“诸比丘,色是无常的;凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无我;凡是无我的,就应该以正确的智慧如实观察:‘这不是我的,这不是我,这不是我的我。’”在这部《阿拉汉经》里,世尊是从无常和苦这两个角度一起来显示无我。为什么要这样呢?因为无常和苦很明显,而无我则不明显。巴利
Bhagavā hi katthaci aniccavasena anattattaṃ dasseti, katthaci dukkhavasena, katthaci ubhayavasena. ‘‘Cakkhu attāti yo vadeyya, taṃ na upapajjati, cakkhussa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, attā me uppajjati ca veti cāti iccassa evamāgataṃ hoti, tasmā taṃ na upapajjati cakkhu attāti yo vadeyya, iti cakkhu anattā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.422) imasmiñhi chachakkasutte aniccavasena anattataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave , attā abhavissa, nayidaṃ rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvatteyya, labbhetha ca rūpe ‘evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’ti. Yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ anattā, tasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattati, na ca labbhati rūpe ‘evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’’’ti (mahāva. 20; saṃ. ni. 3.59) imasmiṃ anattalakkhaṇasutte dukkhavasena anattataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā, yadanattā taṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.76) imasmiṃ arahattasutte ubhayavasena anattataṃ dasseti. Kasmā? Aniccaṃ dukkhañca pākaṭaṃ. Anattāti na pākaṭaṃ.
比如在钵器之类的东西打碎时,人们会说“啊,无常”,却没有人会说“啊,无我”。当身上长了疮疖,或者被刺扎到,人们会说“啊,苦”,但同样没有人会说“啊,无我”。为什么呢?因为无我相本身并不明显,很难看见,也很难让人理解。所以世尊才通过无常、通过苦,或者通过这两者来显示它。在这三转当中,也只是通过无常和苦来显示。受蕴等也是同样的道理。巴利
Paribhogabhājanādīsu hi bhinnesu aho aniccanti vadanti, aho anattāti vattā nāma natthi. Sarīre gaṇḍapiḷakādīsu vā uṭṭhitāsu kaṇṭakena vā viddhā aho dukkhanti vadanti, aho anattāti pana vattā nāma natthi. Kasmā? Idañhi anattalakkhaṇaṃ nāma avibhūtaṃ duddasaṃ duppaññāpanaṃ. Tena taṃ bhagavā aniccavasena vā dukkhavasena vā ubhayavasena vā dasseti. Tayidaṃ imasmimpi teparivaṭṭe aniccadukkhavaseneva dassitaṃ. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
所以这里说“因此,诸比丘”的意思是:比丘们,因为色不论现在还是其他时候都是无常、苦、无我,所以说“因此”。“任何色”等句,在《清净道论》的“蕴的解说”里已经详细说明了。巴利
Tasmā tiha, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, yasmā etarahi aññadāpi rūpaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, tasmāti attho. Yaṃkiñci rūpantiādīni visuddhimagge khandhaniddese vitthāritāneva.
245 “厌离”就是心生厌烦。这里所说的“厌离”,指的是导向出离的观。导向出离的观有很多名称:有的地方叫“想之顶”,有的地方叫“法住智”,有的地方叫“清净勤支”,有的地方叫“行道智见清净”,有的地方叫“无渴爱尽”,有的地方用三个名称来说,有的地方用两个名称来说。巴利
245.Nibbindatīti ukkaṇṭhati. Ettha ca nibbidāti vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā adhippetā. Vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanāya hi bahūni nāmāni. Esā hi katthaci saññagganti vuttā. Katthaci dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti. Katthaci pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti. Katthaci paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti . Katthaci tammayatāpariyādānanti. Katthaci tīhi nāmehi. Katthaci dvīhīti.
在这其中,先看《波塔巴达经》里说:“波塔巴达,想先生起,智随后生起。”这就是被称为“想之顶”的地方。在《苏斯玛经》里说:“苏斯玛,法住智在先,涅槃智在后。”这就是被称为“法住智”的地方。在《十上经》里说:“行道智见清净勤支。”这就是被称为“清净勤支”的地方。在《车乘分别经》里说:“贤友,是为了行道智见清净,才在世尊座下修梵行吗?”这就是被称为“行道智见清净”的地方。在《六处分别经》里说:“诸比丘,依靠无渴爱、依于无渴爱,对于那些依于种种、缘于种种的舍,要把它舍弃;对于那些依于单一、缘于单一的舍,要依靠它、依于它。这样,这种舍就被舍断,这样就被超越。”这就是被称为“渴爱尽”的地方。在《无碍解道》里说:“想要解脱的意乐、审察随观、对诸行的舍,这些法义相同,只是名称不同。”这就是以三种名称来说的。在《发趣论》里说:“随顺对于种姓,以无间缘为缘;随顺对于清净,以无间缘为缘。”这就是以两种名称来说的。而在本《蛇喻经》里,则是以“厌离”这个名称出现的。巴利
Tattha poṭṭhapādasutte tāva ‘‘saññā kho, poṭṭhapāda, paṭhamaṃ uppajjati, pacchā ñāṇa’’nti (dī. ni. 1.416) evaṃ saññagganti vuttā. Susimasutte ‘‘pubbe kho, susima, dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ , pacchā nibbāne ñāṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.70) evaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti vuttā. Dasuttarasutte ‘‘paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhipadhāniyaṅga’’nti (dī. ni. 3.359) evaṃ pārisuddhipadāniyaṅganti vuttā. Rathavinīte ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.257) evaṃ paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti vuttā. Saḷāyatanavibhaṅge ‘‘atammayataṃ, bhikkhave, nissāya atammayataṃ āgamma yāyaṃ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā, taṃ abhinivajjetvā yāyaṃ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā, taṃ nissāya taṃ āgamma evametissā pahānaṃ hoti, evametissā samatikkamo hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.310) evaṃ tammayatāpariyādānanti vuttā. Paṭisambhidāmagge ‘‘yā ca muñcitukamyatā, yā ca paṭisaṅkhānupassanā, yā ca saṅkhārupekkhā, ime dhammā ekatthā byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.54) evaṃ tīhi nāmehi vuttā. Paṭṭhāne ‘‘anulomaṃ gotrabhussa anantarapaccayena paccayo, anulomaṃ vodānassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) evaṃ dvīhi nāmehi vuttā. Imasmiṃ pana alagaddasutte nibbindatīti nibbidānāmena āgatā.
厌离而离贪:这里的“离贪”说的是道。离贪而解脱:这里说的是以离贪之道而解脱,指的是果。在解脱时,生起“已解脱”的智:这里说的是省察智。巴利
Nibbidā virajjatīti ettha virāgoti maggo virāgā vimuccatīti ettha virāgena maggena vimuccatīti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti idha paccavekkhaṇā kathitā.
像这样展示了心解脱的大漏尽者之后,现在要用五种如实的情况来给他安立名称,于是说“这称为,诸比丘”等话。“无明”:就是作为轮回根源的无明。因为它极难拔除,所以称为“闩”。由于他已经把它拔掉,所以说他是“已拔除闩者”。“已作截顶多罗树”:就像被砍掉树冠的多罗树,或者像把多罗树连根拔起,让那个地方再也长不出多罗树一样,意思是使它再也不会被施设、再也不会出现。“令后有”:就是能带来后有。“生轮回”等话里,从投生和轮回流转这两个角度,给后有诸蕴安立了这样的名称,而它们的因缘就是业行。这种业行因为一次又一次地造成投生,像围墙一样围住而存在,所以称为“环绕物”。由于他已经把它打散、散布开来,所以说他是“已散乱环绕物者”。“渴爱”:就是作为轮回根源的渴爱。因为它深深潜入、附着,所以称为“柱”。由于他已经把它拔起、扯断丢弃,所以说他是“已拔出柱者”。“下分结”:就是倾向于下界、成为欲有投生之因的那些结。它们像城门一样把心盖住、堵住而停在那里,所以称为“门闩”。由于他已经把它们去除、破坏,所以说他是“无门闩者”。“圣”:就是没有烦恼、清净。“已倒幢”:就是已经倒下我慢之幢。“已卸担”:就是五蕴担、烦恼担、业行担、五种欲乐担已经被卸下、放下,所以是“已卸担”。不过在这里,因为特别是指我慢之担已被卸下,所以理解为“已卸担”。“已脱离”:就是从四种束缚以及一切烦恼中脱离。但在这里,因为特别是指从我慢的束缚中脱离,所以理解为“已脱离”。“我慢”:就是在色上认为“我存在”的慢,在受上……在想上……在行上……在识上认为“我存在”的慢。巴利
Evaṃ vimuttacittaṃ mahākhīṇāsavaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa yathābhūtehi pañcahi kāraṇehi nāmaṃ gaṇhanto ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Avijjāti vaṭṭamūlikā avijjā. Ayañhi durukkhipanaṭṭhena palighoti vuccati. Tenesa tassa ukkhittattā ukkhittapalighoti vutto. Tālāvatthukatāti sīsacchinnatālo viya katā, samūlaṃ vā tālaṃ uddharitvā tālassa vatthu viya katā, yathā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ puna so tālo na paññāyati, evaṃ puna apaññattibhāvaṃ nītāti attho. Ponobbhavikoti punabbhavadāyako. Jātisaṃsārotiādīsu jāyanavasena ceva saṃsaraṇavasena ca evaṃ laddhanāmānaṃ punabbhavakhandhānaṃ paccayo kammābhisaṅkhāro. So hi punappunaṃ uppattikaraṇavasena parikkhipitvā ṭhitattā parikkhāti vuccati, tenesa tassā saṃkiṇṇattā vikiṇṇattā saṃkiṇṇaparikkhoti vutto. Taṇhāti vaṭṭamūlikā taṇhā. Ayañhi gambhīrānugataṭṭhena esikāti vuccati. Tenesa tassā abbūḷhattā luñcitvā chaḍḍitattā abbūḷhesikoti vutto. Orambhāgiyānīti oraṃ bhajanakāni kāmabhave upapattipaccayāni. Etāni hi kavāṭaṃ viya nagaradvāraṃ cittaṃ pidahitvā ṭhitattā aggaḷāti vuccanti. Tenesa tesaṃ nirākatattā bhinnattā niraggaḷoti vutto. Ariyoti nikkileso parisuddho. Pannaddhajoti patitamānaddhajo. Pannabhāroti khandhabhārakilesabhāraabhisaṅkhārabhārapañckāmaguṇabhārā pannā orohitā assāti pannabhāro. Apica idha mānabhārasseva oropitattā pannabhāroti adhippeto. Visaṃyuttoti catūhi yogehi sabbakilesehi ca visaṃyutto. Idha pana mānasaṃyogeneva visaṃyuttattā visaṃyuttoti adhippeto. Asmimānoti rūpe asmīti māno, vedanāya… saññāya… saṅkhāresu… viññāṇe asmīti māno.
到这一步,世尊已经指出:一位漏尽者通过道灭尽了烦恼,进入最殊胜的灭尽之眠,以涅槃为所缘,入果定而住——这就是他的时机。
就像有两座城:一座是贼城,一座是安稳城。这时有一位大勇士这样想:“只要这座贼城还在,安稳城就摆脱不了威胁。我要把贼城铲平。”于是他披上铠甲,拿起剑,来到贼城,砍断城门口竖起的柱桩,劈开城门,拔起门闩,捣毁城墙,填平壕沟,推倒为装饰城市而竖起的旗幡,然后放火烧了整座城。之后他进入安稳城,登上高楼,被亲族围绕,享用美味饮食。
同样,贼城好比有身,安稳城好比涅槃,大勇士好比修行者。他这样想:“只要有身的轮回还在运转,就摆脱不了三十二种刑罚、九十八种疾病和二十五大怖畏。”于是他像那位大勇士一样披上铠甲——披上戒的铠甲,拿起智慧之剑,以阿拉汉道拔除渴爱之柱,就像那位勇士用剑砍断柱桩;他打开了五下分结的门闩,就像那位勇士劈开城门;他拔起了无明之闩,就像那位勇士拔起门闩;他摧毁了业行,填平了生死轮回的壕沟,就像那位勇士捣毁城墙、填平壕沟;他推倒了慢幢,烧毁了有身之城,就像那位勇士推倒旗幡、烧毁贼城。然后他进入烦恼止息的涅槃之城,就像那位勇士进入安稳城、登上高楼享用美味饮食一样,他安住在以不死之灭为所缘的果定之乐中,度过时光。巴利
Ettāvatā bhagavatā maggena kilese khepetvā nirodhasayanavaragatassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā viharato khīṇāsavassa kālo dassito. Yathā hi dve nagarāni ekaṃ coranagaraṃ, ekaṃ khemanagaraṃ. Atha ekassa mahāyodhassa evaṃ bhaveyya – ‘‘yāvimaṃ coranagaraṃ tiṭṭhati, tāva khemanagaraṃ bhayato na muccati, coranagaraṃ anagaraṃ karissāmī’’ti sannāhaṃ katvā khaggaṃ gahetvā coranagaraṃ upasaṅkamitvā nagaradvāre ussāpite esikatthambhe khaggena chinditvā sadvārabāhakaṃ kavāṭaṃ chinditvā palighaṃ ukkhipitvā pākāraṃ bhindanto parikkhaṃ saṃkiritvā nagarasobhanatthāya ussite dhaje pātetvā nagaraṃ agginā jhāpetvā khemanagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādaṃ abhiruyha ñātigaṇaparivuto surasabhojanaṃ bhuñjeyya, evaṃ coranagaraṃ viya sakkāyo, khemanagaraṃ viya nibbānaṃ, mahāyodho viya yogāvacaro. Tassevaṃ hoti, ‘‘yāva sakkāyavaṭṭaṃ vattati, tāva dvattiṃsakammakāraṇaaṭṭhanavutirogapañcavīsatimahābhayehi parimuccanaṃ natthī’’ti. So mahāyodho viya sannāhaṃ sīlasannāhaṃ katvā, paññākhaggaṃ gahetvā khaggena esikatthambhe viya arahattamaggena taṇhesikaṃ luñcitvā, so yodho sadvārabāhakaṃ nagarakavāṭaṃ viya pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanaggaḷaṃ ugghāṭetvā, so yodho palighaṃ viya, avijjāpalighaṃ ukkhipitvā , so yodho pākāraṃ bhindanto parikkhaṃ viya kammābhisaṅkhāraṃ bhindanto jātisaṃsāraparikkhaṃ saṃkiritvā, so yodho nagarasobhanatthāya ussāpite dhaje viya mānaddhaje pātetvā sakkāyanagaraṃ jhāpetvā, so yodho khemanagare uparipāsāde surasabhojanaṃ viya kilesanibbānaṃ nagaraṃ pavisitvā amatanirodhārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavamāno kālaṃ vītināmeti.
246 246. 现在,为了说明这样心解脱的漏尽者,其识是别人无法了知的,所以说了“如此心解脱……”等话。其中,“寻觅”就是寻找、探求。“依止此”:就是依止这个。“如来”:这里既可以指有情,也可以指最上的人,也就是漏尽者。“不被发现”:既指不存在,也指无法被了知。因为如果把“如来”理解为有情,那意思就是“不存在”;如果把“如来”理解为漏尽者,那意思就是“无法被了知”。巴利
246. Idāni evaṃ vimuttacittassa khīṇāsavassa parehi anadhigamanīyaviññāṇataṃ dassento evaṃ vimuttacittaṃ khotiādimāha. Tattha anvesanti anvesantā gavesantā. Idaṃ nissitanti idaṃ nāma nissitaṃ. Tathāgatassāti ettha sattopi tathāgatoti adhippeto, uttamapuggalo khīṇāsavopi. Ananuvijjoti asaṃvijjamāno vā avindeyyo vā. Tathāgatoti hi satte gahite asaṃvijjamānoti attho vaṭṭati, khīṇāsave gahite avindeyyoti attho vaṭṭati.
在这里,第一种解释的用意是:比丘们,对于现世还活着、仍然在世的漏尽者,我不把他施设为如来、有情或补特伽罗。对于不再结生、已经般涅槃的漏尽者,我怎么会施设他为有情或补特伽罗呢?如来是不可得见的。因为在究竟意义上,根本不存在任何叫“有情”的东西。对于这个不存在的东西,就算去寻找“依止于此的识”,又能得到什么呢?怎么可能找到呢?这就是第一种解释的用意。第二种解释的用意是:比丘们,我说,现世还活着、仍然在世的漏尽者,从识的角度来说,是帝释天神等诸天神所不能了知的。因为即使帝释天神、梵天、生主等诸天神去寻求,也无法知道漏尽者的观心、道心或果心是依止于何种所缘而运作的。对于不再结生、已经般涅槃的漏尽者,他们又能了知什么呢?巴利
Tattha purimanaye ayamadhippāyo – bhikkhave, ahaṃ diṭṭheva dhamme dharamānakaṃyeva khīṇāsavaṃ tathāgato satto puggaloti na paññapemi. Appaṭisandhikaṃ pana parinibbutaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ sattoti vā puggaloti vā kiṃ paññapessāmi? Ananuvijjo tathāgato. Na hi paramatthato satto nāma koci atthi, tassa avijjamānassa idaṃ nissitaṃ viññāṇanti anvesantāpi kiṃ adhigacchissanti? Kathaṃ paṭilabhissantīti attho. Dutiyanaye ayamadhippāyo – bhikkhave, ahaṃ diṭṭheva dhamme dharamānakaṃyeva khīṇāsavaṃ viññāṇavasena indādīhi avindiyaṃ vadāmi. Na hi saindā devā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā anvesantāpi khīṇāsavassa vipassanācittaṃ vā maggacittaṃ vā phalacittaṃ vā, idaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ nissāya vattatīti jānituṃ sakkonti. Te appaṭisandhikassa parinibbutassa kiṃ jānissantīti?
以不存在的东西,就是以不存在的事。以空洞的东西,就是以空洞的事。以虚妄的东西,就是以妄语。以不实的东西,就是凡不存在者,以那来说。诽谤,就是强行指责、压过对方地说。调伏者:调伏就是调治、摧毁,所以叫调伏者,这里的意思就是毁灭有情的人。诸比丘,正如我不是……意思是:诸比丘,我不是以那种言说方式成为毁灭有情的人。正如我不说……意思是:我以任何理由都不宣说有情的毁灭。这段话要表达的是:正如我不是毁灭有情的人,正如我不宣说有情的毁灭,那些沙门婆罗门却说我沙门乔达摩是调伏者、是毁灭有情的人,还说我沙门乔达摩宣说存在的有情会断灭、毁灭、消失——他们就这样以不存在、空洞、虚妄、不实的事来诽谤我。巴利
Asatāti asantena. Tucchāti tucchakena. Musāti musāvādena. Abhūtenāti yaṃ natthi, tena. Abbhācikkhantīti abhiācikkhanti, abhibhavitvā vadanti. Venayikoti vinayati vināsetīti vinayo, so eva venayiko, sattavināsakoti adhippāyo. Yathā cāhaṃ na, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, yena vākārena ahaṃ na sattavināsako. Yathā cāhaṃ na vadāmīti yena vā kāraṇena ahaṃ sattavināsaṃ na paññapemi . Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathāhaṃ na sattavināsako, yathā ca na sattavināsaṃ paññapemi, tathā maṃ te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo’’ti vadantā sattavināsako samaṇo gotamoti ca, ‘‘sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapetī’’ti vadantā sattavināsaṃ paññapetīti ca asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhantīti.
“过去”是指过去在大菩提道场的时候。“现在”是指现在正在说法的时候。“我只施设苦,以及苦的灭”:意思是,不论是我还没有转法轮、住在菩提道场的时候,还是从我转法轮开始说法以来,我都只施设四圣谛。这里应当知道:因为提到了苦,苦的根本——集也就已经被包含在内;因为提到了灭,导向灭的道也已经被包含在内。“于此”是指在宣说四圣谛这件事上。“其他人”是指那些不能了知、不能通达这些圣谛的人。“辱骂”是指他们用十种辱骂的依据来辱骂。“讥毁”是指他们用言语来讥毁。“忿害、恼害”是指他们怀着“要让他发怒、要伤害他”的意图来冲撞、施加苦恼。“对此”是指对于这些辱骂等,或者对于那些人。“愤”就是愤怒。“不满”就是忧恼。“不喜”就是不高兴。巴利
Pubbe cāti pubbe mahābodhimaṇḍamhiyeva ca. Etarahi cāti etarahi dhammadesanāyañca. Dukkhañceva paññapemi, dukkhassa ca nirodhanti dhammacakkaṃ appavattetvā bodhimaṇḍe viharantopi dhammacakkappavattanato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ desentopi catusaccameva paññapemīti attho. Ettha hi dukkhaggahaṇena tassa mūlabhūto samudayo, nirodhaggahaṇena taṃsampāpako maggo gahitova hotīti veditabbo. Tatra ceti tasmiṃ catusaccappakāsane. Pareti saccāni ājānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthapuggalā. Akkosantīti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosanti. Paribhāsantīti vācāya paribhāsanti. Rosenti vihesentīti rosessāma vihesessāmāti adhippāyena ghaṭṭenti dukkhāpenti. Tatrāti tesu akkosādīsu, tesu vā parapuggalesu. Āghātoti kopo. Appaccayoti domanassaṃ. Anabhiraddhīti atuṭṭhi.
这里说的“于此”,就是指宣说四圣谛的时候。“其他人”,是指有能力了知、通达四圣谛宣说的人。“欢喜”,就是欢喜喜悦。“踊跃”,就是兴奋踊跃。“于此”,同样是指宣说四圣谛的时候。“对此”,是指对恭敬等事情。“所谓‘此先前已遍知’”,是指这五蕴过去在菩提道场已经由三种遍知所遍知。“于此这些”,就是在这些五蕴上有这些恭敬等。这是说什么呢?即使在那时,如来也不会想:“这些恭敬是冲着我做的”,或者“我在享受这些”,只是先前已遍知的五蕴在承受这些恭敬,仅此而已。“因此”,是因为那些不能通达诸谛的人也会辱骂如来。其余部分应按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Tatra ceti catusaccappakāsaneyeva. Pareti catusaccappakāsanaṃ ājānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthapuggalā. Ānandoti ānandapīti. Uppilāvitattanti uppilāpanapīti. Tatra ceti catusaccappakāsanamhiyeva. Tatrāti sakkārādīsu. Yaṃ kho idaṃ pubbe pariññātanti idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ pubbe bodhimaṇḍe tīhi pariññāhi pariññātaṃ. Tatthameti tasmiṃ khandhapañcake ime. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Tatrāpi tathāgatassa ime sakkārā mayi karīyantīti vā ahaṃ ete anubhavāmīti vā na hoti. Pubbe pariññātakkhandhapañcakaṃyeva ete sakkāre anubhotīti ettakameva hotīti. Tasmāti yasmā saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthā tathāgatampi akkosanti, tasmā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
247 因此,比丘们,所谓“不是你们的”,意思是:因为即使对属于自己的东西,舍弃欲贪也能在长时间里带来利益和安乐,所以凡是“不是你们的”,你们就应当舍弃它。所谓“随其所欲而行”,就是他想怎样做就怎样做。所谓“尊者,这些不是我们的我”,是说:尊者,这些草木枝叶,不是我们的我,不是我们的色,不是我们的识。所谓“或属于我的”,意思是:它甚至不是我们的衣等资具。“同样地,比丘们,凡不是你们的,就舍弃它”:世尊指出五蕴不是你们的,让你们舍弃它,但并不是要你们把它拔掉或扯掉,而是通过调伏欲贪来让你们舍弃它。巴利
247.Tasmā tiha, bhikkhave, yaṃ na tumhākanti yasmā attaniyepi chandarāgappahānaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattati, tasmā yaṃ na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahathāti attho. Yathāpaccayaṃ vākareyyāti yathā yathā iccheyya tathā tathā kareyya. Na hi no etaṃ, bhante, attā vāti, bhante, etaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṃ amhākaṃ neva attā na amhākaṃ rūpaṃ na viññāṇanti vadanti. Attaniyaṃ vāti amhākaṃ cīvarādiparikkhāropi na hotīti attho. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ na tumhākaṃ taṃ pajahathāti bhagavā, khandhapañcakaṃyeva na tumhākanti dassetvā pajahāpeti, tañca kho na uppāṭetvā, luñcitvā vā. Chandarāgavinayena panetaṃ pajahāpeti.
248 “善说”在这里可以这样理解:从三转开始一直到这个地方,都可以引来说明;如果反过来,从“仅仅因为一点喜爱就能生到天界”开始一直到这个地方,也可以引来说明。“善说”就是说得善巧。正因为说得善巧,所以它显明、开示、清楚。“断破布者”:破布指的是破烂、撕裂、到处缝补打结的旧衣服。如果有人没有这样的破布,却穿着八肘或九肘长的新衣,那他就叫“断破布者”。这个法也是这样,在这里并没有因为欺骗等而造成的破裂、破损、缝合、打结的状态。另外,垃圾也叫破布。在这个教法里,所谓的沙门垃圾是不能立足的。因此说:巴利
248.Evaṃ svākkhātoti ettha tiparivaṭṭato paṭṭhāya yāva imaṃ ṭhānaṃ āharitumpi vaṭṭati, paṭilomena pemamattakena saggaparāyaṇato paṭṭhāya yāva imaṃ ṭhānaṃ āharitumpi vaṭṭati. Svākkhātoti sukathito. Sukathitattā eva uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito. Chinnapilotikoti pilotikā vuccati chinnaṃ bhinnaṃ tattha tattha sibbitaṃ gaṇṭhikataṃ jiṇṇaṃ vatthaṃ, taṃ yassa natthi, aṭṭhahatthaṃ vā navahatthaṃ vā ahatasāṭakaṃ nivattho, so chinnapilotiko nāma. Ayampi dhammo tādiso, na hettha kohaññādivasena chinnabhinnasibbitagaṇṭhikatabhāvo atthi. Apica kacavaro pilotikoti vuccati. Imasmiñca sāsane samaṇakacavaraṃ nāma patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhati. Tenevāha –
“ 把稗子清出去,把污秽扔掉。
接着,要把那些不是沙门却自以为是的假沙门,像扬掉糠秕一样赶走。
把那些心怀恶欲、行为恶劣、常与恶行恶境为伍的人赶走之后,
你们这些清净者要保持正念,与清净的人一起过共住生活。
从那时起,和合而明智的你们,将会终结苦。”巴利
‘‘Kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha, kasambuñcāpakassatha; Tato palāpe vāhetha, assamaṇe samaṇamānine. Niddhamitvāna pāpicche, pāpaācāragocare; Suddhā suddhehi saṃvāsaṃ, kappayavho patissatā; Tato samaggā nipakā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathā’’ti. (su. ni. 283-285);
就这样,即使因沙门垢秽之切断,这个法也叫作“断碎布者”。他们不再有轮回的施设,也就是说,他们的轮回已经达到了不被施设的状态,成为不可施设。像这样的大漏尽者,只会出生在如此善说的教法之中。就像漏尽者一样,不来者等也是如此。巴利
Iti samaṇakacavarassa chinnattāpi ayaṃ dhammo chinnapilotiko nāma hoti. Vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññāpanāyāti tesaṃ vaṭṭaṃ apaññattibhāvaṃ gataṃ nippaññattikaṃ jātaṃ. Evarūpo mahākhīṇāsavo evaṃ svākkhāte sāsaneyeva uppajjati. Yathā ca khīṇāsavo, evaṃ anāgāmiādayopi.
在这其中,法随行者和信随行者这两种人,是处在入流道上的修行者。就像经里说的:“什么样的人是法随行者?如果有人为了亲证入流果而修行,他的慧根特别强,他修的是以慧为主导、以慧为先导的圣道,这样的人就叫做法随行者。为了亲证入流果而修行的人是法随行者,已经安住在果位上的人则是见至者。什么样的人是信随行者?如果有人为了亲证入流果而修行,他的信根特别强,他修的是以信为主导、以信为先导的圣道,这样的人就叫做信随行者。为了亲证入流果而修行的人是信随行者,已经安住在果位上的人则是信解脱者。”(《人施设》30)
“对我只有信,只有爱”这句话,说的是那些没有其他圣法、唯独对如来只有信和爱的人。这里指的是修观的人。修观的比丘们这样建立起观之后坐下来,就会对十力尊生起一种信、一种爱。凭着这种信和这种爱,他们就像被牵着手安置在天界一样,据说已经成了决定趣者。不过古代的长老们把这样的比丘叫做“小入流者”。剩下的内容,各处都很容易理解。巴利
Tattha dhammānusārino saddhānusārinoti ime dve sotāpattimaggaṭṭhā honti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamo ca puggalo dhammānusārī? Yassa puggalassa sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, paññāvāhiṃ paññāpubbaṅgamaṃ ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo dhammānusārī. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno puggalo dhammānusārī, phale ṭhito diṭṭhippatto. Katamo ca puggalo saddhānusārī? Yassa puggalassa sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, saddhāvāhiṃ saddhāpubbaṅgamaṃ ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo saddhānusārī. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno puggalo saddhānusārī, phale ṭhito saddhāvimutto’’ti (pu. pa. 30). Yesaṃ mayi saddhāmattaṃ pemamattanti iminā yesaṃ añño ariyadhammo natthi, tathāgate pana saddhāmattaṃ pemamattameva hoti. Te vipassakapuggalā adhippetā. Vipassakabhikkhūnañhi evaṃ vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnānaṃ dasabale ekā saddhā ekaṃ pemaṃ uppajjati. Tāya saddhāya tena pemena hatthe gahetvā sagge ṭhapitā viya honti, niyatagatikā kira ete. Porāṇakattherā pana evarūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ cūḷasotāpannoti vadanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
3. 《蚁垤经》的注释巴利
3. Vammikasuttavaṇṇanā
249 “如是我闻”这句,是《蚁垤经》的开头。其中“尊者”是一种亲切的称呼。“童子·咖沙巴”是他的名字。因为他小时候就出家了,所以当世尊说“去叫迦叶来,把这个水果或嚼食给迦叶”时,有人问“哪位迦叶?”回答“童子·咖沙巴”,这个名字就这样叫开了。从那时起,即使到了年老,也仍然被称为“童子·咖沙巴”。另外,因为他是国王养大的孩子,人们也叫他“童子·咖沙巴”。下面从他过去的因缘开始,讲述他的事迹:巴利
249.Evaṃme sutanti vammikasuttaṃ. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ. Kumārakassapoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kumārakāle pabbajitattā pana bhagavatā, ‘‘kassapaṃ pakkosatha, idaṃ phalaṃ vā khādanīyaṃ vā kassapassa dethā’’ti vutte, katarassa kassapassāti kumārakassapassāti evaṃ gahitanāmattā tato paṭṭhāya vuḍḍhakālepi ‘‘kumārakassapo’’ tveva vuccati. Apica raññā posāvanikaputtattāpi taṃ ‘‘kumārakassapo’’ti sañjāniṃsu. Ayaṃ panassa pubbayogato paṭṭhāya āvibhāvakathā –
据说,这位长老在莲华上佛的时代,是一个长者的儿子。有一天,他看见世尊把一位善于巧妙说法的弟子安排在某一个位置上,就给世尊做了七天的供养,然后发愿说:“愿我将来在某位佛陀的教法里,也能像这位长老一样,成为善于巧妙说法的弟子。”之后他不断修福。后来在迦叶佛的教法中出家,却没能证得殊胜的成就。巴利
Thero kira padumuttarassa bhagavato kāle seṭṭhiputto ahosi. Athekadivasaṃ bhagavantaṃ citrakathiṃ ekaṃ attano sāvakaṃ ṭhānantare ṭhapentaṃ disvā bhagavato sattāhaṃ dānaṃ datvā, ‘‘ahampi bhagavā anāgate ekassa buddhassa ayaṃ thero viya citrakathī sāvako bhaveyya’’nti patthanaṃ katvā puññāni karonto kassapassa bhagavato sāsane pabbajitvā visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi.
据说,那时迦叶佛已般涅槃,其教法日渐衰败。当时有五位比丘绑好梯子,爬上山顶,在山中修行沙门法。僧团中的长老在第三天证得阿拉汉果,下座长老在第四天证得不来果。其余三人未能证得殊胜的成就,便投生到了天界。此后长达一佛间隔的时间里,他们在天界和人间享受福报。其中一人投生在塔迦尸喇的国王家族,成为一位名叫布咕萨提的国王。他为了世尊而出家,在前往王舍城的途中,于陶匠的草屋里听闻世尊说法,证得不来果。另一人投生在一个海港的良家,乘船出海;船破损沉没后,他穿着树皮衣,获得了丰厚的供养,于是生起“我是阿拉汉”的念头。一位希望他获益的天神责备他说:“你不是阿拉汉,去问世尊问题吧。”他照做了,随后证得阿拉汉果。巴利
Tadā kira parinibbutassa bhagavato sāsane osakkante pañca bhikkhū nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā pabbataṃ abhiruyha samaṇadhammaṃ akaṃsu. Saṅghatthero tatiyadivase arahattaṃ patto. Anuthero catutthadivase anāgāmī ahosi. Itare tayo visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ asakkontā devaloke nibbattiṃsu. Tesaṃ ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhontānaṃ eko takkasilāyaṃ rājakule nibbattitvā pukkusāti nāma rājā hutvā bhagavantaṃ uddissa pabbajitvā rājagahaṃ gacchanto kumbhakārasālāyaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphalaṃ patto. Eko ekasmiṃ samuddapaṭṭane kulaghare nibbattitvā nāvaṃ āruyha bhinnanāvo dārucīrāni nivāsetvā lābhasampattiṃ patto, ‘‘ahaṃ arahā’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā, ‘‘na tvaṃ arahā, gaccha satthāraṃ pañhaṃ pucchā’’ti atthakāmāya devatāya codito tathā katvā arahattaphalaṃ patto.
有一个人投生在王舍城一位良家女子的胎中。她起初向父母请求出家,没有得到允许,就嫁到了夫家,当时还不知道自己已经怀孕。后来她得到丈夫同意,就在比丘尼僧团中出家了。比丘尼们看到她有怀孕的迹象,就去问提婆达多,提婆达多说:“她不是真正的沙门。”她们又去问具足十力的世尊,导师就把这件事交给优波离长老处理。长老把舍卫城的几户人家和女居士毗舍佉叫来,经过仔细审查后说:“她是在出家之前就怀了孕,出家本身是清净无过的。”世尊赞叹长老说:“这场诤事裁决得很好。”那位比丘尼后来生下一个相貌像金像一样的儿子,波斯匿王把他抱去抚养,给他取名叫“迦叶”。后来国王为他盛装打扮,带他到世尊面前,让他出家。正因为他是由国王抚养长大的王子,所以人们都称他为“童子·咖沙巴”。巴利
Eko rājagahe ekissā kuladārikāya kucchimhi uppanno. Sā ca paṭhamaṃ mātāpitaro yācitvā pabbajjaṃ alabhamānā kulagharaṃ gatā gabbhasaṇṭhitampi ajānantī sāmikaṃ ārādhetvā tena anuññātā bhikkhunīsu pabbajitā. Tassā gabbhininimittaṃ disvā bhikkhuniyo devadattaṃ pucchiṃsu, so ‘‘assamaṇī’’ti āha. Dasabalaṃ pucchiṃsu, satthā upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesi. Thero sāvatthinagaravāsīni kulāni visākhañca upāsikaṃ pakkosāpetvā sodhento, – ‘‘pure laddho gabbho, pabbajjā arogā’’ti āha. Satthā ‘‘suvinicchitaṃ adhikaraṇa’’nti therassa sādhukāraṃ adāsi. Sā bhikkhunī suvaṇṇabimbasadisaṃ puttaṃ vijāyi, taṃ gahetvā rājā pasenadi kosalo posāpesi. ‘‘Kassapo’’ti cassa nāmaṃ katvā aparabhāge alaṅkaritvā satthu santikaṃ netvā pabbājesi. Iti rañño posāvanikaputtattāpi taṃ ‘‘kumārakassapo’’ti sañjāniṃsūti.
“盲林”就是指一个叫这个名字的树林。据说这片树林在两位佛陀住世的时候,虽然名字没有变,但一直就以“盲林”这个名称为人所知。这里说明一下它得名的由来:寿命短的佛陀,舍利不会结成完整的一块,而是靠着他决意愿力的作用分散开来。正因为这样,我们的世尊在即将般涅槃时也这样决意:“我不会长久住世,只有少数众生见到了我,没能见到我的众生要多得多。他们若能取我的舍利到各处虔诚供奉,就会因此转生天界。”于是他便决意让自己的遗体分散开来。而寿命长的佛陀,舍利则会像一块完整的黄金一样,保持整块不散。巴利
Andhavaneti evaṃnāmake vane. Taṃ kira vanaṃ dvinnaṃ buddhānaṃ kāle avijahitanāmaṃ andhavanaṃtveva paññāyati. Tatrāyaṃ paññattivibhāvanā – appāyukabuddhānañhi sarīradhātu na ekagghanā hoti. Adhiṭṭhānānubhāvena vippakiriyati. Teneva amhākampi bhagavā, – ‘‘ahaṃ na ciraṭṭhitiko, appakehi sattehi ahaṃ diṭṭho, yehi na diṭṭho, teva bahutarā, te me dhātuyo ādāya tattha tattha pūjentā saggaparāyaṇā bhavissantī’’ti parinibbānakāle, ‘‘attano sarīraṃ vippakiriyatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Dīghāyukabuddhānaṃ pana suvaṇṇakkhandho viya ekagghanaṃ dhātusarīraṃ tiṭṭhati.
迦叶世尊的舍利也同样完整地保留着。后来,大众聚集在一起商量:“这些舍利已经结成整块,没办法分开,我们该怎么办呢?”大家商议后决定:“那就造一座整块的舍利塔吧。不过,要造多大呢?”有人说:“七由旬。”大家说:“那太大了,将来没法维护。六由旬吧,五由旬……四由旬……三由旬……二由旬……一由旬吧。”就这样确定为一由旬。接着又商量砖要用什么样的:“外墙的砖用红金做,整块成砖,每块值十万金;内墙的砖每块值五万金。用雌黄和雄黄代替泥土来粘合,用油代替水。”这样决定之后,他们把建塔的四面分成四份:国王负责一面,王子地护负责一面,身为大臣之首的将军负责一面,身为地方之首的商主负责一面。巴利
Kassapassāpi bhagavato tatheva aṭṭhāsi. Tato mahājanā sannipatitvā, ‘‘dhātuyo ekagghanā na sakkā viyojetuṃ, kiṃ karissāmā’’ti sammantayitvā ekagghanameva cetiyaṃ karissāma, kittakaṃ pana hotu tanti āhaṃsu. Eke sattayojaniyanti āhaṃsu. Etaṃ atimahantaṃ, anāgate jaggituṃ na sakkā, chayojanaṃ hotu, pañcayojanaṃ… catuyojanaṃ… tiyojanaṃ… dviyojanaṃ… ekayojanaṃ hotūti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā iṭṭhakā kīdisā hontūti bāhirante iṭṭhakā rattasuvaṇṇamayā ekagghanā satasahassagghanikā hontu, abbhantarimante paññāsasahassagghanikā. Haritālamanosilāhi mattikākiccaṃ kayiratu, telena udakakiccanti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā cattāri mukhāni catudhā vibhajiṃsu. Rājā ekaṃ mukhaṃ gaṇhi, rājaputto pathavindarakumāro ekaṃ, amaccānaṃ jeṭṭhako hutvā senāpati ekaṃ, janapadānaṃ jeṭṭhako hutvā seṭṭhi ekaṃ.
这时,国王因为财力雄厚,就命人取出黄金,在自己负责的那一面开工,副王和将军也各自在自己负责的那一面开工。可是,商主负责的那一面工程却拖了下来。那时,有一位名叫耶索罗多的近事男,他精通三藏,是证得不来果的圣弟子。他知道工程拖延了,就备好五百辆车,前往各地,劝大家说:“迦叶佛住世两万年,如今已经般涅槃。大家正在为他建一座一由旬高的宝塔。谁愿意布施,不管是黄金、钱财、七宝,还是雌黄、雄黄,都请捐出来。”人们各随自己的能力,布施了钱财、黄金等物;没有能力的人,也布施了油和米等。这位近事男把油、米等送去给工人当伙食和工钱,剩下的就换成黄金送去。就这样,他走遍了整个赡部洲。巴利
Tattha dhanasampannatāya rājāpi suvaṇṇaṃ nīharāpetvā attanā gahitamukhe kammaṃ ārabhi, uparājāpi, senāpatipi. Seṭṭhinā gahitamukhe pana kammaṃ olīyati. Tato yasorato nāma eko upāsako tepiṭako bhāṇako anāgāmī ariyasāvako, so kammaṃ olīyatīti ñatvā pañca sakaṭasatāni yojāpetvā janapadaṃ gantvā ‘‘kassapasammāsambuddho vīsativassasahassāni ṭhatvā parinibbuto. Tassa yojanikaṃ ratanacetiyaṃ kayirati, yo yaṃ dātuṃ ussahati suvaṇṇaṃ vā hiraññaṃ vā sattaratanaṃ vā haritālaṃ vā manosilaṃ vā, so taṃ detū’’ti samādapesi. Manussā attano attano thāmena hiraññasuvaṇṇādīni adaṃsu. Asakkontā telataṇḍulādīni dentiyeva. Upāsako telataṇḍulādīni kammakārānaṃ bhattavetanatthaṃ pahiṇāti, avasesehi suvaṇṇaṃ cetāpetvā pahiṇāti, evaṃ sakalajambudīpaṃ acari.
塔的工程已经完成,他们就从塔场那边派人送了一封信去:“工程已经完成,请老师来礼塔。”老师也送了一封信去:“我已经劝动了整个赡部洲的人,大家把手上有的都拿来,把工程完成吧。”两封信在半路上碰上了。可是,从塔场那边发出的信,反而先到了老师手里。他读完信,心想“我要去礼塔”,就一个人出发了。走到半路一片森林里,冒出五百个盗贼。其中有些人看见他,就对其他人说:“这人从整个赡部洲收集了金银财宝,现在就像一坛移动的宝藏朝我们走过来了。”于是他们把他抓住。他说:“各位,你们为什么抓我?”盗贼们说:“你从整个赡部洲收集了那么多金银财宝,也分一点给我们吧。”他说:“你们难道不知道吗?迦叶世尊已经般涅槃了,大家正在为他建一座一由旬高的宝塔。我是为了那件事才去劝募的,不是为了自己。不管在哪里募到东西,我当场就派人送到塔场去了。我自己身上,除了这套穿着的衣服,连一文钱都没有。”巴利
Cetiye kammaṃ niṭṭhitanti cetiyaṭṭhānato paṇṇaṃ pahiṇiṃsu – ‘‘niṭṭhitaṃ kammaṃ ācariyo āgantvā cetiyaṃ vandatū’’ti. Sopi paṇṇaṃ pahiṇi – ‘‘mayā sakalajambudīpo samādapito, yaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvā kammaṃ niṭṭhāpentū’’ti. Dvepi paṇṇāni antarāmagge samāgamiṃsu. Ācariyassa paṇṇato pana cetiyaṭṭhānato paṇṇaṃ paṭhamataraṃ ācariyassa hatthaṃ agamāsi. So paṇṇaṃ vācetvā cetiyaṃ vandissāmīti ekakova nikkhami. Antarāmagge aṭaviyaṃ pañca corasatāni uṭṭhahiṃsu. Tatrekacce taṃ disvā iminā sakalajambudīpato hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ sampiṇḍitaṃ, nidhikumbhī no pavaṭṭamānā āgatāti avasesānaṃ ārocetvā taṃ aggahesuṃ. Kasmā tātā, maṃ gaṇhathāti? Tayā sakalajambudīpato sabbaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ sampiṇḍitaṃ, amhākampi thokaṃ thokaṃ dehīti. Kiṃ tumhe na jānātha, kassapo bhagavā parinibbuto, tassa yojanikaṃ ratanacetiyaṃ kayirati, tadatthāya mayā samādapitaṃ, no attano atthāya. Taṃ taṃ laddhaladdhaṭṭhānato tattheva pesitaṃ, mayhaṃ pana nivatthasāṭakamattaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ vittaṃ kākaṇikampi natthīti.
有些人说:“老师,那就这样把他放了吧。”另一些人说:“这个人受到国王和重臣的敬重,万一他在城里街道上认出我们当中的某个人,去报告国王、大臣等人,我们就会遭殃。”那位近事男说:“诸位贤友,我不会那样做。”他这样说,是出于对那些人的悲悯,而不是贪恋自己的性命。于是,他们当中一派主张该抓,一派主张该放,争论不休。结果主张该抓的人占了多数,就把他杀了。巴利
Eke, ‘‘evametaṃ vissajetha ācariya’’nti āhaṃsu. Eke, ‘‘ayaṃ rājapūjito amaccapūjito , amhesu kañcideva nagaravīthiyaṃ disvā rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ ārocetvā anayavyasanaṃ pāpuṇāpeyyā’’ti āhaṃsu. Upāsako, ‘‘tātā, nāhaṃ evaṃ karissāmī’’ti āha. Tañca kho tesu kāruññena, na attano jīvitanikantiyā. Atha tesu gahetabbo vissajjetabboti vivadantesu gahetabboti laddhikā eva bahutarā hutvā jīvitā voropayiṃsu.
因为冒犯了这位有大威德的圣弟子,他们的双眼就像灯焰熄灭一样消失了。他们哭喊着:“贤友们,眼睛在哪里?贤友们,眼睛在哪里?”其中一些人被亲戚带回了家。另一些没有亲戚、无依无靠的人,就留在那片森林里,住在树下或树叶搭的棚子里。来到森林的人出于怜悯,给他们米、饭团或生活用品。有人为了柴火、树叶等东西出去,回来后被问“你们去了哪里”,就回答说“我们去了盲林”。就这样,在两位佛的时代,那片森林都被称为盲林。不过在迦叶佛的时代,这里只是被遗弃的边地荒野。到了我们世尊的时代,它在舍卫城附近、祇园精舍后面,是好乐独处的善男子们居住的精勤堂。那时,具寿童子·咖沙巴正住在那里,修习有学之道。因此经中说“住在盲林”。巴利
Tesaṃ balavaguṇe ariyasāvake aparādhena nibbutadīpasikhā viya akkhīni antaradhāyiṃsu. Te, ‘‘kahaṃ bho cakkhu, kahaṃ bho cakkhū’’ti vippalapantā ekacce ñātakehi gehaṃ nītā. Ekacce noñātakā anāthāti tattheva aṭaviyaṃ rukkhamūle paṇṇasālāyaṃ vasiṃsu. Aṭaviṃ āgatamanussā kāruññena tesaṃ taṇḍulaṃ vā puṭabhattaṃ vā paribbayaṃ vā denti. Dārupaṇṇādīnaṃ atthāya gantvā āgatā manussā kuhiṃ gatatthāti vutte andhavanaṃ gatamhāti vadanti. Evaṃ dvinnampi buddhānaṃ kāle taṃ vanaṃ andhavanaṃtveva paññāyati. Kassapabuddhakāle panetaṃ chaḍḍitajanapade aṭavi ahosi. Amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle sāvatthiyā avidūre jetavanassa piṭṭhibhāge pavivekakāmānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ padhānagharaṃ ahosi, tattha āyasmā kumārakassapo tena samayena sekhapaṭipadaṃ pūrayamāno viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘andhavane viharatī’’ti.
有一位天神,意思是说,不知道名字和族姓的某一位天神。在《中部》那段经文“尊者,世尊是否记得,曾为某位有大威力的天神简要宣说灭尽渴爱的解脱”里,即便是众所周知的帝释天王,也被称为“某一位”。而“天神”这个词是通称,男天神和天女都能用。不过在这个语境里,指的是男天神。“深夜已过”这里,“已过”这个词在消逝、美妙、端严、随喜等意思中都能见到。比如在“尊者,夜已消逝,初夜分已过,比丘僧团坐了很久,世尊,请为比丘们诵巴帝摩卡吧”这类句子里,用的是“消逝”的意思。而在“此人在这四种人中,最为优胜、最为殊妙”这类句子里,用的则是“美妙”的意思。巴利
Aññatarā devatāti nāmagottavasena apākaṭā ekā devatāti attho. ‘‘Abhijānāti no, bhante, bhagavā ahuñātaññatarassa mahesakkhassa saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ bhāsitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.365) ettha pana abhiññāto sakkopi devarājā aññataroti vutto. Devatāti ca idaṃ devānampi devadhītānampi sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Imasmiṃ panatthe devo adhippeto. Abhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanādīsu dissati. Tattha – ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho, uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.20) khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’ti (a. ni. 4.100) evamādīsu sundare.
“ 是谁以神通与名声闪耀着,来礼敬我的双脚?
以极其美妙的肤色,照亮了一切方所。”(‘绝妙’指端严。)巴利
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. (vi. va. 857) –
在“绝妙啊,乔达摩贤者!”这类话里,“绝妙”表达的是随喜赞叹。但在这里,它表达的是“消逝”。所以“夜已绝妙地过去”意思就是夜晚已经消逝了。应当知道,这位天子是在中夜刚过的时候来的。“绝妙之色”这里,“绝妙”这个词取的是“端严”的意思。而“色”这个词,则出现在皮肤、称赞、种姓、原因、形态、尺寸、色处等各种语境中。比如在“世尊是金色之身”这类话里,指的是皮肤;在“居士,您这些对沙门乔达摩的称赞是何时积集的?”这类话里,指的是称赞;在“乔达摩贤者,有四种姓”这类话里,指的是种姓;在“凭什么缘故被称为香手?”这类话里,指的是原因;在“变化出大如象王的身形”这类话里,指的是形态;在“钵有三种尺寸”这类话里,指的是尺寸;在“色、香、味、食素”这类话里,指的是色处。在这里,应当取“皮肤”这个意思。因此,“绝妙之色”就是端严可爱、令人悦意的肤色。因为天神来到人间时,会舍弃原本的肤色和神通,现出粗显的身体,以更加殊胜的肤色和更加殊胜的神通,像人们去戏院等场所时那样,以变化出来的身体前来。这位天子也是这样来的。所以说“绝妙之色”。巴利
Evamādīsu abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. Idha pana khaye. Tena abhikkantāya rattiyāti parikkhīṇāya rattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthāyaṃ devaputto majjhimayāmasamanantare āgatoti veditabbo. Abhikkantavaṇṇāti idha abhikkantasaddo abhirūpe. Vaṇṇasaddo pana chavi-thuti-kulavaggakāraṇa-saṇṭhānapamāṇarūpāyatanādīsu dissati. Tattha, ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā’’ti evamādīsu chaviyā. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana te gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.77) evamādīsu thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 3.115) kulavagge. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhathenoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234) kāraṇe. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇe. ‘‘Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā’’ti evamādīsu rūpāyatane. So idha chaviyaṃ daṭṭhabbo. Tena abhikkantavaṇṇāti abhirūpachaviiṭṭhavaṇṇā, manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Devatā hi manussalokaṃ āgacchamānā pakativaṇṇaṃ pakatiiddhiṃ pajahitvā oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā atirekavaṇṇaṃ atirekaiddhiṃ māpetvā naṭasamajjādīni gacchantā manussā viya abhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgacchanti. Ayampi devaputto tatheva āgato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkantavaṇṇā’’ti.
在这里,“全然”这个词有多种含义:无余、多数、纯粹不杂、不过分、坚固、离系等等。比如在“完全圆满、清净的梵行”这类句子里,“全然”是无余的意思。在“鸯伽和摩揭陀的绝大多数人,带着大量硬食软食前来”这类句子里,是多数的意思。在“纯粹苦蕴的生起”这类句子里,是不杂的意思。在“这位具寿恐怕只是有信仰而已”这类句子里,是不过分的意思。在“与具寿阿那律同住的比丘巴希亚,全然为破僧而固执己见”这类句子里,是坚固的意思。在“被称为‘离系者、已住梵行者的最上士’”这类句子里,是离系的意思。但在这里,取的是无余的意思。巴利
Kevalakappanti ettha kevalasaddo anavasesa-yebhūyya-abyāmissānatirekadaḷhattha-visaṃyogādianekattho. Tathā hissa, ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya’’nti (pārā. 1) evamādīsu anavasesattamattho. ‘‘Kevalakappā ca aṅgamagadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī’’ti evamādīsu yebhuyyatā. ‘‘Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti (vibha. 225) evamādīsu abyāmissatā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā’’ti (mahāva. 244) evamādīsu anatirekatā. ‘‘Āyasmato anuruddhassa bāhiyo nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito’’ti (a. ni. 4.243) evamādīsu daḷhatthatā . ‘‘Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.57) evamādīsu visaṃyogo. Idha panassa anavasesattamatthoti adhippeto.
“劫”这个词有许多含义:深信、称呼、时间、施设、切断、调整、少许、遍满等。比如在“乔达摩尊者的这番话确实值得深信,正如对一位阿拉汉、正自觉者所应有的那样”(《中部》1.387)这类句子里,它是“深信”的意思。在“比丘们,我允许你们用五种沙门的称呼来吃果实”(《小品》250)这类句子里,它是“称呼”的意思。在“我以此恒常安住”这类句子里,它是“时间”的意思。在“这位具寿名叫‘劫’”(《相应部》3.124)这类句子里,它是“施设”的意思。在“装扮整齐、须发修剪妥当”(《相应部》4.365)这类句子里,它是“切断”的意思。在“两指宽的劫允许使用”(《小品》446)这类句子里,它是“调整”的意思。在“有躺下的机会”(《增支部》8.80)这类句子里,它是“少许”的意思。在“让整个竹林都遍满光明”(《相应部》1.94)这类句子里,它是“遍满”的意思。这里取的正是“遍满”这个含义。所以“整个暗林”应当理解为:四周无余,到处都是暗林。巴利
Kappasaddo panāyaṃ abhisaddahana-vohāra-kāla-paññatti- chedana-vikappa-lesa-samantabhāvādi-anekattho. Tathā hissa, ‘‘okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa, yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387) evamādīsu abhisaddahanamattho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 250) evamādīsu vohāro. ‘‘Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kālo. ‘‘Iccāyasmā kappo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.124) evamādīsu paññatti. ‘‘Alaṅkatā kappitakesamassū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.365) evamādīsu chedanaṃ. ‘‘Kappati dvaṅgulakappo’’ti (cūḷava. 446) evamādīsu vikappo. ‘‘Atthi kappo nipajjitu’’nti (a. ni. 8.80) evamādīsu leso. ‘‘Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.94) evamādīsu samantabhāvo. Idha panassa samantabhāvo attho adhippeto. Tasmā kevalakappaṃ andhavananti ettha anavasesaṃ samantato andhavananti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
“照亮”是指:以由衣饰和身体发出的光明遍照,像月亮和太阳一样,使其成为一片光明、一束光辉,这就是其含义。“站在一边”是指:站在一个角落、一个地方。“说了这话”是指:说了“比丘!比丘!”等话语。那么,这位天子为什么不先礼敬,而只用沙门的称呼来说话呢?因为他惯于以沙门想来看待对方。据说他心里这样想:“这个人过去住在欲界,而我从那时起就已经是梵行者了。”由于这种沙门想在他心中现起,所以他不先行礼,只用沙门的称呼来说话。据说这位天子是长老前世的朋友。从什么时候开始的呢?从迦叶正自觉佛时期开始。在从前结伴的五位朋友中,那位被称为在第四天证得不来果的较年轻者,就是这位天子。据说那时,他们当中的僧团长老在证得阿拉汉果的同时也获得了神通。他心想:“我该做的事已经完成。”于是飞上空中,到阿耨达池洗了脸,从郁单越取来团食,回来后说:“朋友们,请吃这团食,吃完后不要放逸,要修行沙门之法。”其他人说:“朋友,我们没有这样的约定——‘谁先证得殊胜果位并带来团食,大家就吃他带来的食物,然后其余人修行沙门之法。’你是靠自己的宿因才完成了该做的事。如果我们也有宿因,我们也会完成该做的事。这对我们来说是多余的,你走吧。”他便随宜而去,在寿命终结时般涅槃了。巴利
Obhāsetvāti vatthālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, candimā viya ca sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho. Ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsīti ekasmiṃ ante, ekasmiṃ okāse aṭṭhāsi. Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhū’’tiādivacanamavoca. Kasmā panāyaṃ avanditvā samaṇavohāreneva kathetīti? Samaṇasaññāsamudācāreneva. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ antarā kāmāvacare vasi. Ahaṃ pana asmi tato kālato paṭṭhāya brahmacārī’’ti samaṇasaññāvassa samudācarati, tasmā avanditvā samaṇavohāreneva katheti. Pubbasahāyo kireso devaputto therassa. Kuto paṭṭhāyāti? Kassapasammāsambuddhakālato paṭṭhāya. Yo hi pubbayoge āgatesu pañcasu sahāyesu anuthero catutthadivase anāgāmī ahosīti vutto, ayaṃ so. Tadā kira tesu saṅghattherassa arahatteneva saddhiṃ abhiññā āgamiṃsu. So, ‘‘mayhaṃ kiccaṃ matthakaṃ patta’’nti vehāsaṃ uppatitvā anotattadahe mukhaṃ dhovitvā uttarakuruto piṇḍapātaṃ ādāya āgantvā, ‘‘imaṃ, āvuso, piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā appamattā samaṇadhammaṃ karothā’’ti āha. Itare āhaṃsu – ‘‘na, āvuso, amhākaṃ evaṃ katikā atthi – ‘yo paṭhamaṃ visesaṃ nibbattetvā piṇḍapātaṃ āharati, tenābhataṃ bhuñjitvā sesehi samaṇadhammo kātabbo’ti. Tumhe attano upanissayena kiccaṃ matthakaṃ pāpayittha. Mayampi sace no upanissayo bhavissati, kiccaṃ matthakaṃ pāpessāma. Papañco esa amhākaṃ, gacchatha tumhe’’ti. So yathāphāsukaṃ gantvā āyupariyosāne parinibbāyi.
第二天,那位较年轻的同伴证得了不来果,神通也随之而来。他也同样取来团食,被其他人拒绝后,就随自己方便离开了,命终时投生到净居天。他住在净居天后,观察那些同伴,看见一个人当时就已般涅槃,一个人如今已在世尊身边证得圣位,还有一个人依于利养和恭敬,生起了“我是阿拉汉”的念头,住在素婆罗迦港。他看到这些后,就去找那个人,对他说:“你不是阿拉汉,也没有走上阿拉汉之道。去亲近世尊,听闻法吧。”就这样把他打发走了。那个人也在聚落中请求世尊的教诫,世尊简要地教导他说:“因此,巴希亚雅,你应当这样学:在看的时候,只是看……”(《自说经》10)他由此证得了圣者的境界。巴利
Punadivase anuthero anāgāmiphalaṃ sacchakāsi, tassa abhiññāyo āgamiṃsu. Sopi tatheva piṇḍapātaṃ āharitvā tehi paṭikkhitto yathāphāsukaṃ gantvā āyupariyosāne suddhāvāse nibbatti. So suddhāvāse ṭhatvā te sahāye olokento, eko tadāva parinibbuto, eko adhunā bhagavato santike ariyabhūmiṃ patto, eko lābhasakkāraṃ nissāya, ‘‘ahaṃ arahā’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā suppārakapaṭṭane vasatīti disvā taṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘na tvaṃ arahā, na arahattamaggaṃ paṭipanno, gaccha bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ suṇāhī’’ti uyyojesi. Sopi antaraghare bhagavantaṃ ovādaṃ yācitvā, ‘‘tasmā tiha te bāhiya evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ hotū’’ti (udā. 10) bhagavatā saṃkhittena ovadito ariyabhūmiṃ sampāpuṇi.
从那以后,还有另一位朋友。他四处寻找“他在哪里”,看见这位朋友正在盲林里修行有学之道,心里就想:“我要到朋友那里去。不过去的时候不能空着手,总该带点礼物才对。可我这位朋友不贪图物质供养,他住在山顶上,当初我站在空中送他团食,他都不肯吃,只是一心修沙门法。现在我要带物质上的礼物去,他怎么会接受呢?我还是带一份法的礼物去吧。”于是,他就像在梵天界里串宝珠一样,把十五个问题一一分析清楚,带着这份法的礼物过来,站在离朋友不远的地方。因为他自己还带着沙门的想和习惯,所以没有向朋友顶礼,直接喊道:“比丘!比丘!”接着说了“这蚁垤……”等话。这里要理解成:因为急切呼唤,所以把“比丘”重复了一次。另一种说法是:就像额头上只点一个吉祥点并不好看,如果在周围再点上其他点,就会像花团锦簇一样庄严;同样,单独一个词说话不好看,配上伴随的词句,话就像花团锦簇一样庄严,他就是为了让话像花团锦簇一样庄严,才这样说的。巴利
Tato añño eko atthi, so kuhinti olokento andhavane sekkhapaṭipadaṃ pūrayamāno viharatīti disvā cintesi – ‘‘sahāyakassa santike gamissāmīti, gacchantena pana tucchahatthena agantvā kiñci paṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati, sahāyo kho pana me nirāmiso pabbatamatthake vasanto mayā ākāse ṭhatvā dinnaṃ piṇḍapātampi aparibhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ akāsi, idāni āmisapaṇṇākāraṃ kiṃ gaṇhissati? Dhammapaṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti brahmaloke ṭhitova ratanāvaḷiṃ ganthento viya pannarasa pañhe vibhajitvā taṃ dhammapaṇṇākāraṃ ādāya āgantvā sahāyassa avidūre ṭhatvā attano samaṇasaññāsamudācāravasena taṃ anabhivādetvāva, ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhū’’ti ālapitvā ayaṃ vammikotiādimāha. Tattha turitālapanavasena bhikkhu bhikkhūti āmeḍitaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yathā vā ekaneva tilakena nalāṭaṃ na sobhati, taṃ parivāretvā aññesupi dinnesu phullitamaṇḍitaṃ viya sobhati, evaṃ ekeneva padena vacanaṃ na sobhati , parivārikapadena saddhiṃ phullitamaṇḍitaṃ viya sobhatīti taṃ parivārikapadavasena vacanaṃ phullitamaṇḍitaṃ viya karontopi evamāha.
所谓“这个蚁垤”,并不是说面前真的有个蚁垤,而是为了说法,像指着面前的东西那样说“这个”。“木栓”:他拿着刀挖掘时,看见了木栓。“举起木栓,不断挖掘,智者!”:亲爱的智者啊,所谓木栓,夜里冒烟,白天燃烧。你把它拔出来,再往深处挖。其余各句的意思也应当这样理解。“蛙”:就是青蛙。“双轮辋”:就是碱水过滤器。“龟”:就是乌龟。“屠刀与砧板”:就是切肉的刀和砍肉的砧板。“肉片”:就是一块约如磨石大小的鲜肉团。“龙”:他看见一条龙,颜色像苏摩那花束,有巨大的颈冠,饰以三种卍字纹。“别碰龙!”:用木杖尖、藤条尖驱赶,或者扬撒尘土时,别碰到龙。“向龙行礼!”:要从上风处退开,穿上干净的衣服,向龙行礼。龙所守护的财宝,纵经七世受用也不会耗尽,龙会把它守护的财宝给你,所以要向龙行礼。或者“从此听闻”的“此”:像《苦蕴经》等经中,“此”在教法里是有所依的意思,这里不是那样。这里“此”是依天子而言,所以“或从此”的意思就是“或者从我这里听闻”。这就是这里的含义。巴利
Ayaṃvammikoti purato ṭhito vammiko nāma natthi, desanāvasena pana purato ṭhitaṃ dassento viya ayanti āha. Laṅginti satthaṃ ādāya khaṇanto palighaṃ addasa. Ukkhipa laṅgiṃ abhikkhaṇa sumedhāti tāta, paṇḍita, laṅgī nāma rattiṃ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati. Ukkhipeta paraṃ parato khaṇāti. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho daṭṭhabbo. Uddhumāyikanti maṇḍūkaṃ. Caṅkavāranti khāraparissāvanaṃ. Kummanti kacchapaṃ. Asisūnanti maṃsacchedakaṃ asiñceva adhikuṭṭanañca. Maṃsapesinti nisadapotappamāṇaṃ allamaṃsapiṇḍaṃ. Nāganti sumanapupphakalāpasadisaṃ mahāphaṇaṃ tividhasovatthikaparikkhittaṃ ahināgaṃ addasa. Mā nāgaṃ ghaṭṭesīti daṇḍakakoṭiyā vā vallikoṭiyā vā paṃsucuṇṇaṃ vā pana khipamāno mā nāgaṃ ghaṭṭayi. Namo karohi nāgassāti uparivātato apagamma suddhavatthaṃ nivāsetvā nāgassa namakkāraṃ karohi. Nāgena adhisayitaṃ dhanaṃ nāma yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā khādato na khīyati, nāgo te adhisayitaṃ dhanaṃ dassati, tasmā namo karohi nāgassāti. Ito vā pana sutvāti yathā dukkhakkhandhe itoti sāsane nissakaṃ, na tathā idha. Idha pana devaputte nissakkaṃ, tasmā ito vā panāti mama vā pana santikā sutvāti ayamettha attho.
251 “四大所成的”就是指由四大构成的东西。这是身体的同义词。就像外面的蚁垤,依四种原因而被称为蚁垤,即“吐出者”“被吐出者”“吐物之堆”“被吐出的湿气所黏结”。那个蚁垤会吐出蛇、獴、鼠、壁虎等各种生物,所以是“吐出者”;它被白蚁吐出,所以是“被吐出者”;白蚁吐出后,又用口吻把尘土粉末堆起来,高到腰部或与人齐,所以是“吐物之堆”;因为被白蚁吐出的唾液湿气黏合,即使天降大雨七天七夜也不会散开,到了夏天,从那里抓一把土,用手一捏,湿气就会渗出来,像这样被吐出的湿气所黏结,所以是“被吐出的湿气所黏结”。同样,这个身体也因为从眼睛流出眼垢等等,排出种种不净污秽,所以也是“吐出者”。诸佛、独觉佛、漏尽者在这个生命体里,因为对生命的贪爱已经彻底耗尽,所以舍弃了这个身体而离去,因此从圣者的角度看,它也是“被吐出者”。这个身体由三百块骨头支撑,用筋腱连接,涂上肉,裹着湿皮,再以肤色装饰,欺骗众生,这一切从圣者来看都只是被吐出的东西,所以也是“吐物之堆”。正如经中说:“渴爱生出人,他的心到处奔走。”像这样,因为是被渴爱所生,又被圣者所吐出的渴爱湿气所黏结,所以也是“被吐出的湿气所黏结”。又像蚁垤内部有种种生物在那里出生、大小便、生病躺卧、死后倒在那里,因此那蚁垤就成了它们的产房、厕所、病房和坟墓。同样,刹帝利大户等也是如此,不应当认为“这是被守护保护的、装饰庄严的、有大威势者的身体”,而应当看到:依皮肤而生的生物、依皮而生的生物、依肉而生的生物、依筋而生的生物、依骨而生的生物、依骨髓而生的生物,像这样按种类算,有大约八万种虫类群生在这个身体内部,在那里出生、大小便、生病躺卧、死后倒在那里,所以这个身体也是这些生物的产房、厕所、病房和坟墓,因此被称为“蚁垤”。所以世尊说:“比丘,所谓蚁垤,就是这个四大所成身体的同义词。”巴利
251.Cātummahābhūtikassāti catumahābhūtamayassa. Kāyassetaṃ adhivacananti sarīrassa nāmaṃ. Yatheva hi bāhirako vammiko, vamatīti vantakoti vantussayoti vantasinehasambandhoti catūhi kāraṇehi vammikoti vuccati. So hi ahimaṅgusaundūragharagoḷikādayo nānappakāre pāṇake vamatīti vammiko. Upacikāhi vantakoti vammiko. Upacikāhi vamitvā mukhatuṇḍakena ukkhittapaṃsucuṇṇena kaṭippamāṇenapi porisappamāṇenapi ussitoti vammiko. Upacikāhi vantakheḷasinehena ābaddhatāya sattasattāhaṃ deve vassantepi na vippakiriyati, nidāghepi tato paṃsumuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā tasmiṃ muṭṭhinā pīḷiyamāne sineho nikkhamati, evaṃ vantasinehena sambaddhoti vammiko. Evamayaṃ kāyopi, ‘‘akkhimhā akkhigūthako’’tiādinā nayena nānappakārakaṃ asucikalimalaṃ vamatīti vammiko. Buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā imasmiṃ attabhāve nikantipariyādānena attabhāvaṃ chaḍḍetvā gatāti ariyehi vantakotipi vammiko. Yehi cāyaṃ tīhi aṭṭhisatehi ussito nhārusambaddho maṃsāvalepano allacammapariyonaddho chavirañjito satte vañceti, taṃ sabbaṃ ariyehi vantamevāti vantussayotipi vammiko. ‘‘Taṇhā janeti purisaṃ, cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.55) evaṃ taṇhāya janitattā ariyehi vanteneva taṇhāsinehena sambaddho ayanti vantasinehena sambaddhotipi vammiko. Yathā ca vammikassa anto nānappakārā pāṇakā tattheva jāyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti, gilānā sayanti, matā patanti. Iti so tesaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hoti. Evaṃ khattiyamahāsālādīnampi kāyo ayaṃ gopitarakkhito maṇḍitappasādhito mahānubhāvānaṃ kāyoti acintetvā chavinissitā pāṇā cammanissitā pāṇā maṃsanissitā pāṇā nhārunissitā pāṇā aṭṭhinissitā pāṇā aṭṭhimiñjanissitā pāṇāti evaṃ kulagaṇanāya asītimattāni kimikulasahassāni antokāyasmiṃyeva jāyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti, gelaññena āturitāni sayanti, matāni patanti, iti ayampi tesaṃ pāṇānaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hotīti ‘‘vammiko’’ tveva saṅkhaṃ gato. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘vammikoti kho, bhikkhu, imassa cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti.
由父母所生:由从母亲和父亲而来的父母精血所生。依靠米饭和粥糜增长:靠米饭和粥糜而积集、长大。在此,“无常、涂油、按摩、坏灭、离散之法”中,这个身体因为终将归于不存在,所以是无常之法。为了消除恶臭和不适而涂抹香膏,是涂油之法。为了消除身体各肢节的病痛而轻轻揉按,是按摩之法。或者在幼年时,让人躺在腿上,为了矫正因胎中姿势不正而变形的各个肢节,通过拉伸、按压等方式来按摩,也是按摩之法。即使这样保养,它仍然是会坏灭、会离散的法,也就是说,它会破裂、会散坏,这就是它的本性。其中,用“由父母所生”“依靠米饭和粥糜增长”“涂油”“按摩”这些词,说明了它的生起;用“无常”“坏灭”“离散”这些词,说明了它的灭尽。应当知道,通过这七个词,说明了四大所成的身体的起伏、增减,以及生起和灭尽。巴利
Mātāpettikasambhavassāti mātito ca pitito ca nibbattena mātāpettikena sukkasoṇitena sambhūtassa. Odanakummāsūpacayassāti odanena ceva kummāsena ca upacitassa vaḍḍhitassa. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammassāti ettha ayaṃ kāyo hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccadhammo. Duggandhavighātatthāya tanuvilepanena ucchādanadhammo. Aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāya khuddakasambāhanena parimaddanadhammo. Daharakāle vā ūrūsu sayāpetvā gabbhavāsena dussaṇṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgānaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ añchanapīḷanādivasena parimaddanadhammo. Evaṃ pariharatopi ca bhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammo bhijjati ceva vikirati ca, evaṃ sabhāvoti attho. Tattha mātāpettikasambhavaodanakummāsūpacayaucchādanaparimaddanapadehi samudayo kathito, aniccabhedaviddhaṃsanapadehi atthaṅgamo. Evaṃ sattahipi padehi cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa uccāvacabhāvo vaḍḍhiparihāni samudayatthaṅgamo kathitoti veditabbo.
白天的工作,就是指白天应该做的事。关于“冒烟”这个词,这里的“烟”字可以用在愤怒、渴爱、寻思、五种欲乐、说法以及普通的烟这些意思上。比如“愤怒是烟,妄语是灰烬”这句里,指的是愤怒。“众生被渴爱熏得冒烟”这句里,指的是渴爱。“那时候,有一位比丘在世尊不远处,坐着冒烟”这句里,指的是寻思。巴利
Divā kammanteti divā kattabbakammante. Dhūmāyanāti ettha ayaṃ dhūmasaddo kodhe taṇhāya vitakke pañcasu kāmaguṇesu dhammadesanāya pakatidhūmeti imesu atthesu vattati. ‘‘Kodho dhūmo bhasmanimosavajja’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.165) ettha hi kodhe vattati. ‘‘Icchādhūmāyitā sattā’’ti ettha taṇhāya. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu bhagavato avidūre dhūmāyanto nisinno hotī’’ti ettha vitakke.
“ 欲乐是泥沼,欲乐是淤泥,
这恐惧有三根本,也是我所宣说的。
尘与烟,是我所宣说的;
梵授,你放下这一切,出家去吧。”巴利
‘‘Paṅko ca kāmā palipo ca kāmā, Bhayañca metaṃ timūlaṃ pavuttaṃ; Rajo ca dhūmo ca mayā pakāsitā; Hitvā tuvaṃ pabbaja brahmadattā’’ti. (jā. 1.6.14) –
这里,在五种欲乐中。“是造烟者”(《中部》1.349)这一处,是在说法的语境里。“旌旗是车的标志,烟是火的标志”(《相应部》1.72)这一处,是指自然界的烟。但在这里,这个“烟”指的是寻(思惟)。所以说:“这个夜间冒烟。”巴利
Ettha pañcakāmaguṇesu. ‘‘Dhūmaṃ kattā hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.349) ettha dhammadesanāya. ‘‘Dhajo rathassa paññāṇaṃ, dhūmo paññāṇamaggino’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.72) ettha pakatidhūme. Idha panāyaṃ vitakke adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ rattiṃ dhūmāyanā’’ti.
这是如来的同义词。因为如来已经排除了七种法,所以称为婆罗门。正如经中所说:比丘,因为排除了七种法,所以称为婆罗门。是哪七种呢?贪已被排除,嗔……痴……慢……有身见……疑……戒禁取已被排除。比丘,因为这七种法已被排除,所以称为婆罗门。妙慧就是善妙的智慧。有学,这里“学”就是学习,所以称为有学。正如经中所说:比丘,因为他在学习,所以称为有学。他学习什么呢?他学习增上戒,学习增上心,学习增上慧。巴利
Tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacananti tathāgato hi sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bāhitattā brāhmaṇo nāma. Yathāha – ‘‘sattannaṃ kho, bhikkhu, dhammānaṃ bāhitattā brāhmaṇo. Katamesaṃ sattannaṃ? Rāgo bāhito hoti, doso… moho… māno… sakkāyadiṭṭhi… vicikicchā… sīlabbataparāmāso bāhito hoti. Imesaṃ bhikkhu sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bāhitattā brāhmaṇo’’ti (cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 28). Sumedhoti sundarapañño. Sekkhassāti ettha sikkhatīti sekkho. Yathāha – ‘‘sikkhatīti kho, bhikkhu, tasmā sekkhoti vuccati. Kiñca sikkhati? Adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.86).
“慧”这个说法,是世间慧和出世间慧的同义词,不是指武器刀械。“精进策励”,是指身体上的精进和心理上的精进。这种精进是以慧为导向的:依靠世间慧,它就属于世间;依靠出世间慧,它就属于出世间。下面就是对这里含义的说明:巴利
Paññāyaadhivacananti lokiyalokuttarāya paññāya etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, na āvudhasatthassa. Vīriyārambhassāti kāyikacetasikavīriyassa. Taṃ paññāgatikameva hoti. Lokiyāya paññāya lokiyaṃ, lokuttarāya paññāya lokuttaraṃ. Ettha panāyaṃ atthadīpanā –
据说,有一个乡村婆罗门,清早带着几个年轻弟子从村里出去,白天在树林里教诵咒语,傍晚回到村子。半路上有一座蚁冢,夜里冒烟,白天则燃烧。婆罗门对弟子妙慧青年说:“孩子,这座蚁冢夜里冒烟,白天燃烧,我们来观察它的变化,把它打破,分成四份扔掉。”他答应“好”,就拿起锄头,双脚稳稳地站在地上,照做了。在这里,老师婆罗门好比世尊,妙慧青年好比有学比丘,蚁冢好比身体。婆罗门说“孩子,这座蚁冢夜里冒烟,白天燃烧,我们来观察它的变化,把它打破,分成四份扔掉”的时候,就好比世尊说“比丘,要把这四大所成的身体分成四份来把握”的时候。他答应“好”,拿起锄头照做,就好比有学比丘以四界差别的方式把握身体,即:“在二十个部分中的坚硬性,这是地界;在十二个部分中的粘结性,这是水界;在四个部分中的成熟性,这是火界;在六个部分中的支撑性,这是风界。”应当这样了知。巴利
Eko kira jānapado brāhmaṇo pātova māṇavakehi saddhiṃ gāmato nikkhamma divasaṃ araññe mante vācetvā sāyaṃ gāmaṃ āgacchati. Antarāmagge ca eko vammiko atthi. So rattiṃ dhūmāyati, divā pajjalati. Brāhmaṇo antevāsiṃ sumedhaṃ māṇavaṃ āha – ‘‘tāta, ayaṃ vammiko rattiṃ dhūmāyati, divā pajjalati, vikāramassa passissāma, bhinditvā naṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse katvā khipāhī’’ti. So sādhūti kudālaṃ gahetvā samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya tathā akāsi. Tatra ācariyabrāhmaṇo viya bhagavā. Sumedhamāṇavako viya sekkho bhikkhu. Vammiko viya kāyo. ‘‘Tāta, ayaṃ vammiko rattiṃ dhūmāyati, divā pajjalati, vikāramassa passissāma, bhinditvā naṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse katvā khipāhī’’ti brāhmaṇena vuttakālo viya, ‘‘bhikkhu cātumahābhūtikaṃ kāyaṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse katvā pariggaṇhāhī’’ti bhagavatā vuttakālo. Tassa sādhūti kudālaṃ gahetvā tathākaraṇaṃ viya sekkhassa bhikkhuno, ‘‘yo vīsatiyā koṭṭhāsesu thaddhabhāvo, ayaṃ pathavīdhātu. Yo dvādasasu koṭṭhāsesu ābandhanabhāvo, ayaṃ āpodhātu. Yo catūsu koṭṭhāsesu paripācanabhāvo, ayaṃ tejodhātu. Yo chasu koṭṭhāsesu vitthambhanabhāvo, ayaṃ vāyodhātū’’ti evaṃ catudhātuvavatthānavasena kāyapariggaho veditabbo.
“门闩”,比丘们,为什么世尊把无明说成门闩来开示呢?就像关上城门、插上门闩之后,大众就没办法通行了,本来在城里的人就留在城里,本来在城外的人就留在城外。同样,当无明这个门闩落在智门上的时候,他通往涅槃的智之通行就被截断了。所以世尊把无明说成门闩来开示。“舍弃无明”,这里说的是通过受持业处和反复请问的方式来舍断无明。巴利
Laṅgīti kho, bhikkhūti kasmā bhagavā avijjaṃ laṅgīti katvā dassesīti? Yathā hi nagarassa dvāraṃ pidhāya palighe yojite mahājanassa gamanaṃ pacchijjati, ye nagarassa anto, te antoyeva honti. Ye bahi, te bahiyeva. Evameva yassa ñāṇamukhe avijjālaṅgī patati, tassa nibbānasampāpakaṃ ñāṇagamanaṃ pacchijjati, tasmā avijjaṃ laṅgīti katvā dassesi. Pajaha avijjanti ettha kammaṭṭhānauggahaparipucchāvasena avijjāpahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
“气胀蛙”,比丘们,这里说的气胀蛙并不是大青蛙,只有指甲盖那么大,住在旧树叶之间、灌木丛之间或藤蔓之间。它被棍子尖端、藤条尖端或尘土粉末碰触后,就会吸气鼓胀,变得又大又圆,像木苹果那么大,四只脚悬在空中,再也走不动,落入敌人手中,成为乌鸦、鹰等的食物。同样,这瞋怒刚生起时,只是内心的一点混乱。那时如果不加以制止,它就会增长,让人面部扭曲。那时再不制止,就会让人下巴抽动。那时再不制止,就会让人说出粗恶的话。那时再不制止,就会让人四处张望。那时再不制止,就会让人拉扯拖拽。那时再不制止,就会让人用手抓起土块、棍棒和刀剑。那时再不制止,就会让人用棍棒和刀剑砍击。那时再不制止,就会导致杀害他人,也杀害自己。正如这样说:“当这瞋怒杀害他人又杀害自己时,这瞋怒就已经极其强盛,达到了顶点。”在这里,就像气胀蛙四脚悬空时走不了路,落入敌人手中,成为乌鸦等的食物;同样,具有瞋怒的人无法执取业处并使其增长,落入敌人手中,成为一切魔随心所欲摆布的对象。因此世尊说:“气胀蛙,比丘,这是瞋怒与绝望的同义词。”其中,力量强大的瞋怒就是瞋怒与绝望。“舍弃瞋怒与绝望”,这里说的是通过反复审察来舍断。巴利
Uddhumāyikātikho, bhikkhūti ettha uddhumāyikamaṇḍūko nāma no mahanto, nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇo hoti, purāṇapaṇṇantare vā gacchantare vā valliantare vā vasati. So daṇḍakoṭiyā vā vallikoṭiyā vā paṃsucuṇṇakena vā ghaṭṭito āyamitvā mahanto parimaṇḍalo beluvapakkappamāṇo hutvā cattāro pāde ākāsagate katvā pacchinnagamano hutvā amittavasaṃ yāti, kākakulalādibhattameva hoti. Evameva ayaṃ kodho paṭhamaṃ uppajjanto cittāvilamattakova hoti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe aniggahito vaḍḍhitvā mukhavikulanaṃ pāpeti. Tadā aniggahito hanusañcopanaṃ pāpeti. Tadā aniggahito pharusavācānicchāraṇaṃ pāpeti. Tadā aniggahito disāvilokanaṃ pāpeti. Tadā aniggahito ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanaṃ pāpeti. Tadā aniggahito pāṇinā leḍḍudaṇḍasatthaparāmasanaṃ pāpeti. Tadā aniggahito daṇḍasatthābhinipātaṃ pāpeti . Tadā aniggahito paraghātanampi attaghātanampi pāpeti. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘yato ayaṃ kodho paraṃ ghātetvā attānaṃ ghāteti, ettāvatāyaṃ kodho paramussadagato hoti paramavepullappatto’’ti. Tattha yathā uddhumāyikāya catūsu pādesu ākāsagatesu gamanaṃ pacchijjati, uddhumāyikā amittavasaṃ gantvā kākādibhattaṃ hoti, evameva kodhasamaṅgīpuggalo kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti, amittavasaṃ yāti, sabbesaṃ mārānaṃ yathākāmakaraṇīyo hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘uddhumāyikāti kho, bhikkhu, kodhūpāyāsassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Tattha balavappatto kodhova kodhūpāyāso. Pajaha kodhūpāyāsanti ettha paṭisaṅkhānappahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
“二路”在这里的意思是:就像一个人带着钱财、拥有财物,走在旷野沙漠的长途上,来到一个岔路口,没法决定“我该走这条路,还是该走那条路”,就停在那里不动。这时盗贼冲出来,让他遭受伤害和不幸。同样,一个比丘取得根本业处之后坐下来修行,如果对佛等生起疑惑,就没法让业处增长。这时烦恼魔等一切魔就让他遭受伤害和不幸。所以疑就像岔路一样。因此世尊说:“二路,比丘,这是疑的同义词。”这里说“舍弃疑”,是指通过持取业处和反复参问来舍断疑惑。巴利
Dvidhāpathoti ettha, yathā puriso sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggappaṭipanno dvedhāpathaṃ patvā, ‘‘iminā nu kho gantabbaṃ, iminā gantabba’’nti nicchetuṃ asakkonto tattheva tiṭṭhati, atha naṃ corā uṭṭhahitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpenti, evameva kho mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinno bhikkhu buddhādīsu kaṅkhāya uppannāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti, atha naṃ kilesamārādayo sabbe mārā anayabyasanaṃ pāpenti, iti vicikicchā dvedhāpathasamā hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘dvidhāpathoti kho, bhikkhu, vicikicchāyetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Pajaha vicikicchanti ettha kammaṭṭhānauggahaparipucchāvasena vicikicchāpahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
“滤水器”在这里的意思是:就像染工把水倒进碱水过滤器时,一罐水、两罐水、十罐水、二十罐水,甚至一百罐水,都会直接漏掉,连一点水都留不住;同样,一个被五盖缠住的人,内心里的善法也留不住。所以世尊说:“比丘,‘滤水器’就是五盖的别名。”这里说的“舍弃五盖”,是指通过镇伏和部分断除来舍断诸盖。巴利
Caṅgavāranti ettha, yathā rajakehi khāraparissāvanamhi udake pakkhitte eko udakaghaṭo dvepi dasapi vīsatipi ghaṭasatampi paggharatiyeva, pasaṭamattampi udakaṃ na tiṭṭhati, evameva nīvaraṇasamaṅgino puggalassa abbhantare kusaladhammo na tiṭṭhati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘caṅgavāranti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Pajaha pañcanīvaraṇeti ettha vikkhambhanatadaṅgavasena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
这里,“龟”是指:就像乌龟有四只脚加一个头,一共只有五个部分;同样,一切有为法在被执取时,也就成为五种蕴。所以世尊说:“比丘,‘龟’就是五取蕴的异名。”“应舍断五取蕴”这句话,说的是对五蕴舍断欲贪。巴利
Kummoti ettha, yathā kacchapassa cattāro pādā sīsanti pañceva aṅgāni honti, evameva sabbepi saṅkhatā dhammā gayhamānā pañceva khandhā bhavanti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘kummoti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Pajaha pañcupādānakkhandheti ettha pañcasu khandhesu chandarāgappahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
“刀砧”在这里的意思是:就像把肉放在砧板上,用刀去剁切一样,这些众生为了所贪着的感官对象,被烦恼欲所砍杀;他们被置于那些感官对象之上,被烦恼欲切割、剁碎。因此世尊说:“比丘,‘刀砧’就是五种欲乐的异名。”“舍断五种欲乐”这句话,说的是对五种欲乐舍断欲贪。巴利
Asisūnāti ettha, yathā sūnāya upari maṃsaṃ ṭhapetvā asinā koṭṭenti, evamime sattā vatthukāmatthāya kilesakāmehi ghātayamānā vatthukāmānaṃ upari katvā kilesakāmehi kantitā koṭṭitā ca honti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘asisūnāti kho, bhikkhu, pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Pajaha pañca kāmaguṇeti ettha pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgappahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
“肉片”这个说法,比丘们,在这里,“肉片”是许多人都想要的东西:刹帝利等人类想要它,乌鸦等畜生也想要它。因为这些众生被无明蒙蔽,生起喜贪,使轮回不断增长。又像肉片无论放在哪里都会粘在那里一样,这些众生被喜贪绑住,就粘在轮回上,即使遇到痛苦也不厌离。所以喜贪就像肉片。因此世尊说:“比丘,‘肉片’就是喜贪的异名。”应舍断喜贪,这里说的是通过第四道来舍断喜贪。巴利
Maṃsapesīti kho, bhikkhūti ettha ayaṃ maṃsapesi nāma bahujanapatthitā khattiyādayo manussāpi naṃ patthenti kākādayo tiracchānāpi. Ime hi sattā avijjāya sammattā nandirāgaṃ upagamma vaṭṭaṃ vaḍḍhenti. Yathā vā maṃsapesi ṭhapitaṭhapitaṭṭhāne laggati, evamime sattā nandirāgabaddhā vaṭṭe lagganti, dukkhaṃ patvāpi na ukkaṇṭhanti , iti nandirāgo maṃsapesisadiso hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘maṃsapesīti kho, bhikkhu, nandirāgassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Pajaha nandīrāganti ettha catutthamaggena nandīrāgappahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
比丘,所谓“龙象”,是漏已尽比丘的称呼。在这里,漏已尽者被称为“龙象”的含义,在《无垢经》里已经讲明了。“你应礼敬龙象”,意思是:你应当这样礼敬那位漏已尽者的佛陀龙象——“那位世尊是觉者,为觉悟而说法;是调御者,为调御而说法;是寂静者,为寂静而说法;是已度脱者,为度脱而说法;是已般涅槃者,为般涅槃而说法”,应当这样礼敬。这就是这里的含义。这样一来,这部经就成了这位长老的禅修业处。长老也以这部经作为禅修业处,增长观智,证得了阿拉汉果。“这就是它的含义”,就是对这个问题的解答。于是,世尊就像从宝堆中取出宝珠的尖顶一样,顺着法义的脉络完成了这次说法。巴利
Nāgoti kho, bhikkhu, khīṇāsavassetaṃ bhikkhuno adhivacananti ettha yenatthena khīṇāsavo nāgoti vuccati, so anaṅgaṇasutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.63) pakāsito eva. Namo karohi nāgassāti khīṇāsavassa buddhanāgassa, ‘‘buddho so bhagavā bodhāya dhammaṃ deseti, danto so bhagavā damathāya dhammaṃ deseti, santo so bhagavā samathāya dhammaṃ deseti, tiṇṇo so bhagavā taraṇāya dhammaṃ deseti, parinibbuto so bhagavā parinibbānāya dhammaṃ desetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.361) evaṃ namakkāraṃ karohīti ayamettha attho. Iti idaṃ suttaṃ therassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ ahosi. Theropi idameva suttaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ patto. Ayametassa atthoti ayaṃ etassa pañhassa attho. Iti bhagavā ratanarāsimhi maṇikūṭaṃ gaṇhanto viya yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
4. 《车接替经》的注释巴利
4. Rathavinītasuttavaṇṇanā
252 “如是我闻”这一句,是《车接替经》的开头。其中“在王舍城”的意思是:在那座名叫王舍城的城市里。这座城因为曾被顶生王、大典尊王等人占据统治,所以叫做王舍城。这里也有人用别的说法来解释,但那些都不重要,这只是那座城市的名字而已。而且这座城市只在佛陀出世和转轮王出世的时候才是一座城市,其他时候都是空无人住的,被夜叉占据,成了他们居住的林地。“在竹林栗鼠饲养处”:“竹林”是那座园林的名字。据说那座园林四周被竹子环绕,还有十八肘高的围墙,配有城门和塔楼,泛着青蓝色的光,令人心生欢喜,因此叫做竹林。又因为人们在那里给栗鼠设了喂食的地方,所以又叫栗鼠饲养处。巴利
252.Evaṃme sutanti rathavinītasuttaṃ. Tattha rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare, tañhi mandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā rājagahanti vuccati. Aññepettha pakāre vaṇṇayanti. Kiṃ tehi? Nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ hoti yakkhapariggahitaṃ, tesaṃ vasantavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Veḷuvane kalandakanivāpeti veḷuvananti tassa uyyānassa nāmaṃ, taṃ kira veḷūhi parikkhittaṃ ahosi aṭṭhārasahatthena ca pākārena, gopuraṭṭālakayuttaṃ nīlobhāsaṃ manoramaṃ, tena veḷuvananti vuccati. Kalandakānañcettha nivāpaṃ adaṃsu, tena kalandakanivāpoti vuccati.
据说从前有一位国王,为了到那座园林里游玩而来,被酒醉得神志不清,白天就躺下睡着了。他的随从们心想“国王睡着了”,于是被花果等吸引,四散走开了。这时,因为酒气飘散,一条黑蛇从一棵有空洞的树上爬出来,朝国王的方向爬去。一位树神看见了,心想“我要救国王的命”,就化作一只黑松鼠,来到国王耳边弄出响声。国王醒了,黑蛇便退了回去。国王看到黑蛇退走,知道“是这只黑松鼠救了我的命”,于是就在那里为黑松鼠设了固定的投食处,并发布了不伤害它们的无畏通告。因此,那个地方从那时起就被叫做“黑松鼠饲养处”。Kalandakā就是黑松鼠的名字。巴利
Pubbe kira aññataro rājā tattha uyyānakīḷanatthaṃ āgato surāmadena matto divāseyyaṃ upagato supi. Parijanopissa, ‘‘sutto rājā’’ti pupphaphalādīhi palobhiyamāno ito cito ca pakkāmi, atha surāgandhena aññatarasmā susirarukkhā kaṇhasappo nikkhamitvā raññābhimukho āgacchati. Taṃ disvā rukkhadevatā, ‘‘rañño jīvitaṃ dammī’’ti kāḷakavesena āgantvā kaṇṇamūle saddamakāsi. Rājā paṭibujjhi, kaṇhasappo nivatto. So taṃ disvā, ‘‘imāya mama jīvitaṃ dinna’’nti kāḷakānaṃ tattha nivāpaṃ paṭṭhapesi, abhayaghosanañca ghosāpesi. Tasmā taṃ tato pabhuti kalandakanivāpanti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ. Kalandakāti kāḷakānaṃ nāmaṃ.
“出生地的人”是指住在出生地的人。这里,“出生地”就是出生的地方。不过,这个出生之处,并不是憍萨罗大国王等人的出生处,也不是参吉婆罗门等人的出生处,不是帝释天神、夜摩天、兜率天等天人的出生处,不是八十位大弟子等人的出生处,也不是其他众生的出生处,这些都不能叫“出生地”。然而,有一位众生,在他出生的那天,一万个世界像挂起同一面旗帜,花环散落,花粉和香粉的香气弥漫,如同完全盛开的欢喜园一样光辉灿烂,又像荷叶上的水珠一样颤动;而且,天生盲人等人能看见色法等许多神通变化都发生了。这位一切知菩萨的出生地,就是释迦族人居住的迦毗罗卫城,这才叫作“出生地”。巴利
Jātibhūmikāti jātibhūmivāsino. Tattha jātibhūmīti jātaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ kho panetaṃ neva kosalamahārājādīnaṃ na caṅkībrāhamaṇādīnaṃ na sakkasuyāmasantusitādīnaṃ na asītimahāsāvakādīnaṃ na aññesaṃ sattānaṃ jātaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘jātibhūmī’’ti vuccati. Yassa pana jātadivase dasasahassilokadhātu ekaddhajamālāvippakiṇṇakusumavāsacuṇṇagandhasugandhā sabbapāliphullamiva nandanavanaṃ virocamānā paduminipaṇṇe udakabindu viya akampittha, jaccandhādīnañca rūpadassanādīni anekāni pāṭihāriyāni pavattiṃsu, tassa sabbaññubodhisattassa jātaṭṭhānasākiyajanapado kapilavatthāhāro, sā ‘‘jātibhūmī’’ti vuccati.
对尊重法这一点的注释巴利
Dhammagarubhāvavaṇṇanā
“雨安居结束”,指的是经过了三个月的雨安居、举行过自恣之后。世尊这样说,是指世尊先用“比丘们,还过得去吧”等话接待了这些来访的客人,然后才说了“比丘们,是哪一位呢”等话。据说,那些比丘受到这样的接待问候时——“比丘们,还过得去吧?还能撑得下去吧?你们一路上没受太多劳累吧?没有因为托钵而疲惫吧?比丘们,你们是从哪里来的?”——他们回答说:“世尊,我们从释迦族的迦毗罗卫,从您的出生地来。”那时,世尊没有问苏托达那大王的健康,也没有问释俱王、善悟王、兜头王、甘露王的健康,没有问无敌妃、大爱道的健康,没有问整个释迦族的健康,而是自己向一位获得了十种论事、又能引导他人安住其中、修行具足的比丘询问,说了“比丘们,是哪一位呢”等话。巴利
Vassaṃvuṭṭhāti temāsaṃ vassaṃvuṭṭhā pavāritapavāraṇā hutvā. Bhagavā etadavocāti ‘‘kacci, bhikkhave, khamanīya’’ntiādīhi vacanehi āgantukapaṭisanthāraṃ katvā etaṃ, ‘‘ko nu kho, bhikkhave’’tiādivacanamavoca. Te kira bhikkhu, – ‘‘kacci, bhikkhave, khamanīyaṃ kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kaccittha appakilamathena addhānaṃ āgatā, na ca piṇḍakena kilamittha, kuto ca tumhe, bhikkhave, āgacchathā’’ti paṭisanthāravasena pucchitā – ‘‘bhagavā sākiyajanapade kapilavatthāhārato jātibhūmito āgacchāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Atha bhagavā neva suddhodanamahārājassa, na sakkodanassa, na sukkodanassa, na dhotodanassa, na amitodanassa, na amittāya deviyā, na mahāpajāpatiyā, na sakalassa sākiyamaṇḍalassa ārogyaṃ pucchi. Atha kho attanā ca dasakathāvatthulābhiṃ parañca tattha samādapetāraṃ paṭipattisampannaṃ bhikkhuṃ pucchanto idaṃ – ‘‘ko nu kho, bhikkhave’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
为什么世尊不问净饭王等人的健康,却偏偏问这样一位比丘呢?因为喜爱。对诸佛来说,修行有成的比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女都是可爱、可意的。这是什么原因呢?因为尊重法。如来都是尊重法的人,他们尊重法的情形,可以从“无敬、无顺从地生活确实是苦”这句在阿惹巴拉榕树下生起的意乐来理解。正是因为尊重法,世尊在大迦叶尊者出家那天前去迎接,走了三牛呼的路。又曾走了一百多由旬的路,在恒河岸边说法,使玛哈咖毕那及其徒众安立于阿拉汉果。有一次午后,走了四十五由旬的路,在陶匠的住处整夜说法,使善男子布咕萨提安立于不来果。走了一百二十由旬,去帮助林住沙弥。走了六十由旬的路,对佉提罗林住长老说法。他知道阿那律尊者正坐在东竹林园里思惟大人之思惟,就从空中前往,降在长老面前,表达赞叹。对瞿帝康纳索纳长老,他在一间香房里让人敷设好床座,在黎明时分请他宣说法义,并在梵呗结束时给予赞叹。走了三牛呼的路,在三位善男子所住的牛角娑罗林中,开示了和合的功德。迦叶世尊也生起这样的信赖:“这位圣弟子已安立于不来果”,于是前往陶匠伽帝迦罗的住处,亲手拿起食物而受用。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā suddhodanādīnaṃ ārogyaṃ apucchitvā evarūpaṃ bhikkhumeva pucchati? Piyatāya. Buddhānañhi paṭipannakā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo ca piyā honti manāpā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Dhammagarutāya. Dhammagaruno hi tathāgatā, so ca nesaṃ dhammagarubhāvo, ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati, appatisso’’ti (a. ni. 4.21) iminā ajapālanigrodhamūle uppannajjhāsayena veditabbo. Dhammagarutāyeva hi bhagavā mahākassapattherassa abhinikkhamanadivase paccuggamanaṃ karonto tigāvutaṃ maggaṃ agamāsi. Atirekatiyojanasataṃ maggaṃ gantvā gaṅgātīre dhammaṃ desetvā mahākappinaṃ saparisaṃ arahatte patiṭṭhapesi. Ekasmiṃ pacchābhatte pañcacattālīsayojanaṃ maggaṃ gantvā kumbhakārassa nivesane tiyāmarattiṃ dhammakathaṃ katvā pukkusātikulaputtaṃ anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhapesi. Vīsayojanasataṃ gantvā vanavāsisāmaṇerassa anuggahaṃ akāsi. Saṭṭhiyojanamaggaṃ gantvā khadiravaniyattherassa dhammaṃ desesi. Anuruddhatthero pācīnavaṃsadāye nisinno mahāpurisavitakkaṃ vitakketīti ñatvā tattha ākāsena gantvā therassa purato oruyha sādhukāramadāsi. Koṭikaṇṇasoṇattherassa ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ senāsanaṃ paññapāpetvā paccūsakāle dhammadesanaṃ ajjhesitvā sarabhaññapariyosāne sādhukāramadāsi. Tigāvutaṃ maggaṃ gantvā tiṇṇaṃ kulaputtānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne gosiṅgasālavane sāmaggirasānisaṃsaṃ kathesi. Kassapopi bhagavā – ‘‘anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhito ariyasāvako aya’’nti vissāsaṃ uppādetvā ghaṭikārassa kumbhakārassa nivesanaṃ gantvā sahatthā āmisaṃ gahetvā paribhuñji.
世尊在临近雨安居的时候,由比丘僧团围绕着,从祇园出发去游行。憍萨罗大王、给孤独长者等人怎么劝也没能让他回来。给孤独长者回到家里,满心忧愁地坐着。这时,一个名叫富那的女奴对他说:“主人,您是不是在发愁?”他说:“是啊,我没能劝世尊回来,心里就想:这三个月我既听不到法,也不能随自己的心意去布施了。”她说:“主人,我也去劝世尊回来。”长者说:“你要是能劝他回来,我就让你自由。”她就走到十力者的脚前伏下身来,说:“世尊,请您回来吧。”世尊说:“富那,你自己都是靠别人过活的,能为我做什么呢?”她说:“世尊,您也知道我没有什么能布施的东西。但就因为您回来这件事,我就能安住在三皈依和五戒里。”世尊说:“萨度,萨度,富那!”赞叹之后,就转身回到了祇园。这件事传开了。长者听说世尊是因为富那才回来的,就让她成为自由人,把她当作女儿一样安置。她请求出家,出了家,出家后就开始修观。那时,大师知道她已经进入修观的状态,就说出这首光明偈:巴利
Amhākaṃyeva bhagavā upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya jetavanato bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto cārikaṃ nikkhami. Kosalamahārājaanāthapiṇḍikādayo nivattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Anāthapiṇḍiko gharaṃ āgantvā domanassappatto nisīdi. Atha naṃ puṇṇā nāma dāsī domanassappattosi sāmīti āha. ‘‘Āma je, satthāraṃ nivattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃ, atha me imaṃ temāsaṃ dhammaṃ vā sotuṃ, yathādhippāyaṃ vā dānaṃ dātuṃ na labhissāmī’’ti cintā uppannāti. Ahampi sāmi satthāraṃ nivattessāmīti. Sace nivattetuṃ sakkosi, bhujissāyeva tvanti. Sā gantvā dasabalassa pādamūle nipajjitvā ‘‘nivattatha bhagavā’’ti āha. Puṇṇe tvaṃ parapaṭibaddhajīvikā kiṃ me karissasīti. Bhagavā mayhaṃ deyyadhammo natthīti tumhepi jānātha, tumhākaṃ nivattanapaccayā panāhaṃ tīsu saraṇesu pañcasu sīlesu patiṭṭhahissāmīti. Bhagavā sādhu sādhu puṇṇeti sādhukāraṃ katvā nivattetvā jetavanameva paviṭṭho. Ayaṃ kathā pākaṭā ahosi. Seṭṭhi sutvā puṇṇāya kira bhagavā nivattitoti taṃ bhujissaṃ katvā dhītuṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. Sā pabbajjaṃ yācitvā pabbaji, pabbajitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhi. Athassā satthā āraddhavipassakabhāvaṃ ñatvā imaṃ obhāsagāthaṃ vissajjesi –
“ 布纳,当圆满正法,如十五夜之满月;
以圆满智慧,汝将尽诸苦际。”巴利
‘‘Puṇṇe pūresi saddhammaṃ, cando pannaraso yathā; Paripuṇṇāya paññāya, dukkhassantaṃ karissasī’’ti. (therīgā. 3);
偈颂结束时,她证得了阿拉汉果,成为一位著名的女弟子。如来就是这样敬重法。巴利
Gāthāpariyosāne arahattaṃ patvā abhiññātā sāvikā ahosīti. Evaṃ dhammagaruno tathāgatā.
难陀长老在集会堂说法时,世尊连澡都没洗就直接过去,整夜站着听完法。说法结束时,世尊由衷地赞叹随喜。长老走过来顶礼,问道:“尊者,您是什么时候来的?”世尊回答:“就在你刚开始讲经的时候。”长老说:“尊者,您做了极难做到的事,佛陀您实在太娇贵柔嫩了。”世尊说:“难陀,就算你能讲上一劫的法,我也会站着听上一劫。”诸佛如来就是这样敬重法。正因为他们敬重法,依法修行的人就变得可亲可敬,所以世尊才会询问修行者。所谓修行者,有四种:为自利修行但不为他利修行;为他利修行但不为自利修行;既不为自利也不为他利修行;既为自利也为他利修行。巴利
Nandakatthere upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ dhammaṃ desentepi bhagavā anahātova gantvā tiyāmarattiṃ ṭhitakova dhammakathaṃ sutvā desanāpariyosāne sādhukāramadāsi. Thero āgantvā vanditvā, ‘‘kāya velāya, bhante, āgatatthā’’ti pucchi. Tayā suttante āraddhamatteti. Dukkaraṃ karittha, bhante, buddhasukhumālā tumheti. Sace tvaṃ, nanda, kappaṃ desetuṃ sakkuṇeyyāsi, kappamattampāhaṃ ṭhitakova suṇeyyanti bhagavā avoca. Evaṃ dhammagaruno tathāgatā. Tesaṃ dhammagarutāya paṭipannakā piyā honti, tasmā paṭipannake pucchi. Paṭipannako ca nāma attahitāya paṭipanno no parahitāya, parahitāya paṭipanno no attahitāya, no attahitāya ca paṭipanno no parahitāya ca, attahitāya ca paṭipanno parahitāya cāti catubbidho hoti.
在这里,如果有人自己得到了十种论事,却不因此去教诫、教导别人,就像具寿巴咕拉那样。这种人叫作只为自己的利益修行,不为别人的利益修行。对这样的比丘,世尊不会问他。为什么?因为他没有站在让我教法增长的那一边。巴利
Tattha yo sayaṃ dasannaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ lābhī hoti, paraṃ tattha na ovadati na anusāsati āyasmā bākulo viya. Ayaṃ attahitāya paṭipanno nāma no parahitāya paṭipanno, evarūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ bhagavā na pucchati. Kasmā? Na mayhaṃ sāsanassa vaḍḍhipakkhe ṭhitoti.
如果有人自己没得到十种论事,却拿这些去教诫别人,目的只是为了接受对方为自己所做的执事,就像释迦族的伍巴南达那样,这种人就叫作“为他人利益而行,不为自己的利益而行”。对这样的人,世尊也不问他。为什么呢?因为他的渴爱就像大篮子一样,还没有断除。巴利
Yo pana dasannaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ alābhī, paraṃ tehi ovadati tena katavattasādiyanatthaṃ upanando sakyaputto viya, ayaṃ parahitāya paṭipanno nāma no attahitāya, evarūpampi na pucchati. Kasmā? Assa taṇhā mahāpacchi viya appahīnāti.
如果有人自己没得到十种论事,也不用它来教导别人,就像喇伦达义那样,这种人就是既没有为自利修行,也没有为他利修行,对这样的人,世尊同样不会问他。为什么?因为他内心的烦恼,就像要砍也砍不动的粗大荆棘一样。巴利
Yo attanāpi dasannaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ alābhī, parampi tehi na ovadati, lāḷudāyī viya, ayaṃ neva attahitāya paṭipanno na parahitāya, evarūpampi na pucchati. Kasmā? Assa anto kilesā pharasuchejjā viya mahantāti.
如果有人自己通达了十种论事,又能用这些来教导别人,这就叫作既为自利、又为他利而修行,就像舍利弗、目犍连、大迦叶等八十位大长老那样。对这样的比丘,世尊就会提问。为什么?因为他站在能让我教法增长的一方。在这里,世尊也正是为了问这样的人,才说出“诸比丘,到底是谁……”等话。巴利
Yo pana sayaṃ dasannaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ lābhī, parampi tehi ovadati, ayaṃ attahitāya ceva parahitāya ca paṭipanno nāma sāriputtamoggallānamahākassapādayo asītimahātherā viya, evarūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ pucchati. Kasmā? Mayhaṃ sāsanassa vuḍḍhipakkhe ṭhitoti. Idhāpi evarūpameva pucchanto – ‘‘ko nu kho, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
世尊这样问那些比丘时,他们并没有互相琢磨,也没有互相商量说:“世尊在自己的出生地所问的,是那样一位比丘——他既能利益自己又能利益他人,又具备十种论说的依据——那到底是谁呢?”为什么没有这样想呢?因为具寿满慈子在那片地方,就像悬在空中的月亮和太阳一样,名声显赫,广为人知。所以那些比丘一听到雷声,就像孔雀聚到一处,齐声鸣叫起来;又像刚出家的比丘向世尊禀报自己的老师满慈长老,自觉嘴巴不够用、说不尽长老的功德——他们就是这样,一口气说出了:“尊者,那位名叫满慈的具寿……”等等。这里,“满慈”是那位长老的名字。他是曼答尼的儿子,所以叫“满慈子”。“备受尊敬”,是说因为他的功德被人推崇而受到尊敬。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavatā puṭṭhānaṃ pana tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bhagavā attano jātibhūmiyaṃ ubhayahitāya paṭipannaṃ dasakathāvatthulābhiṃ bhikkhuṃ pucchati, ko nu kho tattha evarūpoti na aññamaññaṃ cintanā vā samantanā vā ahosi. Kasmā? Āyasmā hi mantāṇiputto tasmiṃ janapade ākāsamajjhe ṭhito cando viya sūriyo viya ca pākaṭo paññāto. Tasmā te bhikkhū meghasaddaṃ sutvā ekajjhaṃ sannipatitamoraghaṭā viya ghanasajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ, āraddhabhikkhū viya ca attano ācariyaṃ puṇṇattheraṃ bhagavato ārocentā therassa ca guṇaṃ bhāsituṃ appahontehi mukhehi ekappahāreneva puṇṇo nāma, bhante, āyasmātiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha puṇṇoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Mantāṇiyā pana so putto, tasmā mantāṇiputtoti vuccati. Sambhāvitoti guṇasambhāvanāya sambhāvito.
少欲等品质的注释巴利
Appicchatādivaṇṇanā
“少欲”是指远离欲求,没有欲望,没有渴爱。这里字面上好像还留有余地,但含义其实是彻底、毫无保留的。因为他心里连极微细的恶欲都没有。这位漏已尽的人,已经彻底断除了渴爱。另外,这里还应当了解四种差别:过贪、恶欲、多欲、少欲。巴利
Appicchoti icchāvirahito niiccho nittaṇho. Ettha hi byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viya, attho pana niravaseso. Na hi tassa anto aṇumattāpi pāpikā icchā nāma atthi. Khīṇāsavo hesa sabbaso pahīnataṇho. Apicettha atricchatā pāpicchatā mahicchatā appicchatāti ayaṃ bhedo veditabbo.
在这里,对自己得到的不满足,却去贪求别人得到的,就叫“过贪”。具有这种过贪的人,即使同一锅里烤好的饼落进自己钵里,也会觉得没烤透、太小;而同样一块饼放进别人钵里,就觉得烤得透、又大。把本来没有的功德说成有,而且在接受供养时不知节制,这叫“恶欲”。这种恶欲在《阿毗达摩》里就是以“这里有人本来没有信心,却希望人们知道‘我是有信心的人’”这样的方式来讲的。具有恶欲的人,就落在欺诳之中。把真实具有的功德拿来炫耀,而且在接受供养时不知节制,这叫“多欲”。这种多欲也是以《分别论》851所说的方式出现的:“这里有人本来有信心,却希望人们知道‘我是有信心的人’;本来有戒,却希望人们知道‘我是有戒的人’……”具有多欲的人难以满足,连刚生产的母亲也无法让他称心。因此说——巴利
Tattha sakalābhe atittassa paralābhe patthanā atricchatā nāma. Tāya samannāgatassa ekabhājena pakkapūvopi attano patte patito na supakko viya khuddako viya ca khāyati. Sveva parassa patte pakkhitto supakko viya mahanto viya ca khāyati. Asantaguṇasambhāvanatā pana paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā pāpicchatā nāma, sā, ‘‘idhekacco assaddho samāno saddhoti maṃ jano jānātū’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva, tāya samannāgato puggalo kohaññe patiṭṭhāti. Santaguṇasambhāvanā pana paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā mahicchatā nāma. Sāpi, ‘‘idhekacco saddho samāno saddhoti maṃ jano jānātūti icchati, sīlavā samāno sīlavāti maṃ jano jānātū’’ti (vibha. 851) iminā nayena āgatāyeva, tāya samannāgato puggalo dussantappayo hoti, vijātamātāpissa cittaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 大火堆、大海,还有多欲的人;
用大车来给予资具,这三者也是填不满的。”巴利
‘‘Aggikkhandho samuddo ca, mahiccho cāpi puggalo; Sakaṭena paccayaṃ detu, tayopete atappayā’’ti.
此外,隐藏真实的功德,并且在接受供养时懂得适量,这就叫少欲。具备这种少欲的人,即使自身有功德,也想要把它藏起来。他不希望别人知道“我是有信仰的人”;不希望别人知道“我是具戒的人”;不希望别人知道“我是远离的人”;不希望别人知道“我是多闻的人”;不希望别人知道“我是精进的人”;不希望别人知道“我是得定的人”;不希望别人知道“我是有慧的人”;不希望别人知道“我是漏已尽的人”。就像末阐提长老那样。巴利
Santaguṇanigūhanatā pana paṭiggahaṇe ca mattaññutā appicchatā nāma, tāya samannāgato puggalo attani vijjamānampi guṇaṃ paṭicchādetukāmatāya, ‘‘saddho samāno saddhoti maṃ jano jānātūti na icchati. Sīlavā, pavivitto, bahussuto, āraddhavīriyo, samādhisampanno, paññavā, khīṇāsavo samāno khīṇāsavoti maṃ jano jānātū’’ti na icchati, seyyathāpi majjhantikatthero.
据说,这位长老已经漏尽了一切烦恼,但他的钵和袈裟加起来也只值一毛钱。无忧法王举办精舍落成大典那天,他担任了僧团的上座。人们看到他衣着极其粗劣,就说:“尊者,请稍微往外站一点。”长老心想:“像我这样已经漏尽烦恼的人,如果都不去助成国王的善举,还有谁会去做呢?”于是他沉入大地,等到僧团上座的饭团被举起时,他又正好从地里冒出来接住。他明明已经漏尽烦恼,却根本不想让别人知道“我是漏尽烦恼的人”。像这样少欲的比丘,能让还没生起的利养生起,让已经生起的利养保持稳固,也能让施主们心生欢喜。因为他越是随顺自己的少欲而少拿,那些对他的品行怀有净信的人,就越是会多给。巴利
Thero kira mahākhīṇāsavo ahosi, pattacīvaraṃ panassa pādamattameva agghati, so asokassa dhammarañño vihāramahadivase saṅghatthero ahosi. Athassa atilūkhabhāvaṃ disvā manussā, ‘‘bhante, thokaṃ bahi hothā’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero, ‘‘mādise khīṇāsave rañño saṅgahaṃ akaronte añño ko karissatī’’ti pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā saṅghattherassa ukkhittapiṇḍaṃ gaṇhantoyeva ummujji. Evaṃ khīṇāsavo samāno, ‘‘khīṇāsavoti maṃ jano jānātū’’ti na icchati. Evaṃ appiccho pana bhikkhu anuppannaṃ lābhaṃ uppādeti, uppannaṃ lābhaṃ thāvaraṃ karoti, dāyakānaṃ cittaṃ ārādheti, yathā yathā hi so attano appicchatāya appaṃ gaṇhāti, tathā tathā tassa vatte pasannā manussā bahū denti.
另外还有一种少欲,也分四种:对资具的少欲、对头陀支的少欲、对教理的少欲、对证得的少欲。其中,对四种资具少欲,就叫作“资具少欲”。这种人清楚施主的心意,清楚布施之物的情形,也清楚自己的能力。如果布施之物很多,而施主只想给一点点,他就随顺施主的心意,只拿一点点;如果布施之物很少,而施主想多给,他就随顺布施之物的情形,只拿一点点;如果布施之物很多,施主也想多给,他就如实知道自己的能力,只拿适当的量。巴利
Aparopi catubbidho appiccho – paccayaappiccho dhutaṅgaappiccho pariyattiappiccho adhigamaappicchoti. Tattha catūsu paccayesu appiccho paccayaappiccho nāma, so dāyakassa vasaṃ jānāti, deyyadhammassa vasaṃ jānāti, attano thāmaṃ jānāti. Yadi hi deyyadhammo bahu hoti, dāyako appaṃ dātukāmo, dāyakassa vasena appaṃ gaṇhāti. Deyyadhammo appo, dāyako bahuṃ dātukāmo, deyyadhammassa vasena appaṃ gaṇhāti. Deyyadhammopi bahu, dāyakopi bahuṃ dātukāmo, attano thāmaṃ ñatvā pamāṇeneva gaṇhāti.
不想让别人知道自己受持头陀支,这种人就叫“头陀支少欲”。为了说明这一点,有下面这些事例:据说,冢间住大善贤长老在坟场里住了六十年,其他任何一位比丘都不知道。因此他说:巴利
Dhutaṅgasamādānassa attani atthibhāvaṃ najānāpetukāmo dhutaṅgaappiccho nāma. Tassa vibhāvanatthaṃ imāni vatthūni – sosānikamahāsumanatthero kira saṭṭhi vassāni susāne vasi, añño ekabhikkhupi na aññāsi, tenevāha –
“ 我在坟场里住了六十年,从不间断。
愿没有第二个人知道我,啊,我真是冢间住者中最殊胜的人。”巴利
‘‘Susāne saṭṭhi vassāni, abbokiṇṇaṃ vasāmahaṃ; Dutiyo maṃ na jāneyya, aho sosānikuttamo’’ti.
在支提山住着两位兄弟长老。其中弟弟长老接过侍者送来的甘蔗段,来到哥哥长老面前,说:“尊者,请用吧。”那时,哥哥长老已经吃完饭,正到了漱口的时候,就说:“贤友,不用了。”弟弟长老问:“尊者,您是不是一食者?”哥哥长老说:“贤友,把甘蔗段拿来吧。”这位长老五十年来一直持一食支,却为了隐藏这个头陀支,还是接过来用了;漱完口后,又重新决意持守头陀支,然后离开了。巴利
Cetiyapabbate dvebhātiyattherā vasiṃsu. Tesu kaniṭṭho upaṭṭhākena pesitā ucchukhaṇḍikā gahetvā jeṭṭhassa santikaṃ agamāsi. Paribhogaṃ, bhante, karothāti. Therassa ca bhattakiccaṃ katvā mukhaṃ vikkhālanakālo ahosi. So alaṃ, āvusoti āha. Kacci, bhante, ekāsanikatthāti. Āharāvuso, ucchukhaṇḍikāti paññāsa vassāni ekāsaniko samānopi dhutaṅgaṃ nigūhamāno paribhogaṃ katvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā puna dhutaṅgaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gato.
如果有谁像沙祇城的那位帝萨长老一样,不愿意让别人知道自己是多闻者,这就叫“教理少欲”。据说,这位长老总说没时间,在诵习和提问的场合从不给别人机会。有人责备他说:“尊者,难道要等到死的时候您才有空吗?”他便遣散了众人,去了翅子树沙海精舍。在那里结夏安居期间,他对上座、新学、中座比丘都做了饶益。到了大自恣日那天,他在伍波萨他日以说法震动了大众,然后就离开了。巴利
Yo pana sāketakatissatthero viya bahussutabhāvaṃ jānāpetuṃ na icchati, ayaṃ pariyattiappiccho nāma. Thero kira khaṇo natthīti uddesaparipucchāsu okāsaṃ akaronto maraṇakkhayaṃ, bhante, labhissathāti codito gaṇaṃ vissajjetvā kaṇikāravālikasamuddavihāraṃ gato. Tattha antovassaṃ theranavamajjhimānaṃ upakāro hutvā mahāpavāraṇāya uposathadivase dhammakathāya janataṃ khobhetvā gato.
如果有人已经证得入流等果位,却不想让别人知道自己是入流者等,这就叫作“证得少欲”,就像那三位善男子,也像造陶器的陶匠一样。巴利
Yo pana sotāpannādīsu aññataro hutvā sotāpannādibhāvaṃ jānāpetuṃ na icchati, ayaṃ adhigamaappiccho nāma, tayo kulaputtā viya ghaṭikārakumbhakāro viya ca.
具寿布纳彻底断除了过度欲、恶欲和多欲,因为完全具备了与欲贪相反、名为无贪的清净少欲,所以被称为少欲者。他也对比丘们开示:贤友们,过度欲、恶欲、多欲这些法应当断除。他指出了它们的过患,教导他们应当受持这样的少欲而行持,这就是作少欲之说。因此说:自己少欲,也为比丘们作少欲之说者。巴利
Āyasmā pana puṇṇo atricchataṃ pāpicchataṃ mahicchatañca pahāya sabbaso icchāpaṭipakkhabhūtāya alobhasaṅkhātāya parisuddhāya appicchatāya samannāgatattā appiccho nāma ahosi. Bhikkhūnampi, ‘‘āvuso, atricchatā pāpicchatā mahicchatāti ime dhammā pahātabbā’’ti tesu ādīnavaṃ dassetvā evarūpaṃ appicchataṃ samādāya vattitabbanti appicchakathaṃ kathesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attanā ca appiccho appicchakathañca bhikkhūnaṃ kattā’’ti.
十二种知足的注释巴利
Dvādasavidhasantosavaṇṇanā
现在,我要说明“自己知足”等语句中特别要表达的含义。至于句子的搭配方式,则按照前面说过的方法来理解。所谓“知足”,就是具备随所得资具而知足。这种知足共有十二种。具体来说,在袈裟方面,有随所得知足、随体力知足、随适宜知足三种;在团食等其他资具方面,也同样各有三种。以下是对这些分类的详细解说。巴利
Idāni attanā ca santuṭṭhotiādīsu visesatthameva dīpayissāma. Yojanā pana vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Santuṭṭhoti itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato. So panesa santoso dvādasavidho hoti. Seyyathidaṃ, cīvare yathālābhasantoso yathābalasantoso yathasāruppasantosoti tividho, evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu. Tassāyaṃ pabhedasaṃvaṇṇanā.
在这里,比丘得到一件袈裟,不管是好的还是不好的。他就靠这件袈裟过日子,不再想要别的;即使得到另一件,他也不拿。这就是他对袈裟的“随所得知足”。如果有个比丘天生体弱,或者被疾病、衰老压得受不了,披着厚重的袈裟就觉得累,那他就跟同类的比丘交换,换一件轻便的来用,也能知足。这就是他对袈裟的“随体力知足”。还有一种比丘,能得到上等的资具。他拿到像细棉布袈裟之类贵重袈裟中的某一种,或者拿到很多件袈裟,就想着:“这件适合出家已久的长老们;这件适合多闻的人;这件适合病人;这件适合难得资具的人。”于是布施给他们,然后把他们旧的袈裟,或者从垃圾堆等处捡来的破布收集起来,用那些布做成桑喀帝衣披着,也能知足。这就是他对袈裟的“随适合知足”。巴利
Idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā. So teneva yāpeti aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti, ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha yo pakatidubbalo vā hoti ābādhajarābhibhūto vā, garucīvaraṃ pārupanto kilamati, so sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Aparo paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti, so paṭṭacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghacīvaraṃ bahūni vā pana cīvarāni labhitvā idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ idaṃ bahussutānaṃ anurūpaṃ, idaṃ gilānānaṃ idaṃ appalābhānaṃ hotūti datvā tesaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃ vā saṅkārakūṭādito vā nantakāni uccinitvā tehi saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到团食,不管是粗劣的还是精美的,他只靠这些食物维持生活,不希求别的;即使能得到更好的,他也不接受。这就是他对团食的“随所得知足”。如果比丘得到与自己的体质不合、或与自己的疾病相冲突的团食,吃了之后身体不舒服,他就把这份食物交给同法比丘,再从那位比丘手中拿适合自己吃的食物来吃,同时照样修行沙门之法,也一样知足。这就是他对团食的“随能力知足”。还有另一种比丘,得到大量精美的团食,他就像处理袈裟那样,把这些食物布施给久出家者、多闻者、少有所得者、生病者,然后或者吃剩下的,或者为了乞食而出行,吃混合在一起的食物,也一样知足。这就是他对团食的“随适合知足”。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti, ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, yenassa paribhuttena aphāsu hoti, so sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bahuṃ paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, so taṃ cīvaraṃ viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhigilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ vā sesakaṃ piṇḍāya vā caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到住处,不管是合意的还是不合意的,他都不会因此产生欢喜或嗔恨,哪怕只是铺了一点草的地方,他也对所得感到满足。这就是他对住处的“随所得知足”。如果有人得到与自己体质不合或与疾病相冲突的住处,住在那里感到不舒服,他就把它让给同修比丘,自己住到那位比丘那里合适的住处,也依然感到满足。这就是他对住处的“随力知足”。另有一位福德很大的人,得到许多精美的住处,比如洞窟、亭阁、楼阁等。他像对待袈裟等物那样,把这些布施给出家已久的人、多闻的人、少有所得的人、生病的人,自己无论住在哪里,都依然感到满足。这就是他对住处的“随适合知足”。还有人这样思惟:“所谓最上等的住处,其实是让人放逸的地方。坐在那里,昏沉和睡眠就会袭来;被睡眠压倒后,醒来时不善的念头就会出现。”因此,即使得到了那样的住处,他也不接受;拒绝之后,住在露天、树下等处,也依然感到满足。这就是他对住处的“随适合知足”。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu senāsanaṃ labhati manāpaṃ vā amanāpaṃ vā, so tena neva somanassaṃ na paṭighaṃ uppādeti, antamaso tiṇasanthārakenāpi yathāladdheneva tussati, ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā senāsanaṃ labhati, yatthassa vasato aphāsu hoti, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa santake sappāyasenāsane vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso. Aparo mahāpuñño leṇamaṇḍapakūṭāgārādīni bahūni paṇītasenāsanāni labhati, so tāni cīvarādīni viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhigilānānaṃ datvā yattha katthaci vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso. Yopi, ‘‘uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa puna paṭibujjhato pāpavitakkā pātubhavantī’’ti paṭisañcikkhitvā tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati, so taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlādīsu vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayampissa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到药,不论是粗劣的还是精美的,他得到什么就满足于什么,不再希求别的;即使能得到更好的,他也不接受。这就是他对病缘药的“随所得知足”。如果有人需要油,却得到了糖蜜,他就把糖蜜送给同修比丘,从那位比丘手里拿到油,或者另外去找油,再用这些来配药,他也照样满足。这就是他对病缘药的“随力知足”。又有一种福德很大的人,得到很多油、蜜、糖蜜等精美的药。他像对待袈裟那样,把这些药送给出家已久的人、多闻的人、所得很少的人、生病的人,然后用他们带回来的任何东西维持自己,也照样满足。又有人在一个容器里放浸过尿的诃梨勒,在另一个容器里放四种甜药,当别人对他说“尊者,您想要哪个就拿哪个”时,即使他的病用其中任何一种都能治好,他仍然想:“浸过尿的诃梨勒是诸佛所称赞的。”于是拒绝四种甜药,只用浸过尿的诃梨勒来配药,成为最满足的人。这就是他对病缘药的“随适合知足”。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so yaṃ labhati, teneva santussati, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti, ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telaṃ gahetvā aññadeva vā pariyesitvā tehi bhesajjaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso. Aparo mahāpuñño bahuṃ telamadhuphāṇitādipaṇītabhesajjaṃ labhati, so taṃ cīvaraṃ viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhigilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ ābhatakena yena kenaci yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Yo pana ekasmiṃ bhājane muttaharītakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ, ‘‘gaṇha, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesu aññatarenapi rogo vūpasammati, atha muttaharītakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti catumadhuraṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharītakeneva bhesajjaṃ karonto paramasantuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso.
不过,在这每一种资具各自的三种知足当中,只有随宜知足才是最殊胜的。具寿布纳对每一种资具,都靠着这三种知足而知足。而且,他也成了对比丘们宣讲这知足论的人。巴利
Imesaṃ pana paccekaṃ paccayesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ santosānaṃ yathāsāruppasantosova aggo. Āyasmā puṇṇo ekekasmiṃ paccaye imehi tīhi santosehi santuṭṭho ahosi. Santuṭṭhikathañcāti bhikkhūnampi ca imaṃ santuṭṭhikathaṃ kattāva ahosi.
三种远离的注释巴利
Tividhapavivekavaṇṇanā
“已远离”是指具备三种远离:身远离、心远离、依远离。其中,独自去、独自站、独自坐、独自躺卧、独自进村乞食、独自返回、独自经行、独自游走、独自安住,这叫作身远离。八等至叫作心远离。涅槃叫作依远离。经文里也这样说:“身远离,是属于身已远离、乐于出离的人;心远离,是属于心得清净、达到最上清净的人;依远离,是属于无依著、已到达无造作状态的人。”(《大义释》57)
“远离论”也是对比丘们宣说此远离论者。巴利
Pavivittoti kāyapaviveko cittapaviveko upadhipavivekoti imehi tīhi pavivekehi samannāgato. Tattha eko gacchati, eko tiṭṭhati, eko nisīdati, eko seyyaṃ kappeti, eko gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati, eko paṭikkamati, eko caṅkamamadhiṭṭhāti, eko carati, eko viharatīti ayaṃ kāyapaviveko nāma. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo pana cittapaviveko nāma. Nibbānaṃ upadhipaviveko nāma. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘kāyapaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ. Cittapaviveko ca parisuddhacittānaṃ paramavodānappattānaṃ. Upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatāna’’nti (mahāni. 57). Pavivekakathanti bhikkhūnampi ca imaṃ pavivekakathaṃ kattā.
五种交杂的注释巴利
Pañcavidhasaṃsaggavaṇṇanā
“不交杂”是指远离五种交杂。五种交杂就是:听交杂、看交杂、交谈交杂、受用交杂、身交杂。其中,听交杂是指:这里的比丘听到有人说“某个村子或某个镇上,有位女子或少女,容貌端丽、悦目动人、端庄优雅,具足最上妙的肤色之美”。他听了之后,心就沉溺下去、消沉下去,没办法继续维持梵行,又没有坦白自己学处上的薄弱,就退转还俗了。像这样,不管是听别人讲述容貌等种种好处,还是自己听到嬉笑、交谈、歌唱的声音,经由耳识生起的贪欲,就叫作“听交杂”。这一点,可以通过不为女人香气所动的辟支菩萨,以及住在五隙岩窟的年轻比丘帝萨这两个例子来了解。巴利
Asaṃsaṭṭhoti pañcavidhena saṃsaggena virahito. Savanasaṃsaggo dassanasaṃsaggo samullapanasaṃsaggo sambhogasaṃsaggo kāyasaṃsaggoti pañcavidho saṃsaggo. Tesu idha bhikkhu suṇāti, ‘‘asukasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā itthī vā kumārikā vā abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā’’ti. So taṃ sutvā saṃsīdati visīdati na sakkoti brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretuṃ, sikkhādubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā hīnāyāvattatīti evaṃ parehi vā kathīyamānaṃ rūpādisampattiṃ attanā vā hasitalapitagītasaddaṃ suṇantassa sotaviññāṇavīthivasena uppanno rāgo savanasaṃsaggo nāma. So anitthigandhapaccekabodhisattassa ca pañcaggaḷaleṇavāsītissadaharassa ca vasena veditabbo –
据说,有个年轻男子在空中飞行时,山村里铁匠的女儿和五位少女结伴去到莲花池,沐浴之后戴上莲花,那女子用甜美的嗓音歌唱。他听到这歌声,被欲贪击中,失去了殊胜的修行境界,落得不幸与灾祸。这里说到,比丘并不是听到别人传说,而是亲眼看见一个女人或少女,容貌端丽、悦目动人、端庄优雅,具足最上等的肤色之美。他看到她之后,内心沉陷、颓丧,无法继续守护梵行,又没有勇气承认自己在学处上的软弱,于是退转还俗了。像这样,注视不该注视的对象时,通过眼识过程生起的贪欲,就叫作“看交杂”。这一点应当这样理解——巴利
Daharo kira ākāsena gacchanto girigāmavāsikammāradhītāya pañcahi kumārīhi saddhiṃ padumasaraṃ gantvā nhatvā padumāni ca pilandhitvā madhurassarena gāyantiyā saddaṃ sutvā kāmarāgena viddho visesā parihāyitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇi. Idha bhikkhu na heva kho suṇāti, apica kho sāmaṃ passati itthiṃ vā kumāriṃ vā abhirūpaṃ dassanīyaṃ pāsādikaṃ paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgataṃ. So taṃ disvā saṃsīdati visīdati na sakkoti brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretuṃ, sikkhādubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā hīnāyāvattatīti evaṃ visabhāgarūpaṃ olokentassa pana cakkhuviññāṇavīthivasena uppannarāgo dassanasaṃsaggo nāma. So evaṃ veditabbo –
据说,有个年轻比丘为了学习经文,去了迦罗提迦瓦皮德瓦拉精舍。导师看出他会遇到障碍,就不给他机会。他却一次又一次地跟着导师。导师说:“你要是不到村子里去走动,我就教你经文。”他答应说:“好。”等经文教完,他礼敬了导师,准备离开,心里想:“导师不让我在这个村子里走动,到底是什么原因?”于是披好袈裟,走进了村子。有个良家女子穿着黄衣,站在家里,看见那个年轻比丘,生起了贪爱,就用勺子舀了粥放进他的钵里,然后转身躺到床上。她父母问她:“女儿,你怎么了?”她说:“如果能得到那个从门口走过的年轻比丘,我就能活下去;得不到,我就会死。”父母急忙赶到村口,找到那个年轻比丘,向他行礼,说:“尊者,请回来吧,接受供养。”年轻比丘说:“不用了,我要走了。”他们恳求说:“尊者,事情是这样的——尊者,我们家里有这么多财产,只有这一个女儿,你可以做我们的长子,可以舒舒服服地过日子。”年轻比丘说:“我不需要这种拖累。”没有接受,就径直离开了。巴利
Eko kira daharo kāladīghavāpidvāravihāraṃ uddesatthāya gato. Ācariyo tassa antarāyaṃ disvā okāsaṃ na karoti. So punappunnaṃ anubandhati. Ācariyo sace antogāme na carissasi. Dassāmi te uddesanti āha. So sādhūti sampaṭicchitvā uddese niṭṭhite ācariyaṃ vanditvā gacchanto ācariyo me imasmiṃ gāme carituṃ na deti, kiṃ nu kho kāraṇanti cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ pāvisi, ekā kuladhītā pītakavatthaṃ nivāsetvā gehe ṭhitā daharaṃ disvā sañjātarāgā uḷuṅkena yāguṃ āharitvā tassa patte pakkhipitvā nivattitvā mañcake nipajji. Atha naṃ mātāpitaro kiṃ ammāti pucchiṃsu, dvārena gataṃ daharaṃ labhamānā jīvissāmi, alabhamānā marissāmīti. Mātāpitaro vegena gantvā gāmadvāre daharaṃ patvā vanditvā, ‘‘nivattatha, bhante, bhikkhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti āhaṃsu. Daharo alaṃ gacchāmīti. Te, ‘‘idaṃ nāma, bhante, kāraṇa’’nti yācitvā – ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante, gehe ettakaṃ nāma dhanaṃ atthi, ekāyeva no dhītā, tvaṃ no jeṭṭhaputtaṭṭhāne ṭhassasi, sukhena sakkā jīvitu’’nti āhaṃsu. Daharo, ‘‘na mayhaṃ iminā palibodhena attho’’ti anādiyitvāva pakkanto.
父母走过去对她说:“女儿啊,我们没能让那个年轻人回心转意。你要是想再找个丈夫,我们会给你找到的。起来吃点东西、喝点水吧。”她不愿意,绝食七天就死了。父母为她办了后事,把那件黄布施给了城门口精舍的比丘僧团。比丘们把布剪成一块一块分掉了。一位老比丘拿了自己那份,来到迦良尼精舍。那个年轻比丘也正好想去礼敬佛塔,到了那里,就在白天的休息处坐了下来。老比丘拿起那块布片,对年轻比丘说:“你用这个帮我做一个滤水袋吧。”年轻比丘问:“尊者,您这是从哪儿得来的?”老比丘就把整件事的经过讲了一遍。年轻比丘一听,心想:“我竟然没能和这样的女子一起生活!”当下被贪欲之火吞没,就在那里死了。巴利
Mātāpitaro gantvā, ‘‘amma, nāsakkhimhā daharaṃ nivattetuṃ, yaṃ aññaṃ sāmikaṃ icchasi, taṃ labhissasi, uṭṭhehi khāda ca piva cā’’ti āhaṃsu. Sā anicchantī sattāhaṃ nirāhārā hutvā kālamakāsi. Mātāpitaro tassā sarīrakiccaṃ katvā taṃ pītakavatthaṃ dhuravihāre bhikkhusaṅghassa adaṃsu, bhikkhū vatthaṃ khaṇḍākhanḍaṃ katvā bhājayiṃsu. Eko mahallako attano koṭṭhāsaṃ gahetvā kalyāṇīvihāraṃ āgato. Sopi daharo cetiyaṃ vandissāmīti tattheva gantvā divāṭṭhāne nisīdi. Mahallako taṃ vatthakhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā, ‘‘iminā me parissāvanaṃ vicārethā’’ti daharaṃ avoca. Daharo mahāthera ‘‘kuhiṃ laddha’’nti āha. So sabbaṃ pavattiṃ kathesi. So taṃ sutvāva, ‘‘evarūpāya nāma saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ nālattha’’nti rāgagginā daḍḍho tattheva kālamakāsi.
通过彼此问候交谈而生起的贪欲,叫做“言谈交杂”。比丘拿属于比丘尼的东西来用,或者比丘尼拿属于比丘的东西来用,由这种受用而生起的贪欲,叫做“受用交杂”。这件事要这样理解:据说在摩利迦瓦提精舍举行大法会时,有十万比丘和九万比丘尼。有个沙弥端着热粥走着,一会儿把钵放在袈裟角上,一会儿放在地上。一个沙弥尼看见了,就递给他一个小碟子,说:“把钵放在这上面,你走吧。”后来遇到一场灾难,他们都渡海去了别的国家。比丘尼们先到了。她听说“有个从锡兰来的比丘到了”,就走到那位长老面前,问候寒暄之后坐下,问:“尊者,当年摩利迦瓦提精舍大法会的时候,您几岁?”长老说:“那时我是七岁的沙弥。你那时几岁?”她说:“我就是那个七岁的沙弥尼,曾经给一个端着热粥走的沙弥递过一个小碟子,让他放钵。”长老说:“我就是那个人。”说完就拿出那个小碟子给她看。他们仅仅因为这么一点交杂,就再也守不住梵行,两人到了六十岁时都还俗了。巴利
Aññamaññaṃ ālāpasallāpavasena uppannarāgo pana samullapanasaṃsaggo nāma. Bhikkhuno bhikkhuniyā santakaṃ, bhikkhuniyā vā bhikkhussa santakaṃ gahetvā paribhogakaraṇavasena uppannarāgo sambhogasaṃsaggo nāma. So evaṃ veditabbo – maricavaṭṭivihāramahe kira bhikkhūnaṃ satasahassaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ navutisahassāni eva ahesuṃ. Eko sāmaṇero uṇhayāguṃ gahetvā gacchanto sakiṃ cīvarakaṇṇe ṭhapesi, sakiṃ bhūmiyaṃ. Ekā sāmaṇerī disvā ettha pattaṃ ṭhapetvā yāhīti thālakaṃ adāsi. Te aparabhāge ekasmiṃ bhaye uppanne parasamuddaṃ agamaṃsu. Tesu bhikkhunī puretaraṃ agamāsi. Sā, ‘‘eko kira sīhaḷabhikkhu āgato’’ti sutvā therassa santikaṃ gantvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā nisinnā, – ‘‘bhante, maricavaṭṭivihāramahakāle tumhe kativassā’’ti pucchi. Tadāhaṃ sattavassikasāmaṇero. Tvaṃ pana kativassāti? Ahaṃ sattavassikasāmaṇerīyeva ekassa sāmaṇerassa uṇhayāguṃ gahetvā gacchantassa pattaṭhapanatthaṃ thālakamadāsinti. Thero, ‘‘ahaṃ so’’ti vatvā thālakaṃ nīharitvā dassesi. Te ettakeneva saṃsaggena brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkontā dvepi saṭṭhivassakāle vibbhamiṃsu.
而因牵手等行为生起贪欲的,叫做“身交杂”。这里有一则事例:据说在大塔庙的庭院里,年轻比丘们正在诵习,年轻比丘尼们在背后听法。其中一位年轻比丘伸手时,碰到了一位年轻比丘尼的身体。那位比丘尼抓住他的手,按在自己胸口上。仅仅因为这一点接触,两人都还俗成了在家人。巴利
Hatthagāhādivasena pana uppannarāgo kāyasaṃsaggo nāma. Tatridaṃ vatthu – mahācetiyaṅgaṇe kira daharabhikkhū sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhanti. Tesaṃ piṭṭhipasse daharabhikkhuniyo dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tatreko daharo hatthaṃ pasārento ekissā daharabhikkhuniyā kāyaṃ chupi. Sā taṃ hatthaṃ gahetvā attano urasmiṃ ṭhapesi, ettakena saṃsaggena dvepi vibbhamitvā gihibhāvaṃ pattā.
关于“执取者与执取”等的注释巴利
Gāhagāhakādivaṇṇanā
在这五种交往中,比丘和比丘之间的相见、听闻、交谈、共同受用和身相触,本来就是经常发生的;比丘和比丘尼之间,除了身相触以外,其余四种只是偶尔发生;同样,和男居士、女居士之间的这五种交往,也全都只是偶尔发生。在这些情况下,比丘应当守护自己的心,不让烦恼生起。因为有的比丘是“夺者兼被夺者”,有的是“被夺者但已解脱”,有的是“已解脱但仍是夺者”,有的则是“已解脱兼已解脱”。巴利
Imesu pana pañcasu saṃsaggesu bhikkhuno bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ savanadassanasamullapanasambhogakāyaparāmāsā niccampi hontiyeva, bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ ṭhapetvā kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sesā kālena kālaṃ honti; tathā upāsakaupāsikāhi saddhiṃ sabbepi kālena kālaṃ honti. Tesu hi kilesuppattito cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ. Eko hi bhikkhu gāhagāhako hoti, eko gāhamuttako, eko muttagāhako, eko muttamuttako.
在这四种情况里,如果人们用财物来引诱比丘,想把他拉到自己这边,而比丘也拿花果等东西去拉拢在家人,想把他们占为己有,这种人就叫“被夺而夺者”。如果人们像前面说的那样,怀着占有的心来接近,但比丘是以应受供养的身份来接近,这种人就叫“被夺而解脱者”。如果人们以应受供养的心供养他四种资具,而比丘却拿花果等东西去拉拢在家人,怀着占有的心来接近,这种人就叫“解脱而夺者”。如果人们以应受供养的心供养他四种资具,比丘也像小乞食帝须长老那样,以应受供养的身份来受用,这种人就叫“解脱而又解脱者”。巴利
Tattha yaṃ bhikkhuṃ manussāpi āmisena upalāpetvā gahaṇavasena upasaṅkamanti, bhikkhupi pupphaphalādīhi upalāpetvā gahaṇavasena upasaṅkamati, ayaṃ gāhagāhako nāma. Yaṃ pana manussā vuttanayena upasaṅkamanti, bhikkhu dakkhiṇeyyavasena upasaṅkamati, ayaṃ gāhamuttako nāma. Yassa manussā dakkhiṇeyyavasena cattāro paccaye denti, bhikkhu pupphaphalādīhi upalāpetvā gahaṇavasena upasaṅkamati, ayaṃ muttagāhako nāma. Yassa manussāpi dakkhiṇeyyavasena cattāro paccaye denti, bhikkhupi cūḷapiṇḍapātiyatissatthero viya dakkhiṇeyyavasena paribhuñjati, ayaṃ muttamuttako nāma.
据说,有一位近事女侍奉这位长老整整十二年。有一天,她所在的村庄起了火,把房屋都烧毁了。其他与那些人家相熟的比丘赶来,亲切地问候说:“近事女,可有什么财物还能保住没被烧掉吗?”那家人说:“我们母亲所亲近的长老,一到吃饭的时候就会来的。”第二天,长老估量着乞食的时间才来。近事女让他在仓库的阴凉处坐下,把食物准备好,供养了他。长老吃完饭离开后,那家人说:“我们母亲所亲近的长老,正是到吃饭的时候才来的啊。”近事女说:“你们的亲近长老,正合你们的心意;我的长老,正合我的心意。”然而,具寿满慈子完全不沾染这五种交往,也不与四众弟子混杂。他既是“被夺解脱者”,也是“解脱解脱者”。正如他自己不混杂,他也为比丘们讲说不混杂的法。巴利
Theraṃ kira ekā upāsikā dvādasa vassāni upaṭṭhahi. Ekadivasaṃ tasmiṃ gāme aggi uṭṭhahitvā gehāni jhāpesi. Aññesaṃ kulūpakabhikkhū āgantvā – ‘‘kiṃ upāsike, api kiñci bhaṇḍakaṃ arogaṃ kātuṃ asakkhitthā’’ti paṭisanthāraṃ akaṃsu. Manussā, ‘‘amhākaṃ mātu kulūpakatthero bhuñjanavelāyameva āgamissatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Theropi punadivase bhikkhācāravelaṃ sallakkhetvāva āgato. Upāsikā koṭṭhacchāyāya nisīdāpetvā bhikkhaṃ sampādetvā adāsi. There bhattakiccaṃ katvā pakkante manussā āhaṃsu – ‘‘amhākaṃ mātu kulūpakatthero bhuñjanavelāyameva āgato’’ti. Upāsikā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ kulūpakā tumhākaṃyeva anucchavikā, mayhaṃ thero mayheva anucchaviko’’ti āha. Āyasmā pana mantāṇiputto imehi pañcahi saṃsaggehi catūhipi parisāhi saddhiṃ asaṃsaṭṭho gāhamuttako ceva muttamuttako ca ahosi. Yathā ca sayaṃ asaṃsaṭṭho, evaṃ bhikkhūnampi taṃ asaṃsaggakathaṃ kattā ahosi.
“已发勤精进”是指已经提起精进,也就是身精进和心精进都圆满具足的意思。如果有比丘在行走时,不让已经生起的烦恼有机会进入站立的状态;在站立时,不让已经生起的烦恼有机会进入坐下的状态;在坐下时,不让已经生起的烦恼有机会进入躺卧的状态——他就像用咒术把黑蛇压住再抓住的人,又像踩着仇敌的脖子与之搏斗的人一样行事,这样的比丘就叫做“已发勤精进”。那位长老正是这样的人。他也同样为比丘们作激励精进的开示。巴利
Āraddhavīriyoti paggahitavīriyo, paripuṇṇakāyikacetasikavīriyoti attho. Yo hi bhikkhu gamane uppannakilesaṃ ṭhānaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na deti, ṭhāne uppannakilesaṃ nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya uppannakilesaṃ sayanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na deti, mantena kaṇhasappaṃ uppīḷetvā gaṇhanto viya, amittaṃ gīvāya akkamanto viya ca vicarati, ayaṃ āraddhavīriyo nāma. Thero ca tādiso ahosi. Bhikkhūnampi tatheva vīriyārambhakathaṃ kattā ahosi.
在“戒具足”等说法里,“戒”指四种遍清净戒;“定”指作为观修基础的八种等至;“慧”指世间智和出世间智;“解脱”指圣果;“解脱智见”指十九种省察智。长老自己也具足戒等功德,也能为比丘们讲说戒等法义。他以十种论事来教诫比丘,所以叫“教诫者”。但有的人只会教诫,却没办法把微妙的义理转述清楚,让人明白,长老不是这样。长老能让人通达这十种论事,所以叫“令了知者”。有的人能让人明了,却说不出其中的道理。长老还能指出道理,所以叫“指示者”。有的人能指出存在的道理,却没办法让人信受。长老还能让人信受,所以叫“劝发者”。这样劝发之后,又为了激发比丘们对这些论事的热忱而鼓舞他们,所以叫“激励者”。对已经生起热忱的人,通过赞叹让他们欢喜,所以叫“令喜者”。巴利
Sīlasampannotiādīsu sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Samādhīti vipassanāpādakā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Paññāti lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Vimuttīti ariyaphalaṃ. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Thero sayampi sīlādīhi sampanno ahosi bhikkhūnampi sīlādikathaṃ kattā. Svāyaṃ dasahi kathāvatthūhi ovadatīti ovādako. Yathā pana eko ovadatiyeva, sukhumaṃ atthaṃ parivattetvā jānāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Na evaṃ thero. Thero pana tāni dasa kathāvatthūni viññāpetīti viññāpako. Eko viññāpetuṃ sakkoti, kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ na sakkoti. Thero kāraṇampi sandassetīti sandassako. Eko vijjamānaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasseti, gāhetuṃ pana na sakkoti. Thero gāhetumpi sakkotīti samādapako. Evaṃ samādapetvā pana tesu kathāvatthūsu ussāhajananavasena bhikkhū samuttejetīti samuttejako. Ussāhajāte vaṇṇaṃ vatvā sampahaṃsetīti sampahaṃsako.
253 “善得”是指:对别人来说,获得人身、出家等功德,也可以说是一种“得”。但对尊者布纳来说,这些才是真正的“善得”,意思是能在世尊面前得到这样的称赞。再说,被愚人称赞并不算真正的得,被智者称赞才算得。因为在家人的称赞并不算那样的得:他们本来想称赞,却说“我们的师父温和、亲切、说话让人欢喜,对来寺院的人用粥、饭、糖浆等来照顾”——这实际上是在说坏话。他们本来想说坏话,却说“这位长老好像昏昏沉沉,好像软弱无力,好像整天皱着眉头,和他在一起一点信任感都没有”——这反而成了称赞。即使是同梵行者在世尊背后称赞,也不算那样的得;只有在世尊面前称赞,才是最殊胜的得。世尊正是基于这个道理,才说“善得”。
“随喜再随喜”是指:一次又一次地进入十种论事之后,随喜赞叹。而世尊也对此随喜赞叹,世尊这样随喜说:“正是如此,那位比丘是少欲者,那位比丘是知足者。”这样,被智者称赞是一得,被同梵行者称赞是一得,在世尊面前被称赞是一得,一次又一次随喜是一得,世尊随喜赞叹是一得——世尊就是针对这五种得,才说“善得”。
“有时”是指在某个时候。“何时”是它的同义词。“或许会有某种交谈”是指:或许会有某种对话。据说,那位长老从未见过尊者布纳,也从未听过他说法。因此,他渴望见到他并听闻佛法,这样说道。巴利
253.Suladdhalābhāti aññesampi manussattabhāvapabbajjādiguṇalābhā nāma honti. Āyasmato pana puṇṇassa suladdhalābhā ete, yassa satthu sammukhā evaṃ vaṇṇo abbhuggatoti attho. Apica apaṇḍitehi vaṇṇakathanaṃ nāma na tathā lābho, paṇḍitehi vaṇṇakathanaṃ pana lābho. Gihī hi vā vaṇṇakathanaṃ na tathā lābho, gihī hi ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti, ‘‘amhākaṃ ayyo saṇho sakhilo sukhasambhāso, vihāraṃ āgatānaṃ yāgubhattaphāṇitādīhi saṅgahaṃ karotī’’ti kathento avaṇṇameva katheti. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti ‘‘ayaṃ thero mandamando viya abalabalo viya bhākuṭikabhākuṭiko viya natthi iminā saddhiṃ vissāso’’ti kathento vaṇṇameva katheti. Sabrahmacārīhipi satthu parammukhā vaṇṇakathanaṃ na tathā lābho, satthu sammukhā pana atilābhoti imampi atthavasaṃ paṭicca ‘‘suladdhalābhā’’ti āha. Anumassa anumassāti dasa kathāvatthūni anupavisitvā anupavisitvā. Tañca satthā abbhanumodatīti tañcassa vaṇṇaṃ evametaṃ appiccho ca so bhikkhu santuṭṭho ca so bhikkhūti anumodati. Iti viññūhi vaṇṇabhāsanaṃ eko lābho, sabrahmacārīhi eko, satthu sammukhā eko, anumassa anumassa eko, satthārā abbhanumodanaṃ ekoti ime pañca lābhe sandhāya ‘‘suladdhalābhā’’ti āha. Kadācīti kismiñcideva kāle. Karahacīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Appeva nāma siyā kocideva kathāsallāpoti api nāma koci kathāsamudācāropi bhaveyya. Therena kira āyasmā puṇṇo neva diṭṭhapubbo, nassa dhammakathā sutapubbā. Iti so tassa dassanampi dhammakathampi patthayamāno evamāha.
254 “随其所乐而住”是指:随顺自己的意乐而住。诸佛住在同一个地方时,不会因为树荫、饮水等条件不好,或者住处不舒适,或者那里的人缺乏信心等等,就生起不欢喜。他们也不会因为条件圆满,觉得“在这里住得很舒服”就贪恋不舍,从而久住不去。但是,当如来住在某地时,如果有众生因此皈依三宝,或者受持戒律,或者出家,或者由此成为他们证得入流道等的亲依止缘,那么诸佛就会以让众生安立于这些成就的意乐而住下;如果没有这些因缘,他们就会离开。因此说“随其所乐而住”。“行于游行”是指:踏上长途旅程。而世尊的游行有两种:急行游行和非急行游行。巴利
254.Yathābhirantanti yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā. Buddhānañhi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantānaṃ chāyūdakādivipattiṃ vā apphāsukasenāsanaṃ vā, manussānaṃ assaddhādibhāvaṃ vā āgamma anabhirati nāma natthi. Tesaṃ sampattiyā ‘‘idha phāsu viharāmā’’ti abhiramitvā ciravihāropi natthi. Yattha pana tathāgate viharante sattā saraṇesu vā patiṭṭhahanti, sīlāni vā samādiyanti, pabbajanti vā, tato sotāpattimaggādīnaṃ vā pana tesaṃ upanissayo hoti. Tattha buddhā satte tāsu sampattīsu patiṭṭhāpanaajjhāsayena vasanti; tāsaṃ abhāve pakkamanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā’’ti. Cārikaṃ caramānoti addhānagamanaṃ gacchanto. Cārikā ca nāmesā bhagavato duvidhā hoti turitacārikā ca, aturitacārikā ca.
在这里,“急行游行”是指:即使看见可度化的人远在他方,也为了度化他而立刻赶过去。这种游行,可以从迎接大迦叶等事例中看出来。世尊去迎接大迦叶时,片刻之间就走了三伽浮他(约九公里)的路;为了度化旷野夜叉,走了三十由旬;为了指鬘,也走了同样的距离。为了布咕萨提,走了四十五由旬;为了玛哈咖毕那,走了一百二十由旬;为了佉提罗林住者,走了七百由旬;为了法将的同住沙弥——林住帝萨沙弥,走了一百二十由旬又三伽浮他。巴利
Tattha dūrepi bodhaneyyapuggalaṃ disvā tassa bodhanatthāya sahasā gamanaṃ turitacārikā nāma. Sā mahākassapapaccuggamanādīsu daṭṭhabbā. Bhagavā hi mahākassapaṃ paccuggacchanto muhuttena tigāvutaṃ maggaṃ agamāsi, āḷavakassatthāya tiṃsayojanaṃ, tathā aṅgulimālassa . Pukkusātissa pana pañcacattālīsayojanaṃ, mahākappinassa vīsayojanasataṃ, khadiravaniyassatthāya satta yojanasatāni agamāsi; dhammasenāpatino saddhivihārikassa vanavāsītissasāmaṇerassa tigāvutādhikaṃ vīsayojanasataṃ.
据说有一天,那位长老说:“尊者,我要去帝萨沙弥那里。”世尊说:“我也去。”然后吩咐尊者阿难:“阿难,你去通知那两万位具足六通的比丘,就说:‘世尊要去林住帝萨沙弥那里。’”第二天,世尊在两万位漏尽比丘的围绕下,腾空飞起,飞越一百由旬,降落在帝萨沙弥乞食的村口,然后搭好袈裟。那些正要去干活的人看见了,就说:“导师来了,大家别去干活了!”于是铺设座位,供养粥和饮品。这时年轻的比丘们问:“居士们,世尊要去哪里?”居士们回答说:“世尊不去别的地方,就是专程来见帝萨沙弥的。”他们听了很欢喜,心想:“原来导师是为了见我们的亲教师长老才来的,我们的长老真不是一般人啊!”巴利
Ekadivasaṃ kira thero, ‘‘tissasāmaṇerassa santikaṃ, bhante, gacchāmī’’ti āha. Bhagavā, ‘‘ahampi gamissāmī’’ti vatvā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘ānanda, vīsatisahassānaṃ chaḷabhiññānaṃ ārocehi – ‘bhagavā vanavāsītissasāmaṇerassa santikaṃ gamissatī’’’ti. Tato dutiyadivase vīsatisahassakhīṇāsavaparivuto ākāse uppatitvā vīsayojanasatamatthake tassa gocaragāmadvāre otaritvā cīvaraṃ pārupi. Kammantaṃ gacchamānā manussā disvā, ‘‘satthā, bho, āgato, mā kammantaṃ agamitthā’’ti vatvā āsanāni paññapetvā yāguṃ datvā pānavattaṃ karontā, ‘‘kuhiṃ, bhante, bhagavā gacchatī’’ti daharabhikkhū pucchiṃsu. Upāsakā, na bhagavā aññattha gacchati, idheva tissasāmaṇerassa dassanatthāya āgatoti . Te ‘‘amhākaṃ kira kulūpakattherassa dassanatthāya satthā āgato, no vata no thero oramattako’’ti somanassajātā ahesuṃ.
世尊吃完饭以后,那个沙弥进村乞食,问那些近事男:“大比丘僧团在哪里?”他们对他说:“尊者,导师来了。”他就走到世尊跟前,用乞来的食物向世尊献食。导师伸手接过他的钵,说:“够了,帝萨,我已经吃完斋饭了。”于是沙弥向亲教师告假,坐在自己放钵的座位上,进行了用餐。他用餐完毕以后,导师说了祝福的话,便起身出去,站在村口,问:“帝萨,通往你住处的路是哪一条?”帝萨说:“世尊,是这一条。”世尊指路,说:“帝萨,你在前面走。”据说,世尊虽然是连同诸天神在内的整个世间的指路者,却心想:“在这全长三伽浮他的路上,我将得以见到这个沙弥。”于是就让沙弥来带路。巴利
Atha bhagavato bhattakiccapariyosāne sāmaṇero gāmaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā ‘‘upāsakā mahā bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti pucchi. Athassa te, ‘‘satthā, bhante, āgato’’ti ārocesuṃ, so bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā piṇḍapātena āpucchi. Satthā tassa pattaṃ hatthena gahetvā, ‘‘alaṃ, tissa, niṭṭhitaṃ bhattakicca’’nti āha. Tato upajjhāyaṃ āpucchitvā attano pattāsane nisīditvā bhattakiccamakāsi. Athassa bhattakiccapariyosāne satthā maṅgalaṃ vatvā nikkhamitvā gāmadvāre ṭhatvā, ‘‘kataro te, tissa, vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gamanamaggo’’ti āha. ‘‘Ayaṃ bhagavā’’ti. Maggaṃ desayamāno purato yāhi tissāti. Bhagavā kira sadevakassa lokassa maggadesako samānopi ‘‘sakalatigāvute magge sāmaṇeraṃ daṭṭhuṃ lacchāmī’’ti taṃ maggadesakamakāsi.
帝萨沙弥回到自己的住处后,履行了对世尊的义务。然后世尊问他:“帝萨,你经行的地方是哪里?”接着世尊就去了那里,坐在沙弥坐的那块石头上,问道:“帝萨,你住在这个地方觉得安乐吗?”他回答说:“是的,尊者。我住在这里,听到狮子、老虎、大象、鹿、孔雀等的声音时,心里就会生起林野想,因为这样,我住得很安乐。”于是世尊对他说:“帝萨,你去把比丘僧团集合起来,我要把佛陀的遗产传给你。”等比丘僧团集合之后,世尊为他授了具足戒,然后就回到自己的住处去了。这就叫“急行游行”。巴利
So attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā bhagavato vattamakāsi. Atha naṃ bhagavā, ‘‘kataro te, tissa, caṅkamo’’ti pucchitvā tattha gantvā sāmaṇerassa nisīdanapāsāṇe nisīditvā, ‘‘tissa, imasmiṃ ṭhāne sukhaṃ vasasī’’ti pucchi. So āha – ‘‘āma, bhante, imasmiṃ me ṭhāne vasantassa sīhabyagghahatthimigamorādīnaṃ saddaṃ suṇato araññasaññā uppajjati, tāya sukhaṃ vasāmī’’ti. Atha naṃ bhagavā, ‘‘tissa, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātehi, buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’’ti vatvā sannipatite bhikkhusaṅghe upasampādetvā attano vasanaṭṭhānameva agamāsīti. Ayaṃ turitacārikā nāma.
不过,如果是沿着村落和城镇依次而行,每天走一由旬或半由旬,以托钵乞食等方式利益世间,这种出行就叫作“不急行游行”。而世尊进行这种游行时,是在大圈、中圈、末圈这三个圈中的某一个圈里游行的。其中,大圈有九百由旬,中圈有六百由旬,末圈有三百由旬。当世尊想在大圈里游行时,他会先举行大自恣,然后在自恣结束后的第二天,由大比丘僧团围绕出发。那时周围一百由旬内一片喧腾,先到的人能得到邀请供养的机会;另外两个圈的供养,都会汇聚到大圈来。在那里,世尊在各个村落和城镇中住一两天,以接受食物供养来利益大众,又用说法布施使他们朝向解脱的善业增长,前后用九个月完成游行。巴利
Yaṃ pana gāmanigamapaṭipāṭiyā devasikaṃ yojanaḍḍhayojanavasena piṇḍapātacariyādīhi lokaṃ anuggaṇhantassa gamanaṃ, ayaṃ aturitacārikā nāma. Imaṃ pana cārikaṃ caranto bhagavā mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ antimamaṇḍalanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maṇḍalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ carati. Tattha mahāmaṇḍalaṃ navayojanasatikaṃ, majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ chayojanasatikaṃ, antimamaṇḍalaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ. Yadā mahāmaṇḍale cārikaṃ caritukāmo hoti, mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā pāṭipadadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro nikkhamati. Samantā yojanasataṃ ekakolāhalaṃ ahosi, purimaṃ purimaṃ āgatā nimantetuṃ labhanti; itaresu dvīsu maṇḍalesu sakkāro mahāmaṇḍale osarati. Tatra bhagavā tesu tesu gāmanigamesu ekāhaṃ dvīhaṃ vasanto mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhanto dhammadānena cassa vivaṭṭūpanissitaṃ kusalaṃ vaḍḍhento navahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpeti.
如果雨安居期间比丘们的止观还很稚嫩,就不举行大自恣,而是先做“自恣摄益”,等到迦提迦月满月日再自恣。然后在末伽始罗月第一天,由大比丘僧团围绕出发,进入中圈游行。如果因为其他原因想在中圈游行,也要住满四个月才出发。按照前面说的方式,另外两个圈的供养都归入中圈。世尊同样以先前的方式利益世间,在八个月内结束游行。巴利
Sace pana antovasse bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanā taruṇā hoti, mahāpavāraṇāya apavāretvā pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvā kattikapuṇṇamāya pavāretvā migasirassa paṭhamadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro nikkhamitvā majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ osarati. Aññenapi kāraṇena majjhimamaṇḍale cārikaṃ caritukāmo catumāsaṃ vasitvāva nikkhamati. Vuttanayeneva itaresu dvīsu maṇḍalesu sakkāro majjhimamaṇḍale osarati. Bhagavā purimanayeneva lokaṃ anuggaṇhanto aṭṭhahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpeti.
如果雨安居的四个月已经结束,但世尊所要教化的众生根器还没有成熟,为了等待他们的根器成熟,世尊就会在那里再住一个月、两个月、三个月或四个月,然后才在大比丘僧团的围绕下离开。就像前面说的那样,在另外两个圈里,供养也会向内圈汇聚。世尊同样按照先前的方式利益世间,在七个月、六个月、五个月或四个月之内结束游行。就这样,在这三个圈中,无论走到哪里游行,他都不是为了衣服等资具而游行。他心里想的是:那些处境悲惨、愚痴、衰老、患病的人,什么时候才能来到如来面前见到他呢?只要我出去游行,大众就有机会见到如来。在那里,有些人会生起净信,有些人会用花鬘等供养,有些人会布施一勺饭食,有些人会舍弃邪见而成为具正见者。这会给他们带来长远的利益和安乐。正是出于对世间的悲悯,他才这样游行。巴利
Sace pana catumāsaṃ vuṭṭhavassassāpi bhagavato veneyyasattā aparipakkindriyā honti, tesaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno aparampi ekaṃ māsaṃ vā dviticatumāsaṃ vā tattheva vasitvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro nikkhamati. Vuttanayeneva itaresu dvīsu maṇḍalesu sakkāro antomaṇḍale osarati. Bhagavā purimanayeneva lokaṃ anuggaṇhanto sattahi vā chahi vā pañcahi vā catūhi vā māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpeti. Iti imesu tīsu maṇḍalesu yattha katthaci cārikaṃ caranto na cīvarādihetu carati. Atha kho ye duggatā bālā jiṇṇā byādhitā, te kadā tathāgataṃ āgantvā passissanti? Mayi pana cārikaṃ carante mahājano tathāgatadassanaṃ labhissati, tattha keci cittāni pasādessanti, keci mālādīhi pūjessanti, keci kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ dassanti, keci micchādassanaṃ pahāya sammādiṭṭhikā bhavissanti, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyāti evaṃ lokānukampāya cārikaṃ carati.
另外,诸佛世尊出行游化有四种原因:为了让身体通过经行得到舒适;为了等待教法因缘成熟的时机;为了给比丘们制定学处;为了度化各地那些根器已经成熟、堪受教化的众生。还有另外四种原因让诸佛世尊出行游化:为了让众人生起皈依佛之心,或生起皈依法之心,或生起皈依僧之心,或者为了以广大的法雨让四众弟子得到满足。还有另外五种原因:为了让众生远离杀生,远离不与取,远离欲邪行,远离妄语,远离诸酒放逸处。还有另外八种原因:为了让众生证得初禅,证得第二禅……乃至证得非想非非想处定。还有另外八种原因:为了让众生证得入流道,证得入流果……乃至亲证阿拉汉果。这就是不急迫的游化,这里指的就是这种。而这种游化又分为两种:定期游化和不定期游化。其中,为了度化某一位特定众生而前往,叫做定期游化;按照村落、城镇、城市的次第依次而行,叫做不定期游化。这里所说的,就是这种不定期游化。巴利
Apica catūhi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti – jaṅghāvihāravasena sarīraphāsukatthāya, atthuppattikālaṃ abhikaṅkhanatthāya, bhikhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpanatthāya, tattha tattha paripākagatindriye bodhaneyyasatte bodhanatthāyāti. Aparehipi catūhi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti – buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, mahatā dhammavassena catasso parisā santappessāmīti vāti . Aparehi pañcahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti – pāṇātipātā viramissantīti vā, adinnādānā… kāmesumicchācārā… musāvādā… surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā viramissantīti vāti. Aparehi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti – paṭhamajjhānaṃ paṭilabhissantīti vā, dutiyaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ paṭilabhissantīti vāti. Aparehi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti – sotāpattimaggaṃ adhigamissantīti vā, sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattaphalaṃ sacchikarissantīti vāti. Ayaṃ aturitacārikā, sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā duvidhā hoti nibaddhacārikā, anibaddhacārikā ca. Tattha yaṃ ekasseva bodhaneyyasattassa atthāya gacchati, ayaṃ nibaddhacārikā nāma. Yaṃ pana gāmanigamanagarapaṭipāṭivasena carati, ayaṃ anibaddhacārikā nāma. Esā idha adhippetā.
“整理好坐卧处”就是收拾好住处。不过,长老收拾的时候,并没有把小钵、大钵、小碟、大碟、绢衣、细布衣等物打成包裹,也没有把酥油之类的东西灌满罐子、藏进内室、关上门、上锁加印。然而,依据律文里说的:“如果那里没有比丘、沙弥、守园人或近事男,就把床叠放在四块石头上,把凳子叠放上去,把衣物堆在衣竿或衣绳上,关好门窗,然后离开。”(《小品》361)长老只是跟住在当地的比丘打个招呼,就算收拾好了。巴利
Senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvāti senāsanaṃ paṭisāmetvā. Taṃ pana paṭisāmento thero na cūḷapattamahāpatta-cūḷathālakamahāthālaka-paṭṭuṇṇacīvara-dukūlacīvarādīnaṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ katvā sappitelādīnaṃ vā pana ghaṭe pūrāpetvā gabbhe nidahitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya kuñcikamuddikādīni yojāpesi. ‘‘Sace na hoti bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā upāsako vā, catūsu pāsāṇesu mañce mañcaṃ āropetvā pīṭhe pīṭhaṃ āropetvā cīvaravaṃse vā cīvararajjuyā vā upari puñjaṃ katvā dvāravātapānaṃ thaketvā pakkamitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 361) vacanato pana nevāsikaṃ bhikkhuṃ āpucchanamattakeneva paṭisāmesi.
他朝着舍卫城的方向出发游行。他是因为想见导师,才朝着舍卫城所在的方向启程。出发的时候,他并没有先禀告苏托达那大王,也没有让人带上酥油、蜂蜜、糖浆之类的东西再走。他像一头离开象群的狂象,又像一头不需要同伴的狮子,只拿着衣和钵,独自一人上了路。那他为什么当初没有带着自己的五百个弟子一起去王舍城,偏偏现在才出发呢?因为王舍城离迦毗罗卫很远,有六十由旬,而舍卫城只有十五由旬。导师从王舍城走了四十五由旬,现在住在舍卫城,他听说导师如今就在近处,所以才出发——这种说法是站不住脚的。因为要去见诸佛的人,哪怕要走一千由旬也会去。真正的原因是在那个时候,他没办法获得身远离。和许多人一起走的时候,有人说“我们走吧”,另一个人却说“就留在这里吧”;有人说“留下来吧”,另一个人又说“走吧”。所以,想在想要入定的那一刻就进入等至坐下,或者想在一处舒适的住处获得身远离,都做不到。但如果是一个人独行,这一切就都很容易。因此,他那时没有出发,现在才启程。巴利
Yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṃ pakkāmīti satthu dassanakāmo hutvā yena disābhāgena sāvatthi tena pakkāmi. Pakkamanto ca na suddhodanamahārājassa ārocāpetvā sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīni gāhāpetvā pakkanto. Yūthaṃ pahāya nikkhanto pana mattahatthī viya, asahāyakicco sīho viya, pattacīvaramattaṃ ādāya ekakova pakkāmi. Kasmā panesa pañcasatehi attano antevāsikehi saddhiṃ rājagahaṃ agantvā idāni nikkhantoti? Rājagahaṃ kapilavatthuto dūraṃ saṭṭhiyojanāni, sāvatthi pana pañcadasa. Satthā rājagahato pañcacattālīsayojanaṃ āgantvā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, idāni āsanno jātoti sutvā nikkhamīti akāraṇametaṃ. Buddhānaṃ santikaṃ gacchanto hi esa yojanasahassampi gaccheyya, tadā pana kāyaviveko na sakkā laddhunti. Bahūhi saddhiṃ gamanakāle hi ekasmiṃ gacchāmāti vadante eko idheva vasāmāti vadati. Ekasmiṃ vasāmāti vadante eko gacchāmāti vadati. Tasmā icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ vā phāsukasenāsane kāyavivekaṃ laddhuṃ vā na sakkā hoti, ekakassa pana taṃ sabbaṃ sulabhaṃ hotīti tadā agantvā idāni pakkāmi.
“游行的时候”这句话里,虽然这种“游行”本来只属于诸佛,是为了利益大众;但依托佛陀,按通俗的说法,也可用来指声闻弟子,就像竹片等做成的扇子,随俗也叫“多罗叶扇”一样。
“朝着世尊所在之处”:他在离舍卫城不远的一个村子里托钵乞食,吃完饭后进入祇园精舍,没有去舍利弗长老或大目犍连长老住的地方,没有洗脚、涂油、喝水或喝点饮料、稍微休息,也没有生起“我要去见导师”的念头,而是直接走向香室。因为对这位长老来说,他想见导师时,不需要其他比丘做什么。所以,他也没有生起这样的念头:带上罗睺罗或阿难,请求机会后再去见导师。巴利
Cārikaṃcaramānoti ettha kiñcāpi ayaṃ cārikā nāma mahājanasaṅgahatthaṃ buddhānaṃyeva labbhati, buddhe upādāya pana ruḷhīsaddena sāvakānampi vuccati kilañjādīhi kataṃ bījanampi tālavaṇṭaṃ viya. Yena bhagavāti sāvatthiyā avidūre ekasmiṃ gāmake piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco jetavanaṃ pavisitvā sāriputtattherassa vā mahāmoggallānattherassa vā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā pāde dhovitvā makkhetvā pānīyaṃ vā pānakaṃ vā pivitvā thokaṃ vissamitvā satthāraṃ passissāmīti cittampi anuppādetvā ujukaṃ gandhakuṭipariveṇameva agamāsi. Therassa hi satthāraṃ daṭṭhukāmassa aññena bhikkhunā kiccaṃ natthi. Tasmā rāhulaṃ vā ānandaṃ vā gahetvā okāsaṃ kāretvā satthāraṃ passissāmīti evampi cittaṃ na uppādesi.
这位长老在佛陀的教法里本来就深受器重,就像国王跟前一位在战场上屡建大功的勇将。好比这样一位勇士想见国王,根本不用先经过别人通报引见,凭着自己受宠信的地位,直接就能见到。同样,这位长老在佛陀的教法中也深受器重,他要见导师,不必再经他人安排。于是他洗了脚,用擦脚布擦干,就径直朝世尊所在的地方走去。世尊也早已看到:“天刚亮,满慈子就会来。”所以世尊进了香室,没有上门闩,只是等身体疲劳缓解后,就起身坐着。长老推开门,走进香室,向世尊顶礼后,坐在一边。关于“说法义的开示”:世尊讲说法义时,在《小牛角经》等中,为三位善男子讲了和合的利益;在《有学经》等中,讲了住所的利益;在《陶师经》等中,讲了与获得宿命通相关的法谈;在《拉塔巴拉经》中,讲了四种法要;在《塞拉经》等中,讲了饮品的利益;在《随烦恼经》等中,为跋古长老说法时,讲了和合的利益。而在这部《接力车经》中,为具寿布纳说法时,世尊开示了以十种论题为依据、有无量方法的法门,也就是:布纳,这也是少欲之说,也是知足之说。对于已证得无碍解的弟子来说,这就像站在海岸边把手伸向大海一样。巴利
Thero hi sayameva buddhasāsane vallabho rañño saṅgāmavijayamahāyodho viya. Yathā hi tādisassa yodhassa rājānaṃ daṭṭhukāmassa aññaṃ sevitvā dassanakammaṃ nāma natthi; vallabhatāya sayameva passati. Evaṃ theropi buddhasāsane vallabho, tassa aññaṃ sevitvā satthudassanakiccaṃ natthīti pāde dhovitvā pādapuñchanamhi puñchitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Bhagavāpi ‘‘paccūsakāleyeva mantāṇiputto āgamissatī’’ti addasa. Tasmā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā sūcighaṭikaṃ adatvāva darathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā uṭṭhāya nisīdi. Thero kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Dhammiyā kathāyāti bhagavā dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathento cūḷagosiṅgasutte (ma. ni. 1.325 ādayo) tiṇṇaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sāmaggirasānisaṃsaṃ kathesi; sekkhasutte (ma. ni. 2.22 ādayo) āvasathānisaṃsaṃ, ghaṭikārasutte (ma. ni. 2.282 ādayo) satipaṭilābhikaṃ pubbenivāsappaṭisaṃyuttakathaṃ; raṭṭhapālasutte (ma. ni. 2.304) cattāro dhammuddese, selasutte (ma. ni. 2.396 ādayo) pānakānisaṃsakathaṃ , upakkilesasutte (ma. ni. 3.236 ādayo) bhaguttherassa dhammakathaṃ kathento ekībhāve ānisaṃsaṃ kathesi. Imasmiṃ pana rathavinīte āyasmato puṇṇassa kathento dasakathāvatthunissayaṃ anantanayaṃ nāma dassesi puṇṇa, ayampi appicchakathāyeva santosakathāyevāti. Paṭisambhidāpattassa sāvakassa velante ṭhatvā mahāsamudde hatthappasāraṇaṃ viya ahosi.
他朝着暗林的方向走去。据说那时午饭后,祇园精舍里挤满了人,许多刹帝利、婆罗门之类的人纷纷涌进祇园,那情形就像转轮王安营扎寨的地方一样,根本没法得到独处。而暗林则像精勤修行的禅堂一样幽静、远离尘嚣,因此他就朝暗林那边走去。那他为什么不去见那些大长老呢?据说他是这样想的:“傍晚时分我再过来,先拜见大长老们,然后再去见十力世尊。这样一来,对大长老们算是一次亲近承事,对导师就成了两次。向导师礼敬之后,我再回自己住的地方去。”巴利
Yena andhavananti tadā kira pacchābhatte jetavanaṃ ākiṇṇaṃ hoti, bahū khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo jetavanaṃ osaranti; rañño cakkavattissa khandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti, na sakkā pavivekaṃ labhituṃ. Andhavanaṃ pana padhānagharasadisaṃ pavivittaṃ, tasmā yenandhavanaṃ tenupasaṅkami. Kasmā pana mahāthere na addasa? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘sāyanhasamaye āgantvā mahāthere disvā puna dasabalaṃ passissāmi, evaṃ mahātherānaṃ ekaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ bhavissati, satthu dve bhavissanti, tato satthāraṃ vanditvā mama vasanaṭṭhānameva gamissāmī’’ti.
七清净问的注释巴利
Sattavisuddhipañhavaṇṇanā
256 “他常常赞叹”的意思是:他〔长老,即舍利弗〕一次又一次地称扬、赞叹(布纳的)功德,并这样安住。据说,从那时起,长老〔舍利弗〕天天在僧众当中说:“听说有一位名叫布纳的满慈子,他不与四众混杂,为了见十力如来而前来;他会不会还没见到我就走了呢?”他这样说,是为了让新学比丘和中年比丘们记住,因此讲述具寿布纳的功德。据说他〔长老〕心里是这样想的:“年长的比丘们并不是任何时候都在寺院里;但如果有人讲说他的功德,那么无论哪位比丘见到他,都会(认出他来),然后回来告诉我。”这时,长老的一位同住者看见具寿满慈子拿着衣钵走进香室。他〔同住者〕怎么会认出他〔布纳〕呢?因为世尊说法时曾说到“布纳,布纳”,他〔同住者〕由此知道:“这就是那位长老,我的和尚常常赞叹他。”于是他〔同住者〕就去禀告长老〔舍利弗〕。他〔长老〕拿了坐具,所谓坐具,是指用布制成的垫子。长老却拿了一块皮革前去。所谓“背背相随”,就是随后随后。所谓“回头望头”,是指走在高处时看着前人的背,走在低处时看着前人的头,这也称为回头望头。他〔长老〕就这样跟着走。长老的脚步声音控制得很好,即使走得很近,也不以脚步声打扰他〔布纳〕;但他〔长老〕知道“这不是打招呼的时候”,所以并不太靠近。所谓盲林,是很大的一片;如果在某个地方藏身而看不见他〔布纳〕,就需要发出“贤友布纳,布纳”这样不悦耳的声音,所以他〔长老〕为了知道坐的地方,在不太远的地方,回头望头而行。所谓“日间住处坐下”,就是为了日间住处而坐下。巴利
256.Abhiṇhaṃ kittayamāno ahosīti punappunaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kittayamāno vihāsi. Thero kira tato paṭṭhāya divase divase saṅghamajjhe ‘‘puṇṇo kira nāma mantāṇiputto catūhi parisāhi saddhiṃ asaṃsaṭṭho, so dasabalassa dassanatthāya āgamissati; kacci nu kho maṃ adisvāva gamissatī’’ti theranavamajjhimānaṃ satikaraṇatthaṃ āyasmato puṇṇassa guṇaṃ bhāsati. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘mahallakabhikkhū nāma na sabbakālaṃ antovihāre honti; guṇakathāya panassa kathitāya yo ca naṃ bhikkhuṃ passissati; so āgantvā ārocessatī’’ti. Athāyaṃ therasseva saddhivihāriko taṃ āyasmantaṃ mantāṇiputtaṃ pattacīvaramādāya gandhakuṭiṃ pavisantaṃ addasa. Kathaṃ pana naṃ esa aññāsīti? Puṇṇa, puṇṇāti vatvā kathentassa bhagavato dhammakathāya aññāsi – ‘‘ayaṃ so thero, yassa me upajjhāyo abhiṇhaṃ kittayamāno hotī’’ti. Iti so āgantvā therassa ārocesi. Nisīdanaṃ ādāyāti nisīdanaṃ nāma sadasaṃ vuccati avāyimaṃ. Thero pana cammakhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā agamāsi. Piṭṭhito piṭṭhitoti pacchato pacchato. Sīsānulokīti yo unnataṭṭhāne piṭṭhiṃ passanto ninnaṭṭhāne sīsaṃ passanto gacchati, ayampi sīsānulokīti vuccati. Tādiso hutvā anubandhi. Thero hi kiñcāpi saṃyatapadasaddatāya accāsanno hutvā gacchantopi padasaddena na bādhati, ‘‘nāyaṃ sammodanakālo’’ti ñatvā pana na accāsanno, andhavanaṃ nāma mahantaṃ, ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nilīnaṃ apassantena, āvuso puṇṇa, puṇṇāti aphāsukasaddo kātabbo hotīti nisinnaṭṭhānajānanatthaṃ nātidūre hutvā sīsānulokī agamāsi. Divāvihāraṃ nisīdīti divāvihāratthāya nisīdi.
在这里,具寿富楼那出身北方婆罗门种姓,舍利弗长老也是。富楼那长老身色金黄,舍利弗长老也是。富楼那长老证得阿拉汉果定,舍利弗长老也是。富楼那长老圆满十万劫的愿行,舍利弗长老则圆满了十万劫再加一无数劫。富楼那长老获得无碍解,是大漏尽者,舍利弗长老也是。就这样,他们两位如同进入同一座黄金洞窟的两头狮子,如同踏上同一片嬉戏之地的两只老虎,如同走进同一片开满花的娑罗林的两尊六牙象王,如同进入同一片木棉林的两只金翅鸟王,如同乘上同一辆人车御乘的两位多闻天王,如同坐在同一块黄毛毯石上的两位帝释天神,如同身处同一座天宫之中的两位哈里大梵天王。他们两人同是婆罗门种姓,同是金色身,同是证得定者,同是圆满愿行者,同是获得无碍解的大漏尽者。当他们一同进入那片树林时,那林间之地便焕发出光彩。巴利
Tattha āyasmāpi puṇṇo udiccabrāhmaṇajacco, sāriputtattheropi. Puṇṇattheropi suvaṇṇavaṇṇo, sāriputtattheropi. Puṇṇattheropi arahattaphalasamāpattisamāpanno, sāriputtattheropi. Puṇṇattheropi kappasatasahassaṃ abhinīhārasampanno, sāriputtattheropi kappasatasahassādhikaṃ ekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Puṇṇattheropi paṭisambhidāpatto mahākhīṇāsavo, sāriputtattheropi. Iti ekaṃ kanakaguhaṃ paviṭṭhā dve sīhā viya, ekaṃ vijambhanabhūmiṃ otiṇṇā dve byagghā viya, ekaṃ supupphitasālavanaṃ paviṭṭhā dve chaddantanāgarājāno viya, ekaṃ simbalivanaṃ paviṭṭhā dve supaṇṇarājāno viya, ekaṃ naravāhanayānaṃ abhiruḷhā dve vessavaṇā viya, ekaṃ paṇḍukambalasilaṃ abhinisinnā dve sakkā viya, ekavimānabbhantaragatā dve hāritamahābrahmāno viya ca te dvepi brāhmaṇajaccā dvepi suvaṇṇavaṇṇā dvepi samāpattilābhino dvepi abhinīhārasampannā dvepi paṭisambhidāpattā mahākhīṇāsavā ekaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ anupaviṭṭhā taṃ vanaṭṭhānaṃ sobhayiṃsu.
贤友,我们是在世尊处修梵行吗?贤友,具寿是在我们的世尊身边修梵行吗?具寿舍利弗虽然知道对方在世尊处安住梵行,但为了引出谈论才这样问。因为前面的话如果没有落脚点,后面的话就无从生起,所以他这样问。那位长老表示认可,说:“是的,贤友。”这时,具寿舍利弗想听他回答问题,就依次问了七种清净:“贤友,是为了戒清净才在世尊身边修梵行吗?”这些问题的详细解说,在《清净道论》中已经说过。然而,具寿布纳认为,即使安住在四遍净戒等当中,梵行的安住也还没有达到顶点,所以他对这一切都以“贤友,并非如此”一一否定。巴利
Bhagavati no, āvuso, brahmacariyaṃ vussatīti, āvuso, kiṃ amhākaṃ bhagavato santike āyasmatā brahmacariyaṃ vussatīti? Idaṃ āyasmā sāriputto tassa bhagavati brahmacariyavāsaṃ jānantopi kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ pucchi. Purimakathāya hi appatiṭṭhitāya pacchimakathā na jāyati, tasmā evaṃ pucchi. Thero anujānanto ‘‘evamāvuso’’ti āha. Athassa pañhavissajjanaṃ sotukāmo āyasmā sāriputto ‘‘kiṃ nu kho āvuso sīlavisuddhatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti paṭipāṭiyā satta visuddhiyo pucchi. Tāsaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Āyasmā pana puṇṇo yasmā catupārisuddhisīlādīsu ṭhitassāpi brahmacariyavāso matthakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tasmā, ‘‘no hidaṃ, āvuso’’ti sabbaṃ paṭikkhipi.
“贤友,那到底是为了什么目的呢?”意思是:如果梵行不是为了戒清净等目的而修,那到底是为了什么而修?他这样问。“贤友,是为了无取著般涅槃。”这里,“无取著般涅槃”指的是无因缘的般涅槃。取有两种:执取和缘取。执取就是欲取等四种取;缘取就是“无明缘行”等所说的那些缘。其中,持执取观点的老师们说:无取著般涅槃,就是不以四种取中的任何一种执取任何法而生起的阿拉汉果。因为那个果不与取相应,不执取任何法,而且是在烦恼完全寂灭时生起的,所以称为般涅槃。持缘取观点的老师们则说:无取著般涅槃就是无因缘的般涅槃。他们解释说,依缘不再生起、无为、不死的境界本身,就是无取著般涅槃。这就是终点,就是尽头,就是完结。因为对于达到无因缘般涅槃的人来说,他的梵行安住才真正算到达了顶点,所以长老说“是为了无取著般涅槃这个目的”。接着,舍利弗尊者为了追问下去,又提出一个问题:“贤友,戒清净就是无取著般涅槃吗?”巴利
Kimatthaṃcarahāvusoti yadi sīlavisuddhiādīnaṃ atthāya brahmacariyaṃ na vussati, atha kimatthaṃ vussatīti pucchi. Anupādāparinibbānatthaṃ kho, āvusoti ettha anupādāparinibbānaṃ nāma appaccayaparinibbānaṃ. Dvedhā upādānāni gahaṇūpādānañca paccayūpādānañca. Gahaṇūpādānaṃ nāma kāmupādānādikaṃ catubbidhaṃ, paccayūpādānaṃ nāma avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti evaṃ vuttapaccayā. Tattha gahaṇūpādānavādino ācariyā anupādāparinibbānanti catūsu upādānesu aññatarenāpi kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā pavattaṃ arahattaphalaṃ anupādāparinibbānanti kathenti. Tañhi na ca upādānasampayuttaṃ hutvā kañci dhammaṃ upādiyati, kilesānañca parinibbutante jātattā parinibbānanti vuccati. Paccayūpādānavādino pana anupādāparinibbānanti appaccayaparinibbānaṃ. Paccayavasena anuppannaṃ asaṅkhataṃ amatadhātumeva anupādāparinibbānanti kathenti. Ayaṃ anto, ayaṃ koṭi, ayaṃ niṭṭhā. Appaccayaparinibbānaṃ pattassa hi brahmacariyavāso matthakaṃ patto nāma hoti, tasmā thero ‘‘anupādāparinibbānattha’’nti āha. Atha naṃ anuyuñjanto āyasmā sāriputto ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, sīlavisuddhi anupādāparinibbāna’’nti puna pucchaṃ ārabhi.
258 那位长老对所有环节也同样一一否定之后,在最后指出其中的过失,说道:“朋友,如果戒清净……”等等。在这里,“如果能施设”的意思是:如果可以被施设。把本有执取的法施设为无取著般涅槃,就是把有执取的法施设为无执取的法,把有因缘的法施设为无因缘的法,把有为法施设为无为法。而在智见清净的语境中,应当这样理解:把有因缘的法施设为无因缘的法,把有为法施设为无为法,这就是它的含义。“朋友,因为凡夫……”在这里应理解为指随顺轮回的世间愚痴凡夫。他由于连四遍净戒都不具备,所以完全与这些法不相应。“既然如此”的意思是:因为有些智者能通过譬喻来理解义理,所以我要为你作一个譬喻。巴利
258. Theropi sabbaparivattesu tatheva paṭikkhipitvā pariyosāne dosaṃ dassento sīlavisuddhiṃ ce, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha paññapeyyāti yadi paññapeyya. Saupādānaṃyeva samānaṃ anupādāparinibbānaṃ paññapeyyāti saṅgahaṇadhammameva niggahaṇadhammaṃ sappaccayadhammameva appaccayadhammaṃ saṅkhatadhammameva asaṅkhatadhammanti paññapeyyāti attho. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhiyaṃ pana sappaccayadhammameva appaccayadhammaṃ saṅkhatadhammameva asaṅkhatadhammanti paññapeyyāti ayameva attho gahetabbo. Puthujjano hi, āvusoti ettha vaṭṭānugato lokiyabālaputhujjano daṭṭhabbo. So hi catupārisuddhisīlamattassāpi abhāvato sabbaso aññatra imehi dhammehi. Tena hīti yena kāraṇena ekacce paṇḍitā upamāya atthaṃ jānanti, tena kāraṇena upamaṃ te karissāmīti attho.
《七车注释》巴利
Sattarathavinītavaṇṇanā
259 “七辆被调御的车”,指的是七辆配上已调御的良种骏马的车。“贤友,只是为了心清净”——贤友,这称为戒清净的法,它的目的只是为了心清净。“为了心清净的目的”是表示目的的从格。这里的意思是:称为戒清净的法,只有在为了达到那称为心清净的目的时,才应当被希求。而心清净正是戒清净的目标、终点和究竟。因为对于安住于心清净的人来说,戒清净的作用才可以说已经完成了。这个道理适用于所有文句。巴利
259.Sattarathavinītānīti vinītaassājāniyayutte satta rathe. Yāvadeva, cittavisuddhatthāti , āvuso, ayaṃ sīlavisuddhi nāma, yāvadeva, cittavisuddhatthā. Cittavisuddhatthāti nissakkavacanametaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha attho, yāvadeva, cittavisuddhisaṅkhātā atthā, tāva ayaṃ sīlavisuddhi nāma icchitabbā. Yā pana ayaṃ cittavisuddhi, esā sīlavisuddhiyā attho, ayaṃ koṭi, idaṃ pariyosānaṃ, cittavisuddhiyaṃ ṭhitassa hi sīlavisuddhikiccaṃ kataṃ nāma hotīti. Esa nayo sabbapadesu.
这里,经文与譬喻的对应关系是这样的:应当把畏惧老死的瑜伽行者,看作憍萨罗国的波斯匿王。舍卫城好比有身见之城,娑鸡帝城好比涅槃之城。波斯匿王在娑鸡帝城有一件能带来利益、必须赶快去办妥的紧急事务,这件事发生的时刻,就好比瑜伽行者对于尚未证悟的四圣谛,生起必须证悟这件大事的时刻。七辆马车好比七清净,登上第一辆马车的时刻,好比安住在戒清净的时刻;从第一辆马车依次登上第二辆等马车的时刻,好比从戒清净等依次安住在心清净等的时刻。乘着第七辆马车,到了娑鸡帝城的内宫门口下车,登上高楼,在亲友们的围绕下享用美味饮食的时刻,应当看作瑜伽行者依智见清净断尽一切烦恼后,登上殊胜的正法高楼,以涅槃为所缘而入果等至,为五十多个善法所围绕,坐在灭尽定的床座上,正在体验出世间之乐的时刻。巴利
Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – rājā pasenadi kosalo viya hi jarāmaraṇabhīruko yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo. Sāvatthinagaraṃ viya sakkāyanagaraṃ, sāketanagaraṃ viya nibbānanagaraṃ, rañño sākete vaḍḍhiāvahassa sīghaṃ gantvā pāpuṇitabbassa accāyikassa kiccassa uppādakālo viya yogino anabhisametānaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ abhisamayakiccassa uppādakālo. Satta rathavinītāni viya satta visuddhiyo, paṭhamaṃ rathavinītaṃ āruḷhakālo viya sīlavisuddhiyaṃ ṭhitakālo, paṭhamarathavinītādīhi dutiyādīni āruḷhakālo viya sīlavisuddhiādīhi cittavisuddhiādīsu ṭhitakālo. Sattamena rathavinītena sākete antepuradvāre oruyha uparipāsāde ñātimittagaṇaparivutassa surasabhojanaparibhogakālo viya yogino ñāṇadassanavisuddhiyā sabbakilese khepetvā dhammavarapāsādaṃ āruyha paropaṇṇāsakusaladhammaparivārassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nirodhasayane nisinnassa lokuttarasukhānubhavanakālo daṭṭhabbo.
就这样,法将舍利弗长老向具寿富楼那——这位获得十种论事之法的人,询问了七清净。具寿富楼那则解答了十种论事。不过,法将这样发问,是知道了才问,还是不知道就问?是通达了论场、在自领域内发问,还是未通达论场、在自领域外发问?同样,富楼那长老是知道了才解答,还是不知道就解答?是通达了论场、在自领域内解答,还是未通达论场、在自领域外解答?因为,若说“知道、通达论场、在自领域内发问”,那说的就是法将本人。若说“知道、通达论场、在自领域内解答”,那说的就是富楼那长老本人。因为,在七清净中简略说的内容,在十论事中被详细展开;在十论事中简略说的内容,在七清净中被详细展开。应当按这个思路来理解。巴利
Iti āyasmantaṃ puṇṇaṃ dasakathāvatthulābhiṃ dhammasenāpatisāriputtatthero satta visuddhiyo pucchi. Āyasmā puṇṇo dasa kathāvatthūni vissajjesi. Evaṃ pucchanto pana dhammasenāpati kiṃ jānitvā pucchi, udāhu ajānitvā? Titthakusalo vā pana hutvā visayasmiṃ pucchi, udāhu atitthakusalo hutvā avisayasmiṃ? Puṇṇattheropi ca kiṃ jānitvā vissajjesi, udāhu ajānitvā? Titthakusalo vā pana hutvā visayasmiṃ vissajjesi, udāhu atitthakusalo hutvā avisayeti? Jānitvā titthakusalo hutvā visaye pucchīti hi vadamāno dhammasenāpatiṃyeva vadeyya. Jānitvā titthakusalo hutvā visaye vissajjesīti vadamāno puṇṇattheraṃyeva vadeyya. Yañhi visuddhīsu saṃkhittaṃ, taṃ kathāvatthūsu vitthiṇṇaṃ. Yaṃ kathāvatthūsu saṃkhittaṃ, taṃ visuddhīsu vitthiṇṇaṃ. Tadaminā nayena veditabbaṃ.
在诸清净中,戒清净是以四种论事的形式出现的:少欲论、知足论、不杂居论和戒论。心清净是以三种论事的形式出现的:远离论、精进策励论和定论。这样,在诸清净中简略说的内容,在论事中被详细展开。反过来,在论事中,慧论是以五种清净的形式出现的:见清净、度疑清净、道非道智见清净、行道智见清净和智见清净。这样,在论事中简略说的内容,在诸清净中被详细展开。因此,舍利弗长老问七清净时,并没有问别的,问的正是这十种论事。富楼那长老回答七清净时,也没有回答别的,回答的正是这十种论事。应当这样理解:这两位长老都是知道、精通论题之后,仅在其领域内提问和回答的。巴利
Visuddhīsu hi ekā sīlavisuddhi cattāri kathāvatthūni hutvā āgatā appicchakathā santuṭṭhikathā asaṃsaggakathā, sīlakathāti. Ekā cittavisuddhi tīṇi kathāvatthūni hutvā āgatā – pavivekakathā, vīriyārambhakathā, samādhikathāti, evaṃ tāva yaṃ visuddhīsu saṃkhittaṃ, taṃ kathāvatthūsu vitthiṇṇaṃ. Kathāvatthūsu pana ekā paññākathā pañca visuddhiyo hutvā āgatā – diṭṭhivisuddhi, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi, ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti, evaṃ yaṃ kathāvatthūsu saṃkhittaṃ, taṃ visuddhīsu vitthiṇṇaṃ. Tasmā sāriputtatthero satta visuddhiyo pucchanto na aññaṃ pucchi, dasa kathāvatthūniyeva pucchi. Puṇṇattheropi satta visuddhiyo vissajjento na aññaṃ vissajjesi, dasa kathāvatthūniyeva vissajjesīti. Iti ubhopete jānitvā titthakusalā hutvā visayeva pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu ceva vissajjesuṃ cāti veditabbo.
260 尊者您叫什么名字?——长老并不是不知道他的名字,而是知道却故意问,好借此机会互相问候寒暄。那么尊者您呢?——这是长老在友好寒暄时说的。曼塔尼之子,就是婆罗门女曼塔尼的儿子。正如那样这里的“那样”只是个虚词,没有实义。整句的意思是说:就像博学的弟子应该解说的那样,他正是这样解说的。一再深入、一再深入,意思是深入到十种论题中去,进入其中。用衣布头垫,这里“衣”指布料,“头垫”指垫头布。就算把布料和垫头布放在头上,让尊者坐在上面,带着他到处走,同梵行者也能有机会见到他——对他们来说,能见到面本身就是一种收获。这是用一种极端的假设来说明经常见面的办法。因为如果不这样带着走,想提问或想听法的人就得四处打听:“长老站在哪里?坐在哪里?”而这样带着走的话,无论什么时候想见,都可以立刻把他从头上请下来,请他坐在贵重的座位上,然后提问或听法。就这样,他用一种极端的假设,指出了经常见面的方法。巴利
260.Ko nāmo āyasmāti na thero tassa nāmaṃ na jānāti. Jānantoyeva pana sammodituṃ labhissāmīti pucchi. Kathañca panāyasmantanti idaṃ pana thero sammodamāno āha. Mantāṇiputtoti mantāṇiyā brāhmaṇiyā putto. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, yathā sutavatā sāvakena byākātabbā, evameva byākatāti ayamettha saṅkhepattho. Anumassa anumassāti dasa kathāvatthūni ogāhetvā anupavisitvā. Celaṇḍupakenāti ettha celaṃ vuccati vatthaṃ, aṇḍupakaṃ cumbaṭakaṃ. Vatthacumbaṭakaṃ sīse katvā āyasmantaṃ tattha nisīdāpetvā pariharantāpi sabrahmacārī dassanāya labheyyuṃ, evaṃ laddhadassanampi tesaṃ lābhāyevāti aṭṭhānaparikappena abhiṇhadassanassa upāyaṃ dassesi. Evaṃ apariharantena hi pañhaṃ vā pucchitukāmena dhammaṃ vā sotukāmena ‘‘thero kattha ṭhito kattha nisinno’’ti pariyesantena caritabbaṃ hoti. Evaṃ pariharantā pana icchiticchitakkhaṇeyeva sīsato oropetvā mahārahe āsane nisīdāpetvā sakkā honti pañhaṃ vā pucchituṃ dhammaṃ vā sotuṃ. Iti aṭṭhānaparikappena abhiṇhadassanassa upāyaṃ dassesi.
“舍利弗”的意思是婆罗门女舍利之子,同梵行者们就是这样知道我的。“与导师同模”的意思是和大师相似。就这样,具寿布纳仅凭一句话,就像把长老安置到触及月亮圆盘一般,把舍利弗长老高高托举了起来。因为就在这一点上,长老纯粹说法的特质变得清清楚楚。好比称赞一位大臣或国师伟大时,会说他就如同国王一样;称赞一头牛时,会说它有大象那么大的分量;称赞一个池塘时,会说它有大海那么大的分量;称赞光明时,会说它有日月那么亮——到了这一步,对这些东西的伟大,就再也没有更高的说法了。称赞一位声闻弟子伟大时,会说他就如同大师的对等者,到了这一步,对他的伟大也就再没有别的说法了。就这样,具寿布纳仅凭一句话,就像把长老安置到触及月亮圆盘一般,把长老高高托举了起来。巴利
Sāriputtoti ca pana manti sāriyā brāhmaṇiyā puttoti ca pana evaṃ maṃ sabrahmacārī jānanti. Satthukappenāti satthusadisena. Iti ekapadeneva āyasmā puṇṇo sāriputtattheraṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ āhacca ṭhapento viya ukkhipi. Therassa hi imasmiṃ ṭhāne ekantadhammakathikabhāvo pākaṭo ahosi. Amaccañhi purohitaṃ mahantoti vadamāno rājasadisoti vadeyya, goṇaṃ hatthippamāṇoti, vāpiṃ samuddappamāṇoti, ālokaṃ candimasūriyālokappamāṇoti, ito paraṃ etesaṃ mahantabhāvakathā nāma natthi. Sāvakampi mahāti vadanto satthupaṭibhāgoti vadeyya, ito paraṃ tassa mahantabhāvakathā nāma natthi. Iccāyasmā puṇṇo ekapadeneva theraṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ āhacca ṭhapento viya ukkhipi.
就算只是这么一点,我们也不会答不上来。因为证得无碍解的人,根本不存在答不上来的情况。不过,他举的那个譬喻,我们不必再举譬喻,直接讲说义理就好。譬喻本来就是为那些不懂的人举的——这是这里论师的用意。但在注释书里,却否定了这个说法,认为即使是在诸佛面前,譬喻也照样可以举;这位长老只是出于对长老的恭敬,才这样说的。巴利
Ettakampi no nappaṭibhāseyyāti paṭisambhidāpattassa appaṭibhānaṃ nāma natthi. Yā panāyaṃ upamā āhaṭā, taṃ na āhareyyāma, atthameva katheyyāma. Upamā hi ajānantānaṃ āharīyatīti ayamettha adhippāyo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana idampi paṭikkhipitvā upamā nāma buddhānampi santike āharīyati, theraṃ panesa apacāyamāno evamāhāti.
对每一个都逐一追问:这是深入十种论事之后,一再追问而发问的。那么,是发问难,还是解答难呢?学后发问并不难,解答才难。无论是有因还是有据地发问和解答,两者都难。他们一同随喜:就是以同等的心随喜。这样,开示就顺着前后的关联而圆满结束了。巴利
Anumassa anumassa pucchitāti dasa kathāvatthūni ogāhetvā ogāhetvā pucchitā. Kiṃ pana pañhassa pucchanaṃ bhāriyaṃ, udāhu vissajjananti? Uggahetvā pucchanaṃ no bhāriyaṃ, vissajjanaṃ pana bhāriyaṃ. Sahetukaṃ vā sakāraṇaṃ katvā pucchanampi vissajjanampi bhāriyameva. Samanumodiṃsūti samacittā hutvā anumodiṃsu. Iti yathānusandhināva desanā niṭṭhitāti.
《饵食经》注释巴利
5. Nivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
261 “如是我闻”以下是《饵食经》。其中,“诱饵猎人”是指为了捕捉鹿群,在森林里播撒草籽,心想“等鹿来吃这些草,我就能轻松抓住它们”的人。“Nivāpa”是饵食的意思。“Nivutta”是已播撒的意思。“Migajātā”指鹿群。“Anupakhajjā”是进入之后的意思。“Mucchitā”是被渴爱迷醉所迷醉,意思是渴爱进入心中,令心达到昏醉的状态。“Madaṃ āpajjissantī”是说将陷入骄慢之醉。“Pamāda”是忘失正念的状态。“Yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissantī”是说:我们想怎样就怎样处置它们。在这片诱饵地中,据说有一种叫“暑季极妙”的诱饵草,随着暑热越来越盛,它就像野生稻丛或厚密云层一样,长得密密实实。猎人们在靠近水源、方便取水的地方耕好地、播下种、围起篱笆、装上大门,然后守着。到了大热时节,所有草都干枯了,连润湿舌头的滴水都很难得到。那时鹿群吃着干草和枯叶,战战兢兢地四处游荡,一闻到诱饵草的香气,就不管被杀、被绑等危险,成群越过篱笆钻进来。因为它们对那片诱饵草实在太喜爱、太中意了。猎人看见它们来了,就装作放逸两三天,把门开着站在那里。诱饵地里面到处都有水坑,鹿群从开着的门进来,随便吃一点、喝一点就走了。第二天它们什么也不做,只是摇着耳朵,不慌不忙地吃吃喝喝再走。到了第三天,它们觉得没人会拿它们怎么样,就尽情吃喝,然后走进草丛中央躺下来。猎人们知道它们已经放逸了,就关上大门,团团围住,从边上开始敲打驱赶。就这样,那些鹿在那片诱饵地里,就成了猎人想怎么处置就怎么处置的对象。巴利
261.Evaṃme sutanti nivāpasuttaṃ. Tattha nevāpikoti yo migānaṃ gahaṇatthāya araññe tiṇabījāni vapati ‘‘idaṃ tiṇaṃ khādituṃ āgate mige sukhaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti. Nivāpanti vappaṃ. Nivuttanti vapitaṃ. Migajātāti migaghaṭā. Anupakhajjāti anupavisitvā. Mucchitāti taṇhāmucchanāya mucchitā, taṇhāya hadayaṃ pavisitvā mucchanākāraṃ pāpitāti attho. Madaṃ āpajjissantīti mānamadaṃ āpajjissanti. Pamādanti vissaṭṭhasatibhāvaṃ. Yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavissantīti yathā icchissāma, tathā kātabbā bhavissanti. Imasmiṃ nivāpeti imasmiṃ nivāpaṭṭhāne. Ekaṃ kira nivāpatiṇaṃ nāma atthi nidāghabhaddakaṃ, taṃ yathā yathā nidāgho hoti, tathā tathā nīvāravanaṃ viya meghamālā viya ca ekagghanaṃ hoti, taṃ luddakā ekasmiṃ udakaphāsukaṭṭhāne kasitvā vapitvā vatiṃ katvā dvāraṃ yojetvā rakkhanti. Atha yadā mahānidāghe sabbatiṇāni sukkhāni honti, jivhātemanamattampi udakaṃ dullabhaṃ hoti, tadā migajātā sukkhatiṇāni ceva purāṇapaṇṇāni ca khādantā kampamānā viya vicarantā nivāpatiṇassa gandhaṃ ghāyitvā vadhabandhanādīni agaṇayitvā vatiṃ ajjhottharantā pavisanti. Tesañhi nivāpatiṇaṃ ativiya piyaṃ hoti manāpaṃ. Nevāpiko te disvā dve tīṇi divasāni pamatto viya hoti, dvāraṃ vivaritvā tiṭṭhati. Antonivāpaṭṭhāne tahiṃ tahiṃ udakaāvāṭakāpi honti, migā vivaṭadvārena pavisitvā khāditamattakaṃ pivitamattakameva katvā pakkamanti, punadivase kiñci na karontīti kaṇṇe cālayamānā khāditvā pivitvā ataramānā gacchanti, punadivase koci kiñci kattā natthīti yāvadatthaṃ khāditvā pivitvā maṇḍalagumbaṃ pavisitvā nipajjanti. Luddakā tesaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ jānitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya samparivāretvā koṭito paṭṭhāya koṭṭetvā gacchanti, evaṃ te tasmiṃ nivāpe nevāpikassa yathākāmakaraṇīyā bhavanti.
262 “在此,比丘们”这句话里,“比丘们”是称呼;“在此”指的是在那些鹿群当中。所谓“第一群鹿”,其实鹿群本来并没有第一、第二这样的名称。世尊只是按照它们到来的先后顺序来安排,给它们安上第一、第二、第三、第四的名称,以此来作开示。“神通威力”是指能随心所欲地行事;这里所说的“神通”和“威力”,指的就是那种自在掌控的能力。巴利
262.Tatra, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, tesu migajātesu. Paṭhamā migajātāti, migajātā paṭhamadutiyā nāma natthi. Bhagavā pana āgatapaṭipāṭivasena kappetvā paṭhamā, dutiyā, tatiyā , catutthāti nāmaṃ āropetvā dassesi. Iddhānubhāvāti yathākāmaṃ kattabbabhāvato; vasībhāvoyeva hi ettha iddhīti ca ānubhāvoti ca adhippeto.
263 “怖畏受用”是指因为害怕而受用。“强力的精进”是指不断来回活动的风界,这里的意思是那股精进力退失了。巴利
263.Bhayabhogāti bhayena bhogato. Balavīriyanti aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇavāyodhātu, sā parihāyīti attho.
264 它们心想:“躺在里面吃也有危险,从外面跑来吃也有危险,那我们不如就靠着那个投放诱饵的地方,在一旁安顿下来吧。”于是它们便这样想:靠着那个投放诱饵的地方,在一边找个地方安顿下来。所谓“它们靠近而安顿了住处”,是说猎人们并非时时刻刻都保持警觉。它们想:“我们躺在各处圆形的树丛里、树篱脚下,等他们去洗脸或去吃饭而离开时,就溜进投放诱饵的地方,吃上一点,然后回到我们住的地方去。”于是它们靠着投放诱饵的地方,在密林、树丛、树篱脚下等处安顿了住处。所谓“它们吃了”,是说鹿按上述方式摸清了猎人们放逸的时机后,便飞快地溜进去吃了。所谓“Ketabino”,是指学会了诡计的狡诈之徒。所谓“有神通者”,是指像有神通的人一样。所谓“他方之人”,是指夜叉。所谓“这些不是鹿类”,是指“它们通过这个或那个地方来,到那边去,这些我们不知道”。所谓“用棍棒和网”,是指用棍棒和网。所谓“从四周包围了周围一大片地方”,是指“这些极其狡猾,不会走远,会躺在近处”;于是他们把投放诱饵的田地周围那一大片广大的地方从四周包围了起来。所谓“他们看见了”,是指这样包围之后,从四周摇动网,一边摇一边看,就这样看见了。所谓“Yattha te”,是指“在那些他们进入陷阱的地方,他们看见了那个地方”,这是意思。巴利
264.Upanissāya āsayaṃ kappeyyāmāti anto nipajjitvā khādantānampi bhayameva, bāhirato āgantvā khādantānampi bhayameva, mayaṃ pana amuṃ nivāpaṭṭhānaṃ nissāya ekamante āsayaṃ kappeyyāmāti cintayiṃsu. Upanissāyaāsayaṃ kappayiṃsūti luddakā nāma na sabbakālaṃ appamattā honti. Mayaṃ tattha tattha maṇḍalagumbesu ceva vatipādesu ca nipajjitvā etesu mukhadhovanatthaṃ vā āhārakiccakaraṇatthaṃ vā pakkantesu nivāpavatthuṃ pavisitvā khāditamattaṃ katvā amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisissāmāti nivāpavatthuṃ upanissāya gahanesu gumbavatipādādīsu āsayaṃ kappayiṃsu. Bhuñjiṃsūti vuttanayena luddakānaṃ pamādakālaṃ ñatvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ pavisitvā bhuñjiṃsu. Ketabinoti sikkhitakerāṭikā. Iddhimantāti iddhimanto viya. Parajanāti yakkhā. Ime na migajātāti. Āgatiṃ vā gatiṃ vāti iminā nāma ṭhānena āgacchanti, amutra gacchantīti idaṃ nesaṃ na jānāma. Daṇḍavākarāhīti daṇḍavākarajālehi. Samantā sappadesaṃ anuparivāresunti atimāyāvino ete, na dūraṃ gamissanti, santikeyeva nipannā bhavissantīti nivāpakkhettassa samantā sappadesaṃ mahantaṃ okāsaṃ anuparivāresuṃ. Addasaṃsūti evaṃ parivāretvā vākarajālaṃ samantato cāletvā olokentā addasaṃsu. Yattha teti yasmiṃ ṭhāne te gāhaṃ agamaṃsu, taṃ ṭhānaṃ addasaṃsūti attho.
265 据说他们是这样想的:“躺在里面吃也有危险,从外边进来吃也有危险,在附近住着吃也有危险,因为他们都会被罗网包围而遭捕捉。”因此他们心里想:“我们干脆去一个猎人和他的随从都到不了、也走不到的地方,在那里到处安顿下来吧。”
“会去冲撞别的鹿”是说:住在更远处的其他鹿会来冲撞它们,那些被冲撞的鹿又会去冲撞住得更远的其他鹿。这样一来,我们布下的这个诱饵,所有鹿群、鹿队都会彻底放弃、完全丢开。
“我们就袖手旁观”是说:我们不去参与抓它们。因为对那些以各种方式前来的鹿,不管是幼鹿、老鹿、瘦弱的还是离群的,总还可能抓得到;可要是它们根本不来了,那就什么都捞不着。
“比丘们,他们就袖手旁观了”是说:他们这样想过之后,就真的不再去管了。巴利
265.Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yattha agatīti te kira evaṃ cintayiṃsu – ‘‘anto nipajjitvā anto khādantānampi bhayameva, bāhirato āgantvā khādantānampi santike vasitvā khādantānampi bhayameva, tepi hi vākarajālena parikkhipitvā gahitāyevā’’ti, tena tesaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘yaṃnūna mayaṃ yattha nevāpikassa ca nevāpikaparisāya ca agati avisayo, tattha tattha seyyaṃ kappeyyāmā’’ti. Aññe ghaṭṭessantīti tato tato dūrataravāsino aññe ghaṭṭessanti. Te ghaṭṭitā aññeti tepi ghaṭṭitā aññe tato dūrataravāsino ghaṭṭessanti. Evaṃ imaṃnivāpaṃ nivuttaṃ sabbaso migajātā parimuccissantīti evaṃ imaṃ amhehi nivuttaṃ nivāpaṃ sabbe migaghaṭā migasaṅghā vissajjessanti pariccajissanti. Ajjhupekkheyyāmāti tesaṃ gahaṇe abyāvaṭā bhaveyyāmāti; yathā tathā āgacchantesu hi taruṇapotako vā mahallako vā dubbalo vā yūthaparihīno vā sakkā honti laddhuṃ, anāgacchantesu kiñci natthi. Ajjhupekkhiṃsu kho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ cintetvā abyāvaṭāva ahesuṃ.
267 魔罗布下的那个诱饵,以及那些世间利益,这里说的诱饵或世间利益,都是指作为轮回诱饵的五种欲乐。魔罗并不是像撒种子那样到处撒欲乐,但对于贪着欲乐的人,他能在上面施加控制,所以五种欲乐就叫作魔罗的诱饵。因此说魔罗布下的那个诱饵。他们没能脱离魔罗的神通威力,意思是他们落入了魔罗的掌控,被魔罗随意摆布。这是根据那个带着妻儿出家的事例引出的譬喻。巴利
267.Amuṃnivāpaṃ nivuttaṃ mārassa amūni ca lokāmisānīti ettha nivāpoti vā lokāmisānīti vā vaṭṭāmisabhūtānaṃ pañcannaṃ kāmaguṇānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Māro na ca bījāni viya kāmaguṇe vapento āhiṇḍati, kāmaguṇagiddhānaṃ pana upari vasaṃ vatteti, tasmā kāmaguṇā mārassa nivāpā nāma honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘amuṃ nivāpaṃ nivuttaṃ mārassā’’ti. Na parimucciṃsu mārassa iddhānubhāvāti mārassa vasaṃ gatā ahesuṃ, yathākāmakaraṇīyā. Ayaṃ saputtabhariyapabbajjāya āgataupamā.
268 “心解脱退失”在这里的意思是:所谓心解脱,就是指心里生起“我们要去林中居住”这样的意愿;这个意愿退失了,就是这里的意思。“在那同类的譬喻中,我说这第二群便是如此”——这是用如法婆罗门的出家方式作的譬喻。婆罗门依童真梵行生活四十八年后,因为害怕轮回从此断绝,心想“要把家系延续下去”,于是寻求财富,娶了妻子,在家中过日子。生下一个儿子时,他们便说:“我们的儿子已经出生,轮回不会断绝,家系已经接续上了。”此后,他们要么再次离家出家,要么就继续过着夫妻共住的生活。巴利
268.Cetovimutti parihāyīti ettha cetovimutti nāma araññe vasissāmāti uppannaajjhāsayo; so parihāyīti attho. Tathūpame ahaṃ ime dutiyeti ayaṃ brāhmaṇadhammikapabbajjāya upamā. Brāhmaṇā hi aṭṭhacattālīsavassāni komārabrahmacariyaṃ caritvā vaṭṭupacchedabhayena paveṇiṃ ghaṭayissāmāti dhanaṃ pariyesitvā bhariyaṃ gahetvā agāramajjhe vasantā ekasmiṃ putte jāte ‘‘amhākaṃ putto jāto vaṭṭaṃ na ucchinnaṃ paveṇi ghaṭitā’’ti puna nikkhamitvā pabbajanti vā tameva vā sa’kalattavāsaṃ vasanti.
269 比丘们,这第三类沙门婆罗门也同样没能解脱。和前两类一样,他们也没能摆脱魔罗的神通威力,照样被魔罗随意摆布。那他们到底做了什么呢?他们走进村庄、城镇和王都,在各处的园林和苑囿里搭建修行住所,住在那里教导良家子弟学习象术、马术、车术等各种技艺。就这样,他们像第三群被围网困住的鹿一样,被邪恶的魔罗的邪见之网团团围住,成了任魔罗随意摆布的人。巴利
269.Evañhi te, bhikkhave, tatiyāpi samaṇabrāhmaṇā na parimucciṃsūti purimā viya tepi mārassa iddhānubhāvā na mucciṃsu; yathākāmakaraṇīyāva ahesuṃ. Kiṃ pana te akaṃsūti? Gāmanigamarājadhāniyo osaritvā tesu tesu ārāmauyyānaṭṭhānesu assamaṃ māpetvā nivasantā kuladārake hatthiassarathasippādīni nānappakārāni sippāni sikkhāpesuṃ. Iti te vākarajālena tatiyā migajātā viya mārassa pāpimato diṭṭhijālena parikkhipitvā yathākāmakaraṇīyā ahesuṃ.
270 我说“这些是第四类,如是譬喻”,这就是本教法中所引出的譬喻。巴利
270.Tathūpameahaṃ ime catuttheti ayaṃ imassa sāsanassa upamā āhaṭā.
271 他让魔罗瞎了眼:这并不是说弄瞎了魔罗的眼睛。而是说,当一位比丘进入以观智为基础的禅那时,他的心依着某个所缘而运作,魔罗就看不见他了。因此说“他让魔罗瞎了眼”。把魔罗的眼睛打得无处可寻:意思是用同样的方式,让魔罗的眼睛变得无迹可寻、没有落脚处、没有依止、没有所缘,就是这样把它打掉。他达到了让邪恶的魔罗看不见的地步:也就是用同样的方式,达到了让邪恶的魔罗看不见他的地步。因为魔罗用他的肉眼,根本看不见那位进入以观智为基础禅那的比丘的智慧之身。他以智慧照见之后,诸漏灭尽:意思是,他以道智照见四圣谛之后,四种漏就彻底断尽了。已渡越世间中的贪著:“世间中的贪著”是指众生以执著、散布的状态而得名的贪著。或者也可以这样问:“贪著”凭什么意义叫“贪著”?因为它散开,所以叫贪著;因为它遍满,所以叫贪著;因为它广大,所以叫贪著;因为它宽阔,所以叫贪著;因为它不平正,所以叫贪著;因为它能毒害,所以叫贪著;因为它携带毒,所以叫贪著;因为它欺骗,所以叫贪著;因为它以毒为根,所以叫贪著;因为它以毒为果,所以叫贪著;因为它以毒为受用,所以叫贪著。或者说,那渴爱在色、声、香、味、触中是宽阔的,所以叫贪著。如此,对于名为贪著的渴爱,他已经渡过、完全渡过、超越过去了。因此说“已渡越世间中的贪著”。巴利
271.Andhamakāsi māranti na mārassa akkhīni bhindi. Vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpannassa pana bhikkhuno imaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ nissāya cittaṃ vattatīti māro passituṃ na sakkoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘andhamakāsi māra’’nti. Apadaṃ vadhitvā māracakkhunti teneva pariyāyena yathā mārassa cakkhu apadaṃ hoti nippadaṃ, appatiṭṭhaṃ, nirārammaṇaṃ, evaṃ vadhitvāti attho. Adassanaṃ gato pāpimatoti teneva pariyāyena mārassa pāpimato adassanaṃ gato. Na hi so attano maṃsacakkhunā tassa vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpannassa bhikkhuno ñāṇasarīraṃ daṭṭhuṃ sakkoti. Paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontīti maggapaññāya cattāri ariyasaccāni disvā cattāro āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Tiṇṇo loke visattikanti loke sattavisattabhāvena visattikāti evaṃ saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Atha vā ‘‘visattikāti kenaṭṭhena visattikā? Visatāti visattikā visaṭāti visattikā, vipulāti visattikā, visālāti visattikā, visamāti visattikā, visakkatīti visattikā, visaṃ haratīti visattikā, visaṃvādikāti visattikā, visamūlāti visattikā, visaphalāti visattikā, visaparibhogāti visattikā, visālā vā pana sā taṇhā rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe’’ti (mahāni. 3; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 22, khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 124) visattikā. Evaṃ visattikāti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ taṇhaṃ tiṇṇo nittiṇṇo uttiṇṇo. Tena vuccati – ‘‘tiṇṇo loke visattika’’nti.
第6篇 陷阱堆经的注释巴利
6. Pāsarāsisuttavaṇṇanā
272 “如是我闻”等话,是《陷阱堆经》的开头。在那里,他们恳请时说:“贤友,萨度。”据说,这五百位比丘是乡下地方的人,为了“见十力”而来到舍卫城。他们虽然得到了见世尊的机会,却还没能听到说法。他们因为对世尊的恭敬,不敢说:“尊者,请为我们说法。”因为诸佛确实威严难近,就像独行的狮子兽王、发情的大象、竖起头冠的毒蛇、熊熊燃烧的大火堆一样,难以靠近。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
272.Evaṃme sutanti pāsarāsisuttaṃ. Tattha sādhu mayaṃ, āvusoti āyācantā bhaṇanti. Ete kira pañcasatā bhikkhū janapadavāsino ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmā’’ti sāvatthiṃ anuppattā. Satthudassanaṃ pana etehi laddhaṃ, dhammiṃ kathaṃ na tāva suṇanti. Te satthugāravena ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante , dhammakathaṃ kathethā’’ti vattuṃ na sakkonti. Buddhā hi garū honti, ekacāriko sīho migarājā viya, pabhinnakuñjaro viya, phaṇakataāsīviso viya, mahāaggikkhandho viya ca durāsadā vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 就像凶猛的毒蛇,又像兽王雄狮;
就像长着象牙的龙象一样,诸佛也是如此难以接近。”巴利
‘‘Āsīviso yathā ghoro, migarājāva kesarī; Nāgova kuñjaro dantī, evaṃ buddhā durāsadā’’ti.
那些比丘自己没办法亲自去请求这位难以接近的导师,于是就来恳请阿难尊者,说道:“贤友,那就拜托您了。”巴利
Evaṃ durāsadaṃ satthāraṃ te bhikkhū sayaṃ yācituṃ asakkontā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ yācamānā ‘‘sādhu mayaṃ, āvuso’’ti āhaṃsu.
“或许能吧”——意思是“也许你们能得到”。那么,长老为什么对那些比丘说“你们去兰玛咖婆罗门的修行处”呢?因为他清楚世尊一贯的做法。十力世尊的做法,长老都看在眼里。长老知道:“今天世尊在祇园住下后,会去东园作日间住处;今天在东园住下后,会回祇园作日间住处;今天会独自一人进城乞食;今天会由比丘僧团围绕,在这个时候出发游化各地。”他是靠他心通知道这些的吗?不是。他是靠推理的智慧,根据世尊一贯的做法,掌握其中的规律而知道的。因为,如果世尊打算在祇园住下后去东园作日间住处,就会表现出收拾坐卧具和资具物品的样子,长老便跟着收拾洒扫工具、清理垃圾等。在东园住下后,为了日间住处而回祇园时,也是同样的情形。巴利
Appeva nāmāti api nāma labheyyātha. Kasmā pana thero te bhikkhū ‘‘rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamaṃ upasaṅkameyyāthā’’ti āha? Pākaṭakiriyatāya. Dasabalassa hi kiriyā therassa pākaṭā hoti; jānāti thero, ‘‘ajja satthā jetavane vasitvā pubbārāme divāvihāraṃ karissati; ajja pubbārāme vasitvā jetavane divāvihāraṃ karissati; ajja ekakova piṇḍāya pavisissati; ajja bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto imasmiṃ kāle janapadacārikaṃ nikkhamissatī’’ti. Kiṃ panassa evaṃ jānanatthaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ atthīti? Natthi. Anumānabuddhiyā pana katakiriyāya nayaggāhena jānāti. Yañhi divasaṃ bhagavā jetavane vasitvā pubbārāme divāvihāraṃ kātukāmo hoti, tadā senāsanaparikkhārabhaṇḍānaṃ paṭisāmanākāraṃ dasseti, thero sammajjanisaṅkārachaḍḍanakādīni paṭisāmeti. Pubbārāme vasitvā jetavanaṃ divāvihārāya āgamanakālepi eseva nayo.
不过,当世尊想独自进城乞食时,他清晨起来先料理好身体,然后进入香室,关上门,进入果定而坐。长老凭这个迹象知道:“今天世尊是见到了应受教化的亲族之后才坐下的。”于是以这个想头通知比丘们:“贤友们,今天世尊想独自进城,你们该准备去乞食了。”当世尊想由比丘僧团陪同进城时,他就把香室的门半掩着,进入果定而坐。长老凭这个迹象知道后,便通知比丘们去拿钵和衣。当世尊想出发到各地游行时,他就会多吃一两口食物,并且时常登上经行道来回经行。长老凭这个迹象知道后,对比丘们说:“贤友们,世尊想到各地游行了,你们该做自己该做的事了。”巴利
Yadā pana ekako piṇḍāya pavisitukāmo hoti, tadā pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdati. Thero ‘‘ajja bhagavā bodhaneyyabandhavaṃ disvā nisinno’’ti tāya saññāya ñatvā ‘‘ajja, āvuso, bhagavā ekako pavisitukāmo, tumhe bhikkhācārasajjā hothā’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ saññaṃ deti. Yadā pana bhikkhusaṅghaparivāro pavisitukāmo hoti, tadā gandhakuṭidvāraṃ upaḍḍhapidahitaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdati, thero tāya saññāya ñatvā pattacīvaraggahaṇatthāya bhikkhūnaṃ saññaṃ deti. Yadā janapadacārikaṃ nikkhamitukāmo hoti, tadā ekaṃ dve ālope atirekaṃ bhuñjati, sabbakālaṃ caṅkamanañcāruyha aparāparaṃ caṅkamati, thero tāya saññāya ñatvā ‘‘bhagavā, āvuso, janapadacārikaṃ caritukāmo, tumhākaṃ kattabbaṃ karothā’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ saññaṃ deti.
世尊在最初成道后的二十年里,没有固定住在同一个地方;后来的二十五年,则一直依止舍卫城而住,一天之内会使用两个住处。在祇园住了一夜之后,第二天由比丘僧团围绕,从南门进入舍卫城乞食,再从东门出来,到东园作日间住处。在东园住了一夜之后,第二天从东门进入舍卫城乞食,再从南门出来,到祇园作日间住处。为什么这样呢?是出于对两个家族的慈悯。因为,在生为人的在家人当中,没有别人像给孤独长者那样;在生为女人的在家女众当中,也没有别人像毗舍佉那样,为了如来而舍弃财物。所以,世尊出于对他们的慈悯,一天之内使用这两个住处。而那天世尊住在祇园,因此长老心想:“今天世尊在舍卫城乞食后,傍晚会为了冲洗身体而去东门屋。那时我就请求刚冲洗完身体、站在那里世尊,带着世尊前往兰玛咖婆罗门的修行林。这样,这些比丘就能在世尊面前听闻法谈了。”这样想后,便对比丘们说了。巴利
Bhagavā paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsati vassāni anibaddhavāso ahosi, pacchā pañcavīsati vassāni abbokiṇṇaṃ sāvatthiṃyeva upanissāya vasanto ekadivase dve ṭhānāni paribhuñjati. Jetavane rattiṃ vasitvā punadivase bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto dakkhiṇadvārena sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā pubbārāme divāvihāraṃ karoti. Pubbārāme rattiṃ vasitvā punadivase pācīnadvārena sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā dakkhiṇadvārena nikkhamitvā jetavane divāvihāraṃ karoti. Kasmā? Dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ anukampāya. Manussattabhāve ṭhitena hi anāthapiṇḍikena viya aññena kenaci, mātugāmattabhāve ṭhitāya ca visākhāya viya aññāya itthiyā tathāgataṃ uddissa dhanapariccāgo kato nāma natthi, tasmā bhagavā tesaṃ anukampāya ekadivase imāni dve ṭhānāni paribhuñjati. Tasmiṃ pana divase jetavane vasi, tasmā thero – ‘‘ajja bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā sāyanhakāle gattāni parisiñcanatthāya pubbakoṭṭhakaṃ gamissati; athāhaṃ gattāni parisiñcitvā ṭhitaṃ bhagavantaṃ yācitvā rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamaṃ gahetvā gamissāmi. Evamime bhikkhū bhagavato sammukhā labhissanti dhammakathaṃ savanāyā’’ti cintetvā te bhikkhū evamāha.
“鹿子母讲堂”就是毗舍佉的讲堂。她因为被长者米嘎拉安置在母亲的位置上,所以被称为“鹿子母”。所谓“从独坐静修中起来”:据说,在那座讲堂里,两位大弟子各有自己的华丽房间,世尊的华丽房间就在他们中间。长老打开门,打扫房间内部,把花和垃圾清理出去,铺好床座,然后向导师示意。导师走进那个房间,以右胁着床,具念正知,作狮子卧,等疲劳消除后起身,进入果定安住,到了傍晚时分才从那里起来。针对这件事,所以说“从独坐静修中起来”。巴利
Migāramātupāsādoti visākhāya pāsādo. Sā hi migārena seṭṭhinā mātuṭṭhāne ṭhapitattā migāramātāti vuccati. Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti tasmiṃ kira pāsāde dvinnaṃ mahāsāvakānaṃ sirigabbhānaṃ majjhe bhagavato sirigabbho ahosi. Thero dvāraṃ vivaritvā antogabbhaṃ sammajjitvā mālākacavaraṃ nīharitvā mañcapīṭhaṃ paññapetvā satthu saññaṃ adāsi. Satthā sirigabbhaṃ pavisitvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno sīhaseyyaṃ upagamma darathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā uṭṭhāya phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīditvā sāyanhasamaye tato vuṭṭhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito’’ti.
所谓“冲洗”:如果有人用粉末、泥土等搓擦身体,或者用拳、杵等揉搓身体来洗澡,这就叫“洗澡”。如果不那样做,只是自然地洗,那就叫“冲洗”。世尊的身体上并不会沾上那种需要去除的尘垢污秽,但为了顺应季节,世尊只是下水而已。因此说“为了冲洗身体”。“东门屋”:就是东边的门屋。巴利
Parisiñcitunti yo hi cuṇṇamattikādīhi gattāni ubbaṭṭento mallakamuṭṭhādīhi vā ghaṃsanto nhāyati, so nhāyatīti vuccati. Yo tathā akatvā pakatiyāva nhāyati, so parisiñcatīti vuccati. Bhagavatopi sarīre tathā haritabbaṃ rajojallaṃ nāma na upalimpati, utuggahaṇatthaṃ pana bhagavā kevalaṃ udakaṃ otarati. Tenāha – ‘‘gattāni parisiñcitu’’nti. Pubbakoṭṭhakoti pācīnakoṭṭhako.
据说在舍卫城,那座精舍有时大,有时小。比如在维巴西世尊的时代,它有一由旬大;在西奇佛的时代,有三伽浮他大;在韦萨布佛的时代,有半由旬大;在咖咕桑特佛的时代,有一伽浮他大;在果纳嘎玛那佛的时代,有半伽浮他大;在迦叶佛的时代,有二十乌沙巴大;到了我们世尊的时代,则变成八迦哩沙那么大。而那座城相对于精舍,有时在东边,有时在南边,有时在西边,有时在北边。不过,祇园香室里那四个床脚所安立的位置,却是始终不动的。巴利
Sāvatthiyaṃ kira vihāro kadāci mahā hoti kadāci khuddako. Tathā hi so vipassissa bhagavato kāle yojaniko ahosi, sikhissa tigāvuto, vessabhussa aḍḍhayojaniko, kakusandhassa gāvutappamāṇo, koṇāgamanassa aḍḍhagāvutappamāṇo, kassapassa vīsatiusabhappamāṇo, amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle aṭṭhakarīsappamāṇo jāto. Tampi nagaraṃ tassa vihārassa kadāci pācīnato hoti, kadāci dakkhiṇato, kadāci pacchimato, kadāci uttarato. Jetavane gandhakuṭiyaṃ pana catunnaṃ mañcapādānaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ acalameva.
有四种被称为“不动圣地”的地方:大菩提树下的金刚座处、仙人堕处鹿野苑转法轮处、桑迦萨城门口天降时的阶梯落脚处,以及床脚处。而这个东门屋,在迦叶十力世尊的时代,当精舍方圆二十乌沙巴时,曾是东门旁的门屋。直到现在,它仍然以“东门屋”这个名字为人所知。在迦叶十力世尊的时代,阿致罗筏底河环绕着城市流淌,流到东门屋那里,冲破了河岸,形成了一个巨大的水池,池岸平坦,越往中间越深。在那里,有国王专用的浴场一处,市民的浴场一处,比丘僧团的浴场一处,诸佛的浴场一处——就这样各有各的浴场,令人心旷神怡,铺着像展开的银布一样的细沙。于是,世尊和尊者阿难一起,为了冲洗身体,朝这个东门屋走来。那时,尊者阿难递上浴衣。世尊脱下红色双层衣,穿上浴衣。长老把双层衣连同大衣一起拿在自己手中。世尊走入水中。就在他入水的同时,水里的鱼和鳖全都变成了金色。那景象,就像用水管倾注金色液汁的时候,也像铺展开金布的时候。接着,世尊示现了沐浴的仪态,沐浴后从水中上来时,长老递上红色双层衣。世尊穿上它,系上像闪电一样的腰带,把大衣从里面收拢好,弄得像莲花苞一样,然后接过递来的两端,捏住两个衣角,站住了。因此才说:“在东门屋冲洗身体后,从水中上来,只穿着一件衣站着。”巴利
Cattāri hi acalacetiyaṭṭhānāni nāma mahābodhipallaṅkaṭṭhānaṃ isipatane dhammacakkappavattanaṭṭhānaṃ saṅkassanagaradvāre devorohaṇakāle sopānassa patiṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ mañcapādaṭṭhānanti. Ayaṃ pana pubbakoṭṭhako kassapadasabalassa vīsatiusabhavihārakāle pācīnadvāre koṭṭhako ahosi. So idānipi pubbakoṭṭhakotveva paññāyati. Kassapadasabalassa kāle aciravatī nagaraṃ parikkhipitvā sandamānā pubbakoṭṭhakaṃ patvā udakena bhinditvā mahantaṃ udakarahadaṃ māpesi samatitthaṃ anupubbagambhīraṃ. Tattha ekaṃ rañño nhānatitthaṃ, ekaṃ nāgarānaṃ, ekaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa, ekaṃ buddhānanti evaṃ pāṭiyekkāni nhānatitthāni honti ramaṇīyāni vippakiṇṇarajatapaṭṭasadisavālikāni. Iti bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṃ yena ayaṃ evarūpo pubbakoṭṭhako tenupasaṅkami gattāni parisiñcituṃ . Athāyasmā ānando udakasāṭikaṃ upanesi. Bhagavā rattadupaṭṭaṃ apanetvā udakasāṭikaṃ nivāsesi. Thero dupaṭṭena saddhiṃ mahācīvaraṃ attano hatthagatamakāsi. Bhagavā udakaṃ otari. Sahotaraṇenevassa udake macchakacchapā sabbe suvaṇṇavaṇṇā ahesuṃ. Yantanālikāhi suvaṇṇarasadhārānisiñcamānakālo viya suvaṇṇapaṭapasāraṇakālo viya ca ahosi. Atha bhagavato nhānavattaṃ dassetvā nhatvā paccuttiṇṇassa thero rattadupaṭṭaṃ upanesi. Bhagavā taṃ nivāsetvā vijjulatāsadisaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā mahācīvaraṃ antantena saṃharitvā padumagabbhasadisaṃ katvā upanītaṃ dvīsu kaṇṇesu gahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pubbakoṭṭhake gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
世尊这样站着的时候,他的身体光彩夺目,仿佛在以威严压过盛开的红莲花与青莲花、全然绽放的昼度树,以及群星闪耀的虚空。那以一寻环绕的光辉为庄严的三十二种殊胜相好,串连在一起安立着,就像三十二个月亮组成的花环,就像三十二个太阳组成的花环,又像依次排列的三十二位转轮王、三十二位天子、三十二位大梵天王一样,极其辉煌耀眼,这说的正是色身的殊胜。在这样的时候,有能力的说法者应当用长行或偈颂,引出佛陀的身色、功德色,以及其中的义理、譬喻和理由,充分地加以解说。在这样的时候,说法者的功力如何,就可以知道了。巴利
Evaṃ ṭhitassa pana bhagavato sarīraṃ vikasitakamaluppalasaraṃ sabbapāliphullaṃ pāricchattakaṃ tārāmarīcivikasitaṃ ca gaganatalaṃ siriyā avahasamānaṃ viya virocittha. Byāmappabhāparikkhepavilāsinī cassa dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇamālā ganthetvā ṭhapitā dvattiṃsacandamālā viya, dvattiṃsasūriyamālā viya, paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitā dvattiṃsacakkavatti dvattiṃsadevarājā dvattiṃsamahābrahmāno viya ca ativiya virocittha, vaṇṇabhūmināmesā. Evarūpesu ṭhānesu buddhānaṃ sarīravaṇṇaṃ vā guṇavaṇṇaṃ vā cuṇṇiyapadehi vā gāthāhi vā atthañca upamāyo ca kāraṇāni ca āharitvā paṭibalena dhammakathikena pūretvā kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti evarūpesu ṭhānesu dhammakathikassa thāmo veditabbo.
273 “让身体恢复干燥”是指让身体回到自然状态、把水分去掉,也就是擦干。因为身体还湿着就披上袈裟的话,袈裟上会起皱,随身物品也会损坏。然而,诸佛的身体上不会沾上尘垢和污物;就像落在荷叶上的水珠,水会滑落回去一样。尽管如此,世尊出于对学处的尊重,心想“这是出家人的本分”,便提起大袈裟的两角,遮住身前而站立。就在那时,长老心想:“世尊披上大袈裟后,一旦动念要前往鹿子母讲堂,就很难再改变主意了;因为违逆诸佛的意愿,就像伸手去抓独行的狮子,像用手去摸发情良象的鼻子,像去抓剧毒蛇的脖子一样,是非常严重的事。我就在这里赞叹兰玛咖婆罗门的隐居处,恳请世尊前往那里吧。”于是他这样做了。因此经文说:“那时,具寿阿难……出于怜悯。”巴利
273.Gattāni pubbāpayamānoti pakatibhāvaṃ gamayamāno nirudakāni kurumāno, sukkhāpayamānoti attho. Sodakena gattena cīvaraṃ pārupantassa hi cīvare kaṇṇikā uṭṭhahanti, parikkhārabhaṇḍaṃ dussati. Buddhānaṃ pana sarīre rajojallaṃ na upalimpati; padumapatte pakkhittaudakabindu viya udakaṃ vinivattetvā gacchati, evaṃ santepi sikkhāgāravatāya bhagavā, ‘‘pabbajitavattaṃ nāmeta’’nti mahācīvaraṃ ubhosu kaṇṇesu gahetvā purato kāyaṃ paṭicchādetvā aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe thero cintesi – ‘‘bhagavā mahācīvaraṃ pārupitvā migāramātupāsādaṃ ārabbha gamanābhihārato paṭṭhāya dunnivattiyo bhavissati; buddhānañhi adhippāyakopanaṃ nāma ekacārikasīhassa gahaṇatthaṃ hatthappasāraṇaṃ viya; pabhinnavaravāraṇassa soṇḍāya parāmasanaṃ viya; uggatejassa āsīvisassa gīvāya gahaṇaṃ viya ca bhāriyaṃ hoti. Idheva rammakassa brāhmaṇassa assamassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā tattha gamanatthāya bhagavantaṃ yācissāmī’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā ānando…pe… anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti.
这里,“出于怜悯”是说:因为怜悯那五百位比丘,对他们生起悲心。那五百位比丘是为了在世尊面前听法,才去到那个修行处。“以法谈”是说:他们正坐在一起,谈论十巴拉密中的某一个巴拉密,以及大出离的功德。“等待”是说:他观察着、等待着。“我是佛陀”是说:他没有贸然进去,而是一直站着,直到那场谈话结束。“敲门”是说:他用指尖在门板上示意。“他们打开了”是说:因为他们一直专注听着,所以一听到动静就立刻过来开门。巴利
Tattha anukampaṃ upādāyāti bhagavato sammukhā dhammiṃ kathaṃ sossāmāti taṃ assamaṃ gatānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ anukampaṃ paṭicca, tesu kāruññaṃ katvāti attho. Dhammiyā kathāyāti dasasu pāramitāsu aññatarāya pāramiyā ceva mahābhinikkhamanassa ca vaṇṇaṃ kathayamānā sannisinnā honti. Āgamayamānoti olokayamāno. Ahaṃ buddhoti sahasā appavisitvā yāva sā kathā niṭṭhāti, tāva aṭṭhāsīti attho. Aggaḷaṃ ākoṭesīti agganakhena kavāṭe saññaṃ adāsi. Vivariṃsūti sotaṃ odahitvāva nisinnattā taṅkhaṇaṃyeva āgantvā vivariṃsu.
坐在铺设好的座位上:据说在佛陀时代,只要有哪怕一位比丘住在某个地方,那里就一定会铺设好佛座。为什么呢?据说世尊会留意那些在他身边领受业处后、到舒适处所安住的人:“某某在我身边领受业处后离开了,他能不能证得殊胜呢?”然后世尊看到他放下业处、在思维不善的念头,于是想:“这位善男子在我这样的导师身边领受业处而安住,怎么会被不善的念头压倒,在无始轮回的苦中流转呢?”为了摄受他,世尊就当场示现自身,教导那位善男子之后,飞升到空中,又回到自己的住处。那些比丘正是因为这样被教导,心里想:“导师知道我们的心,前来在我们面前示现自身;那时候如果还要忙着找座位说‘尊者,请坐这里,请坐这里’,那就成了负担。”所以他们总是先把座位铺设好再安住。有凳子的就铺设凳子,没有凳子的就铺设床、木板、木块、石头或沙堆;连这些也找不到的,就把枯叶收集起来,在上面铺上粪扫衣放好。而这里本来就是自然铺设好的座位,针对这一点才说“坐在铺设好的座位上”。巴利
Paññatte āsaneti buddhakāle kira yattha yattha ekopi bhikkhu viharati, sabbattha buddhāsanaṃ paññattameva hoti. Kasmā? Bhagavā kira attano santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā phāsukaṭṭhāne viharante manasi karoti ‘‘asuko mayhaṃ santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gato, sakkhissati nu kho visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ no vā’’ti. Atha naṃ passati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā akusalavitakke vitakkayamānaṃ, tato ‘‘kathañhi nāma mādisassa satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā viharantaṃ imaṃ kulaputtaṃ akusalavitakkā abhibhavitvā anamatagge vaṭṭadukkhe saṃsāressantī’’ti tassa anuggahatthaṃ tattheva attānaṃ dassetvā taṃ kulaputtaṃ ovaditvā ākāsaṃ uppatitvā puna attano vasanaṭṭhānameva gacchati. Athevaṃ ovadiyamānā te bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘satthā amhākaṃ manaṃ jānitvā āgantvā amhākaṃ samīpe ṭhitaṃyeva attānaṃ dasseti; tasmiṃ khaṇe, ‘bhante, idha nisīdatha, idha nisīdathā’ti āsanapariyesanaṃ nāma bhāro’’ti. Te āsanaṃ paññapetvāva viharanti. Yassa pīṭhaṃ atthi, so taṃ paññapeti. Yassa natthi, so mañcaṃ vā phalakaṃ vā kaṭṭhaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā vālikapuñjaṃ vā paññapeti. Taṃ alabhamānā purāṇapaṇṇānipi saṅkaḍḍhitvā tattha paṃsukūlaṃ pattharitvā ṭhapenti. Idha pana pakatipaññattameva āsanaṃ ahosi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti.
“你们为什么坐在一起”的意思是:你们聚在一起谈的是什么话题?“Kāya netthā”也是经文的一种写法,意思是“在这里谈的是什么”。“Kāya notthā”也是经文的一种写法,意思和前面一样。“中间的谈话”是指在作意业处、讲解教法、提问法义等正事之间,插进来的别的话题。“还没说完”是指因为我的到来,谈话没有结束,还没达到完整。那时世尊已经到达,意思是就在那个时候世尊来了。“或者是法谈”是指和十种论事相应的如法谈话。“或是圣默然”:这里第二禅那也算是圣默然,根本业处也算是圣默然。所以,一位比丘入第二禅那而坐,或者取根本业处而坐,就应该知道他是安住在圣默然而坐。巴利
Kāyanutthāti katamāya nu kathāya sannisinnā bhavathāti attho. ‘‘Kāya netthā’’tipi pāḷi, tassā katamāya nu etthāti attho. ‘‘Kāya notthā’’tipi pāḷi, tassāpi purimoyeva attho. Antarā kathāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīnaṃ antarā aññā ekā kathā. Vippakatāti mama āgamanapaccayā apariniṭṭhitā sikhaṃ appattā. Atha bhagavā anuppattoti atha etasmiṃ kāle bhagavā āgato. Dhammī vā kathāti dasakathāvatthunissitā vā dhammī kathā. Ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvoti ettha pana dutiyajjhānampi ariyo tuṇhībhāvo mūlakammaṭṭhānampi. Tasmā taṃ jhānaṃ appetvā nisinnopi, mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinnopi bhikkhu ariyena tuṇhībhāvena nisinnoti veditabbo.
274 比丘们,有两种寻求,这段话的连结在哪里呢?那些比丘心想“我们要当面听法谈”,就把这件事交给长老去办,长老安排他们去了那个住处。他们到了那里坐下后,成为不作畜生论者,而就法谈而坐。于是世尊为了指出“你们这样的寻求就叫圣寻求”,开始了这段教导。在这里,“比丘们,什么是非圣寻求”这一句,就像一位熟悉道路的人,先指出该避开的危险岔路,说“放开左边,走右边”。世尊因为擅长说法,先讲了应当避免的非圣寻求,然后将要讲另一种,于是打破开示的次第这样说道。有生法者,即具有生的自性。有老法者,即具有衰老的自性。有病法者,即具有病的自性。有死法者,即具有死的自性。有愁法者,即具有忧愁的自性。有杂染法者,即具有杂染的自性。巴利
274.Dvemā, bhikkhave, pariyesanāti ko anusandhi? Te bhikkhū sammukhā dhammiṃ kathaṃ sossāmāti therassa bhāraṃ akaṃsu, thero tesaṃ assamagamanamakāsi. Te tattha nisīditvā atiracchānakathikā hutvā dhammiyā kathāya nisīdiṃsu. Atha bhagavā ‘‘ayaṃ tumhākaṃ pariyesanā ariyapariyesanā nāmā’’ti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha katamā ca, bhikkhave, anariyapariyesanāti ettha yathā maggakusalo puriso paṭhamaṃ vajjetabbaṃ apāyamaggaṃ dassento ‘‘vāmaṃ muñcitvā dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vadati. Evaṃ bhagavā desanākusalatāya paṭhamaṃ vajjetabbaṃ anariyapariyesanaṃ ācikkhitvā pacchā itaraṃ ācikkhissāmīti uddesānukkamaṃ bhinditvā evamāha. Jātidhammoti jāyanasabhāvo. Jarādhammoti jīraṇasabhāvo. Byādhidhammoti byādhisabhāvo. Maraṇadhammoti maraṇasabhāvo. Sokadhammoti socanakasabhāvo. Saṃkilesadhammoti saṃkilissanasabhāvo.
“儿子和妻子”就是指儿子们和妻子们。其他地方也都按这个方式理解。在“金银”这个说法里,“金”是指黄金;“银”是指任何可以用来交易的东西,比如铜、钱币之类的金属。比丘们,这些依着是生法,这是在说明:这五种欲乐的依着,全都具有生的性质。在“病法”等段落里,金银没有被算进去,因为它不会有头痛之类的疾病,也不会像众生那样有被称为死亡的命终,也不会生起忧愁。不过,因为它会被铁锈等杂染所染污,所以在“杂染法”这一段里被算进去了。同样,因为它是时节所生,所以在“生法”这一段里也被算进去了。又因为它会沾上污垢而变旧,所以在“老法”这一段里也被算进去了。巴利
Puttabhariyanti puttā ca bhariyā ca. Esa nayo sabbattha. Jātarūparajatanti ettha pana jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti yaṃkiñci vohārūpagaṃ lohamāsakādi. Jātidhammā hete, bhikkhave, upadhayoti ete pañcakāmaguṇūpadhayo nāma honti, te sabbepi jātidhammāti dasseti. Byādhidhammavārādīsu jātarūparajataṃ na gahitaṃ, na hetassa sīsarogādayo byādhayo nāma honti, na sattānaṃ viya cutisaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ, na soko uppajjati. Ayādīhi pana saṃkilesehi saṃkilissatīti saṃkilesadhammavāre gahitaṃ. Tathā utusamuṭṭhānattā jātidhammavāre. Malaṃ gahetvā jīraṇato jarādhammavāre ca.
275 比丘们,这是圣寻求。比丘们,应当知道,这种寻求既没有过失,又是圣者们所应寻求的,所以称为圣寻求。巴利
275.Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, ariyā pariyesanāti, bhikkhave, ayaṃ niddosatāyapi ariyehi pariyesitabbatāyapi ariyapariyesanāti veditabbā.
276 “诸比丘,我也曾”这段话,是为什么开讲的呢?是为了从一开始就展示佛陀的大出家。据说事情是这样的:世尊心里想:“诸比丘,我过去也追求过非圣的追求。我舍弃了那种追求,去追求圣的追求,因而证得了一切知。五比丘也曾追求非圣的追求,他们舍弃之后,追求圣的追求,达到了漏尽的境界。你们现在也走上了我和五比丘所走过的道路,圣的追求就是你们应当追求的。”为了把自己从最初开始的大出家历程展示出来,世尊便开始了这段开示。巴利
276.Ahampi sudaṃ, bhikkhaveti kasmā ārabhi? Mūlato paṭṭhāya mahābhinikkhamanaṃ dassetuṃ. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘bhikkhave, ahampi pubbe anariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesiṃ. Svāhaṃ taṃ pahāya ariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesitvā sabbaññutaṃ patto. Pañcavaggiyāpi anariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesiṃsu. Te taṃ pahāya ariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesitvā khīṇāsavabhūmiṃ pattā. Tumhepi mama ceva pañcavaggiyānañca maggaṃ āruḷhā. Ariyapariyesanā tumhākaṃ pariyesanā’’ti mūlato paṭṭhāya attano mahābhinikkhamanaṃ dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
277 那时,他正年轻,意思是还处在年少阶段。头发极黑,意思是头发非常乌黑,像眼药那样黑。以贤善的,意思是以美好的。以第一阶段的年龄,指三种年龄中的第一个阶段。不情愿的,意思是不愿意的人;这里用属格,表示不尊重的意味。泣面者,意思是眼泪在脸上的人;也就是他们泪湿了脸,意思是满脸被泪水沾湿。正在哭泣的,意思是哭过之后还在哀泣。寻找什么是善的,意思是在寻求善。无上的寂静安稳之境,指最高、名为寂静的殊胜境界,也就是在寻求涅槃。前往阿罗罗·迦罗摩那里:其中阿罗罗是他的名字,据说他头发极黄,因此得名阿罗罗;迦罗摩是姓。愿尊者住,意思是愿尊者安住。在那里,有智的人……指在那法中,有智慧的人……自己老师的教义,指自己老师的教说。获得后而住,指证得后而住。到这里,他就给出了机会。那法,指他们师徒的宗义体系。我掌握,指听闻后便掌握了。巴利
277. Tattha daharova samānoti taruṇova samāno. Susukāḷakesoti suṭṭhu kāḷakeso, añjanavaṇṇakesova hutvāti attho. Bhadrenāti bhaddakena. Paṭhamena vayasāti tiṇṇaṃ vayānaṃ paṭhamavayena. Akāmakānanti anicchamānānaṃ, anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ. Assūni mukhe etesanti assumukhā; tesaṃ assumukhānaṃ, assukilinnamukhānanti attho. Rudantānanti kanditvā rodamānānaṃ. Kiṃkusalagavesīti kiṃ kusalanti gavesamāno. Anuttaraṃ santivarapadanti uttamaṃ santisaṅkhātaṃ varapadaṃ, nibbānaṃ pariyesamānoti attho. Yena āḷāro kālāmoti ettha āḷāroti tassa nāmaṃ, dīghapiṅgalo kireso. Tenassa āḷāroti nāmaṃ ahosi. Kālāmoti gottaṃ. Viharatāyasmāti viharatu āyasmā. Yattha viññū purisoti yasmiṃ dhamme paṇḍito puriso. Sakaṃ ācariyakanti attano ācariyasamayaṃ. Upasampajja vihareyyāti paṭilabhitvā vihareyya. Ettāvatā tena okāso kato hoti. Taṃ dhammanti taṃ tesaṃ samayaṃ tantiṃ. Pariyāpuṇinti sutvāva uggaṇhiṃ.
“只是嘴唇碰一下”的意思是:仅仅用嘴唇碰一下,来表示接受他所说的话;也就是只是不停地动动嘴唇而已。“只是口头重复”的意思是:只是把他说的复述一遍。“声称有智”就是声称“我知道”的那种说法。“声称是长老”就是声称自己地位稳固、说“我在这里是长老”的那种话。“不仅是我,还有其他人”是说:不只是我,还有很多人也这样说。“仅仅凭着信心”是说:没有以智慧亲自证得,只是单凭纯粹的信心。菩萨仅仅在跟着口头教说学习法的时候,就已经知道:“在这教说里,并不是只有口头上的教理而已,他一定是七种等至的证得者。”于是他心里生起了这样的想法。巴利
Oṭṭhapahatamattenāti tena vuttassa paṭiggahaṇatthaṃ oṭṭhapaharaṇamattena; aparāparaṃ katvā oṭṭhasañcaraṇamattakenāti attho. Lapitalāpanamattenāti tena lapitassa paṭilāpanamattakena. Ñāṇavādanti jānāmīti vādaṃ . Theravādanti thirabhāvavādaṃ, thero ahametthāti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Ahañceva aññe cāti na kevalaṃ ahaṃ, aññepi bahū evaṃ vadanti. Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakenāti paññāya asacchikatvā suddhena saddhāmattakeneva. Bodhisatto kira vācāya dhammaṃ uggaṇhantoyeva, ‘‘na kālāmassa vācāya pariyattimattameva asmiṃ dhamme, addhā esa sattannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ lābhī’’ti aññāsi, tenassa etadahosi.
他让我明白,这七种等至是以无所有处为最终目标的。“信”是指为了成就这七种等至而生的信;精进等也同样理解。“应精勤”意思是应当努力用功。“不久之后,我以证智亲自证得此法,具足而住”:据说菩萨提起精进,仅仅几天之内,就像铺开七道金梯一样,成就了七种等至,所以才这样说。巴利
Ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ pavedesīti ākiñcaññāyatanapariyosānā satta samāpattiyo maṃ jānāpesi. Saddhāti imāsaṃ sattannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ nibbattanatthāya saddhā. Vīriyādīsupi eseva nayo. Padaheyyanti payogaṃ kareyyaṃ. Nacirasseva taṃ dhammaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsinti bodhisatto kira vīriyaṃ paggahetvā katipāhaññeva satta suvaṇṇanisseṇiyo pasārento viya satta samāpattiyo nibbattesi; tasmā evamāha.
“我们有收获,贤友”这句话,是因为这位迦罗摩确实不嫉妒。因此,他没有嫉妒地想“这个新来的人是怎么成就这个法的”,而是以清净的信心表达自己的信心,才这样说。“我们两个都来护持这个团体”:他说“这个团体很大,我们两个人一起来护持吧”,这样让团体知道,又说:“我也证得了七种等至,大人也证得了七种等至。这么多人可以在大人跟前学习修行方法,这么多人跟我学。”他把团体分成两部分来分配。“以殊胜”是指以最上的。“供养”:据说迦罗摩的男女侍者们拿着香、花等前来,迦罗摩说:“去吧,去供养大人。”他们供养大人之后,剩下什么,就用那个供养迦罗摩。有人带来昂贵的床座,也是先给大人,如果还有剩下,自己才拿。所到之处,他都让菩萨得到最好的坐卧处,自己用剩下的。他就这样以殊胜的供养来供养。“此法不是为了厌离”等句的意思是:这七种等至的法,不是为了厌离轮回,不是为了离染,不是为了灭除贪等烦恼,不是为了寂静,不是为了证知应证知之法,不是为了四道正觉,也不是为了现证涅槃。巴利
Lābhā no, āvusoti anusūyako kiresa kālāmo. Tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ adhunāgato, kinti katvā imaṃ dhammaṃ nibbattesī’’ti usūyaṃ akatvā pasanno pasādaṃ pavedento evamāha. Ubhova santā imaṃ gaṇaṃ pariharāmāti ‘‘mahā ayaṃ gaṇo, dvepi janā pariharāmā’’ti vatvā gaṇassa saññaṃ adāsi, ‘‘ahampi sattannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ lābhī, mahāpurisopi sattannameva , ettakā janā mahāpurisassa santike parikammaṃ uggaṇhatha, ettakā mayha’’nti majjhe bhinditvā adāsi. Uḷārāyāti uttamāya. Pūjāyāti kālāmassa kira upaṭṭhākā itthiyopi purisāpi gandhamālādīni gahetvā āgacchanti. Kālāmo – ‘‘gacchatha, mahāpurisaṃ pūjethā’’ti vadati. Te taṃ pūjetvā yaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, tena kālāmaṃ pūjenti. Mahagghāni mañcapīṭhāni āharanti; tānipi mahāpurisassa dāpetvā yadi avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, attanā gaṇhāti. Gatagataṭṭhāne varasenāsanaṃ bodhisattassa jaggāpetvā sesakaṃ attanā gaṇhāti. Evaṃ uḷārāya pūjāya pūjesi. Nāyaṃ dhammo nibbidāyātiādīsu ayaṃ sattasamāpattidhammo neva vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāya, na virajjanatthāya, na rāgādinirodhatthāya, na upasamatthāya, na abhiññeyyadhammaṃ abhijānanatthāya, na catumaggasambodhāya, na nibbānasacchikiriyāya saṃvattatīti attho.
只是能投生到无所有处天而已:能导致投生的,最高也就是寿命六万劫的无所有处天,不会超出那里。所以这个法还是会退转回来的;它所能达到的境界,并没有脱离生、老、死,仍然被死神的罗网包围着。从那以后,大菩萨就像一个人饿得不行,得到美味的食物,虽然高高兴兴地吃了,后来却因为胆汁、痰或者苍蝇而吐了出来,于是再也不想吃哪怕一口;同样,他费了很大力气才成就这七种等至,却看到它们有退转等种种过患,就再也不生起这样的想法:我要再次作意这个法,或入这个定,或决意这个定,或从这定出起,或观察这个定。所谓“不满足”:就是“够了,这个够了,这个够了”,一次又一次地不满足。厌离:厌离之后。离开:我便离去了。巴利
Yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanūpapattiyāti yāva saṭṭhikappasahassāyuparimāṇe ākiñcaññāyatanabhave upapatti, tāvadeva saṃvattati, na tato uddhaṃ. Evamayaṃ punarāvattanadhammoyeva; yañca ṭhānaṃ pāpeti, taṃ jātijarāmaraṇehi aparimuttameva maccupāsaparikkhittamevāti. Tato paṭṭhāya ca pana mahāsatto yathā nāma chātajjhattapuriso manuññabhojanaṃ labhitvā sampiyāyamānopi bhuñjitvā pittavasena vā semhavasena vā makkhikāvasena vā chaḍḍetvā puna ekaṃ piṇḍampi bhuñjissāmīti manaṃ na uppādeti; evameva imā satta samāpattiyo mahantena ussāhena nibbattetvāpi, tāsu imaṃ punarāvattikādibhedaṃ ādīnavaṃ disvā, puna imaṃ dhammaṃ āvajjissāmi vā samāpajjissāmi vā adhiṭṭhahissāmi vā vuṭṭhahissāmi vā paccavekkhissāmi vāti cittameva na uppādesi. Analaṅkaritvāti alaṃ iminā, alaṃ imināti punappunaṃ alaṅkaritvā. Nibbijjāti nibbinditvā. Apakkaminti agamāsiṃ.
278 罗摩确实不是这个法。在这里,菩萨在修学这个法的时候就已经知道:这不是单凭罗摩的言教就能掌握的八等至之法,他一定是已经证得八等至的人。于是他这样想:罗摩确实不是……知而见而住。这里剩下的内容,应当依照前面那一段的方式理解。巴利
278.Na kho rāmo imaṃ dhammanti idhāpi bodhisatto taṃ dhammaṃ uggaṇhantoyeva aññāsi – ‘‘nāyaṃ aṭṭhasamāpattidhammo udakassa vācāya uggahitamattova, addhā panesa aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī’’ti. Tenassa etadahosi – ‘‘na kho rāmo…pe… jānaṃ passaṃ vihāsī’’ti. Sesamettha purimavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
279 279. 说到“我前往优楼频螺的将军村”:这里的“优楼频螺”意思是“大沙堆”,也就是一大堆沙子。另一种解释是:uru 是沙,velā 是界限;为了越过界限而运来的沙,所以叫优楼频螺,应该这样理解。据说在过去、诸佛还没有出世的时候,有一万个善男子出家做了苦行者,住在那个地方。有一天他们聚在一起,定下一条规矩:“身业和语业,别人还能察觉,但意业是不显露的。所以,如果有人生起欲寻、嗔恚寻或害寻,没有别人能来举发他;他应该自己举发自己,用钵装沙倒在这个地方,这就是对他的处罚。”从那时起,谁生起那样的念头,就用钵装沙倒在那里。就这样,那里渐渐堆成了一个大沙堆。后来的人把它围起来,建成了塔庙的地方。就是针对这件事说:“优楼频螺就是大沙堆,意思是一大堆沙子。”也是针对这件事说:“或者,uru 叫沙,velā 叫界限;为了越过界限而运来的沙,所以叫优楼频螺,应该这样理解。”巴利
279.Yena uruvelā senānigamoti ettha uruvelāti mahāvelā, mahāvālikarāsīti attho. Atha vā urūti vālikā vuccati; velāti mariyādā, velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Atīte kira anuppanne buddhe dasasahassā kulaputtā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā tasmiṃ padese viharantā ekadivasaṃ sannipatitvā katikavattaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammāni nāma paresampi pākaṭāni honti, manokammaṃ pana apākaṭaṃ. Tasmā yo kāmavitakkaṃ vā byāpādavitakkaṃ vā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā vitakketi, tassa añño codako nāma natthi; so attanāva attānaṃ codetvā pattapuṭena vālikaṃ āharitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne ākiratu, idamassa daṇḍakamma’’nti. Tato paṭṭhāya yo tādisaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, so tattha pattapuṭena vālikaṃ ākirati, evaṃ tattha anukkamena mahāvālikarāsi jāto. Tato taṃ pacchimā janatā parikkhipitvā cetiyaṭṭhānamakāsi; taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uruvelāti mahāvelā, mahāvālikarāsīti attho’’ti. Tameva sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha vā urūti vālikā vuccati, velāti mariyādā. Velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
将军村,就是军队的村落。据说在劫初的时候,那个地方曾经是军队驻扎的营地,所以那个地方就叫将军村。也有写成“将军之村”的读法。将军是善生的父亲,意思就是他的村子。我到了那里,就是说我进入了那个地方。我看见一片令人愉悦的土地:那里开满各种水生和陆生花朵,绚丽可爱,令人心旷神怡。又看见令人欢喜的丛林:它像孔雀尾羽束一样,令人见了心生欢喜。又看见一条流动的河,就是尼连禅河——它奔流不息,河水像宝石堆一样,澄净、青蓝、清凉。所谓“白色”,就是清净无泥。所谓“有善妙的渡口”,就是河岸有次第渐深、善妙的渡口。所谓“令人愉悦”,就是像银板一样,散布着沙子,有许多鱼和龟,看起来令人欢喜。四周都有托钵村,就是看见那个地方四周不远之处,有往来便利、容易获得托钵食物给到来出家者的托钵村。所谓“确实足够”,就是确实有能力。所谓“就在那里坐下”,是就坐在菩提座上而说的。因为在上面经中,“就在那里”指的是修苦行的地方,但在这里则是指菩提座,因此说“就在那里坐下”。所谓“这确实足以精勤”,就是这样思惟“这个地方足以用来精勤”之后坐下,意思就是这样。巴利
Senānigamoti senāya nigamo. Paṭhamakappikānaṃ kira tasmiṃ ṭhāne senāniveso ahosi; tasmā so padeso senānigamoti vuccati. ‘‘Senāni-gāmo’’tipi pāṭho. Senānī nāma sujātāya pitā, tassa gāmoti attho. Tadavasarinti tattha osariṃ. Ramaṇīyaṃ bhūmibhāganti supupphitanānappakārajalajathalajapupphavicittaṃ manorammaṃ bhūmibhāgaṃ. Pāsādikañca vanasaṇḍanti morapiñchakalāpasadisaṃ pasādajananavanasaṇḍañca addasaṃ. Nadiñca sandantinti sandamānañca maṇikkhandhasadisaṃ vimalanīlasītalasalilaṃ nerañjaraṃ nadiṃ addasaṃ. Setakanti parisuddhaṃ nikkaddamaṃ. Supatitthanti anupubbagambhīrehi sundarehi titthehi upetaṃ. Ramaṇīyanti rajatapaṭṭasadisaṃ vippakiṇṇavālikaṃ pahūtamacchakacchapaṃ abhirāmadassanaṃ. Samantā ca gocaragāmanti tassa padesassa samantā avidūre gamanāgamanasampannaṃ sampattapabbajitānaṃ sulabhapiṇḍaṃ gocaragāmañca addasaṃ. Alaṃ vatāti samatthaṃ vata. Tattheva nisīdinti bodhipallaṅke nisajjaṃ sandhāyāha. Uparisuttasmiñhi tatthevāti dukkarakārikaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetaṃ, idha pana bodhipallaṅko. Tenāha – ‘‘tattheva nisīdi’’nti. Alamidaṃ padhānāyāti idaṃ ṭhānaṃ padhānatthāya samatthanti evaṃ cintetvā nisīdinti attho.
280 我证得了,意思是到达了、获得了。而我生起了智与见:我生起了一切知智,能够照见一切法。我的解脱不可动摇:我的阿拉汉果解脱,因为具有不可动摇性,又以不可动摇的所缘为对象,所以不可动摇;它确实不被贪等烦恼所动摇,因此从不可动摇性来说也是不可动摇;又因为它以不可动摇的涅槃为所缘,所以也是不可动摇。这是最后生:这是我最后的一生。如今不再有后有:如今我不再有结生。这样,他也显示了自己生起省察智。巴利
280.Ajjhagamanti adhigacchiṃ paṭilabhiṃ. Ñāṇañca pana me dassananti sabbadhammadassanasamatthañca me sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ udapādi. Akuppā me vimuttīti mayhaṃ arahattaphalavimutti akuppatāya ca akuppārammaṇatāya ca akuppā, sā hi rāgādīhi na kuppatīti akuppatāyapi akuppā, akuppaṃ nibbānamassārammaṇantipi akuppā. Ayamantimā jātīti ayaṃ sabbapacchimā jāti. Natthidāni punabbhavoti idāni me puna paṭisandhi nāma natthīti evaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi me uppannanti dasseti.
281 281. “证得”就是通达。“法”指四圣谛法。“甚深”这个说法,是为了否定“浅显”。“难见”:正因为甚深,所以难见,要艰难地才能见到,不可能轻松地见到。正因为难见,所以难觉,要艰难地才能觉悟,不可能轻松地觉悟。“寂静”就是寂灭。“微妙”就是无恼。这两个词是就出世间法说的。“非寻思所行”:不能靠寻思进入其中、深入其中,只有靠智慧才能进入。“微细”就是细致。“唯智者能知”:只有走上正道的智者才能了知。“乐于所依”:有情对五种欲乐产生执著,所以它们被称为“所依”。一百零八种渴爱行也黏着于所依,所以也称为“所依”。他们乐于这些所依,所以叫“乐于所依”。“耽著于所依”,就是“于所依极欢喜”。就像一位国王走进一座布置精美、花果树木繁茂的园林,对种种圆满景象感到快乐,满心欢喜、愉悦、兴奋,不厌倦,到了傍晚也不想离开;同样,这些有情也乐于这些欲所依和渴爱所依,在轮回中欢喜、不厌倦地安住。因此,世尊为了显示这两种所依如同园林之地,而说了“乐于所依”等话。巴利
281.Adhigatoti paṭividdho. Dhammoti catusaccadhammo. Gambhīroti uttānabhāvapaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ. Duddasoti gambhīrattāva duddaso dukkhena daṭṭhabbo, na sakkā sukhena daṭṭhuṃ. Duddasattāva duranubodho, dukkhena avabujjhitabbo, na sakkā sukhena avabujjhituṃ. Santoti nibbuto. Paṇītoti atappako. Idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atakkāvacaroti takkena avacaritabbo ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabbo. Nipuṇoti saṇho. Paṇḍitavedanīyoti sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi veditabbo. Ālayarāmāti sattā pañcasu kāmaguṇesu allīyanti. Tasmā te ālayāti vuccanti. Aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni ālayanti, tasmā ālayāti vuccanti. Tehi ālayehi ramantīti ālayarāmā. Ālayesu ratāti ālayaratā. Ālayesu suṭṭhu muditāti ālayasammuditā. Yatheva hi susajjitaṃ pupphaphalabharitarukkhādisampannaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho rājā tāya tāya sampattiyā ramati, sammudito āmoditapamodito hoti, na ukkaṇṭhati, sāyampi nikkhamituṃ na icchati; evamimehipi kāmālayataṇhālayehi sattā ramanti, saṃsāravaṭṭe sammuditā anukkaṇṭhitā vasanti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā duvidhampi ālayaṃ uyyānabhūmiṃ viya dassento ‘‘ālayarāmā’’tiādimāha.
“此即”(yadidaṃ)是一个小品词。就它的处所说,是“这个就是”(yaṃ idaṃ);就缘起说,是“这个就是”(yo ayaṃ),应当这样理解它的意思。“此缘性缘起”(idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo):这些的缘就是“此缘”;此缘本身就是“此缘性”;此缘性也就是缘起,所以合起来叫“此缘性缘起”。这是对行等诸缘的称呼。“一切行寂止”等语,全部指的就是涅槃。因为依靠它,一切行的躁动都止息、平息下来,所以称为“一切行寂止”。又因为依靠它,一切依着都被舍弃,一切渴爱都耗尽,一切烦恼贪染都离染,一切苦都灭尽;所以称为“一切依着弃舍、渴爱尽、离贪、灭”。而这个渴爱,因为它以有结生有,或者使业与果报一起弯曲、纠缠,所以称为“渴爱林”;从那里出离,就是“离林”,也就是涅槃。“那对我来说会是疲劳”(so mamassa kilamatho):如果对那些不了知的人说法,那对我来说就是疲劳,对我来说就是损恼。意思是说,那将会是身体的疲劳和身体的损恼。但在诸佛心中,这两种都不存在。“而且”(apissu)是表示增强义的小品词,它说明:“不只是这些生起了,这些偈颂也显现了。”
“我的”(manti)就是“我的”。“随顺奇妙”(anacchariyā)就是“随顺未曾有”。“显现”(paṭibhaṃsu)就是成为名为“显现”的智的所缘,达到了可以被寻思的状态。巴利
Yadidanti nipāto, tassa ṭhānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yaṃ ida’’nti, paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo aya’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādoti imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā; idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā; idappaccayatā ca sā paṭiccasamuppādo cāti idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. Saṅkhārādipaccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ nibbānameva. Yasmā hi taṃ āgamma sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti vuccati. Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā honti, sabbā taṇhā khīyanti, sabbe kilesarāgā virajjanti, sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nirujjhati; tasmā sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Sā panesā taṇhā bhavena bhavaṃ, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati, tato nikkhantaṃ vānatoti nibbānaṃ. So mamassa kilamathoti yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assa, sā mama vihesā assāti attho. Kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca assāti vuttaṃ hoti. Citte pana ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi. Apissūti anubrūhanatthe nipāto, so ‘‘na kevalaṃ etadahosi, imāpi gāthā paṭibhaṃsū’’ti dīpeti. Manti mama. Anacchariyāti anuacchariyā. Paṭibhaṃsūti paṭibhānasaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa gocarā ahesuṃ; parivitakkayitabbataṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.
“艰难地”是指以苦,而不是指苦行道。因为诸佛的四道都是乐行道。不过,这是就菩萨还在圆满巴拉密的时期来说的——那时他还有贪、嗔、痴,面对一个接一个前来乞求的人,他割下装饰好的头,引出颈上的血,挖出涂了药的眼睛,把作为家族明灯的儿子、举止可爱的妻子等布施出去;在其他像忍辱仙人那样的生世中,也遭受刀割、杖击等等。这段话是针对他趋向菩提的修行之道而说的。“足够”这里的“ha”只是小品词,意思是“足够”。“宣说”:对于这样艰难证得的法,何须宣说,不必宣说了,再宣说还有什么用呢?“被贪嗔所征服的人”,是指被贪和嗔遍满的人,或者被贪嗔所随逐的人。巴利
Kicchenāti dukkhena, na dukkhāya paṭipadāya. Buddhānañhi cattāropi maggā sukhappaṭipadāva honti. Pāramīpūraṇakāle pana sarāgasadosasamohasseva sato āgatāgatānaṃ yācakānaṃ , alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā, galalohitaṃ nīharitvā, suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā, kulavaṃsappadīpaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyanti evamādīni dentassa, aññāni ca khantivādisadisesu attabhāvesu chejjabhejjādīni pāpuṇantassa āgamaniyapaṭipadaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ . Halanti ettha ha-kāro nipātamatto, alanti attho. Pakāsitunti desituṃ, evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa alaṃ desituṃ, pariyattaṃ desituṃ, ko attho desitenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosapariphuṭṭhehi rāgadosānugatehi vā.
逆流而行,是指逆着常等之流而趋向无常、苦、无我、不净,如此趣向四圣谛法。被贪染着,是指被欲贪、有贪和邪见贪所染着。不能见,是指他们无法以无常、苦、无我、不净这样的本质来看见法;对那些看不见的人,谁又能让他们这样接受、这样理解呢?被黑暗蕴所覆,是指被无明之聚所压制、笼罩。巴利
Paṭisotagāminti niccādīnaṃ paṭisotaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti evaṃ gataṃ catusaccadhammaṃ. Rāgarattāti kāmarāgena bhavarāgena diṭṭhirāgena ca rattā. Na dakkhantīti aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti iminā sabhāvena na passissanti, te apassante ko sakkhissati evaṃ gāhāpetuṃ. Tamokhandhena āvuṭāti avijjārāsinā ajjhotthatā.
282 “不活跃”是指无所作为的状态,意思就是不想说法。可是,他的心为什么会这样倾向呢?难道他不是这样想的吗:“我已经解脱,我要让别人也解脱;我已经渡越,我要让别人也渡越。”巴利
282.Appossukkatāyāti nirussukkabhāvena, adesetukāmatāyāti attho. Kasmā panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami, nanu esa mutto mocessāmi, tiṇṇo tāressāmi.
“ 以未知之相于我何用?于此亲证此法何益?
证得一切知智后,我将度脱人天世间。”巴利
‘‘Kiṃ me aññātavesena, dhammaṃ sacchikatenidha; Sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇitvā, tārayissaṃ sadevaka’’nti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.56) –
他发下誓愿,圆满诸巴拉密后,证得了一切知智。这是真的,正是由于如此省察的威力,他的心才这样倾向。因为他证得一切知智后,省察有情的烦恼丛聚和法的甚深时,有情的烦恼丛聚和法的甚深就以一切方式清楚地显现了。于是他想:“这些有情就像装满酸粥的葫芦,像盛满酪浆的瓮,像浸透油脂的碎布,又像涂满眼膏的手,被烦恼充塞,极度染污——被贪染着,被嗔败坏,被痴迷惑。他们到底能通达什么呢?”由于省察烦恼丛聚的威力,他的心也这样倾向了。巴利
Patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ pattoti. Saccametaṃ, tadevaṃ paccavekkhaṇānubhāvena panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Tassa hi sabbaññutaṃ patvā sattānaṃ kilesagahanataṃ, dhammassa ca gambhīrataṃ paccavekkhantassa sattānaṃ kilesagahanatā ca dhammagambhīratā ca sabbākārena pākaṭā jātā. Athassa ‘‘ime sattā kañjikapuṇṇā lābu viya, takkabharitā cāṭi viya, vasātelapītapilotikā viya, añjanamakkhitahattho viya ca kilesabharitā atisaṃkiliṭṭhā rāgarattā dosaduṭṭhā mohamūḷhā, te kiṃ nāma paṭivijjhissantī’’ti cintayato kilesagahanapaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenāpi evaṃ cittaṃ nami.
这个法既像承载大地的水聚那样深,又像被山遮住而放在那里的芥子那样难见,还像把一根劈成一百份的头发尖端与尖端相接那样难以通达。难道不是吗?我为了证悟这个法而努力时,没有哪一种布施是我没给过的,没有哪一种戒是我没守护过的,没有哪一种巴拉密是我没圆满过的。可是,即使我毫不费力地摧破魔军,大地也没有震动;在初夜分随念宿命时,大地也没有震动;在中夜分净化天眼时,大地也没有震动;只有在后夜分证悟缘起的那一刻,一万个世界才震动了。所以,连我这样智慧锐利的人,都是费了极大的艰难才证悟这个法,那些普通的世间大众又怎么能证悟呢?即使由于省察法之甚深性的力量,心也这样倾向于(不说法)。应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Ayañca dhammo pathavīsandhārakaudakakkhandho viya gambhīro, pabbatena paṭicchādetvā ṭhapito sāsapo viya duddaso, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭipaṭipādanaṃ viya duranubodho. Nanu mayā hi imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantena adinnaṃ dānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ nāma natthi, aparipūritā kāci pāramī nāma natthi? Tassa me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassāpi pathavī na kampittha, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantassāpi na kampittha, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ sodhentassāpi na kampittha, pacchimayāme pana paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭivijjhantasseva me dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Iti mādisenāpi tikkhañāṇena kicchenevāyaṃ dhammo paṭividdho, taṃ lokiyamahājanā kathaṃ paṭivijjhissantī’’ti dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenāpi evaṃ cittaṃ namīti veditabbaṃ.
不过,在大梵天请求下,出于想要说法的意愿,他的心也这样倾向了。因为世尊确实知道:“当我倾向于少事时,大梵天王就会来请求我说法;而这些众生敬重梵天神,他们会想:‘听说导师本来不想说法,是大梵天请求之后才说的。诸位,这法确实是寂静的,诸位,这法确实是殊胜的。’于是他们就会愿意认真听闻。”应当知道,正是因为这个原因,他的心才倾向于少事,而不是倾向于说法。巴利
Apica brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyapissa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Jānāti hi bhagavā – ‘‘mama appossukkatāya citte namamāne maṃ mahābrahmā dhammadesanaṃ yācissati, ime ca sattā brahmagarukā, te ‘satthā kira dhammaṃ na desetukāmo ahosi, atha naṃ mahābrahmā yācitvā desāpesi, santo vata, bho, dhammo paṇīto vata, bho, dhammo’ti maññamānā sussūsissantī’’ti. Idampissa kāraṇaṃ paṭicca appossukkatāya cittaṃ nami, no dhammadesanāyāti veditabbaṃ.
这位“娑婆主”是这样来的:据说,在迦叶世尊的教法时期,有一位名叫“同伴”的长老,他修成了初禅,死后投生到初禅天,成为寿命长达一劫的梵天神。在那里,众梵天神都认出他就是娑婆主梵天。针对他,经文才说“梵天神的娑婆主”。据说他当时发出这样的声音:“诸位尊者啊,这真是损失!”这一声传到了一万个世界体系的梵天神耳中,他们全都聚集过来。“在这样的世间啊”,意思就是在这样的世界里。“出现在面前”,是说他和那一万位梵天神一起出现。“少尘垢种性者”,是说在智慧之眼中,他们的贪嗔痴尘垢极少、极微薄,具有这样的性质,所以叫少尘垢种性者。“由于未听闻”,就是因为没有听闻过。“将会成为”,世尊在这里表明:在过去诸佛那里,以十种善行积集了善根、就像等待阳光照射的成熟莲花一样、一心只盼着听闻正法的人,在听完四句偈的时候就能进入圣者之境——这样的人不是一个两个,而是成百上千、乃至无数百千的人,将会成为通达此法的人。巴利
Sahampatissāti so kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane sahako nāma thero paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyukabrahmā hutvā nibbatto. Tatra naṃ sahampatibrahmāti paṭisañjānanti, taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘brahmuno sahampatissā’’ti. Nassati vata, bhoti so kira imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāresi, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sabbe sannipatiṃsu. Yatra hi nāmāti yasmiṃ nāma loke. Purato pāturahosīti tehi dasahi brahmasahassehi saddhiṃ pāturahosi. Apparajakkhajātikāti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesaṃ, evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Assavanatāti assavanatāya. Bhavissantīti purimabuddhesu dasapuññakiriyavasena katādhikārā paripākagatapadumāni viya sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ, dhammadesanaṃyeva ākaṅkhamānā catuppadikagāthāvasāne ariyabhūmiṃ okkamanārahā na eko, na dve, anekasatasahassā dhammassa aññātāro bhavissantīti dasseti.
“显现了”就是出现了。“被杂秽者所思”是指被六位杂秽的导师所思维。那些导师更早出世,在整个赡部洲,就像散布荆棘、喷洒毒液一样,宣说了杂秽的邪见之法。“请开启”就是打开这扇门。“不死之门”是指作为不死涅槃之门的圣道,也就是圣道。“愿他们聆听无垢者所觉知之法”:这位梵天恳求说:“世尊啊,愿这些众生聆听由远离贪等垢秽而成为无垢的正自觉者所觉知的四圣谛之法吧。”巴利
Pāturahosīti pātubhavi. Samalehi cintitoti samalehi chahi satthārehi cintito. Te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā sakalajambudīpe kaṇṭake pattharamānā viya, visaṃ siñcamānā viya ca samalaṃ micchādiṭṭhidhammaṃ desayiṃsu. Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ. Amatassa dvāranti amatassa nibbānassa dvārabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti ime sattā rāgādimalānaṃ abhāvato vimalena sammāsambuddhena anubuddhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ suṇantu tāva bhagavāti yācati.
就像站在岩石山顶上的人,那山顶是一整块坚固的岩石,他稳稳地站在那里。他站在那里,并不需要伸脖子、探头张望之类的动作才能看见什么。所谓“就像那样”,就是指与这个情形相似,以岩石山来作比喻。
这里简要的意思是:就像一个有眼睛的人站在岩石山顶上,能环顾四周的众人;同样,善慧啊,你也应当以妙智、一切知智具足遍眼,作为世尊登上法所成的楼阁,亲自以离忧之心,观看、审视、观察那些陷入忧愁、被生老所征服的众生。
这里真正的用意是这样的:比如在山脚下,四周开辟了大片田地,在田埂间搭了些小茅屋,夜里点起灯火,而黑暗是彻底的四重黑暗。那时,站在山顶上有眼睛的人向地面望去,既看不见田地,也看不见田埂,看不见茅屋,看不见躺在那里的人,只能看见茅屋中那一团团火焰。同样,如来登上法之楼阁观看众生界时,那些没有修善的众生,即使与如来同住一处精舍、坐在如来右膝旁边,也不会进入佛眼的视野,就像夜里射出的箭一样。而那些已修善、堪受教化的众生,即使站在很远的地方,也会进入他的视野,就像火一样,就像雪山一样。巴利
Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhitoti selamaye ekagghane pabbatamuddhani yathā ṭhitova. Na hi tassa ṭhitassa dassanatthaṃ gīvukkhipanapasāraṇādikiccaṃ atthi. Tathūpamanti tappaṭibhāgaṃ selapabbatūpamaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā selapabbatamuddhani ṭhitova cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya, tathā tvampi, sumedha, sundarapañña-sabbaññutaññāṇena samantacakkhu bhagavā dhammamayaṃ pāsādamāruyha sayaṃ apetasoko sokāvatiṇṇaṃ jātijarābhibhūtaṃ janataṃ avekkhassu upadhāraya upaparikkha. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā hi pabbatapāde samantā mahantaṃ khettaṃ katvā tattha kedārapāḷīsu kuṭikāyo katvā rattiṃ aggiṃ jāleyyuṃ. Caturaṅgasamannāgatañca andhakāraṃ assa, atha tassa pabbatassa matthake ṭhatvā cakkhumato purisassa bhūmiṃ olokayato neva khettaṃ, na kedārapāḷiyo, na kuṭiyo, na tattha sayitamanussā paññāyeyyuṃ. Kuṭikāsu pana aggijālāmattakameva paññāyeyya. Evaṃ dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha sattanikāyaṃ olokayato tathāgatassa, ye te akatakalyāṇā sattā, te ekavihāre dakkhiṇajāṇupasse nisinnāpi buddhacakkhussa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti, rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Ye pana katakalyāṇā veneyyapuggalā, te evassa dūrepi ṭhitā āpāthaṃ āgacchanti, so aggi viya himavantapabbato viya ca. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 善人虽在远方,也能显现光辉,就像雪山一样。
‘ 不善之人这里看不见,如同夜间射出的箭矢。’(Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā)——《法句经》304”巴利
‘‘Dūre santo pakāsenti, himavantova pabbato; Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā’’ti. (dha. pa. 304);
“起来!”——这是他在向世尊恳求为了说法而游方时说的。在“勇士”等词中,世尊因为具足精进,所以是勇士;因为战胜了天子魔、死魔和烦恼魔,所以是战胜战场者;因为能引导所教化的众生越过生的荒野等,所以是商队主;因为不存在欲贪之债,所以应当知道是“无债者”。巴利
Uṭṭhehīti bhagavato dhammadesanatthaṃ cārikacaraṇaṃ yācanto bhaṇati. Vīrātiādīsu bhagavā vīriyavantatāya vīro. Devaputtamaccukilesamārānaṃ vijitattā vijitasaṅgāmo. Jātikantārādinittharaṇatthāya veneyyasatthavāhanasamatthatāya satthavāho. Kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvato aṇaṇoti veditabbo.
283 “请求”就是乞请。“以佛眼”是指以知根上下之智和知意乐随眠之智。因为这两种智名叫佛眼,一切知智名叫普眼,三种道智名叫法眼。在“少尘垢者”等说法中,凡是按照上面所说的方式,其智慧眼中的贪等尘垢少的人,就是少尘垢者;尘垢多的人,就是多尘垢者。凡是信等诸根锐利的人,就是利根;诸根软弱的人,就是钝根。凡是那些信等行相美好的人,就是妙行相。凡是能领会所说的道理、容易让他们明白的人,就是易教。凡是把来世和过失看作可怕的人,就叫作见他世与过失之怖畏者。巴利
283.Ajjhesananti yācanaṃ. Buddhacakkhunāti indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāmaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇassa samantacakkhūti, tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ dhammacakkhūti. Apparajakkhetiādīsu yesaṃ vuttanayeneva paññācakkhumhi rāgādirajaṃ appaṃ, te apparajakkhā. Yesaṃ taṃ mahantaṃ, te mahārajakkhā. Yesaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni tikkhāni, te tikkhindriyā. Yesaṃ tāni mudūni, te mudindriyā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā sundarā, te svākārā. Ye kathitakāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā. Ye paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passanti, te paralokavajjabhayadassāvino nāma.
这里面的巴利经文是:有信的人尘垢少,无信的人尘垢多。已发起精进的人……懈怠的人……念现前的人……失念的人……入定的人……未入定的人……有慧的人……无慧的人尘垢多。同样,有信的人是利根……中间省略……有慧的人能见到他世和过失的可怕,无慧的人见不到他世和过失的可怕。所谓世间,就是蕴世间、处世间、界世间、福报有世间、福报所生世间、衰败有世间、衰败所生世间。一种世间:一切众生依靠食物而住。两种世间:名和色。三种世间:三种受。四种世间:四种食。五种世间:五取蕴。六种世间:六内处。七种世间:七识住。八种世间:八种世间法。九种世间:九种众生居处。十种世间:十处。十二种世间:十二处。十八种世间:十八界。所谓过失,就是一切烦恼是过失,一切恶行是过失,一切造作是过失,一切导向存在的业是过失。这样,对于这个世间和这个过失,强烈的怖畏想就现前了,就像面对举起利剑的刽子手一样。通过这五十种方式,他了知、看见、解悟、证悟这五根。这就是如来的知根上下之智。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha pāḷi – ‘‘saddho puggalo apparajakkho, assaddho puggalo mahārajakkho. Āraddhavīriyo…, kusito…, upaṭṭhitassati…, muṭṭhassati…, samāhito…, asamāhito…, paññavā…, duppañño puggalo mahārajakkho. Tathā saddho puggalo tikkhindriyo…pe… paññavā puggalo paralokavajjabhayadassāvī, duppañño puggalo na paralokavajjabhayadassāvī. Lokoti khandhaloko, āyatanaloko, dhātuloko, sampattibhavaloko, sampattisambhavaloko, vipattibhavaloko, vipattisambhavaloko, eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Dve lokā – nāmañca rūpañca. Tayo lokā – tisso vedanā. Cattāro lokā – cattāro āhārā. Pañca lokā – pañcupādānakkhandhā. Cha lokā – cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. Satta lokā – satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Aṭṭha lokā – aṭṭha lokadhammā. Nava lokā – nava sattāvāsā. Dasa lokā – dasāyatanāni. Dvādasa lokā – dvādasāyatanāni. Aṭṭhārasa lokā – aṭṭhārassa dhātuyo. Vajjanti sabbe kilesā vajjā, sabbe duccaritā vajjā, sabbe abhisaṅkhārā vajjā, sabbe bhavagāmikammā vajjā. Iti imasmiñca loke imasmiñca vajje tibbā bhayasaññā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, seyyathāpi ukkhittāsike vadhake. Imehi paññāsāya ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni jānāti passati aññāsi paṭivijjhi. Idaṃ tathāgatassa indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.112).
“在青莲花丛中”指的是青莲花林。其他几种莲花也是同样的理解方式。“在水下滋养的”是指那些完全沉在水里生长的。“高出水面而立的”是指已经超出水面而立的。其中,那些高出水面而立的,正等着阳光照到它们,当天就会开花;那些刚好与水面齐平的,第二天会开花;那些从水里长出来却还沉在水下、靠水滋养的,第三天会开花。可是,还有一些没有长出水面,比如所谓的“有病”青莲花等,它们根本不会开花,只会成为鱼和鳖的食物。这些并没有出现在经文里。不过,还是应当引来说明,所以在这里加以说明。巴利
Uppaliniyanti uppalavane. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Antonimuggaposīnīti yāni anto nimuggāneva posiyanti. Udakaṃ accuggamma ṭhitānīti udakaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitāni. Tattha yāni accuggamma ṭhitāni, tāni sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni ṭhitāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma atthi, yāni neva pupphissanti, macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti. Tāni pāḷiṃ nāruḷhāni. Āharitvā pana dīpetabbānīti dīpitāni.
就像那四种花一样,同样有四种人:略闻即悟者、广说方悟者、需引导者、止于文字者。其中,如果某个人在法刚一说出时就通达法,这种人就叫略闻即悟者。如果某个人在简略说出后,对含义加以详细分别解释时才通达法,这种人就叫广说方悟者。如果某个人通过听受教法、追问、如理作意、亲近、结交、侍奉善知识,才逐渐通达法,这种人就叫需引导者。如果某个人虽然多听、多说、多忆持、多诵读,但在那一生中仍然不能通达法,这种人就叫止于文字者。(《人施设论》151)在这里,世尊观察像青莲花池一样的十千世界时,看到:略闻即悟者就像今天开放的花,广说方悟者就像明天开放的花,需引导者就像第三天开放的花,止于文字者就像将成为鱼鳖食物的花。世尊在观察时,也从一切方面看到:这么多是尘垢少的,这么多是尘垢多的,其中这么多是略闻即悟者。巴利
Yatheva hi tāni catubbidhāni pupphāni, evameva ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā. Tattha ‘‘yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ugghaṭitaññū. Yassa puggalassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamo’’ (pu. pa. 151). Tattha bhagavā uppalavanādisadisaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokento ‘‘ajja pupphanakāni viya ugghaṭitaññū, sve pupphanakāni viya vipañcitaññū, tatiyadivase pupphanakāni viya neyyo, macchakacchapabhakkhāni pupphāni viya padaparamo’’ti addasa. Passanto ca ‘‘ettakā apparajakkhā, ettakā mahārajakkhā, tatrāpi ettakā ugghaṭitaññū’’ti evaṃ sabbākāratova addasa.
在这其中,对前三种人来说,世尊的说法能让他们就在这一生中达成目标;对文字最上者来说,则成为未来熏修的因缘。然后,世尊知道为这四种人说法能带来利益,生起想要说法的意愿,又把三有中的一切众生按有堪能和无堪能分成两类。关于这一点,经中说:“哪些众生是无堪能者?那些具足业障、烦恼障、异熟障,无信、无欲、无慧,不能在善法中进入正性决定的众生,这些就是无堪能者。哪些众生是堪能者?那些没有业障……乃至……具足堪能的众生,这些就是堪能者。”(《分别论》827;《无碍解道》1.115)在这里,世尊舍弃一切无堪能的人,只以智慧摄受堪能的人,把他们分成六类:“这么多是贪行者,这么多是嗔行者、痴行者、寻行者、信行者、觉行者。”这样分好之后,世尊心想:“我要为他们说法。”巴利
Tattha tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imasmiṃyeva attabhāve bhagavato dhammadesanā atthaṃ sādheti. Padaparamānaṃ anāgate vāsanatthāya hoti. Atha bhagavā imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ viditvā desetukamyataṃ uppādetvā puna sabbepi tīsu bhavesu satte bhabbābhabbavasena dve koṭṭhāse akāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘katame te sattā abhabbā, ye te sattā kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā kilesāvaraṇena samannāgatā vipākāvaraṇena samannāgatā assaddhā acchandikā duppaññā abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ, ime te sattā abhabbā. Katame te sattā bhabbā? Ye te sattā na kammāvaraṇena…pe… ime te sattā bhabbā’’ti (vibha. 827; paṭi. ma. 1.115). Tattha sabbepi abhabbapuggale pahāya bhabbapuggaleyeva ñāṇena pariggahetvā ‘‘ettakā rāgacaritā, ettakā dosamohacaritā vitakkasaddhābuddhicaritā’’ti cha koṭṭhāse akāsi; evaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desissāmīti cintesi.
我回应说,就是我说了。已打开,就是已开启。不死之门,就是圣道。因为圣道就是被称为不死的涅槃之门,这里要表明的是:我已把它打开并安立好了。让他们释放信心,就是愿一切人都释放自己的信心,把它放舍。最后两句的意思是:我因为想到说法会让身体和语言疲惫,所以虽然自己对这殊胜最上的法既熟悉又能流畅宣说,却一直没有说。但现在,所有人都可以把信心这个容器拿来,我要满足他们的心愿。巴利
Paccabhāsinti patiabhāsiṃ. Apārutāti vivaṭā. Amatassa dvārāti ariyamaggo. So hi amatasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa dvāraṃ, so mayā vivaritvā ṭhapitoti dasseti. Pamuñcantu saddhanti sabbe attano saddhaṃ pamuñcantu, vissajjentu. Pacchimapadadvaye ayamattho, ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattitampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā na bhāsiṃ . Idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi nesaṃ saṅkappanti.
284 比丘们,那时我心里生起了这样的念头:我应当先为谁说法呢?这就是与说法相关的寻思生起了。那么这个寻思是什么时候生起的呢?是在成佛之后的第八个七日。巴利
284.Tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhave, etadahosīti etaṃ ahosi – kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyanti ayaṃ dhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko udapādīti attho. Kadā panesa udapādīti? Buddhabhūtassa aṭṭhame sattāhe.
这里有一段次第说:据说,菩萨在大出离那天,看到敞开的宫女住处,心里生起警惧,就叫来恰那说:“把犍陟牵来。”恰那陪着菩萨,菩萨骑上马王的背,出了城,经过名叫犍陟折返塔的地方,又越过三个王国,在阿诺摩河边出家。此后他次第游行,到王舍城乞食,坐在般荼婆山上。摩揭陀王问了他的名姓后,说:“请接受这个王位吧!”菩萨回答:“够了,大王,我不需要王位。我舍弃王位,是为了利益世间而精勤修行,要在世间成为无覆者,所以才出家。”国王便说:“既然如此,愿你成佛之后,最先来到我的国土。”菩萨接受了这个承诺。之后他去参访阿喇拉·迦罗摩和伍达咖·罗摩子,在他们的教法里找不到实质,就离开了那里。在优楼频螺,他修了六年苦行,仍然不能证得不死,于是用粗食来滋养身体。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – bodhisatto kira mahābhinikkhamanadivase vivaṭaṃ itthāgāraṃ disvā saṃviggahadayo, ‘‘kaṇḍakaṃ āharā’’ti channaṃ āmantetvā channasahāyo assarājapiṭṭhigato nagarato nikkhamitvā kaṇḍakanivattanacetiyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma dassetvā tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma anomānadītīre pabbajitvā anupubbena cārikaṃ caramāno rājagahe piṇḍāya caritvā paṇḍavapabbate nisinno magadhissarena raññā nāmagottaṃ pucchitvā, ‘‘imaṃ rajjaṃ sampaṭicchāhī’’ti vutto, ‘‘alaṃ mahārāja, na mayhaṃ rajjena attho, ahaṃ rajjaṃ pahāya lokahitatthāya padhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā loke vivaṭacchado bhavissāmīti nikkhanto’’ti vatvā, ‘‘tena hi buddho hutvā paṭhamaṃ mayhaṃ vijitaṃ osareyyāsī’’ti paṭiññaṃ gahito kālāmañca udakañca upasaṅkamitvā tesaṃ dhammadesanāya sāraṃ avindanto tato pakkamitvā uruveḷāya chabbassāni dukkarakārikaṃ karontopi amataṃ paṭivijjhituṃ asakkonto oḷārikāhārapaṭisevanena kāyaṃ santappesi.
那时,在优楼频螺村里,有个叫善生女的居士女儿,在一棵榕树下发了个愿:“如果我嫁到门当户对的人家,头一胎就生下儿子,我就来作供养。”她这个愿望实现了。在毗舍佉月满月那天,她想一早就去作供养,于是天还没亮就熬好了乳粥。熬那乳粥的时候,冒出很大很大的泡沫,全都向右旋转,连一滴都不往外溅。大梵天王替她撑着伞盖,四大护世天王手持宝剑守护,帝释天神一边拨弄火棒一边把火点着,天神们把四大洲的营养精华收集起来投进锅里。菩萨等到该乞食的时候,清早出门,坐在树下。那个去打扫树根的婢女回来告诉善生女:“树神坐在树下了。”善生女把全身的装饰都穿戴好,把乳粥盛进价值十万金的纯金钵里,再用另一只金盘盖上,端起来就去了。她见到那位大士,就连钵一起放到他手里,顶礼之后说:“就像我的愿望已经实现了一样,愿您的愿望也实现!”说完就走了。巴利
Tadā ca uruvelagāme sujātā nāma kuṭumbiyadhītā ekasmiṃ nigrodharukkhe patthanamakāsi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ samānajātikaṃ kulagharaṃ gantvā paṭhamagabbhe puttaṃ labhissāmi, balikammaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Tassā sā patthanā samijjhi. Sā visākhapuṇṇamadivase pātova balikammaṃ karissāmīti rattiyā paccūsasamaye eva pāyasaṃ paṭiyādesi. Tasmiṃ pāyase paccamāne mahantamahantā pupphuḷā uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇāvaṭṭā hutvā sañcaranti. Ekaphusitampi bahi na gacchati. Mahābrahmā chattaṃ dhāresi. Cattāro lokapālā khaggahatthā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhiṃsu. Sakko alātāni samānento aggiṃ jālesi. Devatā catūsu dīpesu ojaṃ saṃharitvā tattha pakkhipiṃsu. Bodhisatto bhikkhācārakālaṃ āgamayamāno pātova gantvā rukkhamūle nisīdi. Rukkhamūle sodhanatthāya gatā dhātī āgantvā sujātāya ārocesi – ‘‘devatā rukkhamūle nisinnā’’ti. Sujātā, sabbaṃ pasādhanaṃ pasādhetvā satasahassagghanike suvaṇṇathāle pāyasaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aparāya suvaṇṇapātiyā pidahitvā ukkhipitvā gatā mahāpurisaṃ disvā saheva pātiyā hatthe ṭhapetvā vanditvā ‘‘yathā mayhaṃ manoratho nipphanno, evaṃ tumhākampi nipphajjatū’’ti vatvā pakkāmi.
菩萨走到尼连禅河边,把金钵放在岸上,沐浴后上岸,把乳粥捏成四十九个饭团,吃完后把钵扔进河里,说:“如果我今天能成佛,这钵就逆流而上。”钵果然逆流而去,停了一会儿,进入迦罗龙王的宫殿,把过去三佛的钵托起来安住。巴利
Bodhisatto nerañjarāya tīraṃ gantvā suvaṇṇathālaṃ tīre ṭhapetvā nhatvā paccuttaritvā ekūnapaṇṇāsapiṇḍe karonto pāyasaṃ paribhuñjitvā ‘‘sacāhaṃ ajja buddho bhavāmi, thālaṃ paṭisotaṃ gacchatū’’ti khipi. Thālaṃ paṭisotaṃ gantvā thokaṃ ṭhatvā kālanāgarājassa bhavanaṃ pavisitvā tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ thālāni ukkhipitvā aṭṭhāsi.
大士在树林里做完白天的禅修,傍晚时接过割草人给的八把草,登上菩提道场,先站在南边。那个地方像莲叶上的水珠一样晃动起来。大士心想:“这个地方承受不住我的功德。”就走到西边,那里也同样晃动。他又走到北边,那里也一样晃动。他再走到东边,那里有一块刚好够结跏趺坐的地方,像深深埋入地下的因陀罗柱一样,纹丝不动。大士想:“这就是诸佛摧破、粉碎烦恼的地方。”于是抓住草尖抖了抖,那些草就变得像画师用笔尖裁过一样整齐。菩萨下定决心:“不证菩提,我绝不从这座上起来。”便提起四种精进力,盘腿坐下。巴利
Mahāsatto vanasaṇḍe divāvihāraṃ katvā sāyanhasamaye sottiyena dinnā aṭṭha tiṇamuṭṭhiyo gahetvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha dakkhiṇadisābhāge aṭṭhāsi. So padeso paduminipatte udakabindu viya akampittha. Mahāsatto, ‘‘ayaṃ mama guṇaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkotī’’ti pacchimadisābhāgaṃ agamāsi, sopi tatheva akampittha. Uttaradisābhāgaṃ agamāsi, sopi tatheva akampittha. Puratthimadisābhāgaṃ agamāsi, tattha pallaṅkappamāṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ sunikhātaindakhilo viya niccalamahosi. Mahāsatto ‘‘idaṃ ṭhānaṃ sabbabuddhānaṃ kilesabhañjanaviddhaṃsanaṭṭhāna’’nti tāni tiṇāni agge gahetvā cālesi. Tāni cittakārena tūlikaggena paricchinnāni viya ahesuṃ. Bodhisatto , ‘‘bodhiṃ appatvā imaṃ pallaṅkaṃ na bhindissāmī’’ti caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdi.
就在那一刹那,魔罗变化出千条手臂,骑上一头名叫基利美卡拉、有一百五十由旬高的大象,率领九由旬长的魔军,斜着眼看过来,像大山一样压过来,逼近了菩萨。
大士心想:“我圆满十巴拉密的时候,没有别的沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔罗、梵天神能为我作证;可是在我投生为韦桑德拉的那一世,大地曾七次为我作证;现在,这无知无觉、像枯柴一样的大地,也一定会为我作证。”于是伸出了手。
大地立刻像被铁棍敲打的铜盘一样,发出百次、千次的巨响,剧烈震动翻滚,把魔军抛进了轮围山边缘的深渊里。
大士在太阳还挂在天上的时候就摧毁了魔军,在初夜分证得宿住智,中夜分清净了天眼,后夜分把智慧投入缘起,顺逆观察流转与还灭,在日出时成了佛。他说:“为了成就这个跏趺座,我经历了无数万亿劫的努力。”然后以同一个跏趺座坐了七天。
这时,有些天人生起了疑惑:“难道还有别的能成佛的法吗?”巴利
Taṅkhaṇaññeva māro bāhusahassaṃ māpetvā diyaḍḍhayojanasatikaṃ girimekhalaṃ nāma hatthiṃ āruyha navayojanaṃ mārabalaṃ gahetvā addhakkhikena olokayamāno pabbato viya ajjhottharanto upasaṅkami. Mahāsatto, ‘‘mayhaṃ dasa pāramiyo pūrentassa añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā sakkhi natthi, vessantarattabhāve pana mayhaṃ sattasu vāresu mahāpathavī sakkhi ahosi; idānipi me ayameva acetanā kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamā mahāpathavī sakkhī’’ti hatthaṃ pasāreti. Mahāpathavī tāvadeva ayadaṇḍena pahataṃ kaṃsathālaṃ viya ravasataṃ ravasahassaṃ muñcamānā viravitvā parivattamānā mārabalaṃ cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ muñcanamakāsi. Mahāsatto sūriye dharamāneyeva mārabalaṃ vidhamitvā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ otāretvā vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ sammasitvā aruṇodaye buddho hutvā , ‘‘mayā anekakappakoṭisatasahassaṃ addhānaṃ imassa pallaṅkassa atthāya vāyāmo kato’’ti sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisīdi. Athekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho aññepi buddhattakarā dhammā atthī’’ti kaṅkhā udapādi.
那时,世尊在第八天从定中出来,知道天人们心里还有疑惑。为了消除这些疑惑,他升到空中示现双神变,把他们的疑惑打消了。然后他稍离跏趺座,站在其东北方,用不眨眼的双眼注视着跏趺座和菩提树——那是他圆满了四阿僧祇劫又十万劫巴拉密之后证得果位的地方,就这样过了七天。那个地方后来就被称为不瞬塔。巴利
Atha bhagavā aṭṭhame divase samāpattito vuṭṭhāya devatānaṃ kaṅkhaṃ ñatvā kaṅkhāvidhamanatthaṃ ākāse uppatitvā yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvā tāsaṃ kaṅkhaṃ vidhamitvā pallaṅkato īsakaṃ pācīnanissite uttaradisābhāge ṭhatvā cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca pūritānaṃ pāramīnaṃ phalādhigamaṭṭhānaṃ pallaṅkañceva bodhirukkhañca animisehi akkhīhi olokayamāno sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ animisacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ.
然后,他在跏趺座和站立处之间那条东西向延伸的宝石经行道上经行,度过了七天。那个地方后来被称为宝石经行塔。之后,天神们在西边建起了一座宝石殿堂,他在那里以跏趺坐坐下,仔细思择阿毗达摩藏,尤其是其中有无量方法、无边理路的《发趣论》,就这样度过了七天。那个地方后来被称为宝石殿堂塔。就这样,他在菩提树附近度过了四个七天。到第五个七天,他从菩提树下去往阿阇波罗榕树,在那里也是一边思择法,一边体验解脱之乐而坐着。在思择法时,他这样梳理阿毗达摩的次第:第一部是《法集论》,接着是《分别论》《界论》《人施设论》,然后是《论事》《双论》,最后是名为大论的《发趣论》。巴利
Atha pallaṅkassa ca ṭhitaṭṭhānassa ca antarā puratthimapacchimato āyate ratanacaṅkame caṅkamanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanacaṅkamacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Tato pacchimadisābhāge devatā ratanagharaṃ māpayiṃsu, tattha pallaṅkena nisīditvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ visesato cettha anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Evaṃ bodhisamīpeyeva cattāri sattāhāni vītināmetvā pañcame sattāhe bodhirukkhamūlā yena ajapālanigrodho tenupasaṅkami, tatrāpi dhammaṃ vicinantoyeva vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento nisīdi, dhammaṃ vicinanto cettha evaṃ abhidhamme nayamaggaṃ sammasi – paṭhamaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇīpakaraṇaṃ nāma, tato vibhaṅgapakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathāpakaraṇaṃ, puggalapaññattipakaraṇaṃ, kathāvatthu nāma pakaraṇaṃ, yamakaṃ nāma pakaraṇaṃ, tato mahāpakaraṇaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti.
那时,他的心进入微细的《发趣论》时,喜生起了;喜一生起,血液就变得清净;血液清净了,皮肤也清净了。因为皮肤清净,从身体东侧升起像尖顶楼阁那么大的光芒,像六牙象群冲入空中一样,射向东方无量的轮围世界;从身体西侧升起,射向西方;从右肩顶升起,射向南方;从左肩顶升起,射向北方,射向无量的轮围世界。从脚底放出珊瑚嫩芽颜色的光芒,穿透大地,劈开水,裂开风团,冲入无阻碍的虚空。从头顶升起一道青色的光柱,像旋转的宝珠串一样,穿透六欲天,穿透九梵天、广果天和五净居天,越过四无色界,冲入无阻碍的虚空。那一天,无量轮围世界中的无量众生全都变成了金色。而且从世尊身上放出的那些光芒,直到今天,仍然遍及无尽的世界。巴利
Tatthassa saṇhasukhumapaṭṭhānamhi citte otiṇṇe pīti uppajji; pītiyā uppannāya lohitaṃ pasīdi, lohite pasanne chavi pasīdi. Chaviyā pasannāya puratthimakāyato kūṭāgārādippamāṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā ākāse pakkhandachaddantanāgakulaṃ viya pācīnadisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā, pacchimakāyato uṭṭhahitvā pacchimadisāya, dakkhiṇaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇadisāya, vāmaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā uttaradisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā, pādatalehi pavāḷaṅkuravaṇṇā rasmiyo nikkhamitvā mahāpathaviṃ vinivijjhitvā udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā vātakkhandhaṃ padāletvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā, sīsato samparivattiyamānaṃ maṇidāmaṃ viya nīlavaṇṇā rasmivaṭṭi uṭṭhahitvā cha devaloke vinivijjhitvā nava brahmaloke vehapphale pañca suddhāvāse ca vinivijjhitvā cattāro āruppe atikkamma ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Tasmiṃ divase aparimāṇesu cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇā sattā sabbe suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva ahesuṃ. Taṃ divasañca pana bhagavato sarīrā nikkhantā yāvajjadivasāpi tā rasmiyo anantā lokadhātuyo gacchantiyeva.
世尊就这样在阿阇波罗榕树下度过了七天。之后,他又在目恰林达树下坐了七天。他刚坐下,一场巨大的非时雨云就出现了,遍满整个轮围世界。据说,这样的大雨云只在两种时候降下:转轮王出世时,或者佛陀出世时。这一次,是在佛陀出世时降下的。那雨云出现时,目恰林达龙王心想:“世尊刚进入我的住处,这雨云就出现了,我应该为他提供避雨的地方。”他虽然能化现出七宝宫殿,但转念一想:“如果这样做,我就得不到大果报。我要亲身服侍十力世尊。”于是,他现出巨大的身躯,把世尊盘绕了七圈,又在上面撑起自己的头盖。盘绕出的内部空间,下方有铁宫殿那么大。龙王心里想的是:“愿世尊能以他喜欢的任何姿势安住。”所以他围出了这么大的空间。中间安置了宝座,上方悬挂着用金星装饰、缀有香鬘花鬘的布幔,四角点着香油灯,四方敞开,摆放着装满栴檀香的盒子。世尊就这样在那里度过了七天。之后,他又在罗阇耶多那树下坐了七天。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā ajapālanigrodhe sattāhaṃ vītināmetvā tato aparaṃ sattāhaṃ mucalinde nisīdi, nisinnamattasseva cassa sakalaṃ cakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūrento mahāakālamegho udapādi. Evarūpo kira mahāmegho dvīsuyeva kālesu vassati cakkavattimhi vā uppanne buddhe vā. Idha buddhakāle udapādi. Tasmiṃ pana uppanne mucalindo nāgarājā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ megho satthari mayhaṃ bhavanaṃ paviṭṭhamatteva uppanno, vāsāgāramassa laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. So sattaratanamayaṃ pāsādaṃ nimminituṃ sakkontopi evaṃ kate mayhaṃ mahapphalaṃ na bhavissati, dasabalassa kāyaveyyāvaccaṃ karissāmīti mahantaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā satthāraṃ sattakkhattuṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvā upari phaṇaṃ dhāresi. Parikkhepassa anto okāso heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇo ahosi. Icchiticchitena iriyāpathena satthā viharissatīti nāgarājassa ajjhāsayo ahosi. Tasmā evaṃ mahantaṃ okāsaṃ parikkhipi. Majjhe ratanapallaṅko paññatto hoti, upari suvaṇṇatārakavicittaṃ samosaritagandhadāmakusumadāmacelavitānaṃ ahosi. Catūsu koṇesu gandhatelena dīpā jalitā, catūsu disāsu vivaritvā candanakaraṇḍakā ṭhapitā. Evaṃ bhagavā taṃ sattāhaṃ tattha vītināmetvā tato aparaṃ sattāhaṃ rājāyatane nisīdi.
在第八个七日,世尊嚼了帝释天王送来的齿木和药果诃梨勒,漱了口,又用四大天王献上的珍贵石钵,吃了德布萨和波利供养的团食。然后他回到阿阇波罗榕树下,坐下来时,心里生起了这个一切佛陀都共有的思惟。巴利
Aṭṭhame sattāhe sakkena devānamindena ābhataṃ dantakaṭṭhañca osadhaharītakañca khāditvā mukhaṃ dhovitvā catūhi lokapālehi upanīte paccagghe selamaye patte tapussabhallikānaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā puna paccāgantvā ajapālanigrodhe nisinnassa sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇo ayaṃ vitakko udapādi.
在这里,“智者”是指具备智慧的人。“聪敏者”是指具备敏慧的人。“大智者”是指具备依处而生的智慧的人。“尘垢少的种性者”是指通过等至镇伏了烦恼,所以其种性没有烦恼尘垢,是清净的众生。“将会了知”是指将会观察、将会证悟。“而且我也生起了智”,是指我也生起了一切知智。据说,世尊并没有仅仅因为天神的话就下结论,而是自己用一切知智观察,看到这个人在距今七天前已经命终并投生到无所有处。针对这个情况,他才说:“而且我也生起了智与见。”“大损失”是指因为从本应在七天内证得的道果中退堕了,所以遭受了巨大的损失,因此称为大损失。他出生在不适合修行的时节,即使去听,也没有能听闻佛陀所说法的净信之耳,甚至连前来这处说法地方的脚也没有。这样说明他成了一个有大损失的人。“于昨暮命终”是指在半夜命终。“而且我也生起了智”,是指我也生起了一切知智。据说,在这里世尊同样没有因为天神的话就作决定,而是用一切知智观察,看到:“他昨天半夜命终,伍达咖·拉玛子已投生于非想非非想处。”因此才这样说。其余内容和前面所说的类似。“多所助益者”是指做了很多有帮助之事的人。“他们侍奉了为精进而派遣者”,是指为了精进而被派遣的那位,他们在住处通过打扫精舍、拿着钵与衣随行、提供漱口水和齿木等方式来服侍他。那么,哪些人是这“五比丘”呢?就是他们——巴利
Tattha paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Viyattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato. Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyā paññāya samannāgato. Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitattā nikkilesajātiko visuddhasatto. Ājānissatīti sallakkhessati paṭivijjhissati. Ñāṇañca pana meti mayhampi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uppajji. Bhagavā kira devatāya kathiteneva niṭṭhaṃ agantvā sayampi sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ito sattamadivasamatthake kālaṃ katvā ākiñcaññāyatane nibbattoti addasa. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādī’’ti. Mahājāniyoti sattadivasabbhantare pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni assāti mahājāniyo. Akkhaṇe nibbattattā gantvā desiyamānaṃ dhammampissa sotuṃ sotappasādo natthi, idha dhammadesanaṭṭhānaṃ āgamanapādāpi natthi, evaṃ mahājāniyo jātoti dasseti. Abhidosakālaṅkatoti aḍḍharatte kālaṅkato. Ñāṇañca pana meti mayhampi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ udapādi. Idhāpi kira bhagavā devatāya vacanena sanniṭṭhānaṃ akatvā sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ‘‘hiyyo aḍḍharatte kālaṅkatvā udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbatto’’ti addasa. Tasmā evamāha. Sesaṃ purimanayasadisameva. Bahukārāti bahūpakārā. Padhānapahitattaṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsūti padhānatthāya pesitattabhāvaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne pariveṇasammajjanena pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā anubandhanena mukhodakadantakaṭṭhadānādinā ca upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Ke pana te pañcavaggiyā nāma? Yete –
拉玛、陀阇、罗佉那、若提曼提,
焰那、苏跋阇、须夜摩、苏达达。
这八位就是当时的婆罗门,
六支具足者宣说了咒语。巴利
Rāmo dhajo lakkhaṇo jotimanti, Yañño subhojo suyāmo sudatto; Ete tadā aṭṭha ahesuṃ brāhmaṇā, Chaḷaṅgavā mantaṃ viyākariṃsūti.
菩萨出生的时候,有八位婆罗门,既负责解梦,也负责看相。其中三位作了两种解说:“具足这些相好的人,如果在家生活,就会成为转轮王;如果出家,就会成为佛陀。”五位婆罗门则作了唯一确定的解说:“具足这些相好的人,不会留在家中,一定会成佛。”这三位还停留在自己预言的字句范围内,而那五位已经超越了预言的字句。他们把得到的满钵财物分给亲戚后,心想:“这位大士绝不会在家生活,一定会成佛。”于是生起厌离心,为了菩萨而出家成为沙门。也有人说,出家的是那五位婆罗门的儿子,但这种说法已被义注否定。巴利
Bodhisattassa jātakāle supinapaṭiggāhakā ceva lakkhaṇapaṭiggāhakā ca aṭṭha brāhmaṇā. Tesu tayo dvedhā byākariṃsu – ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāraṃ ajjhāvasamāno rājā hoti cakkavattī, pabbajamāno buddho’’ti. Pañca brāhmaṇā ekaṃsabyākaraṇā ahesuṃ – ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāre na tiṭṭhati, buddhova hotī’’ti. Tesu purimā tayo yathāmantapadaṃ gatā, ime pana pañca mantapadaṃ atikkantā. Te attanā laddhaṃ puṇṇapattaṃ ñātakānaṃ vissajjetvā ‘‘ayaṃ mahāpuriso agāraṃ na ajjhāvasissati, ekantena buddho bhavissatī’’ti nibbitakkā bodhisattaṃ uddissa samaṇapabbajjaṃ pabbajitā. Tesaṃ puttātipi vadanti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāya paṭikkhittaṃ.
据说,这些人年纪轻轻就精通了许多咒语,所以那些婆罗门就把他们放在老师的位置上。他们后来心想:如果等到以后,我们舍不下妻子儿女这些牵绊,就没办法出家了。于是他们年纪轻轻就出了家,四处游方,享用着舒适的住处。不过他们时不时会问:贤友,那位大士出家了吗?人们就说:你们哪里见得到那位大士?他正在三座宫殿里,被三种歌舞围绕,像天神一样享受着福报呢。他们听了之后,心想:那位大士的智慧还没成熟。于是就安闲自在地住着,一点也不着急。那么,世尊为什么在这里说这五群比丘确实很有帮助呢?难道世尊只为帮助过自己的人说法,不为没帮助过自己的人说法吗?不是的,他也为后者说法。只是因为过去的亲近关系,世尊先想到了阿喇拉·迦罗摩和伍达咖·拉玛子。而在这佛陀的教化领域里,除了阿若憍陈如,没有别人能第一个证悟法。为什么呢?因为他具备那样的宿世因缘。巴利
Ete kira daharakāleyeva bahū mante jāniṃsu, tasmā te brāhmaṇā ācariyaṭṭhāne ṭhapayiṃsu. Te pacchā amhehi puttadārajaṭaṃ chaḍḍetvā na sakkā bhavissati pabbajitunti daharakāleyeva pabbajitvā ramaṇīyāni senāsanāni paribhuñjantā vicariṃsu. Kālena kālaṃ pana ‘‘kiṃ, bho, mahāpuriso mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto’’ti pucchanti. Manussā, ‘‘kuhiṃ tumhe mahāpurisaṃ passissatha, tīsu pāsādesu tividhanāṭakamajjhe devo viya sampattiṃ anubhotī’’ti vadanti. Te sutvā, ‘‘na tāva mahāpurisassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gacchatī’’ti appossukkā vihariṃsuyeva. Kasmā panettha bhagavā, ‘‘bahukārā kho ime pañcavaggiyā’’ti āha? Kiṃ upakārakānaṃyeva esa dhammaṃ deseti, anupakārakānaṃ na desetīti? No na deseti. Paricayavasena hesa āḷārañceva kālāmaṃ udakañca rāmaputtaṃ olokesi. Etasmiṃ pana buddhakkhette ṭhapetvā aññāsikoṇḍaññaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Kasmā? Tathāvidhaupanissayattā.
据说,过去在积福的时候,有两兄弟。他们一起种一块庄稼。其中,哥哥心想:“这一季庄稼,我要做九次最上等的布施。”于是播种时,他布施了叫“种子最上”的那一份;庄稼结穗时,他对弟弟说:“现在结穗了,我们把穗剖开布施吧。”弟弟说:“你这是要毁掉嫩庄稼啊。”哥哥知道弟弟不肯听从,就把田分开,从自己那份里剖开谷穗,取出乳浆,拌上酥油和糖浆布施出去;谷粒还嫩时,就做成嫩谷布施;收割时做“收割最上施”;扎成束时做“束最上施”;捆成把时做“把最上施”;堆到打谷场时做“场最上施”;堆垛时做“堆垛最上施”;入谷仓时做“仓最上施”——就这样,在一季庄稼里做了九次最上等的布施。弟弟却是等收下来以后才布施。这两人当中,哥哥后来成了阿若憍陈如长老,弟弟成了游行者苏跋达。正因为在一季庄稼中做了九次最上等布施,除了这位长老,再没有别人能最先证悟法。“这五群比丘确实多所助益”这句话,只是世尊忆念他们曾给的帮助而说的。巴利
Pubbe kira puññakaraṇakāle dve bhātaro ahesuṃ. Te ekatova sassaṃ akaṃsu. Tattha jeṭṭhakassa ‘‘ekasmiṃ sasse navavāre aggasassadānaṃ mayā dātabba’’nti ahosi. So vappakāle bījaggaṃ nāma datvā gabbhakāle kaniṭṭhena saddhiṃ mantesi – ‘‘gabbhakāle gabbhaṃ phāletvā dassāmā’’ti. Kaniṭṭho ‘‘taruṇasassaṃ nāsetukāmosī’’ti āha. Jeṭṭho kaniṭṭhassa ananuvattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā khettaṃ vibhajitvā attano koṭṭhāsato gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ nīharitvā sappiphāṇitehi yojetvā adāsi, puthukakāle puthukaṃ kāretvā adāsi, lāyane lāyanaggaṃ veṇikaraṇe veṇaggaṃ kalāpādīsu kalāpaggaṃ khaḷaggaṃ bhaṇḍaggaṃ koṭṭhagganti evaṃ ekasasse navavāre aggadānaṃ adāsi. Kaniṭṭho panassa uddharitvā adāsi, tesu jeṭṭho aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero jāto, kaniṭṭho subhaddaparibbājako. Iti ekasmiṃ sasse navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā ṭhapetvā theraṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. ‘‘Bahukārā kho ime pañcavaggiyā’’ti idaṃ pana upakārānussaraṇamattakeneva vuttaṃ.
在仙人堕处鹿野苑:据说,在佛陀还没出世的时候,那些独觉佛在香醉山以灭尽定度过七天,出定之后,嚼了龙蔓做的齿木,在阿耨达池洗了脸,拿着钵和袈裟,从空中飞来,降落在这里。他们在这里披好袈裟,进城乞食,吃完饭,要离开的时候,也是从这里腾空而去。因为仙人们在这里降落、又从这里飞起,所以这个地方就叫仙人堕处。又因为这里是施给鹿群、让它们免于恐惧的地方,所以叫鹿野苑。因此经中说“在仙人堕处鹿野苑”。巴利
Isipatane migadāyeti tasmiṃ kira padese anuppanne buddhe paccekasambuddhā gandhamādanapabbate sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā vītināmetvā nirodhā vuṭṭhāya nāgalatādantakaṭṭhaṃ khāditvā anotattadahe mukhaṃ dhovitvā pattacīvaramādāya ākāsena āgantvā nipatanti. Tattha cīvaraṃ pārupitvā nagare piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakiccā gamanakālepi tatoyeva uppatitvā gacchanti. Iti isayo ettha nipatanti uppatanti cāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ isipatananti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Migānaṃ pana abhayatthāya dinnattā migadāyoti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘isipatane migadāye’’ti.
285 “在伽耶与菩提之间”:指伽耶和菩提之间的空隙处,距离三牛呼。从菩提道场到伽耶是三牛呼,到波罗奈是十八由旬。伍巴咖在菩提道场与伽耶之间见到了世尊。因为和“之间”这个词搭配,所以用了业格。语法家们在这样的场合通常只用一个“之间”,比如“在村庄与河流之间行走”。这个词必须和第二个词一起搭配理解;如果不搭配,业格就说不通。这里正是搭配之后才说的。“已踏上长途道路”:意思是已踏上被称为长途的道路,也就是走在长途上。因为在《分别论》中解释走长途的时机时说到“心想‘我要走半由旬’也该进食”等等,所以半由旬也算长途。不过,从菩提道场到伽耶是三牛呼。巴利
285.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti gayāya ca bodhissa ca vivare tigāvutantare ṭhāne. Bodhimaṇḍato hi gayā tīṇi gāvutāni. Bārāṇasī aṭṭhārasa yojanāni. Upako bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti. So dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti . Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Idha pana yojetvā eva vuttoti. Addhānamaggapaṭipannanti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ paṭipannaṃ, dīghamaggapaṭipannanti attho. Addhānamaggagamanasamayassa hi vibhaṅge ‘‘addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’ntiādivacanato (pāci. 218) addhayojanampi addhānamaggo hoti. Bodhimaṇḍato pana gayā tigāvutaṃ.
征服了一切:已经战胜一切三地之法而安住。了知一切:已经了知、证知一切四地之法。于一切法无染:于一切三地之法,不被烦恼的污染所染。舍离一切:已经舍离一切三地之法而安住。于渴爱灭尽得解脱:以渴爱灭尽的涅槃为所缘而得解脱。由自己证知:由自己亲自了知一切四地之法。我该指定谁:我该指定哪一位其他的老师,说“这是我的老师”呢?巴利
Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Sabbavidūti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ avediṃ aññāsiṃ. Sabbesu dhammesu anupalittoti sabbesu tebhūmakadhammesu kilesalepanena anupalitto. Sabbaṃ jahoti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito. Taṇhākkhaye vimuttoti taṇhākkhaye nibbāne ārammaṇato vimutto. Sayaṃ abhiññāyāti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ attanāva jānitvā. Kamuddiseyyanti kaṃ aññaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me ācariyo’’ti uddiseyyaṃ.
在出世间法上,我确实没有老师。“没有和我对等的人”,是说没有能与我匹敌的人。“正自觉者”,是指以正确的方法自己觉悟了四圣谛。“清凉者”,是因为熄灭了一切烦恼之火而变得清凉。由于烦恼本身已经止息,所以称为“寂灭者”。“迦尸城”,就是迦尸国的城市。“我要击响不死之鼓”,意思是:为了获得法轮,我要去击响不死之鼓。“你应当被称为无边胜者”,意思是:你适合成为无边胜者。“Hupeyya pāvuso”,意思是:贤友,或许也会这样吧。“他离开了”,是指他去了一个叫曲颈车的地方。巴利
Na me ācariyo atthīti lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthi. Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ paṭibhāgapuggalo nāma natthi. Sammāsambuddhoti sahetunā nayena cattāri saccāni sayaṃ buddho. Sītibhūtoti sabbakilesagginibbāpanena sītibhūto. Kilesānaṃyeva nibbutattā nibbuto. Kāsinaṃ puranti kāsiraṭṭhe nagaraṃ. Āhañchaṃ amatadundubhinti dhammacakkapaṭilābhāya amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmi. Arahasi anantajinoti anantajinoti bhavituṃ yutto. Hupeyya pāvusoti, āvuso, evampi nāma bhaveyya. Pakkāmīti vaṅkahārajanapadaṃ nāma agamāsi.
那时,他依止一个小猎人村住了下来。村里一位年长的猎人照顾他。那个地方苍蝇很凶。于是人们让他住进一个大陶罐里。猎人要去远处打猎时,嘱咐女儿差婆说:“别怠慢我们的阿拉汉。”然后就带着儿子和兄弟们出发了。他的女儿长得漂亮,身材也好。第二天,伍巴咖来到她家,看见这少女已经准备好一切招待,上前来服侍,被贪欲压倒,连饭都吃不下去,用钵盛了饭回到住处,把饭放在一边,心想:“如果能得到差婆,我就活下去;如果得不到,我就死。”于是不吃不喝地躺下了。到了第七天,猎人回来,向女儿打听伍巴咖的情况。她说:“他只来过一天,后来就再没来过。”猎人穿着来时的装束,立刻赶去他那里,心想“我问问”,一边按摩他的脚一边问:“尊者,您身体不舒服吗?”伍巴咖只是呻吟着翻来覆去。猎人说:“尊者,您说吧。只要我能做到的,我全都去做。”伍巴咖说:“如果能得到差婆,我就活下去;如果得不到,我宁愿死在这里。”猎人问:“尊者,您会什么手艺吗?”
答:“我不会。”猎人说:“尊者,什么手艺都不会的人,是没办法成家过日子的。”巴利
Tatthekaṃ migaluddakagāmakaṃ nissāya vāsaṃ kappesi. Jeṭṭhakaluddako taṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Tasmiñca janapade caṇḍā makkhikā honti. Atha naṃ ekāya cāṭiyā vasāpesuṃ, migaluddako dūre migavaṃ gacchanto ‘‘amhākaṃ arahante mā pamajjī’’ti chāvaṃ nāma dhītaraṃ āṇāpetvā agamāsi saddhiṃ puttabhātukehi. Sā cassa dhītā dassanīyā hoti koṭṭhāsasampannā. Dutiyadivase upako gharaṃ āgato taṃ dārikaṃ sabbaṃ upacāraṃ katvā parivisituṃ upagataṃ disvā rāgena abhibhūto bhuñjitumpi asakkonto bhājanena bhattaṃ ādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā bhattaṃ ekamante nikkhipitvā sace chāvaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi, no ce, marāmīti nirāhāro sayi. Sattame divase māgaviko āgantvā dhītaraṃ upakassa pavattiṃ pucchi. Sā ‘‘ekadivasameva āgantvā puna nāgatapubbo’’ti āha. Māgaviko āgataveseneva naṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmīti taṃkhaṇaṃyeva gantvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, apphāsuka’’nti pāde parāmasanto pucchi. Upako nitthunanto parivattatiyeva. So ‘‘vadatha bhante, yaṃ mayā sakkā kātuṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ karissāmī’’ti āha. Upako, ‘‘sace chāvaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi, no ce, idheva maraṇaṃ seyyo’’ti āha. Jānāsi pana, bhante, kiñci sippanti. Na jānāmīti. Na, bhante, kiñci sippaṃ ajānantena sakkā gharāvāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātunti.
他说:“我什么手艺都不会,不过我可以给你们搬肉,也可以帮你们卖肉。”猎人听了说:“这也正合我们的心意。”于是给了他一件上衣,把他带回家,把女儿嫁给了他。他们一起生活后,生了一个儿子,给他取名叫苏跋达。孩子哭的时候,差婆就唱着哄孩子的歌,说“搬肉人的儿子啊,猎人的儿子啊,别哭啦”之类的话,拿这些来讥讽伍巴咖。伍巴咖说:“贤妻,你以为我无依无靠吗?我有一位朋友,名叫无边胜者。我要到他那里去。”差婆知道他因此而苦恼,便一次又一次地说。于是有一天,伍巴咖没有告诉任何人,就朝着中部地方出发了。巴利
So āha – ‘‘nāhaṃ kiñci sippaṃ jānāmi, apica tumhākaṃ maṃsahārako bhavissāmi, maṃsañca vikkīṇissāmī’’ti. Māgaviko, ‘‘amhākampi etadeva ruccatī’’ti uttarasāṭakaṃ datvā gharaṃ ānetvā dhītaraṃ adāsi. Tesaṃ saṃvāsamanvāya putto vijāyi. Subhaddotissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Chāvā tassa rodanakāle ‘‘maṃsahārakassa putta, migaluddakassa putta mā rodī’’tiādīni vadamānā puttatosanagītena upakaṃ uppaṇḍesi. Bhadde tvaṃ maṃ anāthoti maññasi. Atthi me anantajino nāma sahāyo. Tassāhaṃ santike gamissāmīti āha. Chāvā evamayaṃ aṭṭīyatīti ñatvā punappunaṃ katheti. So ekadivasaṃ anārocetvāva majjhimadesābhimukho pakkāmi.
那时,世尊住在舍卫城祇园的大寺里。世尊事先就吩咐比丘们:“比丘们,如果有人来问‘无边胜者’在哪里,你们就带他来见我。”伍巴咖也一路打听“无边胜者住在哪里”,渐渐来到舍卫城,站在精舍中间问道:“无边胜者在哪里?”比丘们就把他带到世尊面前。他见到世尊后说:“世尊,您认得我吗?”世尊说:“是的,伍巴咖,我认得你。你住在哪里呢?”他回答:“在曲颈车国,尊者。”世尊说:“伍巴咖,你已经老了,还能出家吗?”他说:“我能出家,尊者。”世尊就让他出家,并教给他修行的方法。他依照这个方法用功修行,证得不来果,命终之后投生到无烦天,在投生的那一刹那便证得阿拉汉果。因为在无烦天,刚投生就证得阿拉汉果的有七个人,他就是其中之一。巴利
Bhagavā ca tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane mahāvihāre. Atha kho bhagavā paṭikacceva bhikkhū āṇāpesi – ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, ‘anantajino’ti pucchamāno āgacchati, tassa maṃ dasseyyāthā’’ti. Upakopi kho ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino vasatī’’ti pucchanto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ āgantvā vihāramajjhe ṭhatvā kuhiṃ anantajinoti pucchi. Taṃ bhikkhū bhagavato santikaṃ nayiṃsu. So bhagavantaṃ disvā – ‘‘sañjānātha maṃ bhagavā’’ti āha. Āma, upaka, sañjānāmi, kuhiṃ pana tvaṃ vasitthāti. Vaṅkahārajanapade, bhanteti. Upaka, mahallakosi jāto pabbajituṃ sakkhissasīti. Pabbajissāmi, bhanteti. Bhagavā pabbājetvā tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ adāsi. So kammaṭṭhāne kammaṃ karonto anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāya kālaṃ katvā avihesu nibbatto. Nibbattakkhaṇeyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti. Avihesu nibbattamattā hi satta janā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, tesaṃ so aññataro.
“ 已经投生到无烦天的七位比丘,已经解脱了。
贪与嗔已经灭尽,他们已超越世间的执著束缚。
伍巴咖、帕拉甘达,还有布咕萨提,这三位;
跋迪亚、坎达提婆、巴胡拉吉和桑吉约,
他们舍弃了人身,达到了天界的结合。”巴利
‘‘Avihaṃ upapannāse, vimuttā satta bhikkhavo; Rāgadosaparikkhīṇā, tiṇṇā loke visattikaṃ. Upako palagaṇḍo ca, pukkusāti ca te tayo; Bhaddiyo khaṇḍadevo ca, bahuraggi ca saṅgiyo; Te hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upajjhagu’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.105);
286 286. “使立定”意思是他们立下了约定。“重物质者”,是指为了衣服等物资的丰足而修行的人。“退失精进者”,是指从精进中退失、败坏、衰退的人。“转向于重物质”,是指为了衣服等物资的丰富而转求。再者,“应当安置座位”:他们说,对于出身高贵的他,应当只为他安置一个座位。“未能”:他们被佛陀的威神力和威光所征服,无法坚守自己的约定而安住。“以名字和以‘贤友’之语相待”:他们直呼“乔达摩”之名,并称“贤友”。意思是:“贤友乔达摩,我们在优楼频螺精进修行时,曾为你执持衣钵,递上漱口水与杨枝,清扫你住过的精舍;后来是谁为你作那些服侍呢?我们离开后,你难道不曾想念我们吗?”他们说着这样的话。“威仪”:指难行的威仪。“道”:指难行的修行。“难行苦行”:凭极少量的小豆汤等维持饮食,行持种种难行的苦行。“你们记得我吗”:即问“你们记得我吗?”
“如是显发此言”:这是指如此一类的话语。其意旨是:“我是否曾在优楼频螺精进修行时,为了摄护你们、护念你们,于夜间或白天来到你们面前,说过:‘贤友,不要寻思,我的光明或相好显现了’——我说过这样一类的话吗?”他们仅凭这一句话便获得了正念,生起了恭敬心,相信“这位确实已成佛了”,于是说:“不,尊者,确实没有。” “比丘们,我确实能够使五群比丘信服”:比丘们,我能够使他们知道我已成佛。那时,世尊正是在伍波萨他日来的。他让他们知道自己的佛境界后,以孔丹尼亚长老为见证,宣说了转法轮经。经文结束时,长老与十八亿梵天众一起证得入流果。就在太阳还高悬时,说法便结束了。世尊就在那里入雨安居。巴利
286.Saṇṭhapesunti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Bāhullikoti cīvarabāhullādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno. Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato vibbhanto bhaṭṭho parihīno. Āvatto bāhullāyāti cīvarādīnaṃ bahulabhāvatthāya āvatto. Apica kho āsanaṃ ṭhapetabbanti apica kho panassa uccakule nibbattassa āsanamattaṃ ṭhapetabbanti vadiṃsu. Nāsakkhiṃsūti buddhānubhāvena buddhatejasā abhibhūtā attano katikāya ṭhātuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācarantīti gotamāti, āvusoti ca vadanti. Āvuso gotama, mayaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhānakāle tuyhaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarimhā, mukhodakaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ adamhā, vutthapariveṇaṃ sammajjimhā, pacchā ko te vattappaṭipattimakāsi, kacci amhesu pakkantesu na cintayitthāti evarūpiṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho. Iriyāyāti dukkarairiyāya. Paṭipadāyāti dukkarapaṭipattiyā. Dukkarakārikāyāti pasatapasata-muggayūsādiāharakaraṇādinā dukkarakaraṇena. Abhijānātha me noti abhijānātha nu mama. Evarūpaṃ pabhāvitametanti etaṃ evarūpaṃ vākyabhedanti attho. Api nu ahaṃ uruvelāya padhāne tumhākaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ rattiṃ vā divā vā āgantvā, – ‘‘āvuso, mā vitakkayittha, mayhaṃ obhāso vā nimittaṃ vā paññāyatī’’ti evarūpaṃ kañci vacanabhedaṃ akāsinti adhippāyo. Te ekapadeneva satiṃ labhitvā uppannagāravā, ‘‘handa addhā esa buddho jāto’’ti saddahitvā no hetaṃ, bhanteti āhaṃsu. Asakkhiṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetunti ahaṃ , bhikkhave, pañcavaggiye bhikkhū buddho ahanti jānāpetuṃ asakkhiṃ. Tadā pana bhagavā uposathadivaseyeva āgacchi. Attano buddhabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā koṇḍaññattheraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā dhammacakkappavattanasuttaṃ kathesi. Suttapariyosāne thero aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Sūriye dharamāneyeva desanā niṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā tattheva vassaṃ upagacchi.
比丘们,所谓“我教导两位比丘”等话,是从半月初日那天说起,是为了说明他们连托钵都不进村子。因为世尊为了净除那些比丘在业处上生起的垢染,一直留在精舍里。那些比丘每当业处上生起垢染,就去到世尊身边请问。世尊也亲自到他们坐的地方去,为他们去除垢染。就这样,世尊如此以携来的食物为他们去除垢染并给予教导时,瓦巴长老在半月初日就证得入流果,跋迪亚长老在第二天证得,玛哈那玛长老在第三天证得,阿萨吉长老在第四天证得。到了半个月的第五天,世尊把他们全部召集在一起,开示了《无我相经》。经文结束时,他们全都证得了阿拉汉果。因此经中说:“那时,比丘们,五群比丘就这样被我教导……证得了无上的轭安稳涅槃……如今不再有后有。”世尊提示出这一整段教导的脉络,就是为了显示他之前所说的“你们也已登上我和五群比丘的道路,圣遍求就是你们的遍求”这一完全一致的关联。巴利
Dvepi sudaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ovadāmītiādi pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya piṇḍapātatthāyapi gāmaṃ appavisanadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesañhi bhikkhūnaṃ kammaṭṭhānesu uppannamalavisodhanatthaṃ bhagavā antovihāreyeva ahosi. Uppanne uppanne kammaṭṭhānamale tepi bhikkhū bhagavato santikaṃ gantvā pucchanti. Bhagavāpi tesaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā malaṃ vinodeti. Atha nesaṃ bhagavatā evaṃ nīhaṭabhattena ovadiyamānānaṃ vappatthero pāṭipadadivase sotāpanno ahosi. Bhaddiyatthero dutiyāyaṃ, mahānāmatthero tatiyāyaṃ, assajitthero catutthiyaṃ. Pakkhassa pana pañcamiyaṃ sabbeva te ekato sannipātetvā anattalakkhaṇasuttaṃ kathesi, suttapariyosāne sabbepi arahattaphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Tenāha – ‘‘atha kho, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū mayā evaṃ ovadiyamānā…pe… anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ ajjhagamaṃsu…pe… natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti. Ettakaṃ kathāmaggaṃ bhagavā yaṃ pubbe avaca – ‘‘tumhepi mamañceva pañcavaggiyānañca maggaṃ āruḷhā, ariyapariyesanā tumhākaṃ pariyesanā’’ti imaṃ ekameva anusandhiṃ dassento āhari.
287 287. 现在,因为并非只有在家人这样才能遍求五种欲乐,出家人如果不省察四种资具就受用,也会由于五种欲乐而有非圣遍求。因此,为了说明这一点,世尊说了“比丘们,有这五种欲乐”等话。其中,对于新受持的衣、钵等物,可以体验到“眼所识的色”等四种欲乐。而这里的“味”,是指受用时的味道。对于可口的团食和药物,五种欲乐都能体验到。在坐卧具方面,就像衣服一样,只有四种。这里的“味”,也只是受用时的味道。那么,“比丘们,凡任何……”这段话,世尊是为了什么而开始说的呢?像这样显示了五种欲乐之后,有些人可能会这样说:“从出家那一刻起,哪里还有什么非圣遍求?出家人的遍求就是圣遍求啊!”为了驳斥这些人,说明出家人对四种资具不加省察就受用,本身就是非圣遍求,世尊才开始了这段开示。其中,“被钩住”是指被渴爱的钩子钩住。“迷醉”是指被渴爱的迷醉所迷醉。“深陷”是指深深沉溺在渴爱中。“不见过患”是指看不到过患。“没有出离的智慧”中,“出离”指的是省察的智慧。他们就是缺少这个。巴利
287. Idāni yasmā na agāriyānaṃyeva pañcakāmaguṇapariyesanā hoti, anagāriyānampi cattāro paccaye appaccavekkhitvā paribhuñjantānaṃ pañcakāmaguṇavasena anariyapariyesanā hoti, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ pañcime, bhikkhave, kāmaguṇātiādimāha. Tattha navarattesu pattacīvarādīsu cakkhuviññeyyā rūpātiādayo cattāro kāmaguṇā labbhanti. Raso panettha paribhogaraso hoti. Manuññe piṇḍapāte bhesajje ca pañcapi labbhanti. Senāsanamhi cīvare viya cattāro. Raso pana etthāpi paribhogarasova. Ye hi keci, bhikkhaveti kasmā ārabhi? Evaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe dassetvā idāni ye evaṃ vadeyyuṃ, ‘‘pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya anariyapariyesanā nāma kuto, ariyapariyesanāva pabbajitāna’’nti, tesaṃ paṭisedhanatthāya ‘‘pabbajitānampi catūsu paccayesu appaccavekkhaṇaparibhogo anariyapariyesanā evā’’ti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha gadhitāti taṇhāgedhena gadhitā. Mucchitāti taṇhāmucchāya mucchitā . Ajjhopannāti taṇhāya ajjhogāḷhā. Anādīnavadassāvinoti ādīnavaṃ apassantā. Anissaraṇapaññāti nissaraṇaṃ vuccati paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Te tena virahitā.
现在,为了说明能成立这个道理的譬喻,世尊说了“譬如,比丘们……”等话。这里的譬喻和法义的对应,应当这样理解:沙门婆罗门就像山林里的野兽;四种资具就像猎人在林中布下的罗网。那只野兽扑倒在猎人的网堆上躺卧的时候,就好比他们不加省察就受用四种资具的时候;猎人走来时,野兽无法随心所欲地逃走,就好比沙门婆罗门被魔王随意摆布的时候,意思是他们落入了魔王的掌控。反过来,没被捆住的野兽即使躺在网堆上,也好比沙门婆罗门对四种资具先省察再受用;猎人走来时野兽能随心所欲地离开,应当理解为沙门婆罗门不落入魔王的掌控。“已得无畏”是指没有恐惧、没有疑虑顾虑。其余各处文义都很浅显易懂。巴利
Idāni tassatthassa sādhakaṃ upamaṃ dassento seyyathāpi, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatrevaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ – āraññakamago viya hi samaṇabrāhmaṇā, luddakena araññe ṭhapitapāso viya cattāro paccayā, tassa luddassa pāsarāsiṃ ajjhottharitvā sayanakālo viya tesaṃ cattāro paccaye appaccavekkhitvā paribhogakālo. Luddake āgacchante magassa yena kāmaṃ agamanakālo viya samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ mārassa yathākāmakaraṇīyakālo, māravasaṃ upagatabhāvoti attho. Magassa pana abaddhassa pāsarāsiṃ adhisayitakālo viya samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ catūsu paccayesu paccavekkhaṇaparibhogo, luddake āgacchante magassa yena kāmaṃ gamanaṃ viya samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ māravasaṃ anupagamanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vissatthoti nibbhayo nirāsaṅko. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
7. 《小象迹喻经》的注释巴利
7. Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā
288 “如是我闻”这句,就是《小象迹喻经》的开头。其中“纯白色的母马车”是指这样一段经文所说的:“那些马确实是白色的,配着白色的装饰;车是白色的,有白色的装饰、白色的随从、白色的缰绳、白色的刺棒、白色的伞盖、白色的头巾、白色的衣服、白色的鞋子,还用白色的牦牛尾扇来扇风。”这里说的,就是由四匹母马驾驶、通体纯白的车。巴利
288.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷahatthipadopamasuttaṃ. Tattha sabbasetena vaḷavābhirathenāti, ‘‘setā sudaṃ assā yuttā honti setālaṅkārā. Seto ratho setālaṅkāro setaparivāro, setā rasmiyo, setā patodalaṭṭhi, setaṃ chattaṃ, setaṃ uṇhīsaṃ, setāni vatthāni, setā upāhanā, setāya sudaṃ vālabījaniyā bījiyatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.4) evaṃ vuttena sakalasetena catūhi vaḷavāhi yuttarathena.
车其实有两种:战车和装饰车。其中,战车是四方形,不太大,能坐下两三个人。装饰车则很大,长得很长,宽得很宽。车上安排持伞的人、拿牦牛尾拂的人、持棕榈扇的人,这样八个人或十个人都能轻松地站着、坐着或躺着,这也属于装饰车。那辆车整套车轮、车身和护栏都用白银包覆。母马本来就是白色的。装饰品也都是银制的。缰绳上套着银管,包护得很妥当。刺棒也包着白银。婆罗门穿着白衣,披的也是白色上衣,涂白色涂香,戴白色花环,十个手指戴着戒指,耳朵上戴着耳环,像这一类的装饰也全是银制的。他身边大约有一万名婆罗门随从,也同样穿着白衣、涂香、戴花环装饰。因此说“驾着全白色的母马车”。巴利
Ratho ca nāmeso duvidho hoti – yodharatho, alaṅkārarathoti. Tattha yodharatho caturassasaṇṭhāno hoti nātimahā, dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā janānaṃ gahaṇasamattho. Alaṅkāraratho mahā hoti, dīghato dīgho, puthulato puthulo. Tattha chattaggāhako vālabījaniggāhako tālavaṇṭaggāhakoti evaṃ aṭṭha vā dasa vā sukhena ṭhātuṃ vā nisīdituṃ vā nipajjituṃ vā sakkonti, ayampi alaṅkārarathoyeva. So sabbo sacakkapañjarakubbaro rajataparikkhitto ahosi. Vaḷavā pakatiyā setavaṇṇāva. Pasādhanampi tādisaṃ rajatamayaṃ ahosi. Rasmiyopi rajatapanāḷi suparikkhittā. Patodalaṭṭhipi rajataparikkhittā. Brāhmaṇopi setavatthaṃ nivāsetvā setaṃyeva uttarāsaṅgamakāsi, setavilepanaṃ vilimpi, setamālaṃ pilandhi, dasasu aṅgulīsu aṅgulimuddikā, kaṇṇesu kuṇḍalānīti evamādialaṅkāropissa rajatamayova ahosi. Parivārabrāhmaṇāpissa dasasahassamattā tatheva setavatthavilepanamālālaṅkārā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasetena vaḷavābhirathenā’’ti.
从舍卫城出发:据说那位婆罗门每六个月绕城一周,作右绕礼。在离出发还有若干天时,就先发出通告:“再过这么多天,就要绕城了。”听到这个消息,还没有离开城的人就不走了;已经离开的人也会回来,心想:“我们要去看看那位有福之人的祥瑞气象。”到了婆罗门巡行全城的那天,人们一大早就清扫城内街道,铺撒细沙,遍撒以炒米为第五的鲜花,摆好满瓶,竖起芭蕉树和旗幡,让整座城都熏香洒香。婆罗门清早洗过头,午前吃过饭,照前面说的那样,用白衣等物装扮自己,从高楼下来,登上马车。随后,那些婆罗门也都以全白衣物、涂香、花鬘为装饰,手持白色伞盖,围绕在他身边。接着,为了召集大众,他们先向小男孩们抛撒各种果实,然后抛撒玛萨卡小钱,再抛撒迦诃波那钱币,大众便聚集过来,欢呼声和挥衣声此起彼伏。这时,婆罗门在那些为他做吉祥仪式、念诵祝福的人簇拥下,以盛大的排场巡行全城。有福的人们登上单层楼阁等高处,打开像鹦鹉翅膀一样的窗户向外观看。婆罗门也仿佛以自己的名声和祥瑞气象笼罩全城一般,朝着南门方向而去。因此说“从舍卫城出发”。巴利
Sāvatthiyā niyyātīti so kira channaṃ channaṃ māsānaṃ ekavāraṃ nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karoti. Ito ettakehi divasehi nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karissatīti puretarameva ghosanā karīyati; taṃ sutvā ye nagarato na pakkantā, te na pakkamanti. Ye pakkantā, tepi, ‘‘puññavato sirisampattiṃ passissāmā’’ti āgacchanti. Yaṃ divasaṃ brāhmaṇo nagaraṃ anuvicarati, tadā pātova nagaravīthiyo sammajjitvā vālikaṃ okiritvā lājapañcamehi pupphehi abhippakiritvā puṇṇaghaṭe ṭhapetvā kadaliyo ca dhaje ca ussāpetvā sakalanagaraṃ dhūpitavāsitaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇo pātova sīsaṃ nhāyitvā purebhattaṃ bhuñjitvā vuttanayeneva setavatthādīhi attānaṃ alaṅkaritvā pāsādā oruyha rathaṃ abhiruhati. Atha naṃ te brāhmaṇā sabbasetavatthavilepanamālālaṅkārā setacchattāni gahetvā parivārenti; tato mahājanassa sannipātanatthaṃ paṭhamaṃyeva taruṇadārakānaṃ phalāphalāni vikiritvā tadanantaraṃ māsakarūpāni; tadanantaraṃ kahāpaṇe vikiranti; mahājanā sannipatanti. Ukkuṭṭhiyo ceva celukkhepā ca pavattanti. Atha brāhmaṇo maṅgalikasovatthikādīsu maṅgalāni ceva suvatthiyo ca karontesu mahāsampattiyā nagaraṃ anuvicarati. Puññavantā manussā ekabhūmakādipāsāde āruyha sukapattasadisāni vātapānakavāṭāni vivaritvā olokenti. Brāhmaṇopi attano yasasirisampattiyā nagaraṃ ajjhottharanto viya dakkhiṇadvārābhimukho hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāvatthiyā niyyātī’’ti.
“白天里的白天”是指白天的正午时分。“碎布衣游方者”是指一位游方者,他因以阴性词“碎布衣”来称呼而得名。据说这位游方者年纪轻轻,正值青年,肤色金黄,是佛陀的侍者。清晨,他先侍奉如来和诸位大长老,然后带上三杖、水瓶等资具,从祇园出来,朝城里走去。那位婆罗门从远处看见他走来。“于是说了这话”——这是说,等他逐渐走近、被认出来之后,婆罗门便称呼他的族姓,说了这样一番话:“瓦恰亚那尊者,您从哪里来?”
“认为是贤善的吗?”这里的意思是:瓦恰亚那尊者,您认为沙门乔达摩是贤善的,还是不认为呢?巴利
Divā divassāti divasassa divā, majjhanhakāleti attho. Pilotikaṃ paribbājakanti pilotikāti evaṃ itthiliṅgavohāravasena laddhanāmaṃ paribbājakaṃ. So kira paribbājako daharo paṭhamavaye ṭhito suvaṇṇavaṇṇo buddhupaṭṭhāko, pātova tathāgatassa ceva mahātherānañca upaṭṭhānaṃ katvā tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādiparikkhāraṃ ādāya jetavanā nikkhamitvā nagarābhimukho pāyāsi. Taṃ esa dūratova āgacchantaṃ addasa. Etadavocāti anukkamena santikaṃ āgataṃ sañjānitvā etaṃ, ‘‘handa kuto nu bhavaṃ vacchāyano āgacchatī’’ti gottaṃ kittento vacanaṃ avoca. Paṇḍito maññeti bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ paṇḍitoti maññati, udāhu noti ayamettha attho.
“尊者,尊者,说到要了解沙门乔达摩的智慧明辨,我算什么呢?我又怎么能了解沙门乔达摩的智慧明辨呢?我凭什么能了解呢?”他这样在各方面都表明自己并不了解。“那能了解的人,也必定是那样的人”:如果有人能了解沙门乔达摩的智慧明辨,那人也必定是圆满了十巴拉密、证得一切知智的,正是那样的佛陀。就像想测量须弥山、雪山、大地或虚空的人,必须拿到与它们相应大小的杖或绳;同样,想了解沙门乔达摩智慧的人,也必须获得与他的智慧相等的一切知智。这里是出于恭敬而重复叠说。“殊胜”:是指无上、最胜。“尊者,尊者,说到称赞沙门乔达摩,我算什么呢?我又怎么能称赞沙门乔达摩呢?我凭什么能称赞呢?”
“被称赞者中的被称赞者”:他是以自身那些在一切功德中最为殊胜、被一切世间所称扬的功德,而自身就是被称赞者,并不需要别人来称赞他。就像瞻波花、青莲花、红莲花或紫檀,凭自身的色泽、香气与光彩便已美丽芬芳,并不需要外来的颜色和香气来赞美;又像摩尼宝珠或月轮,凭自身的光明便已照耀,并不需要别的东西来照亮。同样,沙门乔达摩以自身那些被一切世间所称扬的功德,而自身就是被称赞者、被赞叹者,已达到世间最胜,并不需要别人来称赞他。或者说,他是被那些被称赞者所称赞的,所以叫“被称赞者中的被称赞者”。巴利
Ko cāhaṃ, bhoti, bho, samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jānane ahaṃ ko nāma? Ko ca samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jānissāmīti kuto cāhaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jānissāmi, kena kāraṇena jānissāmīti? Evaṃ sabbathāpi attano ajānanabhāvaṃ dīpeti . Sopi nūnassa tādisovāti yo samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jāneyya, sopi nūna dasa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ patto tādiso buddhoyeva bhaveyya. Sineruṃ vā himavantaṃ vā pathaviṃ vā ākāsaṃ vā pametukāmena tappamāṇova daṇḍo vā rajju vā laddhuṃ vaṭṭati. Samaṇassa gotamassa paññaṃ jānantenapi tassa ñāṇasadisameva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Ādaravasena panettha āmeḍitaṃ kataṃ. Uḷārāyāti uttarāya seṭṭhāya. Ko cāhaṃ, bhoti, bho, ahaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa pasaṃsane ko nāma? Ko ca samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsissāmīti kena kāraṇena pasaṃsissāmi? Pasatthapasatthoti sabbaguṇānaṃ uttaritarehi sabbalokapasatthehi attano guṇeheva pasattho, na tassa aññehi pasaṃsanakiccaṃ atthi. Yathā hi campakapupphaṃ vā nīluppalaṃ vā padumaṃ vā lohitacandanaṃ vā attano vaṇṇagandhasiriyāva pāsādikañceva sugandhañca, na tassa āgantukehi vaṇṇagandhehi thomanakiccaṃ atthi. Yathā ca maṇiratanaṃ vā candamaṇḍalaṃ vā attano ālokeneva obhāsati, na tassa aññena obhāsanakiccaṃ atthi. Evaṃ samaṇo gotamo sabbalokapasatthehi attano guṇeheva pasattho thomito sabbalokassa seṭṭhataṃ pāpito, na tassa aññena pasaṃsanakiccaṃ atthi. Pasatthehi vā pasatthotipi pasatthapasattho.
哪些是“被称赞者”呢?憍萨罗王波斯匿被迦尸和憍萨罗的居民称赞,频婆娑罗王被鸯伽和摩揭陀的居民称赞。毗舍离的离车族人被跋耆国的居民称赞。波婆城的末罗人、拘尸那罗城的末罗人,还有其他各地的刹帝利,都被各自地方的居民称赞。旃迦等婆罗门被婆罗门大众称赞,给孤独等近事男被数以百计的近事男众称赞,毗舍佉等近事女被数以百计的近事女众称赞,萨咕伦达义等游方者被数以百计的游方者众称赞,莲华色长老尼等大女弟子被数以百计的比丘尼众称赞,舍利弗长老等大弟子被数以百计的比丘众称赞,帝释天神等诸天神被数以千计的天人称赞,大梵天王等梵天神被数以千计的梵天神称赞。他们全都赞叹、称扬、称赞十力者,所以世尊被称为“被称赞者中的被称赞者”。巴利
Ke pasatthā nāma? Rājā pasenadi kosalo kāsikosalavāsikehi pasattho, bimbisāro aṅgamagadhavāsīhi. Vesālikā licchavī vajjiraṭṭhavāsīhi pasatthā. Pāveyyakā mallā, kosinārakā mallā, aññepi te te khattiyā tehi tehi jānapadehi pasatthā. Caṅkīādayo brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇagaṇehi, anāthapiṇḍikādayo upāsakā anekasatehi upāsakagaṇehi, visākhādayo upāsikā anekasatāhi upāsikāhi, sakuludāyiādayo paribbājakā anekehi paribbājakasatehi, uppalavaṇṇātheriādikā mahāsāvikā anekehi bhikkhunisatehi, sāriputtattherādayo mahāsāvakā anekasatehi bhikkhūhi, sakkādayo devā anekasahassehi devehi, mahābrahmādayo brahmāno anekasahassehi brahmehi pasatthā. Te sabbepi dasabalaṃ thomenti vaṇṇenti, pasaṃsantīti bhagavā ‘‘pasatthapasattho’’ti vuccati.
义利,就是利益和功德。接着,那位游方者说明自己生起净信的理由,说道:贤者们,譬如一位善巧的住象林者……等等。在这里,住象林者是指住在象林中、没有学过技艺的人。但在后面出现的住象林者,则是指已经学过技艺的人。四足迹,就是四种智足迹,是智慧的痕迹,也就是智慧所行之处。巴利
Atthavasanti atthānisaṃsaṃ. Athassa paribbājako attano pasādakāraṇaṃ ācikkhanto seyyathāpi, bho, kusalo nāgavanikotiādimāha. Tattha nāgavanikoti nāgavanavāsiko anuggahitasippo puriso. Parato pana uggahitasippo puriso nāgavanikoti āgato. Cattāri padānīti cattāri ñāṇapadāni ñāṇavalañjāni, ñāṇena akkantaṭṭhānānīti attho.
289 在“刹帝利贤者”等说法中,“贤者”是指具备智慧的人。“聪慧”是指心思敏锐、细腻,智慧微细,能够洞察微细的义理差别。“已解外论”是指已经了解外道的论说,也曾经和其他人有过辩论往来。“如能射穿毛发的人”是指像能射穿毛发的弓箭手那样。他们“好像一边射穿毛发一边行走”,意思是:就像射穿毛发的人能射穿毛发一样,他们用自己的智慧,好像能把别人那些极其微细的邪见一一射穿、破斥掉而行走。“制造问题”是指提出两句、三句、四句的问题。“将举发过失”是指想要指出他人的过失。“他们不问沙门乔达摩问题”,为什么他们不问呢?据说,世尊在众会中说法时,会观察众会的意乐,然后看到:“这些刹帝利贤者把隐秘、秘密的问题变成了有壳之精华而前来。”于是,对于他们未曾问过的这类问题,世尊会这样想:提问有这么多过失,回答有这么多,义理、词句、字音有这么多,他提问时就会这样问,回答时就会这样回答。就这样,他把他们做成有壳之精华一样带来的问题,插入到法谈中间加以摧破。刹帝利贤者们心想:“我们确实更好,因为我们没有问这些问题;如果我们问了,沙门乔达摩就会把我们弄得站不住脚而抛下。”于是心生欢喜。巴利
289.Khattiyapaṇḍitetiādīsu paṇḍiteti paṇḍiccena samannāgate. Nipuṇeti saṇhe sukhumabuddhino, sukhumaatthantarapaṭivijjhanasamatthe. Kataparappavādeti viññātaparappavāde ceva parehi saddhiṃ katavādaparicaye ca. Vālavedhirūpeti vālavedhidhanuggahasadise. Te bhindantā maññe carantīti vālavedhi viya vālaṃ sukhumānipi paresaṃ diṭṭhigatāni attano paññāgatena bhindantā viya carantīti attho. Pañhaṃ abhisaṅkharontīti dupadampi tipadampi catuppadampi pañhaṃ karonti. Vādaṃ āropessāmāti dosaṃ āropessāma. Na ceva samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pañhaṃ pucchantīti; kasmā na pucchanti? Bhagavā kira parisamajjhe dhammaṃ desento parisāya ajjhāsayaṃ oloketi, tato passati – ‘‘ime khattiyapaṇḍitā guḷhaṃ rahassaṃ pañhaṃ ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā āgatā’’ti. So tehi apuṭṭhoyeva evarūpe pañhe pucchāya ettakā dosā, vissajjane ettakā, atthe pade akkhare ettakāti ime pañhe pucchanto evaṃ puccheyya, vissajjento evaṃ vissajjeyyāti, iti ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ānīte pañhe dhammakathāya antare pakkhipitvā viddhaṃseti. Khattiyapaṇḍitā ‘‘seyyo vata no, ye mayaṃ ime pañhe na pucchimhā, sace hi mayaṃ puccheyyāma, appatiṭṭheva no katvā samaṇo gotamo khipeyyā’’ti attamanā bhavanti.
另外,佛陀说法的时候,会用慈心遍满在场的大众。因为慈心的遍满,十力者能让大众的心生起净信。而且佛陀已经达到色法的究竟,具足可观的身相,声音甜美,舌头柔软,牙齿和嘴唇也很端正,说法的时候就像用甘露浇灌人的心脏一样。在那里,那些因为慈心遍满而心生净信的人会这样想:世尊说的是没有歧义的话、不会落空的话、能引导人解脱的话,我们不可能跟他唱反调。他们凭着自己已经生起的净信,就不发问了。巴利
Apica buddhā nāma dhammaṃ desentā parisaṃ mettāya pharanti, mettāpharaṇena dasabale mahājanassa cittaṃ pasīdati, buddhā ca nāma rūpaggappattā honti dassanasampannā madhurassarā mudujivhā suphusitadantāvaraṇā amatena hadayaṃ siñcantā viya dhammaṃ kathenti. Tatra nesaṃ mettāpharaṇena pasannacittānaṃ evaṃ hoti – ‘‘evarūpaṃ advejjhakathaṃ amoghakathaṃ niyyānikakathaṃ kathentena bhagavatā saddhiṃ na sakkhissāma paccanīkaggāhaṃ gaṇhitu’’nti attano pasannabhāveneva na pucchanti.
“决定义”就是完全、必定如此。“成为声闻”是指通过皈依而成为声闻弟子。“那无上”就是那无与伦比的。“梵行究竟”是指道之梵行的最终归宿——阿拉汉果,他们正是为了这个目的而出家。“贤者们,我们确实差点毁了”:意思是,贤者们,如果我们不去亲近,仅仅因为这一点不亲近、不侍奉,我们就已经毁了;但正因为我们稍微亲近了一下,所以并没有毁。第二句只是第一句的另一种说法。“不是沙门”等句中:因为没有止息恶法,所以不是真正的沙门;因为没有驱除恶法,所以不是真正的婆罗门;因为没有杀死烦恼之敌,所以不是真正的阿拉汉。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Aññadatthūti ekaṃsena. Sāvakā sampajjantīti saraṇagamanavasena sāvakā honti. Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ. Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānabhūtaṃ arahattaphalaṃ, tadatthāya hi te pabbajanti. Manaṃ vata, bho, anassāmāti, bho, sace mayaṃ na upasaṅkameyyāma, iminā thokena anupasaṅkamanamattena apayirupāsanamatteneva naṭṭhā bhaveyyāma. Upasaṅkamanamattakena panamhā na naṭṭhāti attho. Dutiyapadaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Assamaṇāva samānātiādīsu pāpānaṃ asamitattā assamaṇāva. Abāhitattā ca pana abrāhmaṇāva. Kilesārīnaṃ ahatattā anarahantoyeva samānāti attho.
290 他说出感叹语,就是发出了感叹的话。就像油如果装不进容器里,就会溢出来,这叫作“溢流”;水如果装不进湖里,就会漫出来,这叫作“瀑流”。同样,充满喜悦的话语如果装不进心里,满得在内里待不住而向外涌出,这就叫作“感叹语”。意思是,他说出了这样充满喜悦的话语。“象足迹喻”:是说这个法以象足迹作为譬喻。这是在显示,仅凭这一点,这个譬喻还没有详尽完整。“象林者”:指学过调象技艺、以象林为生的人。那么,为什么这里不说“善巧”呢?因为后面有“谁是善巧者”的分别说明。凡是进入象林的人,如果他是善巧的,就不会在仅仅见到足迹时就立刻下结论。所以这里不说“善巧”,而放在后面再说。巴利
290.Udānaṃ udānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari. Yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasekoti vuccati, yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati. Evameva yaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi nikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho. Hatthipadopamoti hatthipadaṃ upamā assa dhammassāti hatthipadopamo. So na ettāvatā vitthārena paripūro hotīti dasseti. Nāgavanikoti uggahitahatthisippo hatthivanacāriko. Atha kasmā idha kusaloti na vuttoti? Parato ‘‘yo hoti kusalo’’ti vibhāgadassanato. Yo hi koci pavisati, yo pana kusalo hoti, so neva tāva niṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Tasmā idha kusaloti avatvā parato vutto.
291 矮小者:指身材短小,从长度来说也不高,不是那种大肚子、长身量的母象。蹭高处:指在七八肘尺高的榕树等树干部位磨蹭过的地方。高而齿列参差者:指长得高、腿像拐杖一样,同时因为牙齿参差不齐而叫“齿列参差”。据说她们一根象牙向上翘,一根向下弯,两根牙都稀疏,不靠在一起。高齿撕裂处:指在七八肘尺高的榕树等树干部位,像被斧头砍过一样,被象牙割裂的地方。高而如象母者:指长得高、腿长如拐杖,同时因为牙齿像母象一样,所以叫“如象母者”。据说她们的牙齿像花苞一样。他得出最终结论:那位象林守护者心想,我一路循着足迹追踪的,就是这头大象,不会是别的。最初见到足迹时,我还没有确定,这会是矮小者的足迹吧;后来见到别的足迹时,也没有确定,这会是齿列参差者的,或是如象母者的吧。直到亲眼见到这头大象,才得出结论:所有这些足迹,全都是这头大象的足迹。巴利
291.Vāmanikāti rassā āyāmatopi na dīghā mahākucchihatthiniyo. Uccā ca nisevitanti sattaṭṭharatanubbedhe vaṭarukkhādīnaṃ khandhappadese ghaṃsitaṭṭhānaṃ. Uccā kāḷārikāti uccā ca yaṭṭhisadisapādā hutvā, kāḷārikā ca dantānaṃ kaḷāratāya. Tāsaṃ kira eko danto unnato hoti, eko onato. Ubhopi ca viraḷā honti, na āsannā. Uccāca dantehi ārañjitānīti sattaṭṭharatanubbedhe vaṭarukkhādīnaṃ khandhappadese pharasunā pahataṭṭhānaṃ viya dāṭṭhāhi chinnaṭṭhānaṃ. Uccā kaṇerukā nāmāti uccā ca yaṭṭhisadisadīghapādā hutvā, kaṇerukā ca dantānaṃ kaṇerutāya, tā kira makuḷadāṭhā honti. Tasmā kaṇerukāti vuccanti. So niṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti so nāgavaniko yassa vatāhaṃ nāgassa anupadaṃ āgato, ayameva so, na añño. Yañhi ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ padaṃ disvā vāmanikānaṃ padaṃ idaṃ bhavissatīti niṭṭhaṃ na gato, yampi tato orabhāge disvā kāḷārikānaṃ bhavissati, kaṇerukānaṃ bhavissatīti niṭṭhaṃ na gato, sabbaṃ taṃ imasseva mahāhatthino padanti mahāhatthiṃ disvāva niṭṭhaṃ gacchati.
同样地,在此,应当这样把譬喻和所喻对应起来:从开头一直到舍断诸盖为止的这段说法,应当理解为象林。善巧的象林住者好比禅修者,大象好比正自觉者,巨大的象足迹好比禅那与神通。象林住者在各处看到足迹,虽然心想“这会是矮小母象的足迹,会是黑牙母象的足迹,会是花牙母象的足迹”,而处于未确定的状态,就好比禅修者心想“这些所谓的禅那与神通,在外道游方者那里也有”,而处于未确定的状态。象林住者在各处看到足迹后,直到亲眼见到大象,才确定“我看到的这个足迹就是这头大象的,不是别的”,这就好比圣弟子证得阿拉汉果之后才真正确定。而且,这个譬喻的对应,放在最后来说也可以,放在这里说也同样合适。不过,这里是顺着经文依次下来的次第,就在这里说了。其中,“在此”是一个表示地点方位的词。这个词有时是就世间来说的,比如经文说“在此世间,如来出现”。有时是就教法来说的,比如“就在此处,比丘们,有沙门;就在此处,有第二沙门”。有时是就处所来说的,比如——巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – nāgavanaṃ viya hi ādito paṭṭhāya yāva nīvaraṇappahānā dhammadesanā veditabbā. Kusalo nāgavaniko viya yogāvacaro; mahānāgo viya sammāsambuddho; mahantaṃ hatthipadaṃ viya jhānābhiññā. Nāgavanikassa tattha tattha hatthipadaṃ disvāpi vāmanikānaṃ padaṃ bhavissati, kāḷārikānaṃ kaṇerukānaṃ padaṃ bhavissatīti aniṭṭhaṅgatabhāvo viya yogino, imā jhānābhiññā nāma bāhirakaparibbājakānampi santīti aniṭṭhaṅgatabhāvo. Nāgavanikassa, tattha tattha mayā diṭṭhaṃ padaṃ imasseva mahāhatthino, na aññassāti mahāhatthiṃ disvā niṭṭhaṅgamanaṃ viya ariyasāvakassa arahattaṃ patvāva niṭṭhaṅgamanaṃ. Idañca pana opammasaṃsandanaṃ matthake ṭhatvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Imasmimpi ṭhāne vaṭṭatiyeva. Anukkamāgataṃ pana pāḷipadaṃ gahetvā idheva kataṃ. Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto. Svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.279). Katthaci sāsanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
“ 我今犹住此间,身为天众,正念现前;
寿命复得,贤者当如是知。”巴利
‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato; Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190);
在某些地方,它只是用来补足句子的音节而已。就像经里说的:“比丘们,在这里,我若已吃饱、已满足而住。”但在这里,应当知道它是就“世间”而说的。这段话的意思是:“婆罗门,在这个世间,如来出现,是阿拉汉……乃至……佛陀、世尊。”巴利
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha – ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘brāhmaṇa imasmiṃ loke tathāgato uppajjati arahaṃ…pe… buddho bhagavā’’ti.
在这里,“如来”这个词在《根本法门经》里已经解释过,“阿拉汉”等称呼在《清净道论》里已经详细说明。在“出现于世间”这一句里,“世间”有三种:空间世间、有情世间、行世间。但这里指的是有情世间。如来虽然出现在有情世间,却不在天界出现,不在梵天界出现,只在人间出现。在人间,也不是在别的轮围世界,只在这个轮围世界。在这个世界里,也不是在所有地方,只在中部地区。这个中部地区的范围是这样界定的:“东方有个叫伽姜伽罗的聚落,过了它后面的大娑罗树,再过去就是边地,以内是中部。东南方有条叫萨罗婆提的河,过了它再过去就是边地,以内是中部。南方有个叫白耳环的聚落,过了它再过去就是边地,以内是中部。西方有个叫图那的婆罗门村,过了它再过去就是边地,以内是中部。北方有座叫优尸罗幢的山,过了它再过去就是边地,以内是中部。”这个中部地区长三百由旬,宽二百五十由旬,周长九百由旬。不只是如来,独觉佛、上首弟子、八十位大长老、佛母、佛父、转轮王,以及其他证得殊胜成就的婆罗门和居士,都只在这里出现。其中,如来从接受善生女供养的乳粥开始,直到证得阿拉汉道,这期间叫“正在出现”;证得阿拉汉果时叫“已经出现”。或者从大出家开始,直到证得阿拉汉道;或者从兜率天开始,直到证得阿拉汉道;或者从燃灯佛足下开始,直到证得阿拉汉道,这期间都叫“正在出现”;证得阿拉汉果时叫“已经出现”。这里是以最初出现的状态来说“出现”,意思就是:如来出现在世间。巴利
Tattha tathāgatasaddo mūlapariyāye, arahantiādayo visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Loke uppajjatīti ettha pana lokoti okāsaloko sattaloko saṅkhāralokoti tividho. Idha pana sattaloko adhippeto. Sattaloke uppajjamānopi ca tathāgato na devaloke, na brahmaloke, manussalokeyeva uppajjati. Manussalokepi na aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe. Tatrāpi na sabbaṭṭhānesu, ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo. Tassāparena mahāsālo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Puratthimadakkhiṇāya disāya sallavatī nāma nadī, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo , tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato parā paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe’’ti (mahāva. 259) evaṃ paricchinne āyāmato tiyojanasate vitthārato aḍḍhateyyayojanasate parikkhepato navayojanasate majjhimapadese uppajjati. Na kevalañca tathāgatova, paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā asīti mahātherā buddhamātā buddhapitā cakkavattī rājā aññe ca sārappattā brāhmaṇagahapatikā ettheva uppajjanti. Tattha tathāgato sujātāya dinnamadhupāyasabhojanato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma. Arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Mahābhinikkhamanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva arahattamaggo. Dīpaṅkarapādamūlato vā yāva arahattamaggo, tāva uppajjati nāma. Arahattaphale uppanno nāma. Idha sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya uppajjatīti vuttaṃ , tathāgato loke uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
世尊用“这个世间”这句话,是在指出现在即将要说的这个世间。“连同诸天神”就是与诸天神一起,叫“连同诸天神”。同样,与魔一起叫“连同魔”,与梵天神一起叫“连同梵天神”,与沙门、婆罗门一起叫“连同沙门婆罗门”。“生类”是因为被出生,所以叫生类,就是那些众生。与天和人一起叫“连同天和人”。其中,通过“连同诸天神”这个词,应当知道是指五欲界的诸天神。通过“连同魔”这个词,是指第六欲界天。通过“连同梵天神”这个词,是指梵身天等梵天界。通过“连同沙门婆罗门”这个词,是指作为教法的反对者和敌人的沙门、婆罗门,以及已经止息恶、已经远离恶的沙门、婆罗门。通过“生类”这个词,是指有情世间。通过“连同天和人”这个词,是指假名施设的天和其余的人。这样,在这里应当知道,前三句连同行处世间一起含摄了有情世间,后两句则只以生类的方式含摄了有情世间。巴利
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ, idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ. Evaṃ saha mārena samārakaṃ. Saha brahmunā sabrahmakaṃ. Saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ. Pajātattā pajā, taṃ pajaṃ. Saha devamanussehi sadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ. Sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇivacanena sāsanassa paccatthipaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca. Pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ. Sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko, dvīhi pajāvasena sattalokova gahitoti veditabbo.
另一种解释方式:用“连同诸天神”这一说法,涵盖了无色界的天界。用“连同魔”这一说法,涵盖了六欲天界。用“连同梵天”这一说法,涵盖了有色的梵天界。用“连同沙门、婆罗门”等说法,则是按四众弟子来说,或者连同假名意义上的天与人,涵盖了人世间以及其余一切有情世间。巴利
Aparo nayo – sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito. Samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko. Sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpī brahmaloko. Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko avasesasabbasattaloko vā.
另外,这里通过“连同诸天神”这一说法,从最高范围的限定,说明了一切世间都已亲证。于是,有些人心里想:“魔罗有大神力,是六欲天之主、自在者,难道他也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,就说“连同魔罗”。还有些人心里想:“梵天神有大神力,用一个手指就能照亮一千个轮围世界,用两个手指……乃至用十个手指就能照亮一万个轮围世界,还能体验无上禅那等至的快乐,难道他也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,就说“连同梵天神”。接着又有人想:“那么多沙门婆罗门都是教法的敌人,难道他们也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,就说“连同沙门婆罗门的众生”。这样显示了最高中的最高者都已亲证之后,再依据假名的天和其余人类,从最高范围的限定来说明其余有情世间的亲证,所以说“连同诸天神与人”。这就是这里展开的次第。不过古师们说:“连同诸天神”是指连同诸天神在内的其余世间;“连同魔罗”是指连同魔罗在内的其余世间;“连同梵天神”是指连同梵天神在内的其余世间。这样把三有中的一切有情用三种方式归入前三句,然后再用两句总括,说“连同沙门婆罗门的众生,连同诸天神与人”。如此,用五句、以各种方式,就已经把三界全部收摄尽了。巴利
Apicettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassa lokassa sacchikatabhāvamāha. Tato yesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo chakāmāvacarissaro vasavattī. Kiṃ sopi etena sacchikato’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto samārakanti āha. Yesaṃ pana ahosi – ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo , ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi…pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati, anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Kiṃ sopi sacchikato’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sabrahmakanti āha. Tato ye cintesuṃ – ‘‘puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanassa paccatthikā, kiṃ tepi sacchikatā’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajanti āha. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhānaṃ sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsento sadevamanussanti āha. Ayamettha bhāvānukkamo. Porāṇā panāhu – sadevakanti devatāhi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipetvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādiyanto ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussa’’nti āha. Evaṃ pañcahi padehi tena tenākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.
自己以胜智亲证之后而宣说——“自己”的意思是自己成为不依赖他人的人。“以胜智”就是以胜智了知,也就是以超越的智慧了知。“亲证之后”就是使之成为现前亲见。由此便否定了比量等其他认知方式。“宣说”就是令觉醒、令了知、令显明。世尊宣说初善……乃至……后善之法,意思是:世尊因为悲悯众生,舍弃了无上的远离之乐,而宣说法要。而且,无论他宣说的法是少是多,都是以初善等方式来宣说:即使在开头,他也先使法成为善的、极妙的、无过失的,然后才宣说;在中间……在结尾,也是先使其成为善的、极妙的、无过失的,然后才宣说。这就是此处所说的意思。巴利
Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti sayanti sāmaṃ aparaneyyo hutvā. Abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato hoti. Pavedetīti bodheti viññāpeti pakāseti. So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Ādimhipi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti. Majjhepi… pariyosānepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这里,说法有初、中、后之分,教法也有初、中、后之分。先说说法:即使是一首四句偈颂,第一句就叫“初”,中间两句叫“中”,最后一句叫“后”。对于只有一个连结段的经,序分是“初”,“这是世尊所说”是“后”,两者之间是“中”。对于有多个连结段的经,第一个连结段是“初”,最后的连结段是“后”,中间的一个、两个或多个都只是“中”。而教法的“初”是戒、定、观。这也曾说过:“什么是诸善法的初?戒清净和正直之见。”又说:“诸比丘,有如来所证悟的中道。”如此所说的圣道叫“中”,果与涅槃叫“后”。这里说:“婆罗门,梵行以此为目的,以此为核心,以此为究竟。”此处果被称为究竟。又说:“友毗舍佉,梵行以涅槃为沉浸,以涅槃为归宿,以涅槃为究竟。”此处涅槃被称为究竟。这里所指的是说法的初、中、后。因为世尊说法时,在初示戒,在中示道,在后示涅槃。因此说:“他说法初善、中善、后善。”所以其他说法者说法时——巴利
Tattha atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ, atthi sāsanassa. Desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāya paṭhamapādo ādi nāma, tato dve majjhaṃ nāma, ante eko pariyosānaṃ nāma. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānamādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnaṃ antarā majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa paṭhamānusandhi ādi, ante anusandhi pariyosānaṃ, majjhe eko vā dve vā bahū vā majjhameva. Sāsanassa pana sīlasamādhivipassanā ādi nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ, sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ, diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369). ‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ vutto pana ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāma, phalañceva nibbānañca pariyosānaṃ nāma. ‘‘Etadatthamidaṃ, brāhmaṇa, brahmacariyametaṃ sāraṃ, etaṃ pariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.324) hi ettha phalaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nibbānogadhañhi , āvuso visākha, brahmacariyaṃ vussati nibbānaparāyaṇaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ettha nibbānaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. Idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento ādimhi sīlaṃ dassetvā majjhe maggaṃ pariyosāne nibbānaṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti. Tasmā aññopi dhammakathiko dhammaṃ kathento –
“ 开头要讲戒,中间要讲清楚道,
到了结尾,就要显示涅槃,这就是说法者所立的次第。”巴利
‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye; Pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ, esā kathikasaṇṭhitī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190);
有义、音声具足:如果一个人的开示是依附于粥、饭、女人、男人等世间事物的描述,那他就不是在说“有义”的法。世尊则舍弃那样的开示,而开示依托于四念处等内容的法,因此被称为“有义地说法”。如果一个人的开示只用单一字母等,或者全用无卷舌音,或者全用送气音和全用不送气音,那么由于他的音声不完整,就像达罗毗荼语、基罗萨语等边地未开化人的语言一样,这类开示就称为“无音声”。然而世尊——巴利
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti yassa hi yāgubhattaitthipurisādivaṇṇanā nissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati. Yassa pana desanā ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā sabbavissaṭṭhasabbaniggahītabyañjanā vā, tassa damiḷakirāsavarādimilakkhūnaṃ bhāsā viya byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana –
“ 松弛音、紧张音、长音与短音,重音、轻音并及鼻音;
连结音、分界音、离散音,依字母之智分别,共成十种。”巴利
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahītaṃ; Sambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190) –
像这样,他没有漏掉这十种音节,而是让音节完全圆满之后才说法。因此就说他“开示具足音节的法”。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ amakkhetvā paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ deseti. Tasmā ‘‘sabyañjanaṃ dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati.
“完全圆满”在这里,“完全”是“全部”的同义词,“圆满”是指不缺也不多。这里要表达的是:所说的法是整体圆满的,没有任何一部分不圆满。“清净”是指没有烦恼杂染。如果有人是为了得到利养或恭敬才开示这个法,他的开示就是不清净的。但世尊不期待世间的利养,以遍及一切众生的慈心修习,内心柔软,以救拔众生为本怀而开示。所以说他“开示清净的法”。“阐明梵行”在这里,“梵行”指包含三学的整个教法。因此,“阐明梵行”的意思是:他开示初善……中略……清净的法,这样开示时,也就阐明了含摄三学的整个教法之梵行——这里应当这样理解。“梵行”是以最胜之义而言,是梵的修行;或者说,是梵者——佛陀等——的修行。巴利
Kevalaparipuṇṇanti ettha kevalanti sakalādhivacanaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti anūnādhikavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘sakalaparipuṇṇameva deseti, ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthī’’ti. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Yo hi idaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmīti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇena mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti. Tasmā ‘‘parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati. Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ. Tasmā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… parisuddhaṃ, evaṃ desento ca sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ cariyaṃ. Brahmabhūtānaṃ vā buddhādīnaṃ cariyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
那个法,就是指具有上述那种品质的法。为什么在讲“居士听闻”时,先提到居士呢?因为他们已经摧伏了慢心,而且人数众多。通常,从刹帝利家族出家的人,会依靠出身而生起慢心;从婆罗门家族出家的人,会依靠咒术而生起慢心;从低贱种姓家族出家的人,则无法安忍于自己的出身。可是居士家的子弟在田里耕作时,腋下流汗,背上结出盐霜,他们的慢心和傲气已经被摧伏了。他们出家以后,不摆慢心,也不逞傲气,尽力学习佛陀的教法,修习观业,能够安立在阿拉汉果上。而从其他家族出家的人并不多,居士却很多。所以,因为他们摧伏了慢心,又人数众多,就先提到居士。巴利
Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ. Suṇāti gahapati vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti? Nihatamānattā ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā nāma na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā, iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.
“或在其他某个家族”:指在其他某个家族、某个种姓当中。“再生”:就是出生。“对如来获得信心”:听了清净的法之后,对法主如来生起信心:“世尊确实是正自觉者。”“他这样思量”:就是如此观察。“居家生活是拥挤的”:即使夫妻二人住在六十肘宽的房子里,或者相隔一百由旬而住,对他们来说,因为有执著和障碍,居家生活仍然是拥挤的。“尘垢之路”:大注释书说,这是贪欲等尘垢生起的地方。也可以说成“来去之路”。“像露天一样,因为不执著”:就是露天。因为出家人即使住在楼阁、宝殿、天宫等门窗紧闭、有遮蔽的地方,也不执取、不系缚、不黏著。因此说:“出家是露天。”另外,居家生活拥挤,是因为没有行善的空间;尘垢之路,就像不加遮盖的垃圾堆,是尘垢、烦恼尘垢聚集的地方;出家是露天,因为对于行善有宽敞的空间。巴利
Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Paccājātoti patijāto. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammassāmimhi tathāgate ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati. Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhoyeva. Rajopathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vaṭṭati. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyāti abbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsādadevavimānādīsu pihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati na sajjati na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti. Apica sambādho gharāvāso kusalakiriyāya okāsābhāvato. Rajopatho asaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato. Abbhokāso pabbajjā kusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasabbhāvato.
“这并不容易……中略……出家”这里,简要的解释是:这个三学梵行,哪怕只修一天,也要做到不破损,直到最后心,所以是绝对圆满的;哪怕只修一天,也要做到不被烦恼尘垢染污,直到最后心,所以是绝对清净的。应当像链刻、像刻贝、像洗净的贝壳那样去修习。对于住在家里、身处家中的人来说,要修习这样绝对圆满……中略……去实行,实在不容易。于是他想:“我何不剃除须发,披上因染成褐黄色而适合修梵行者的袈裟,从家里出来,出家过无家的生活呢?”这里,凡是对居家有利的耕田、经商等事,称为“在家业”;而出家时这些都没有。因此应当知道,出家就是“无家”。出家,就是去实行。“少”:财富少于一千,称为少;从一千起,称为大。以系缚之义,亲属本身就是“亲族圈”。这个亲族圈,少于二十人为小,从二十人起为大。巴利
Nayidaṃ sukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepakathā – yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ. Ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalinaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ, saṅkhalikhitaṃ likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ, idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kāsāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi. Tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyāti ñātabbā, taṃ anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ. Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Ābandhanaṭṭhena ñāti eva parivaṭṭo ñātiparivaṭṭo. So vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā.
292 比丘进入修学与共住生活:比丘们以增上戒为内容的修学,以及他们共同生活、同一种活法、行为相合的那个方面,就是世尊所制定的学处,也就是共住生活;以学习的方式进入其中,就是比丘进入修学与共住生活。进入的意思是:圆满修学,并且不违犯共住生活,两者都做到了。在舍离杀生等条目中,杀生等的说明前面已经详细讲过。舍离就是舍弃了名为杀生思的恶戒。已离就是从舍弃的那一刻起,就远离那种恶戒、不再违犯。放下杖、放下刀:不是为了伤害他人而拿起杖或刀,所以是放下了杖、放下了刀。这里除了杖以外,其余一切能伤害众生的器具都应理解为刀。但比丘拿着手杖、牙签刀或贝叶刀走动,并不是为了伤害他人,所以仍然算放下杖、放下刀。有愧就是具备以厌恶罪恶为特征的愧。有慈悲心就是具有慈悲,也就是怀有慈心。怜悯一切众生就是以利益之心怜悯一切众生。由此具有慈悲,故对一切众生怀有利益之心。住就是行持、守护。巴利
292.Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpannoti yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā, tañca, yattha cete saha jīvanti ekajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, taṃ bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadasaṅkhātaṃ sājīvañca tattha sikkhanabhāvena samāpannoti bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno. Samāpannoti sikkhaṃ paripūrento, sājīvañca avītikkamanto hutvā tadubhayaṃ upagatoti attho. Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyātiādīsu pāṇātipātādikathā heṭṭhā vitthāritā eva. Pahāyāti imaṃ pāṇātipātacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭivirato hotīti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya tato dussīlyato orato viratova hoti. Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasatthoti parūpaghātatthāya daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā ādāya avattanato nikkhittadaṇḍo ceva nikkhittasattho cāti attho. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇaṃ sattānaṃ vihiṃsanabhāvato satthanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhavāsiṃ vā pipphalakaṃ vā gahetvā vicaranti, na taṃ parūpaghātatthāya. Tasmā nihitadaṇḍo nihitasatthotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Lajjīti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgato. Dayāpannoti dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno. Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako. Tāya dayāpannatāya sabbesaṃ pāṇabhūtānaṃ hitacittakoti attho. Viharatīti iriyati pāleti.
只取别人给的东西,所以叫“取所施者”。心里也只盼着别人给的东西,所以叫“期待所施者”。偷偷拿走,所以叫“偷盗者”。不是用偷盗的方式,不是偷盗。因为本身清净,所以不是偷盗。以自身,就是以这个身体,把不偷盗、清净的身体保持下去而生活,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Dinnameva ādiyatīti dinnādāyī. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhatīti dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Thenetīti theno. Na thenena athenena. Athenattāyeva sucibhūtena. Attanāti attabhāvena, athenaṃ sucibhūtaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
非梵行就是不高尚的行为。行持殊胜、最高尚的行为,就叫梵行者。远离而行,就是远离非梵行而行事。淫欲,是因为贪欲缠缚,对同类众生做出被称作淫欲者的行为,这些因被称为淫欲者而可实践的不善法。村法,就是村民的习俗。巴利
Abrahmacariyanti aseṭṭhacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratīti brahmacārī. Ārācārīti abrahmacariyato dūracārī. Methunāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasena sadisattā methunakāti laddhavohārehi paṭisevitabbato methunāti saṅkhaṃ gatā asaddhammā. Gāmadhammāti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammā.
说真实语,所以叫“说真实语者”。用真实把真实连接起来、接续起来,所以叫“真实连接者”,意思是不在中间插进妄语。因为如果有人有时候说妄语,有时候说真实语,他的真实就被妄语隔断了,真实就没法跟真实接上。所以他不算是真实连接者。但这个人不是那样,就算为了活命也不说妄语,只用真实连接真实,所以叫“真实连接者”。“坚定”:就是稳固,意思是说话稳固。因为有一种人说话不稳固,就像姜黄染的颜色容易褪掉,像插在灰堆里的树桩,像放在马背上的瓮一样,不是说话稳固者。另一种人像石上的刻痕,像门柱一样,是说话稳固者;即使被人用剑砍头,也不说两种话;这种人叫“坚定者”。“可信赖者”:应被信赖,值得相信。因为有一种人不可信赖,当有人说“这是谁说的,是某某说的”时,他就会落到该被说“不要相信他的话”的地步。另一种人可信赖,当有人说“这是谁说的,是某某说的”时,他就会落到该被说“如果是他说的,这就是标准,现在没有什么可考察的,就是这样”的地步,这种人叫“可信赖者”。“不欺诳世间者”:以此真实语性,不欺诳世间。巴利
Saccaṃ vadatīti saccavādī. Saccena saccaṃ sandahati ghaṭetīti saccasandho, na antarantarā musā vadatīti attho. Yo hi puriso kadāci musā vadati, kadāci saccaṃ, tassa musāvādena antaritattā saccaṃ saccena na ghaṭīyati . Tasmā na so saccasandho, ayaṃ pana na tādiso, jīvitahetupi musāvādaṃ avatvā saccena saccaṃ sandahatiyevāti saccasandho. Thetoti thiro, thirakathoti attho. Eko hi puggalo haliddirāgo viya, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇu viya, assapiṭṭhe ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍamiva ca na thirakatho hoti. Eko pāsāṇalekhā viya indakhilo viya ca thirakatho hoti; asinā sīse chijjantepi dve kathā na katheti; ayaṃ vuccati theto . Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbako, saddhāyikoti attho. Ekacco hi puggalo na paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte ‘‘mā tassa vacanaṃ saddahathā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Eko paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte, ‘‘yadi tena vuttaṃ, idameva pamāṇaṃ, idāni upaparikkhitabbaṃ natthi, evameva ida’’nti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ vuccati paccayiko. Avisaṃvādako lokassāti tāya saccavāditāya lokaṃ na visaṃvādetīti attho.
“为了让他们分裂”:意思是,对那些因为“从他这里听说”而被提到的人,为了让他们分裂。“或者让已经分裂的人和好”:如果两个朋友,或者同一位亲教师等,因为某种原因而分裂,他就一个一个地去找他们,说“你们出生在这样的家族,这么博学多闻,这样做实在不合适”等等,然后促成他们和好。“给与者”:就是和合的给与者,意思是看到两个人和睦相处,就说“你们出生在这样的家族,具备这样的功德,这样才合适”等等,来使他们坚定。“和合为住处”:和合就是他的住处。凡是没有和合的地方,他甚至连住都不愿意住,这是意思。巴利语也作“Samaggarāmo”,这里就是这个意思。“和合乐”:于和合中欣悦,意思是即使舍弃和合去往别处,他也不愿意。“和合喜”:看到和合、听说和合也欢喜。“说作和合语”:那种能令众生和合的语言,他只说这种阐明和合功德的语言,不说其他。巴利
Imesaṃ bhedāyāti yesaṃ ito sutvāti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ, tesaṃ bhedāya. Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātāti dvinnampi mittānaṃ vā samānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ vā kenacideva kāraṇena bhinnānaṃ ekamekaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ īdise kule jātānaṃ evaṃ bahussutānaṃ idaṃ na yutta’’ntiādīni vatvā sandhānaṃ kattā. Anuppadātāti sandhānānuppadātā, dve jane samagge disvā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ evarūpe kule jātānaṃ evarūpehi guṇehi samannāgatānaṃ anucchavikameta’’ntiādīni vatvā daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho. Samaggo ārāmo assāti samaggārāmo. Yattha samaggā natthi, tattha vasitumpi na icchatīti attho. ‘‘Samaggarāmo’’tipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho. Samaggaratoti samaggesu rato, te pahāya aññatra gantumpi na icchatīti attho. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatīti samagganandī. Samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti yā vācā satte samaggeyeva karoti, taṃ sāmaggiguṇaparidīpakameva vācaṃ bhāsati, na itaranti.
“无过失”:“过失”是指嗔怒,没有这个过失,所以叫无过失,意思就是没有缺点,就像“无过失之身,白衣为盖”那里所说的“无过失”一样。“悦耳”:因为语音甜美,所以让耳朵舒服,不会像针刺一样造成耳朵的刺痛。“令生爱”:因为义理甜美,不会让全身生起恼怒,而是让人生起爱意,所以叫令生爱。“入心”:能进入心,没有障碍,安乐地进入心,所以叫入心。“城市语”:因为功德圆满,所以是过去就有的,因此叫城市语;又像在城里长大的女子那样柔嫩,所以也叫城市语;又,这是城市所有的,所以叫城市语,意思是城市居民的语言。城市居民说话得体,称父亲为父亲,称母亲为母亲,称兄弟为兄弟。这样的语言为许多人所喜爱,所以叫“众人所爱”。正因为可爱,所以为许多人所满意、能让心增长,所以叫“众人可意”。巴利
Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso, nāssā elanti nelā, niddosāti attho. ‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti ettha vuttanelaṃ viya. Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā, sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetīti pemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati, apaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatīti hadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavāti porī, pure saṃvaddhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī, purassa esātipi porī, nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho . Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti, pitimattaṃ pitāti, mātimattaṃ mātāti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotīti bahujanakantā. Kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuddhikarāti bahujanamanāpā.
说“适时说”,就是先看清该说的时机才说,这是它的意思。说“真实说”,就是只说真实、如实、本来如此的话。说“说义”,就是只依现世和来世的利益来说。说“说法”,就是依九种出世间法来说。说“说律”,就是依防护律仪和断除律仪来说。所谓“有安放处”,“安放处”指的就是放置的地方;说“有安放处”,是因为它有安放处——意思是,他说的是应当铭记于心的合适话语。说“有譬喻”,就是有譬喻,也就是有理由的意思。说“有界限”,就是显示界限,令界限得以明了,如此而说,这是它的含义。说“义相应”,就是使以多种方式分析亦无法穷尽,而义理具足;或者说,他作为说义者所说的义,因为与该义相应,所以说“义相应”的话,而不是舍弃一义又说另一义,这就是所说的意思。说“适时”,意思是:即使说的是这样的话,他也不会想“我要说有安放处的话”就说得不合时机,而是先观察合适的时机才说,这就是它的意思。巴利
Kālena vadatīti kālavādī, vattabbayuttakālaṃ sallakkhetvā vadatīti attho. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ sabhāvameva vadatīti bhūtavādī. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthasannissitameva katvā vadatīti atthavādī. Navalokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti dhammavādī. Saṃvaravinayapahānavinayasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti vinayavādī. Nidhānaṃ vuccati ṭhapanokāso, nidhānamassā atthīti nidhānavatī, hadaye nidhātabba yuttavācaṃ bhāsitāti attho. Kālenāti evarūpiṃ bhāsamānopi ca ‘‘ahaṃ nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsissāmī’’ti na akālena bhāsati, yuttakālaṃ pana avekkhitvā bhāsatīti attho. Sāpadesanti saupamaṃ, sakāraṇanti attho. Pariyantavatinti paricchedaṃ dassetvā yathāssā paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatīti attho. Atthasaṃhitanti anekehipi nayehi vibhajantena pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya atthasampannaṃ, yaṃ vā so atthavādī atthaṃ vadati, tena atthena saṃhitattā atthasaṃhitaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, na aññaṃ nikkhipitvā aññaṃ bhāsatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
293 伤害种子类和草木类,是指对五种种子——根种子、茎种子、节种子、枝种子、种子种子——这五类种子,以及对任何青色草、树木等草木类的伤害,也就是以砍断、劈开、煮烧等方式加以破坏。远离这些,就是这段的意思。日中一食,是指早餐和晚餐两餐。其中早餐以正午为界限,另一餐从正午之后到天亮之前。所以,即使在正午之前吃了十次,也仍然算是日中一食者,就是针对这种情况才说日中一食。夜里吃东西叫夜食,因为停止了夜食,所以叫夜分止息。过了正午直到太阳落山这段时间吃东西,叫非时食。因为远离了它,所以叫离非时食。观看歌舞等,是指与教法不相合、像荆棘一样障碍修行的观看。自己跳舞、让别人跳舞、自己唱歌、让别人唱歌、自己演奏、让别人演奏,乃至以孔雀舞等方式进行的歌舞伎乐,以及观看这些歌舞伎乐的表演——这些就是歌舞伎乐观看。因为歌舞伎乐等,无论自己去做、让别人去做,还是去看别人做,对比丘和比丘尼都不允许。关于花鬘等,花是指任何一种花,香是指任何一种香料,涂香是指能令肤色变好的涂抹物。其中,佩戴叫戴,补足欠缺之处叫装饰,以香气和肤色变好的方式享受叫严饰。处是指理由。因此,远离凡夫为了持花鬘等而生的破戒之心,就是这段的意思。巴利
293.Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhāti mūlabījaṃ khandhabījaṃ phaḷubījaṃ aggabījaṃ bījabījanti pañcavidhassa bījagāmassa ceva yassa kassaci nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa bhūtagāmassa ca samārambhā, chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvena vikopanā paṭiviratoti attho. Ekabhattikoti pātarāsabhattaṃ sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni. Tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ, itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ antoaruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānopi ekabhattikova hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekabhattiko’’ti. Rattiyā bhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatoti rattūparato. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṃgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma. Tato viratattā virato vikālabhojanā. Sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca, antamaso mayūranaccanādivasenāpi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā cāti naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā. Naccādīni hi attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭanti. Mālādīsu mālāti yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃkiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Tattha piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma. Ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma. Gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāma. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ. Tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, tato paṭiviratoti attho.
“高床”是指超过规定尺寸的床。“大床”是指不合法的铺具。意思是远离这些。“金”就是黄金。“银”是指铜钱、铁钱、胶钱、木钱等市面上流通的货币。对这两种东西都远离接受:自己不拿,不叫别人拿,也不接受别人寄存的。意思是这样。“接受生谷物”是指接受七种生谷物:稻、米、大麦、小麦、粟、稗、豆。“接受生肉”在这里是指,除了特别允许的情况之外,比丘接受生肉和生鱼是不允许的,用手碰也不允许。巴利
Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ. Mahāsayanaṃ akappiyattharaṇaṃ. Tato paṭiviratoti attho. Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo lohamāsako jatumāsako dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti, tassa ubhayassapi paṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato, neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatīti attho. Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇāti sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsakasaṅkhātassa sattavidhassāpi āmakadhaññassa paṭiggahaṇā. Na kevalañca etesaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva, āmasanampi bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha aññatra odissa anuññātā āmakamaṃsamacchānaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭati, no āmasanaṃ.
关于“接受女人和女孩”:这里,“女人”指已经和男人有过性关系的女性,其他的就叫“女孩”。接受她们或者触摸她们,都是不允许的。“接受婢女和奴仆”:这里,如果纯粹以婢女、奴仆的身份来接受他们,那是不可以的;但如果对方说“我供养一个净人”“我供养一个园民”,这样说就可以接受。对于羊等牲畜,一直到田地、地基这些情况,应当依据律藏来审查什么是允许的、什么是不允许的。其中,“田地”是指能种谷物的地方。“地基”是指能种豆类等作物的地方。或者,凡是两者都能生长的地方,那就是田地;为了这个目的而尚未开垦的地段,则是地基。这里,以田地和地基为首,连水库、池塘等也都包括在内了。“使节事”:充当信使,即携带在家人书信或口信,各处奔波传递。“受遣送行”:被差遣在一家接一家之间奔走的小差事。“随行”:从事这两类行为,因此这里应理解为:从事使节事与受遣送行的行为。巴利
Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha itthīti purisantaragatā, itarā kumārikā nāma. Tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇampi āmasanampi akappiyameva. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha dāsidāsavaseneva tesaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati, ‘‘kappiyakārakaṃ dammi, ārāmikaṃ dammī’’ti evaṃ vutte pana vaṭṭati. Ajeḷakādīsu khettavatthupariyosānesu kappiyākappiyanayo vinayavasena upaparikkhitabbo. Tattha khettaṃ nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati, taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya akatabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpitaḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāneva. Dūteyyaṃ vuccati dūtakammaṃ, gihīnaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Pahiṇagamanaṃ vuccati gharā gharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ. Anuyogo nāma tadubhayakaraṇaṃ, tasmā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānaṃ anuyogāti evamettha attho veditabbo.
买卖,就是买和卖。在“秤上作弊”等等里面,“作弊”指的是欺骗。其中,秤上作弊有四种:在秤的样子上作弊、在秤的部件上作弊、在握秤的方式上作弊、在秤的隐藏结构上作弊。
其中,在秤的样子上作弊,就是做两杆外形一模一样的秤,收东西时用大秤,给东西时用小秤。
在秤的部件上作弊,就是收东西时用手压秤的后端,给东西时压前端。
在握秤的方式上作弊,就是收东西时握住绳子的根部,给东西时握住绳子的末端。
在秤的隐藏结构上作弊,就是把秤杆掏空,里面装上铁粉,收东西时让装铁粉的一端在后,给东西时让它在先。
“金钱钵”,就是铜器。用铜钵欺骗,就是铜钵作弊。怎么作弊呢?做一个金钵,再把另外两个三个铜钵做成金子的颜色,然后到乡下去,进入某个富户家,说“买金器吗?”当问价钱时,他们就想给个更便宜的价钱。于是他们问“怎么知道这些是金子的?”他便说“你们检验一下再买”,于是拿金钵在石头上磨,然后把所有钵都交出去就走了。巴利
Kayavikkayāti kayā ca vikkayā ca. Tulākūṭādīsu kūṭanti vañcanaṃ. Tattha tulākūṭaṃ tāva rūpakūṭaṃ aṅgakūṭaṃ gahaṇakūṭaṃ paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha rūpakūṭaṃ nāma dve tulā sarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti. Aṅgakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ nāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge. Kaṃso vuccati suvaṇṇapāti, tāya vañcanaṃ kaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇā karoti, tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva addhakulaṃ pavisitvā, ‘‘suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi ‘‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vutte – ‘‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbā pātiyo datvā gacchati.
所谓“量欺”,按破心、破尖、破绳分为三种。其中,破心发生在量取酥油、油等东西的时候。收进来时,用底部有孔的量器,嘴上说“慢慢倒”,却让大量液体流进下面的容器;给出去时,把孔堵住,迅速装满再交给对方。破尖发生在量取芝麻、稻谷等东西的时候。收进来时,慢慢把量器上的尖堆得高高的;给出去时,迅速装满,再把尖削平了给。破绳发生在丈量田地的时候。因为拿不到贿赂,就把本来不大的田量成一大片。巴利
Mānakūṭaṃ nāma hadayabhedasikhābhedarajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha hadayabhedo sappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhā chiddena mānena, ‘‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’’ti vatvā antobhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti; dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti. Sikhābhedo tilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti. Rajjubhedo khettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Lañjaṃ alabhantā hi khettaṃ amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti.
在欺压等条目中,欺压是指以暗中夺取或强行夺取的方式,取走属于某人或不属于某人的东西。诈骗是指用各种手段欺骗他人。这里有一件事:据说有个猎人抓了一头鹿和一只小鹿回来。一个骗子问他:“朋友,鹿值多少?小鹿值多少?”猎人回答说:“鹿值两个迦哈巴那,小鹿值一个。”骗子就给了一个迦哈巴那,带走小鹿,走了一小段路又折回来,说:“朋友,我不要小鹿了,把鹿给我吧。”猎人说:“那你得给两个迦哈巴那。”骗子说:“我刚才不是已经给过你一个迦哈巴那了吗?”猎人说:“是的,给过了。”骗子说:“那你把这小鹿也拿回去。这样一来,那一个迦哈巴那,加上这只值一个迦哈巴那的小鹿,不就是两个迦哈巴那了吗?”猎人觉得他说得有道理,就收回小鹿,把鹿给了他。巴利
Ukkoṭanādīsu ukkoṭananti sāmike assāmike kātuṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ. Vañcananti tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati. Tameko dhutto, ‘‘kiṃ, bho, migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto, ‘‘na me, bho, migapotakena attho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi ‘‘dve kahāpaṇe dehī’’ti. So āha – ‘‘nanu te, bho, mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti. Āma dinnoti. ‘‘Imampi migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo ayañca kahāpaṇagghanako migapotakoti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantī’’ti. So kāraṇaṃ vadatīti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti.
欺诈,是指靠咒术或幻术,把不是首饰的说成首饰,把不是摩尼宝的说成摩尼宝,把不是真金的说成真金,用假货来骗人。曲行,就是歪曲的行为,这其实是上述欺压、诈骗、欺诈等行为的统称,所以这里的含义应当理解为:欺压曲行、诈骗曲行、欺诈曲行。有些人说,先拿出一件东西、再换成另一件东西的调包行为就是曲行,但那其实已经被诈骗所涵盖了。在砍断等条目中,砍断指砍手砍脚等。杀指杀害。缚指用绳子等捆绑。掠盗有两种:雪掠盗和灌木掠盗。在降雪之时,埋伏在雪中,抢夺路上行人,这是雪掠盗。埋伏在灌木丛等中抢夺,这是灌木掠盗。劫掠,是指对村落、市镇等进行掠夺破坏。粗暴行为,就是暴行,比如闯入别人家里,把刀抵在对方胸口,然后夺走自己想要的东西。如此,他远离砍断……乃至……粗暴行为。巴利
Nikatīti yogavasena vā māyāvasena vā apāmaṅgaṃ pāmaṅganti, amaṇiṃ maṇinti, asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti katvā paṭirūpakena vañcanaṃ. Sāciyogoti kuṭilayogo, etesaṃyeva ukkoṭanādīnametaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmā ukkoṭanasāciyogo vañcanasāciyogo nikatisāciyogoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Keci aññaṃ dassetvā aññassa parivattanaṃ sāciyogoti vadanti. Taṃ pana vañcaneneva saṅgahitaṃ. Chedanādīsuchedananti hatthacchedanādi. Vadhoti māraṇaṃ. Bandhoti rajjubandhanādīhi bandhanaṃ. Viparāmosoti himaviparāmoso gumbaviparāmosoti duvidho. Yaṃ himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggapaṭipannaṃ janaṃ musanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gumbādīhi paṭicchannā musanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso. Ālopo vuccati gāmanigamādīnaṃ vilopakaraṇaṃ. Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā, gehaṃ pavisitvā manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ. Evametasmā chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
294 这位比丘知足,是指他具备前面所说的、在四种资具上十二种随得资具的知足。而具备这十二种随得资具知足的比丘,有八种资具是适用的:三衣、钵、裁齿木刀、一根针、腰带、滤水囊。关于这一点也有偈颂说:巴利
294.So santuṭṭho hotīti svāyaṃ bhikkhu heṭṭhā vuttena catūsu paccayesu dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato hoti. Iminā pana dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgatassa bhikkhuno aṭṭha parikkhārā vaṭṭanti tīṇi cīvarāni patto dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi ekā sūci kāyabandhanaṃ parissāvananti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 三衣和钵,刀、针和腰带,
连同滤水囊,这八样东西就是精勤比丘的资具。”巴利
‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ; Parissāvanena aṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhuno’’ti.
这些资具全都可以用来护身,也可以用来护腹。怎么说呢?先说三衣:穿着它到处走动的时候,它护养身体,所以是护身的;用衣角滤水来喝,或者拿可嚼的果实来吃的时候,它护养肚子,所以是护腹的。钵也一样:用它舀水洗澡,或者修补房舍用具的时候,是护身的;盛了食物来吃的时候,是护腹的。小刀:用它削牙木,或者整理床凳的腿脚、衣服、小屋的支柱时,是护身的;削甘蔗、椰子之类的东西来吃时,是护腹的。针:缝补衣服的时候,是护身的;戳穿糕饼或水果来吃的时候,是护腹的。腰带:系着它走动的时候,是护身的;捆扎甘蔗之类的东西拿着走的时候,是护腹的。滤水囊:用它滤水洗澡,或者整理坐卧处的用具时,是护身的;滤饮用水,或者用它盛着芝麻、米、炒谷之类的东西来吃时,是护腹的。以上就是拥有八种资具的人的资具数量。巴利
Te sabbepi kāyaparihārikāpi honti kucchiparihārikāpi. Kathaṃ? Ticīvaraṃ tāva nivāsetvā pārupitvā ca vicaraṇakāle kāyaṃ pariharati posetīti kāyaparihārikaṃ hoti, cīvarakaṇṇena udakaṃ parissāvetvā pivanakāle khāditabbaphalāphalaggahaṇakāle ca kucchiṃ pariharati posetīti kucchiparihārikaṃ hoti. Pattopi tena udakaṃ uddharitvā nahānakāle kuṭiparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihāriko hoti, āhāraṃ gahetvā bhuñjanakāle kucchiparihāriko hoti. Vāsipi tāya dantakaṭṭhacchedanakāle mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgapādacīvarakuṭidaṇḍakasajjanakāle ca kāyaparihārikā hoti, ucchucchedananāḷikerāditacchanakāle kucchiparihārikā. Sūcipi cīvarasibbanakāle kāyaparihārikā hoti, pūvaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vijjhitvā khādanakāle kucchiparihārikā. Kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā vicaraṇakāle kāyaparihārikaṃ, ucchuādīni bandhitvā gahaṇakāle kucchiparihārikaṃ. Parissāvanaṃ tena udakaṃ parissāvetvā nahānakāle, senāsanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihārikaṃ, pānīyaparissāvanakāle teneva tilataṇḍulaputhukādīni gahetvā khādanakāle ca kucchiparihārikaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa parikkhāramattā.
不过,对于只有九种资具的比丘,进入住处时,那里的常设敷布或钥匙可以用。对于有十种资具的比丘,坐具或一块皮革可以用。对于有十一种资具的比丘,带杈的杖或油筒可以用。对于有十二种资具的比丘,伞或凉鞋可以用。而在这些人当中,只有八资具者才是知足的,对其他资具数量的人,也不该说他们是“不知足、多欲、负担重”。因为他们同样也是少欲、知足、容易养活、生活轻便的。不过,世尊并不是根据他们来讲这部经的,而是根据八资具者来讲的。因为八资具者把小刀和针放进滤水囊,再把滤水囊放进钵里,把钵挂在肩头,三衣系在身上,就能随心所欲、轻松自在地出发。他不需要再回头去取什么东西。世尊为了显示这位比丘生活轻便,才说了“他知足,以护身的衣服”等话。巴利
Navaparikkhārikassa pana seyyaṃ pavisantassa tatraṭṭhakapaccattharaṇaṃ vā kuñcikā vā vaṭṭati. Dasaparikkhārikassa nisīdanaṃ vā cammakhaṇḍaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Ekādasaparikkhārikassa kattarayaṭṭhi vā telanāḷikā vā vaṭṭati. Dvādasaparikkhārikassa chattaṃ vā upāhanā vā vaṭṭati. Etesu ca aṭṭhaparikkhārikova santuṭṭho, itare asantuṭṭhā, mahicchā mahābhārāti na vattabbā. Etepi hi appicchāva santuṭṭhāva subharāva sallahukavuttinova. Bhagavā pana nayimaṃ suttaṃ tesaṃ vasena kathesi, aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa vasena kathesi. So hi khuddakavāsiñca sūciñca parissāvane pakkhipitvā pattassa anto ṭhapetvā pattaṃ aṃsakūṭe laggetvā ticīvaraṃ kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvā yenicchakaṃ sukhaṃ pakkamati. Paṭinivattetvā gahetabbaṃ nāmassa na hoti, iti imassa bhikkhuno sallahukavuttitaṃ dassento bhagavā, santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarenātiādimāha.
这里,“护身”是指仅够护身这一点点。“护腹”是指仅够护腹这一点点。“收好就出发”是指:他把那八样资具全部带上,系附在身上就走。他不会对“这是我的精舍、这是我的住处、这是我的侍者”产生执著或牵绊。他就像脱离弓弦的箭,又像离开象群的醉象,随自己想去哪里,就受用那里的坐卧处、林丛、树下、山林崖窟,独自站着,独自坐着,在一切行住坐卧中都是独自一人,没有同伴。巴利
Tattha kāyaparihārikenāti kāyapariharaṇamattakena. Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena. Samādāyeva pakkamatīti taṃ aṭṭhaparikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvā kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati, ‘‘mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’tissa saṅgo vā baddho vā na hoti, so jiyā mutto saro viya, yūthā apakkanto mattahatthī viya icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ vanapabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto ekova tiṭṭhati, ekova nisīdati, sabbiriyāpathesu ekova adutiyo.
“ 他四处游走,心中没有怨恨。
无论得到什么,都能知足。
面对种种危难,他能安忍,毫不畏惧,
一个人应当像犀牛角那样独自而行。”巴利
‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti, Santussamāno itarītarena; Parissayānaṃ sahitā achambhī, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 42);
他就达到了这样被称赞的犀牛角状态。巴利
Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.
现在,为了用譬喻说明这个道理,说了“犹如”等话。其中,pakkhī 就是有翅膀的鸟,sakuṇo 就是鸟。ḍeti 就是飞起来。这里简要的意思是:所谓鸟,就是知道“某个地方的树果实熟了”,便从四面八方飞来,用爪、翅膀、嘴等去刺、摇、啄食那些果实。它们不会想:“这些今天吃,那些明天再吃。”等到果实吃完了,它们不会为那棵树设防,也不会在那里留下翅膀、爪或嘴,而是对那棵树毫无留恋,谁想去哪个方向,就只带着翅膀飞走。同样地,这位比丘毫无执着、毫无恋栈地离去。因此说“执持随身而去”。ariyena 是无过失的,ajjhattaṃ 意为在自身中,anavajjasukhaṃ 意为无过失的安乐。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇā nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapakkhatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti. ‘‘Idaṃ ajjatanāya idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’’ti nesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti, atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkho hutvā yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova – uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkhoyeva pakkamati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samādāyeva pakkamatī’’ti. Ariyenāti niddosena. Ajjhattanti sake attabhāve. Anavajjasukhanti niddosasukhaṃ.
295 “他以眼见了色之后”的意思是:这位具备圣戒蕴的比丘,以眼识看见了色之后。其余需要说明的内容,在《清净道论》中都已经讲过了。“不混杂的乐”是指不被烦恼所浸染的乐,也叫做“不散乱的乐”。因为守护根门的乐,是在所见等对象上只以所见等的方式生起运作,所以是不散乱的。“他于前进、返回时”:这位具备对以意为第六的六根进行守护的比丘,在前进、返回等七种情形中,依靠念与正知而成为正知而行的人。关于这里需要说明的内容,在《念处》中已经讲过了。巴利
295.So cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti so iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato bhikkhu cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ passitvāti attho. Sesapadesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Abyāsekasukhanti kilesehi anavasittasukhaṃ, avikiṇṇasukhantipi vuttaṃ. Indriyasaṃvarasukhañhi diṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhamattādivasena pavattatāya avikiṇṇaṃ hoti. So abhikkante paṭikkanteti so manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvarena samannāgato bhikkhu imesu abhikkantapaṭikkantādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññavasena sampajānakārī hoti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ satipaṭṭhāne vuttameva.
296 “他以这个……”等等,是要说明什么?是要说明林中居住的资具圆满。因为,如果有人不具备这四种资具,他的林中居住就不会成就,他会落到跟畜生或林中野人共处的地步;住在林中的天神会发出可怕的声音说:“像这样的恶比丘,住在林里有什么用?”还会用手拍头,做出逃跑的样子。“某比丘进了森林后,做了这样那样的恶行”——这种坏名声也会传开。但如果有人具备这四种资具,他的林中居住就能成就。因为他审察自己的戒时,看不到任何黑点或瑕疵,就生起喜悦,接着以灭尽和坏灭的方式观照它,从而进入圣者之境;住在林中的天神心生欢喜,称扬他的美德;于是他的名声就像滴入水中的油滴一样,广泛传开。巴利
296.So iminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi, tassa araññavāso na ijjhati, tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vattabbataṃ āpajjati, araññe adhivatthā devatā, ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti. ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammaṃ akāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati, so hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayato vayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati, araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti, itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti.
这里,“远离”是指空旷、少声音,也就是没有喧闹的意思。正是针对这一点,《分别论》里说:“‘远离’:即使住处离人很近,只要不被在家众和出家众挤满,那它就是远离的。”(《分别论》526)
“人们在那里躺卧和安坐”,所以叫“坐卧处”,这是床、椅等的同义词。因此说:“‘坐卧处’:床是坐卧处,椅也是,床垫也是,枕头也是;精舍也是,半圆顶屋也是,殿堂也是,楼阁也是,洞窟也是,露台也是,圆顶屋也是,山洞也是,竹林丛也是,树下也是,帐棚也是坐卧处;或者,凡是比丘们所退居的地方,这一切都是坐卧处。”另外,“精舍、半圆顶屋、殿堂、楼阁、洞窟”这一类叫精舍坐卧处。“床、椅、床垫、枕头”这一类叫床椅坐卧处。“地毯、皮片、草席、叶席”这一类叫铺设坐卧处。“或者,凡是比丘们所退居的地方”这一类叫空间坐卧处。这样,坐卧处共有四种,这一切都被“坐卧处”这个词涵盖了。接着,为了说明适合这位像鸟一样、随处而住的比丘的住处,他说了“森林、树下”等话。巴利
Tattha vivittanti suññaṃ appasaddaṃ, appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge, ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi, tena taṃ vivitta’’nti (vibha. 526) vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ, mañcapīṭhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ, pīṭhampi bhisipi bimbohanampi, vihāropi aḍḍhayogopi, pāsādopi, hammiyampi, guhāpi, aṭṭopi, māḷopi, leṇampi, veḷugumbopi , rukkhamūlampi, maṇḍapopi senāsanaṃ, yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti. Apica ‘‘vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhā’’ti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Mañco pīṭhaṃ, bhisi bimbohana’’nti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Cimilikā, cammakhaṇḍo, tiṇasanthāro, paṇṇasanthāro’’ti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantī’’ti idaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti, taṃ sabbampi senāsanaggahaṇena gahitameva. Imassa pana sakuṇasadisassa cātuddisassa bhikkhuno anucchavikaṃ dassento araññaṃ rukkhamūlantiādimāha.
这里,“林野”是指比丘尼所说的“走出村落、到了门柱之外,这一切都叫林野”这种林野。而“所谓林野住所,最远以五百弓为限”(《巴拉基格》654)这一种,才适合这位比丘,它的特征在《清净道论》头陀支解说中已经讲过。“树下”是指任何有浓密树荫、远离人群的树根处。“山”是指岩石山。因为在那种地方,在水潭边洗漱完毕,坐在清凉的树荫下,四处眺望,凉风吹拂,心就能专一。“溪谷”:“ka”是水的意思,被水冲刷、被水裂开的山间地带,人们也叫它河滩或河湾。那里有像银板一样的沙,头顶上密林像宝石华盖,水流像宝石流。进入这样的溪谷,喝了水,让身体清凉,堆起沙堆,铺开粪扫衣,坐下来修习沙门法,心就能专一。“山洞”是指两山之间,或者在一座山里像隧道一样的大洞穴。坟场的特征在《清净道论》中已经讲过。“林薮”是指越过了人们活动的范围,那里人们不耕种、不播种。因此说:“‘林薮’是那些远处住所的称呼”等等(《分别论》531)。“露地”是指没有遮盖的地方,如果需要,也可以在那里搭个衣棚住下。“草堆”是指稻草堆。人们从大草堆里抽出稻草,做成像岩窟一样的住处,或者在树木、灌木丛上面放上稻草,坐在下面修习沙门法,这段话就是针对这种情况说的。巴利
Tattha araññanti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā, sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ araññaṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ, tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese vuttaṃ. Rukkhamūlanti yaṃkiñci sandacchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rakkhamūlaṃ. Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena vījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ, udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatappadesaṃ, yaṃ nadītumbantipi nadīkuñjantipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālikā honti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahanaṃ, maṇikkhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālikaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññāpetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antarā, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaṅgasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ. Susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Vanapatthanti atikkamitvā manussānaṃ upacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasanti na vapanti. Tenevāha – ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi (vibha. 531). Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ, ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsiṃ . Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
饭后,就是指吃完饭之后。从乞食返回,是指结束乞食的寻求而回来。结跏趺坐,是指把双腿从四周盘绑起来的坐姿。盘起,就是绑好。把身体端正挺直,就是把上半身摆正,让十八节脊椎骨一节对一节地接正。这样坐着的时候,皮肤、肌肉、筋腱就不会向前弯歪。如果它们弯歪,就会在每一刹那因此生起苦受;那些苦受不生起时,心就能专一,业处不会散乱退失,而能增长、兴盛。把念安放在面前,就是把念安置在朝向业处的方向,或者理解为把念放在面部附近。因此《分别论》中说:“这念已安立、善安立于鼻端或口相,所以说‘把念安放在面前’。”(《分别论》537)或者,按照《无碍解道》所说——“‘pari’是摄持的意思,‘mukha’是出离的意思,‘sati’是安立的意思,所以说‘parimukhaṃ sati’”(《无碍解道》1.164)——这里也应当依照这个方式来理解其含义。简单说,就是“建立起摄持的出离之念”。巴利
Pacchābhattanti bhattassa pacchato. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto. Pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanahārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā, mukhasamīpe vā katvāti attho. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (vibha. 537). Atha vā ‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho, mukhanti niyyānattho, satīti upaṭṭhānattho, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ sati’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.164) evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānasatiṃ katvā’’ti.
“于世间断除贪欲”这句话里,以坏灭、崩坏的含义来说,五取蕴就是世间。因此,在五取蕴中舍掉贪染,把欲贪镇伏下来——这就是这里的含义。“以离贪欲”:因为是通过镇伏的方式断除了,所以是离贪欲,并不是像眼识那样自然就没有贪欲的意思。“令心从贪欲中净化”:意思是把心从贪欲中释放出来。就像那贪欲释放了心,释放之后不再重新抓取,他就是这样做——这就是这里的含义。“断除嗔恚之过恶”等处,也按同样的方式理解。心因此被损害,像腐坏的食物等舍弃了先前的状态,所以叫“嗔”。因为发生变异而变坏,或者损害、破坏他人,所以叫“过恶”。这两者都是忿怒的同义词。“昏沉”:是心的病。“睡眠”:是心所的病。昏沉与睡眠合起来就是“昏眠”。“有光明想”:因为具有即使在夜里也能像白天一样了知所见光明的能力,所以安住于已离盖、清净之想。“具念正知”:具足念与智。这两者是因为有助于光明想才被提到的。“掉举与追悔”:合称“掉悔”。“已度疑”:指超越、克服了疑而安住。“这是如何、这是如何”这种想法不再生起,所以是“无犹豫”。“于善法”:指于无过失的法。不会这样怀疑、这样犹豫——“这些确实是善吗?这些怎么是善呢?”——这就是这里的含义。这是此处的简要说明。不过,关于这些盖,若要按词义、特征等各方面来详细说明,那全部都已经在《清净道论》里讲过了。巴利
Abhijjhaṃ loketi ettha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena pañcupādānakkhandhā loko, tasmā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu rāgaṃ pahāya kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhetvāti ayamettha attho. Vigatābhijjhenāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnattā vigatābhijjhena, na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenāti attho. Abhijjhāya cittaṃ parisodhetīti abhijjhāto cittaṃ parimoceti. Yathā naṃ sā muñcati ceva, muñcitvā ca na puna gaṇhāti, evaṃ karotīti attho. Byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Byāpajjati iminā cittaṃ pūtikammāsādayo viya purimapakatiṃ pajahatīti byāpādo. Vikārāpattiyā padussati, paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetīti padoso. Ubhayametaṃ kodhassevādhivacanaṃ. Thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ. Middhaṃ cetasikagelaññaṃ. Thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Ālokasaññīti rattimpi divā diṭṭhaālokasañjānanasamatthatāya vigatanīvaraṇāya parisuddhāya saññāya samannāgato. Sato sampajānoti satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ ālokasaññāya upakārattā vuttaṃ. Uddhaccañca kukkuccañca uddhaccakukkuccaṃ. Tiṇṇavicikicchoti vicikicchaṃ taritvā atikkamitvā ṭhito. ‘‘Kathamidaṃ kathamida’’nti evaṃ nappavattatīti akathaṃkathī. Kusalesu dhammesūti anavajjesu dhammesu. ‘‘Ime nu kho kusalā, kathamime kusalā’’ti evaṃ na vicikicchati na kaṅkhatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, imesu pana nīvaraṇesu vacanatthalakkhaṇādibhedato yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttaṃ.
297 令智慧羸弱:这五种盖生起时,会让尚未生起的世间与出世间智慧无法生起;即使已经生起的八等至或五神通,也会被它们切断而退失。因此,它们被称为令智慧羸弱。如来足迹:这也是指如来的智足迹、智行处,也就是以智所践踏之处。如来所亲近:是指被如来的智肋所摩擦之处。如来所刮痕:是指被如来的智牙所刮蹭留痕之处。巴利
297.Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti ime pañca nīvaraṇā uppajjamānā anuppannāya lokiyalokuttarāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na denti, uppannā api aṭṭha samāpattiyo pañca vā abhiññā ucchinditvā pātenti; tasmā ‘‘paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā’’ti vuccanti. Tathāgatapadaṃ itipīti idampi tathāgatassa ñāṇapadaṃ ñāṇavaḷañjaṃ ñāṇena akkantaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tathāgatanisevitanti tathāgatassa ñāṇaphāsukāya nighaṃsitaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathāgatārañjitanti tathāgatassa ñāṇadāṭhāya ārañjitaṭṭhānaṃ.
299 如实了知,就是按照事物的真实本性去了知。不过,圣弟子这时还没有达到确信。因为这些禅那和神通,外道也能修得,所以这时还没有达到确信。即使在见道的那一刹那,也因为该完成的任务还没有完成,所以还没有达到确信。然而,他确实正在达到确信。也就是说,在见道那一刹那,就像象园者见到大雄象一样,他以“世尊是正自觉者”这种方式,对三宝生起确信。已到达确信,是说这样在见道刹那正在达到确信的人,到了阿拉汉果那一刹那,因为一切该完成的任务都已彻底完成,就以一切方式对三宝真正达到了确信。其余的文句,意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
299.Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti yathāsabhāvaṃ pajānāti. Natveva tāva ariyasāvako niṭṭhaṃ gato hotīti imā jhānābhiññā bāhirakehipi sādhāraṇāti na tāva niṭṭhaṃ gato hoti. Maggakkhaṇepi apariyositakiccatāya na tāva niṭṭhaṃ gato hoti. Apica kho niṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti apica kho pana maggakkhaṇe mahāhatthiṃ passanto nāgavaniko viya sammāsambuddho bhagavāti iminā ākārena tīsu ratanesu niṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Niṭṭhaṃ gato hotīti evaṃ maggakkhaṇe niṭṭhaṃ gacchanto arahattaphalakkhaṇe pariyositasabbakiccatāya sabbākārena tīsu ratanesu niṭṭhaṃ gato hoti. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.
《大象迹喻经》的注释巴利
8. Mahāhatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā
300 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《大象迹喻经》。其中,“陆行”指在地上行走的众生;“生物”指有脚的众生;“足迹类”指各种足迹;“纳入”就是归入、包含进去。“被称为最上”就是被称为第一。“即此”是说,因为体量巨大才被称为最上,不是从功德角度说的,这是它的意思。“任何善法”指任何世间或出世间的善法。“归摄”在这里有四种摄:同生摄、同处摄、作用摄、计数摄。其中,像“所有刹帝利都来,所有婆罗门都来”这样,按同一种姓来摄,叫同生摄。像“所有憍萨罗人都来,所有摩揭陀人都来”这样,按同一出生地来摄,叫同处摄。像“所有车兵都来,所有弓箭手都来”这样,按所做的事来摄,叫作用摄。像“眼界入哪一蕴的计数?眼界入色蕴的计数。如果眼界入色蕴的计数,那么据此就该说,眼界被色蕴所摄。”这样的摄,叫计数摄。在这里,所指的正是这一种。巴利
300.Evaṃme sutanti mahāhatthipadopamasuttaṃ. Tattha jaṅgalānanti pathavītalacārīnaṃ. Pāṇānanti sapādakapāṇānaṃ. Padajātānīti padāni. Samodhānaṃ gacchantīti odhānaṃ pakkhepaṃ gacchanti. Aggamakkhāyatīti seṭṭhaṃ akkhāyati. Yadidaṃ mahantattenāti mahantabhāvena aggaṃ akkhāyati, na guṇavasenāti attho. Ye keci kusalā dhammāti ye keci lokiyā vā lokuttarā vā kusalā dhammā. Saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti ettha catubbidho saṅgaho – sajātisaṅgaho, sañjātisaṅgaho, kiriyasaṅgaho, gaṇanasaṅgahoti. Tattha ‘‘sabbe khattiyā āgacchantu sabbe brāhmaṇā’’ti evaṃ samānajātivasena saṅgaho sajātisaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Sabbe kosalakā sabbe māgadhakā’’ti evaṃ sañjātidesavasena saṅgaho sañjātisaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Sabbe rathikā sabbe dhanuggahā’’ti evaṃ kiriyavasena saṅgaho kiriyasaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Cakkhāyatanaṃ katamakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchatīti? Cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati. Hañci cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati, tena vata re vattabbe cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhena saṅgahita’’nti (kathā. 471), ayaṃ gaṇanasaṅgaho nāma. Imasmimpi ṭhāne ayameva adhippeto.
有人会问:在回答“四圣谛中哪些是善、哪些是不善、哪些是无记”这个问题时,经典里确实说过:“集谛是不善,道谛是善,灭谛是无记,苦谛则可能是善、可能是不善、可能是无记。”既然这样,那么属于四地范围的善法,岂不是只和一个半的谛有关系吗?那为什么大长老还说善法要计入四圣谛之中呢?回答说:因为善法都含摄在谛里面。就像经里说的:“诸比丘,这一百五十多条学处,每半月诵一次,想要解脱的善男子们就在其中修学。诸比丘,有三种学:增上戒学、增上心学、增上慧学。”在这里,一百五十多条学处整体上属于增上戒学这一项,但正在学这些学处的人,也被说成是在学全部三种学,因为三种学都含摄在学处之中。又像大象的足迹分成四个部分,狐狸、狼、兔、鹿等小兽的脚印,不论落在大象足迹的一个部分、两个部分、三个部分还是四个部分,都已经归入大象的足迹之中,因为它们始终没有脱离大象足迹的范围,本来就含摄在其中。同样地,不论归入一个谛、两个谛、三个谛还是四个谛的法,都已经算是进入四圣谛的计数之中,因为都含摄在谛里面。所以,即使善法只归入一个半谛的计数,仍然说“这一切都归摄于四圣谛之中”。至于在“苦圣谛”等纲目条目中,以及在“生是苦”等解释条目中应当说明的内容,在《清净道论》里已经讲过了。这里只需要了解教说的次第而已。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ kati kusalā kati akusalā kati abyākatāti pañhassa vissajjane samudayasaccaṃ akusalaṃ, maggasaccaṃ kusalaṃ, nirodhasaccaṃ abyākataṃ, dukkhasaccaṃ siyā kusalaṃ, siyā akusalaṃ, siyā abyākata’’nti (vibha. 216-217) āgatattā catubhūmakampi kusalaṃ diyaḍḍhameva saccaṃ bhajati. Atha kasmā mahāthero catūsu ariyasaccesu gaṇanaṃ gacchatīti āhāti? Saccānaṃ antogadhattā. Yathā hi ‘‘sādhikamidaṃ, bhikkhave, diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasataṃ anvaddhamāsaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchati, yattha attakāmā kulaputtā sikkhanti. Tisso imā, bhikkhave, sikkhā adhisīlasikkhā adhicittasikkhā adhipaññāsikkhā’’ti (a. ni. 3.88) ettha sādhikamidaṃ diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasataṃ ekā adhisīlasikkhāva hoti, taṃ sikkhantopi tisso sikkhā sikkhatīti dassito, sikkhānaṃ antogadhattā. Yathā ca ekassa hatthipadassa catūsu koṭṭhāsesu ekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse otiṇṇānipi dvīsu tīsu catūsu koṭṭhāsesu otiṇṇānipi siṅgālasasamigādīnaṃ pādāni hatthipade samodhānaṃ gatāneva honti. Hatthipadato amuccitvā tasseva antogadhattā. Evameva ekasmimpi dvīsupi tīsupi catūsupi saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā dhammā catūsu saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatāva honti; saccānaṃ antogadhattāti diyaḍḍhasaccagaṇanaṃ gatepi kusaladhamme ‘‘sabbe te catūsu ariyasaccesu saṅgahaṃ gacchantī’’ti āha. ‘‘Dukkhe ariyasacce’’tiādīsu uddesapadesu ceva jātipi dukkhātiādīsu niddesapadesu ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva. Kevalaṃ panettha desanānukkamova veditabbo.
301 301. 就像一位手艺熟练的竹编工匠,得到一根上好的竹子,先把它截成四段,然后留下三段,取一段再破成五条;从那五条里又留下四条,取一条剖开,做成五片薄竹片;接着又留下四片薄竹片,取一片,从腹面和背面剖成两半,然后把背面那半放下,拿腹面那半,用它做出小箱、簸箕、扇子、棕榈扇等各种竹编器物。这时不能说,那背面半片、其余四片薄竹片、其余四段、其余三段,工匠都没有用到。只是没法一次全部用上,他会按顺序逐步用。同样,这位大长老也像那位竹编工匠。他得到这部大经,就像得到一根上好的竹子,先依四圣谛立起总纲,好比工匠把竹子截成四段。工匠留下三段、取一段再分成五条,就好比长老把其余三圣谛放在一边,单取苦谛来剖析,从五蕴的角度分成五类。然后,就像那位工匠留下四段、取一段破成五片,长老也把四种无色蕴放在一边,专门分析色蕴时,分成四大种以及四大种所造色,共五类。接着,就像那位工匠留下四片薄竹片、取一片,从腹面和背面剖成两半,长老也把所造色和其余三界放在一边,专门分析地界时,从内、外两方面分成两类来显示。又像那位工匠放下背面那半,拿腹面那半,做出种种竹编器物,长老也把外地界放在一边,为了把内地界从二十种角度分析显示出来,而说出“友啊,什么是内地界”等话。巴利
301. Yathā hi cheko vilīvakāro sujātaṃ veḷuṃ labhitvā catudhā chetvā tato tayo koṭṭhāse ṭhapetvā ekaṃ gaṇhitvā pañcadhā bhindeyya, tatopi cattāro ṭhapetvā ekaṃ gaṇhitvā phālento pañca pesiyo kareyya, tato catasso ṭhapetvā ekaṃ gaṇhitvā kucchibhāgaṃ piṭṭhibhāganti dvidhā phāletvā piṭṭhibhāgaṃ ṭhapetvā kucchibhāgaṃ ādāya tato samuggabījanitālavaṇṭādinānappakāraṃ veḷuvikatiṃ kareyya, so piṭṭhibhāgañca itarā ca catasso pesiyo itare ca cattāro koṭṭhāse itare ca tayo koṭṭhāse kammāya na upanessatīti na vattabbo. Ekappahārena pana upanetuṃ na sakkā, anupubbena upanessati. Evameva ayaṃ mahātheropi vilīvakāro sujātaṃ veḷuṃ labhitvā cattāro koṭṭhāse viya, imaṃ mahantaṃ suttantaṃ ārabhitvā catuariyasaccavasena mātikaṃ ṭhapesi. Vilīvakārassa tayo koṭṭhāse ṭhapetvā ekaṃ gahetvā tassa pañcadhā karaṇaṃ viya therassa tīṇi ariyasaccāni ṭhapetvā ekaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ gahetvā bhājentassa khandhavasena pañcadhā karaṇaṃ. Tato yathā so vilīvakāro cattāro koṭṭhāse ṭhapetvā ekaṃ bhāgaṃ gahetvā pañcadhā phālesi, evaṃ thero cattāro arūpakkhandhe ṭhapetvā rūpakkhandhaṃ vibhajanto cattāri ca mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpanti pañcadhā akāsi. Tato yathā so vilīvakāro catasso pesiyo ṭhapetvā ekaṃ gahetvā kucchibhāgaṃ piṭṭhibhāganti dvidhā phālesi, evaṃ thero upādāya rūpañca tisso ca dhātuyo ṭhapetvā ekaṃ pathavīdhātuṃ vibhajanto ajjhattikabāhiravasena dvidhā dassesi. Yathā so vilīvakāro piṭṭhibhāgaṃ ṭhapetvā kucchibhāgaṃ ādāya nānappakāraṃ vilīvavikatiṃ akāsi, evaṃ thero bāhiraṃ pathavīdhātuṃ ṭhapetvā ajjhattikaṃ pathavīdhātuṃ vīsatiyā ākārehi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ katamā cāvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātūtiādimāha.
就像竹篾工匠会把背面的那半片、其余四片薄竹片、其余四段、其余三段,按顺序一步步用到活儿上——因为不可能一次性全用上——同样,这位长老也会把外地界以及其余三界、所造色以及其余四种无色蕴、其余三圣谛,按顺序逐一分析展示出来,因为不可能一次性全部展示完。另外,通过王子的譬喻,也应该说明这个次第——巴利
Yathā pana vilīvakāro piṭṭhibhāgañca itarā ca cattasso pesiyo itare ca cattāro koṭṭhāse itare ca tayo koṭṭhāse anupubbena kammāya upanessati, na hi sakkā ekappahārena upanetuṃ, evaṃ theropi bāhirañca pathavīdhātuṃ itarā ca tisso dhātuyo upādārūpañca itare ca cattāro arūpino khandhe itarāni ca tīṇi ariyasaccāni anupubbena vibhajitvā dassessati, na hi sakkā ekappahārena dassetuṃ. Apica rājaputtūpamāyapi ayaṃ kamo vibhāvetabbo –
据说,有一位大王,他有一千多个儿子。他把儿子们的装饰用品放进四个箱子里,交给长子,吩咐说:“孩子,这是你兄弟们的装饰品。到了该打扮的节日,他们来求你说‘请给我们装饰品’时,你就给他们。”长子回答:“萨度,父王。”便把箱子收存在宝库里。到了该打扮的节日,王子们来到国王面前说:“父王,请给我们装饰品吧,我们要庆祝星宿节。”国王说:“孩子们,我已经把装饰品交给你们的长兄了,你们去让他拿来,然后戴上吧。”他们答应着“好”,就来到长兄那里,说:“听说我们的装饰品在你手上,请给我们吧。”长兄说:“好,我来办。”他打开宝库,取出四个箱子,把三个放在一边,打开其中一个,从里面取出五个匣子,把四个放在一边,打开其中一个,从里面取出五个小盒,把四个放在一边,打开其中一个,把盖子放在旁边,从里面取出手饰、脚饰等各种各样的装饰品,分给他们。他虽然还没有把剩下的四个小盒、四个匣子、三个箱子一次全部分给他们,但会一批一批地给——因为不可能一次全部给完。巴利
Eko kira mahārājā, tassa parosahassaṃ puttā. So tesaṃ piḷandhanaparikkhāraṃ catūsu peḷāsu ṭhapetvā jeṭṭhaputtassa appesi – ‘‘idaṃ te, tāta, bhātikānaṃ piḷandhanabhaṇḍaṃ tathārūpe chaṇe sampatte piḷandhanaṃ no dehīti yācantānaṃ dadeyyāsī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhu devā’’ti sāragabbhe paṭisāmesi, tathārūpe chaṇadivase rājaputtā rañño santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘piḷandhanaṃ no, tāta, detha, nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tātā, jeṭṭhabhātikassa vo hatthe mayā piḷandhanaṃ ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ āharāpetvā piḷandhathāti. Te sādhūti paṭissuṇitvā tassa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ kira no hatthe piḷandhanabhaṇḍaṃ, taṃ dethā’’ti āhaṃsu. So evaṃ karissāmīti gabbhaṃ vivaritvā, catasso peḷāyo nīharitvā tisso ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vivaritvā, tato pañca samugge nīharitvā cattāro ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vivaritvā, tato pañcasu karaṇḍesu nīharitesu cattāro ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vivaritvā pidhānaṃ passe ṭhapetvā tato hatthūpagapādūpagādīni nānappakārāni piḷandhanāni nīharitvā adāsi. So kiñcāpi itarehi catūhi karaṇḍehi itarehi catūhi samuggehi itarāhi tīhi peḷāhi na tāva bhājetvā deti, anupubbena pana dassati, na hi sakkā ekappahārena dātuṃ.
在这里,应当把世尊看作那位大王。经中也这样说:“世尊说:‘塞拉,我是王,是无上的法王。’”应当把舍利弗长老看作长子。经中也这样说:“比丘们,如果有人要正确地说,就该说:‘他是世尊的亲生子,从口而生,从法而生,由法所成,是法的继承者,不是财物的继承者。’那他说的正是舍利弗。……”应当把比丘僧团看作那一千多个王子。经中也这样说——巴利
Tattha mahārājā viya bhagavā daṭṭhabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘rājāhamasmi selāti bhagavā, dhammarājā anuttaro’’ti (su. ni. 559). Jeṭṭhaputto viya sāriputtatthero, vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ kho taṃ, bhikkhave, sammā vadamāno vadeyya, ‘bhagavato putto oraso mukhato jāto dhammajo dhammanimmito dhammadāyādo, no āmisadāyādo’ti sāriputtameva taṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyya, bhagavato putto…pe… no āmisadāyādo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.97). Parosahassarājaputtā viya bhikkhusaṅgho daṭṭhabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 逾千比丘众,恭敬亲近善逝;
彼宣说离尘之法,涅槃无所怖畏。”巴利
‘‘Parosahassaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, sugataṃ payirupāsati; Desentaṃ virajaṃ dhammaṃ, nibbānaṃ akutobhaya’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.216);
国王把那些王子的饰物装进四个箱子,交到长子手里的时候,就像世尊把阐明四圣谛的任务交到法将舍利弗手里的时候一样。所以世尊才说:诸比丘,舍利弗能够详细地解说、开示、阐明、建立、揭示、分析、显明四圣谛。在那样的时候,那些王子去国王那里请求饰物,就像比丘僧团在临近雨安居时前来请求说法一样。据说这部经就是在临近雨安居时宣说的。国王说:孩子们,我已经把饰物交在你们长兄的手里了,你们让他拿出来戴上吧。同样,正自觉者也说:诸比丘,你们应当亲近舍利弗和目犍连,诸比丘,你们应当依止舍利弗和目犍连。他们是智者,是同梵行者的扶助者。就这样把比丘们派到法将身边。巴利
Rañño tesaṃ puttānaṃ piḷandhanaṃ catūsu peḷāsu pakkhipitvā jeṭṭhaputtassa hatthe ṭhapitakālo viya bhagavato dhammasenāpatissa hatthe catusaccappakāsanāya ṭhapitakālo, tenevāha – ‘‘sāriputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattāri ariyasaccāni vitthārena ācikkhituṃ desetuṃ paññāpetuṃ paṭṭhapetuṃ vivarituṃ vibhajituṃ uttānīkātu’’nti (ma. ni. 3.371). Tathārūpe khaṇe tesaṃ rājaputtānaṃ taṃ rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā piḷandhanaṃ yācanakālo viya bhikkhusaṅghassa vassūpanāyikasamaye āgantvā dhammadesanāya yācitakālo. Upakaṭṭhāya kira vassūpanāyikāya idaṃ suttaṃ desitaṃ. Rañño, ‘‘tātā, jeṭṭhabhātikassa vo hatthe mayā piḷandhanaṃ ṭhapitaṃ taṃ āharāpetvā piḷandhathā’’ti vuttakālo viya sambuddhenāpi, ‘‘sevetha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne, bhajatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne. Paṇḍitā bhikkhū anuggāhakā sabrahmacārīna’’nti evaṃ dhammasenāpatino santike bhikkhūnaṃ pesitakālo.
王子们听了国王的话,就去到长兄那里请求饰物;同样,比丘们听了导师的话之后,就来到法将身边请求说法。长兄打开内室,取出四个箱子放好;同样,法将开始讲这部经,以四圣谛建立纲目。放好三个箱子,打开其中一个,从中取出五个匣子;同样,先把其他三圣谛放在一边,解析苦圣谛时,显示五蕴。放好四个匣子,打开其中一个,从中取出五个小箧;同样,先把四个无色蕴放在一边,解析色蕴时,依四大种及所造色显示五个部分。巴利
Rājaputtehi rañño kathaṃ sutvā jeṭṭhabhātikassa santikaṃ gantvā piḷandhanaṃ yācitakālo viya bhikkhūhi satthukathaṃ sutvā dhammasenāpatiṃ upasaṅkamma dhammadesanaṃ āyācitakālo. Jeṭṭhabhātikassa gabbhaṃ vivaritvā catasso peḷāyo nīharitvā ṭhapanaṃ viya dhammasenāpatissa imaṃ suttantaṃ ārabhitvā catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ vasena mātikāya ṭhapanaṃ. Tisso peḷāyo ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vivaritvā tato pañcasamugganīharaṇaṃ viya tīṇi ariyasaccāni ṭhapetvā dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ vibhajantassa pañcakkhandhadassanaṃ. Cattāro samugge ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vivaritvā tato pañcakaraṇḍanīharaṇaṃ viya cattāro arūpakkhandhe ṭhapetvā ekaṃ rūpakkhandhaṃ vibhajantassa catumahābhūtaupādārūpavasena pañcakoṭṭhāsadassanaṃ.
302 就像把四个小盒放在一边,打开其中一个,把盖子搁在旁边,然后把手饰、脚饰等饰物送给人一样;同样,先把三大种和所造色放在一边,在分析地界时,先把外地界像盖子一样搁在一边,为了从种种自性方面以二十种方式显示内地界,而说出“贤友,什么是内地界”等话。巴利
302. Cattāro karaṇḍe ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vivaritvā pidhānaṃ passe ṭhapetvā hatthūpagapādūpagādipiḷandhanadānaṃ viya tīṇi mahābhūtāni upādārūpañca ṭhapetvā ekaṃ pathavīdhātuṃ vibhajantassa bāhiraṃ tāva pidhānaṃ viya ṭhapetvā ajjhattikāya pathavīdhātuyā nānāsabhāvato vīsatiyā ākārehi dassanatthaṃ ‘‘katamā cāvuso ajjhattikā pathavīdhātū’’tiādivacanaṃ.
那位王子后来从四个小箧、四个匣子、三个箱子里依次取出饰物分给他们;同样应当知道,长老也是后来依次分别展示其余三大种、所造色、四无色蕴和三圣谛。所说的“贤友,什么是内地界”等等,其中“内的”和“自身的”都是指自己所有的同义词。“硬”就是坚硬;“粗糙”就是粗涩。“所执取”并不只是指业所生的,而是泛指存在于身体中的一切。因为身体中的一切,不论是已执取的还是未执取的,就其为执取、抓取、执著的对象而言,全都称为“所执取”。也就是:头发、体毛……乃至胃中物、粪便。这就是为修习界业处的善男子,依内地界所分别说明的业处。在这里,想要从作意开始,增长观慧而证得阿拉汉果的人,他所应当做的一切,在《清净道论》中已经详细说明了。至于“脑”,在这里的经文中并没有收录。也应当把它取来,依照《清净道论》所说的方法,从颜色、形状等方面确定之后,作意:“这也是无心的、无记的、空的、坚硬的地界。”又说“或者其他任何”,这是为了把存在于其余三部分中的地界也一并含摄而说的。那么,所谓“以及这内地界”,就是指上面所说的这种内地界。所谓“以及外地界”,就是指在《分别论》中依照“铁、铜、锡、铅”等方式所说的外地界。巴利
Tassa pana rājaputtassa tehi catūhi karaṇḍehi catūhi samuggehi tīhi ca peḷāhi pacchā anupubbena nīharitvā piḷandhanadānaṃ viya therassāpi itaresañca tiṇṇaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādārūpānañca catunnaṃ arūpakkhandhānañca tiṇṇaṃ ariyasaccānañca pacchā anupubbena bhājetvā dassanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘katamā cāvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ajjhattaṃ paccattanti ubhayampetaṃ niyakādhivacanameva. Kakkhaḷanti thaddhaṃ. Kharigatanti pharusaṃ. Upādinnanti na kammasamuṭṭhānameva, avisesena pana sarīraṭṭhakassetaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Sarīraṭṭhakañhi upādinnaṃ vā hotu, anupādinnaṃ vā, ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhavasena sabbaṃ upādinnameva nāma. Seyyathidaṃ – kesā lomā…pe… udariyaṃ karīsanti idaṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānikassa kulaputtassa ajjhattikapathavīdhātuvasena tāva kammaṭṭhānaṃ vibhattaṃ. Ettha pana manasikāraṃ ārabhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ gahetukāmena yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vitthāritameva. Matthaluṅgaṃ pana na idha pāḷiāruḷhaṃ. Tampi āharitvā, visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena vavatthapetvā, ‘‘ayampi acetanā abyākatā suññā thaddhā pathavīdhātu evā’’ti manasi kātabbaṃ. Yaṃ vā panaññampīti idaṃ itaresu tīsu koṭṭhāsesu anugatāya pathavīdhātuyā gahaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātūti yā ca ayaṃ vuttappakārā ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Yā ca bāhirāti yā ca vibhaṅge, ‘‘ayo lohaṃ tipu sīsa’’ntiādinā (vibha. 173) nayena āgatā bāhirā pathavīdhātu.
到这里,长老已经按不同自性,用二十种行相详细说明了内地界,而对外地界只是简略说明。为什么呢?因为在众生对某处的爱着、喜好、希求、缠缚、执取、执著很强时,佛陀或佛弟子为了拔除他们对这些爱着等的执取,就会详细解说;而在这些不强的地方,因为没有要做的事,就只简略说明。就像农夫耕田时,在草根、树根牢固、犁头被卡住的地方,他会停下牛,拨开泥土,把根一根根切断拔除,费很大力气;在没有这些根的地方,他就用力赶牛,鞭打牛背,直接耕过去。应当知道这里的道理也是这样。巴利
Ettāvatā therena ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu nānāsabhāvato vīsatiyā ākārehi vitthārena dassitā, bāhirā saṅkhepena. Kasmā? Yasmiñhi ṭhāne sattānaṃ ālayo nikanti patthanā pariyuṭṭhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ parāmāso balavā hoti, tattha tesaṃ ālayādīnaṃ uddharaṇatthaṃ buddhā vā buddhasāvakā vā vitthārakathaṃ kathenti. Yattha pana na balavā, tattha kattabbakiccābhāvato saṅkhepena kathenti. Yathā hi kassako khettaṃ kasamāno yattha mūlasantānakānaṃ balavatāya naṅgalaṃ laggati, tattha goṇe ṭhapetvā paṃsuṃ viyūhitvā mūlasantānakāni chetvā chetvā uddharanto bahuṃ vāyāmaṃ karoti. Yattha tāni natthi, tattha balavaṃ payogaṃ katvā goṇe piṭṭhiyaṃ paharamāno kasatiyeva, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
这“就是地界”说的是:这两种地界,从坚硬、粗涩、粗硬的角度看,都是同一个特征,所以都只是地界。说“贤友”,是把内地界和外地界放在一起对照来说明。因为外地界没有心识这一点很明显,内地界却不明显,所以当人把内地界看成和外地界完全一样、同样没有心识时,就容易把握了。就像什么呢?就像把一头还没调伏的牛和一头已经调伏的牛拴在一起,那头没调伏的牛头几天还会挣扎乱动,但过不了多久就被调伏了。同样,如果把内地界也看成和外地界一样,那么“没有心识”这一点头几天可能还显现不出来,但不用多久,它没有心识的事实就会变得很清楚。对于这两者,都应当以正慧如实观察:“这不是我的,这不是我,这不是我的自我。”所谓“如实”,就是按照它本来的样子;因为它具有无常等性质,所以应当这样观察:是无常、是苦、是无我。巴利
Pathavīdhāturevesāti duvidhāpesā thaddhaṭṭhena kakkhaḷaṭṭhena pharusaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇā pathavīdhātuyeva , āvusoti ajjhattikaṃ bāhirāya saddhiṃ yojetvā dasseti. Yasmā bāhirāya pathavīdhātuyā acetanābhāvo pākaṭo, na ajjhattikāya, tasmā sā bāhirāya saddhiṃ ekasadisā acetanāyevāti gaṇhantassa sukhapariggaho hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā dantena goṇena saddhiṃ yojito adanto katipāhameva visūkāyati vipphandati, atha na cirasseva damathaṃ upeti. Evaṃ ajjhattikāpi bāhirāya saddhiṃ ekasadisāti gaṇhantassa katipāhameva acetanābhāvo na upaṭṭhāti, atha na cirenevassā acetanābhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Taṃ netaṃ mamāti taṃ ubhayampi na etaṃ mama, na esohamasmi, na eso me attāti evaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathābhūtanti yathāsabhāvaṃ, tañhi aniccādisabhāvaṃ, tasmā aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti evaṃ daṭṭhabbanti attho.
为什么接着又说“贤友,确实有这回事”呢?是为了先通过外水界来显示外地界的坏灭,然后再进一步以更明显的方式,显示已执取的、存在于身体中的地界的坏灭。所谓“增盛扰动”,是指在水劫的力量下不断增长而扰动。所谓“那时外地界消失”,是指在那个时候,百千俱胝轮围世界当中,一切以山等形态存在的地界,都被碱水溶解,随水而去,彻底消失不见。溶解之后,就只剩下水。所谓“如是广大”,就是指它如此巨大。巴利
Hoti kho so, āvusoti kasmā ārabhi? Bāhiraāpodhātuvasena bāhirāya pathavīdhātuyā vināsaṃ dassetvā tato visesatarena upādinnāya sarīraṭṭhakapathavīdhātuyā vināsadassanatthaṃ. Pakuppatīti āposaṃvaṭṭavasena vaḍḍhamānā kuppati. Antarahitā tasmiṃ samaye bāhirā pathavīdhātu hotīti tasmiṃ samaye koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe khārodakena vilīyamānā udakānugatā hutvā sabbā pabbatādivasena saṇṭhitā pathavīdhātu antarahitā hoti. Vilīyitvā udakameva hoti. Tāva mahallikāyāti tāva mahantāya.
二十万又四那由他。
大地就是按这样的厚度来计算的。巴利
Duve satasahassāni, cattāri nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharāti. –
就这样,仅凭它的厚度就已经这么庞大,而从广度来说,更有百千俱胝轮围世界那么大。“无常性”,就是曾经存在而后不复存在。“尽法”,就是其本性趋向消亡。“坏法”,就是其本性趋向毁坏。“变易法”,就是其本性会舍弃原来的状态。所以,用这所有的词,说的都只是无常这一个特征。而凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无我。这样一来,无常、苦、无我这三个特征也就都包含在内了。“少住立”,就是住立的时间很短。应当知道,这个身体的短暂住立有两种方式:一是住立时间的短暂,二是自身本质的短暂。因为,这个身体在过去的心识刹那曾活着,现在不活着,未来也不会活着;在未来的心识刹那将会活着,现在不活着,过去也不曾活着;在现在的心识刹那正活着,过去不曾活着,未来也不会活着。巴利
Evaṃ bahalatteneva mahantāya, vitthārato pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷappamāṇāya. Aniccatāti hutvā abhāvatā. Khayadhammatāti khayaṃ gamanasabhāvatā . Vayadhammatāti vayaṃ gamanasabhāvatā. Vipariṇāmadhammatāti pakativijahanasabhāvatā, iti sabbehipi imehi padehi aniccalakkhaṇameva vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ anattāti tīṇipi lakkhaṇāni āgatāneva honti. Mattaṭṭhakassāti parittaṭṭhitikassa, tattha dvīhākārehi imassa kāyassa parittaṭṭhititā veditabbā ṭhitiparittatāya ca sarasaparittatāya ca. Ayañhi atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha, na jīvati, na jīvissati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissati, na jīvati, na jīvittha. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe jīvati , na jīvittha, na jīvissatīti vuccati.
“ 生命、自体与一切苦乐,
皆与单一心识相应;彼一刹那,倏忽即逝。”巴利
‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā; Ekacittasamāyuttā, lahu so vattate khaṇo’’ti. –
这句话正是为了说明它自身的短暂住立而说的。应当这样理解:因为住立极其短暂,所以叫短暂住立。巴利
Idaṃ etasseva parittaṭṭhitidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ṭhitiparittatāya parittaṭṭhititā veditabbā.
不过,应当知道,由于它和入息、出息等紧密相连,所以它的自性是短暂的。因为众生的生命,有的依靠入息而存续,有的依靠出息而存续,有的依靠入息和出息而存续,有的依靠四大种而存续,有的依靠段食而存续,有的依靠识而存续。这在《清净道论》中已经详细说明了。巴利
Assāsapassāsūpanibaddhādibhāvena panassa sarasaparittatā veditabbā. Sattānañhi assāsūpanibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ, passāsūpanibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ, assāsapassāsūpanibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ, mahābhūtūpanibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ, kabaḷīkārāhārūpanibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ, viññāṇūpanibaddhaṃ jīvitanti visuddhimagge vitthāritaṃ.
“渴爱所执”是指被渴爱抓取、执持、紧紧握住的“我是”“我的”或“我存在”。而“此时,对于他,这些在这里不存在”:此时,那位比丘这样把三种相(无常、苦、无我)加在上面观察时,对于内在的地界等,“我是”等三种由渴爱、慢、见而来的执取,在这里就不存在了,也就是彻底没有。就像依水界那样,依火界、风界也是如此,外在的地界也会消失。不过这里只提到了一种,其余的也应从义理上理解。巴利
Taṇhupādinnassāti taṇhāya ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhassa ahanti vā mamanti vā asmīti vā. Atha khvāssa notevettha hotīti atha kho assa bhikkhuno evaṃ tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā passantassa ettha ajjhattikāya pathavīdhātuyā ahanti vātiādi tividho taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāho noteva hoti, na hotiyevāti attho. Yathā ca āpodhātuvasena, evaṃ tejodhātuvāyodhātuvasenapi bāhirāya pathavīdhātuyā antaradhānaṃ hoti. Idha pana ekaṃyeva āgataṃ. Itarānipi atthato veditabbāni.
“贤友,如果”这句话,是在这里显示那位修界业处的比丘在耳门建立把握所缘时的力量。“骂詈”:用十种骂詈的事来骂。“毁呰”:用言语说“你做了这样那样的事,我们也要对你这样那样”来毁呰。“触恼”:激怒。“使之苦恼”:令痛苦,这一切都是以言语来恼害。“他如是”:那位修界业处的比丘这样清楚地了知。“我的受已生起”:以当下正在生起的状态,以及以现前生起的状态,说为已生起。“耳触所生”:依耳触为缘,从耳触所生的、在耳门速行的感受。“触是无常”:耳触存在后以坏灭之义为无常,他这样观见。受等也应知为与耳触相应。“唯以界为所缘”:就是以界为名的所缘。“趣入”:进入。“信受”:于彼所缘信受,或者说这只是依处格的说法。依连声之故说“唯以界为所缘”,这里的意思是“唯以界为所缘”。“胜解”:以界之力如此获得胜解,不贪染,不瞋害。因为这位在耳门所缘现前时,以根本遍知、客随、暂时之力作把握,其广说在念处经的念与正知品中已说。然而那里是以眼门说的,这里应以耳门来了知。巴利
Tañce, āvusoti idha tassa dhātukammaṭṭhānikassa bhikkhuno sotadvāre pariggahaṃ paṭṭhapento balaṃ dasseti. Akkosantīti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosanti. Paribhāsantīti tayā idañcidañca kataṃ, evañca evañca taṃ karissāmāti vācāya paribhāsanti. Rosentīti ghaṭṭenti. Vihesentīti dukkhāpenti, sabbaṃ vācāya ghaṭṭanameva vuttaṃ. So evanti so dhātukammaṭṭhāniko evaṃ sampajānāti. Uppannā kho me ayanti sampativattamānuppannabhāvena ca samudācāruppannabhāvena ca uppannā. Sotasamphassajāti upanissayavasena sotasamphassato jātā sotadvārajavanavedanā, phasso aniccoti sotasamphasso hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccoti passati. Vedanādayopi sotasamphassasampayuttāva veditabbā. Dhātārammaṇamevāti dhātusaṅkhātameva ārammaṇaṃ. Pakkhandatīti otarati. Pasīdatīti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe pasīdati, bhummavacanameva vā etaṃ. Byañjanasandhivasena ‘‘dhātārammaṇamevā’’ti vuttaṃ, dhātārammaṇeyevāti ayamettha attho. Adhimuccatīti dhātuvasena evanti adhimokkhaṃ labhati, na rajjati, na dussati. Ayañhi sotadvāramhi ārammaṇe āpāthagate mūlapariññāāgantukatāvakālikavasena pariggahaṃ karoti, tassa vitthārakathā satipaṭṭhāne satisampajaññapabbe vuttā. Sā pana tattha cakkhudvāravasena vuttā, idha sotadvāravasena veditabbā.
对于已经这样把握了界业处的强力观行者来说,即使所缘出现在眼门等处时,如果生起了不如理的作意,那么它到了确定阶段,经过一两次的反复熏习,心就沉入有分,不会以贪等的方式生起,这就是达到顶点的锐利观行者。另一种人,会以贪等方式进行一次速行,但在速行结束时,他这样作意“我以贪等方式速行了”,这时所缘就被把握住了,第二次就不会再那样速行。还有另一种人,第一次这样作意之后,第二次仍然以贪等方式速行,但在第二次结束时,他这样作意“我以贪等方式速行了”,这时所缘就被把握住了,第三次就不会再生起。在这里,第一种人过于锐利,第三种人过于迟钝,应当依据第二种人来理解这部经、《鹌鹑譬喻经》和《根修习经》中的含义。巴利
Evaṃ katapariggahassa hi dhātukammaṭṭhānikassa balavavipassakassa sacepi cakkhudvārādīsu ārammaṇe āpāthagate ayoniso āvajjanaṃ uppajjati, voṭṭhabbanaṃ patvā ekaṃ dve vāre āsevanaṃ labhitvā cittaṃ bhavaṅgameva otarati, na rāgādivasena uppajjati, ayaṃ koṭippatto tikkhavipassako. Aparassa rāgādivasena ekaṃ vāraṃ javanaṃ javati, javanapariyosāne pana rāgādivasena evaṃ me javanaṃ javitanti āvajjato ārammaṇaṃ pariggahitameva hoti, puna vāraṃ tathā na javati. Aparassa ekavāraṃ evaṃ āvajjato puna dutiyavāraṃ rāgādivasena javanaṃ javatiyeva, dutiyavārāvasāne pana evaṃ me javanaṃ javitanti āvajjato ārammaṇaṃ pariggahitameva hoti, tatiyavāre tathā na uppajjati. Ettha pana paṭhamo atitikkho, tatiyo atimando, dutiyassa pana vasena imasmiṃ sutte, laṭukikopame, indriyabhāvane ca ayamattho veditabbo.
像这样,通过耳门来把握所缘,从而显示界业处修行者的力量之后,现在要说明身门,于是说出“贤友,如果……”等话。因为遇到不可意的所缘时,在两门会疲惫,也就是在耳门和身门。因此,就像一位田主拿着锄头巡视田地,并非到处放置土块,而只在薄弱的地方用锄头破土,放上一块带草的土块;同样,大长老为了让未来那些想要修学、精进用功的善男子,在这两门建立防护,使他们能迅速终结生老死,所以针对这两门,以坚固地防护来展开这段教导。巴利
Evaṃ sotadvāre pariggahitavasena dhātukammaṭṭhānikassa balaṃ dassetvā idāni kāyadvāre dīpento tañce, āvusotiādimāha. Aniṭṭhārammaṇañhi patvā dvīsu vāresu kilamati sotadvāre ca kāyadvāre ca. Tasmā yathā nāma khettassāmī puriso kudālaṃ gahetvā khettaṃ anusañcaranto yattha vā tattha vā mattikapiṇḍaṃ adatvā dubbalaṭṭhānesuyeva kudālena bhūmiṃ bhinditvā satiṇamattikapiṇḍaṃ deti. Evameva mahāthero anāgate sikkhākāmā padhānakammikā kulaputtā imesu dvāresu saṃvaraṃ paṭṭhapetvā khippameva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissantīti imesuyeva dvīsu dvāresu gāḷhaṃ katvā saṃvaraṃ desento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
在这里,“现行”是指主动上前攻击。“以手触”是指用手掌打,其他情况也按这个方式理解。“如是已成为”是指具有那样的状态。“于如实”是指在如实的状态中。“步向”是指运作、进行。在“如是随念佛陀”等说法中,以“彼世尊是……”这样的方式随念,就是随念佛陀;即使是以“这确是世尊所说的”这样的方式随念,也仍然是随念佛陀。以“法由世尊善说……”这样的方式随念,就是随念法;即使随念《锯喻经》的教诫,也仍然是随念法。以“善行道……”这样的方式随念,就是随念僧;即使忆念那位忍受锯割的比丘的功德,也仍然是随念僧。巴利
Tattha samudācarantīti upakkamanti. Pāṇisamphassenāti pāṇippahārena, itaresupi eseva nayo. Tathābhūtoti tathāsabhāvo. Yathābhūtasminti yathāsabhāve. Kamantīti pavattanti. Evaṃ buddhaṃ anussaratotiādīsu itipi so bhagavātiādinā nayena anussarantopi buddhaṃ anussarati, vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatāti anussarantopi anussaratiyeva. Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammotiādinā nayena anussarantopi dhammaṃ anussarati, kakacūpamovādaṃ anussarantopi anussaratiyeva. Suppaṭipannotiādinā nayena anussarantopi saṅghaṃ anussarati, kakacokantanaṃ adhivāsayamānassa bhikkhuno guṇaṃ anussaramānopi anussaratiyeva.
“依于善的舍不持续”,这里指的是观舍。“依于善的舍持续”,这里指的是六支舍。虽然这六支舍在漏尽者面对可爱与不可爱的所缘时,是以不贪等方式生起的,但这位比丘凭借精进力,通过修行成就,把自己的观安置在漏尽者六支舍的位置上,所以这个观本身就成了六支舍。巴利
Upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātīti idha vipassanupekkhā adhippetā. Upekkhā kusalanissitā saṇṭhātīti idha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, sā panesā kiñcāpi khīṇāsavassa iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu ārammaṇesu arajjanādivasena pavattati, ayaṃ pana bhikkhu vīriyabalena bhāvanāsiddhiyā attano vipassanaṃ khīṇāsavassa chaḷaṅgupekkhāṭhāne ṭhapetīti vipassanāva chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma jātā.
303 在水界的解说中,“水性的”:指存在于一切水中的湿润与流动的特相。至于胆汁、痰等方面的内容,连同修习的方法,都已经在《清净道论》里讲过了。“激增”:指像洪水一样增长,或者海水从海中涌出;这是它通常的激增状况。但在水灭劫的时候,百千俱胝轮围世界全都被水充满。“下沉”:指向下沉没,就像放在灶上的水一样,逐渐耗竭、消失。其余部分,都应依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
303. Āpodhātuniddese āpogatanti sabbaāpesu gataṃ allayūsabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Pittaṃ semhantiādīsu pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ saddhiṃ bhāvanānayena visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Pakuppatīti oghavasena vaḍḍhati, samuddato vā udakaṃ uttarati, ayamassa pākatiko pakopo, āposaṃvaṭṭakāle pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ udakapūrameva hoti. Ogacchantīti heṭṭhā gacchanti, uddhane āropitaudakaṃ viya khayaṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇanti. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
304 在火界的解说中,“火性”指存在于一切火中的暖热特相;或者火本身达到火的状态,所以叫“火性”。前面讲“水性”、后面讲“风性”时,也应同样理解。“由此”就是由这种火性。当它被扰动时,这个身体就会发热,出现一日热病等状况,体内生起热气。“由此衰老”就是由这种火界,这个身体才衰老,诸根残缺、体力耗尽,出现皱纹、白发等。“由此燃烧”就是当它被扰动时,这个身体像被烧着一样,那人哭喊着“我燃烧了!我燃烧了!”还盼着涂抹百次淘洗之酥与清凉白栴檀等膏,以及棕榈叶扇之风。“由此所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝得以正消化”就是由这火界,令所吃的饭等、所饮的饮料等、所嚼的面食等、所尝的芒果、蜂蜜、糖浆等,得以很好地熟化,也就是以转变成味等方式而分离,达成消化。以上是此处简说。若依详说,应当说的所有内容,都已连同修习方法在《清净道论》中讲述。巴利
304. Tejodhātuniddese tejogatanti sabbatejesu gataṃ uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ. Tejo eva vā tejobhāvaṃ gatanti tejogataṃ. Purime āpogatepi pacchime vāyogatepi eseva nayo. Yena cāti yena tejogatena. Tasmiṃ kuppite ayaṃ kāyo santappati, ekāhikajarādibhāvena usumajāto hoti. Yena ca jīrīyatīti yena ayaṃ kāyo jīrati, indriyavekallattaṃ balaparikkhayaṃ valipalitādibhāvañca pāpuṇāti. Yena ca pariḍayhatīti yena kuppitena ayaṃ kāyo dayhati, so ca puggalo dayhāmi dayhāmīti kandanto satadhotasappigosītacandanādilepañca tālavaṇṭavātañca paccāsīsati. Yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatīti yena taṃ asitaṃ vā odanādi, pītaṃ vā pānakādi, khāyitaṃ vā piṭṭhakhajjakādi, sāyitaṃ vā ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi sammā paripākaṃ gacchati, rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ saddhiṃ bhāvanānayena visuddhimagge vuttaṃ.
“青草”就是青草。意思是:依靠青草等物,火就熄灭了。“路中”就是大路。“岩山”就是山。“水中”就是水。“或可爱之地”是指没有草丛灌木等、空旷远离的露天地面。“无食”就是没有燃料、没有可执取的东西;这也是就火通常的熄灭方式而说的。但在火灭劫的时候,火焚烧百千俱胝轮围世界,连一点灰烬都不剩下。“以筋片”就是用皮片刮擦。“求火”:人们拿着这样细微的燃料去寻找火,只要得到一点点热气,就会燃烧起来。其余部分,在这里也应按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Haritantanti haritameva. Allatiṇādiṃ āgamma nibbāyatīti attho. Panthantanti mahāmaggameva. Selantanti pabbataṃ. Udakantanti udakaṃ. Ramaṇīyaṃ vā bhūmibhāganti tiṇagumbādirahitaṃ, vivittaṃ abbhokāsaṃ bhūmibhāgaṃ. Anāhārāti nirāhārā nirupādānā, ayampi pakatiyāva tejovikāro vutto, tejosaṃvaṭṭakāle pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ jhāpetvā chārikāmattampi na tiṭṭhati. Nhārudaddulenāti cammanillekhanena. Aggiṃ gavesantīti evarūpaṃ sukhumaṃ upādānaṃ gahetvā aggiṃ pariyesanti, yaṃ appamattakampi usumaṃ labhitvā pajjalati, sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
305 在风界的解说中,上行风是指引起打嗝、咳嗽等向上活动的风。下行风是指推动大便、小便等向下排出的风。腹内风是指肠外的风。肠内风是指肠内的风。随行于肢节、小肢节是指沿着血管网络遍布全身,随行于各个大小肢节,引发弯曲、伸展等动作的风。入息是指进入鼻腔的气息。出息是指从鼻腔呼出的气息。以上是这里的简要说明。至于详细阐述的内容以及修习方法,在《清净道论》中已经全部说明了。巴利
305. Vāyodhātuniddese uddhaṅgamā vātāti uggārahikkārādipavattakā uddhaṃ ārohanavātā. Adhogamā vātāti uccārapassāvādinīharaṇakā adho orohanavātā. Kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā. Koṭṭhāsayā vātāti antānaṃ antovātā. Aṅgamaṅgānusārinoti dhamanījālānusārena sakalasarīre aṅgamaṅgāni anusaṭā samiñjanapasāraṇādinibbattakavātā. Assāsoti antopavisananāsikavāto . Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikavāto. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ saddhiṃ bhāvanānayena visuddhimagge vuttaṃ.
“能吹走村庄”是指把整个村庄碾成粉末,然后带着走。对城镇等地方也是这样理解。这里说的是,在风劫发生时,以摧毁百千俱胝轮围世界的方式,显示风界的变异。“以扇子”是指用来扇火的东西。“于檐槽”是指屋顶的檐槽,因为水从那里流下来,所以它被称为“檐槽”。剩下的内容,在这里也应该按照前面的方式配合解释。巴利
Gāmampi vahatīti sakalagāmampi cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ kurumānā ādāya gacchati, nigamādīsupi eseva nayo. Idha vāyosaṃvaṭṭakāle koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaviddhaṃsanavasena vāyodhātuvikāro dassito. Vidhūpanenāti aggibījanakena. Ossavaneti chadanagge, tena hi udakaṃ savati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘ossavana’’nti vuccati. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
306 “贤友,正如……”这里是要说明什么呢?是要说明前面所说诸大种是没有众生的。“木”指木材之类的材料。“蔓”指用来捆绑的藤蔓。“草”指用来盖屋顶的草。“泥”指用来涂抹的泥。“虚空被围绕”意思是:这些木等材料从内外围绕之后,虚空就安立在那里。“就称为屋”:这只是施设名为“屋”而已。可是当木等各自分开堆成一堆一堆时,就只叫木堆、藤蔓堆等。同样地,骨等从内外围绕之后,虚空安立在那里,依靠这些骨等,就只称为“色”,世俗上称为“身体”。就像依靠木等材料而称为屋的房屋,可以叫刹帝利宅、婆罗门宅;同样地,这个身体也叫刹帝利身、婆罗门身。然而在这里,并没有任何众生或命者存在。巴利
306.Seyyathāpi, āvusoti idha kiṃ dasseti? Heṭṭhā kathitānaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ nissattabhāvaṃ. Kaṭṭhanti dabbasambhāraṃ. Vallinti ābandhanavalliṃ. Tiṇanti chadanatiṇaṃ. Mattikanti anulepamattikaṃ. Ākāso parivāritoti etāni kaṭṭhādīni anto ca bahi ca parivāretvā ākāso ṭhitoti attho. Agāraṃtveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti agāranti paṇṇattimattaṃ hoti. Kaṭṭhādīsu pana visuṃ visuṃ rāsikatesu kaṭṭharāsivallirāsītveva vuccati. Evameva khoti evameva aṭṭhiādīni anto ca bahi ca parivāretvā ṭhito ākāso, tāneva aṭṭhiādīni paṭicca rūpaṃtveva saṅkhaṃ gacchati, sarīranti vohāraṃ gacchati. Yathā kaṭṭhādīni paṭicca gehanti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ agāraṃ khattiyagehaṃ brāhmaṇagehanti vuccati, evamidampi khattiyasarīraṃ brāhmaṇasarīranti vuccati, na hettha koci satto vā jīvo vā vijjati.
贤友,为什么这里开始说“内眼”呢?因为前面没有讲到所造色、四种无色蕴和三圣谛,现在为了讲这些,才开始了这段开示。其中,“眼不坏”是指:当眼净色已经灭去、已经损坏,或者被胆、痰、血等阻碍时,眼就不能成为眼识生起的缘,这就叫“坏”;而能够成为眼识生起的缘的,就叫“不坏”。“外色”是指外在的、由四种来源所生的色。“与此相应的作意”是指依靠那眼和那些色,让有分心转向之后生起的作意;具体说,就是在眼门中能使有分心转向的唯作意界心。如果那些色不在感知范围内,或者那人没有留意,这种作意就不会生起。“与此相应的”是指与它相适合的。“识的部分”是指识的那一部分。巴利
Ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, cakkhūti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Heṭṭhā upādārūpaṃ cattāro ca arūpino khandhā tīṇi ca ariyasaccāni na kathitāni, idāni tāni kathetuṃ ayaṃ desanā āraddhāti. Tattha cakkhuṃ aparibhinnanti cakkhupasāde niruddhepi upahatepi pittasemhalohitehi palibuddhepi cakkhu cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo bhavituṃ na sakkoti, paribhinnameva hoti, cakkhuviññāṇassa pana paccayo bhavituṃ samatthaṃ aparibhinnaṃ nāma. Bāhirā ca rūpāti bāhirā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpā. Tajjo samannāhāroti taṃ cakkhuñca rūpe ca paṭicca bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭetvā uppajjanamanasikāro, bhavaṅgāvaṭṭanasamatthaṃ cakkhudvāre kiriyamanodhātucittanti attho. Taṃ rūpānaṃ anāpāthagatattāpi aññāvihitassapi na hoti, tajjassāti tadanurūpassa. Viññāṇabhāgassāti viññāṇakoṭṭhāsassa.
在“彼如实者”等语句中,是依门来显示四圣谛。其中,“如实者”指与眼识俱存者,也就是具有眼识的人。“色”:因为眼识不是色的生起之因,在眼识的刹那,只有三种来源所生的色,而在紧接着的心识刹那,也可得到四种来源所生的色。“入摄”就是被计入。“受”等是与眼识相应而有的。“识”就是眼识本身。这里,“行”只指思心所。“摄”是合在一起的总摄。“合”是集合。“同聚”是积聚。“见缘起者”就是见到缘的人。“见法者”就是见到缘生之法的人。“欲”等词全都是渴爱的同义词。因为渴爱能起欲求的作用,所以称为“欲”;能起执著的作用,所以称为“执著”;能起随顺的作用,所以称为“随顺”;能沉入、吞没、执取,所以称为“联结”。欲贪的调伏、欲贪的舍断,就是涅槃的同义词。这样,经中已说到的三谛,还要引出道谛来把握:在这三处中的正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定,以及修习与通达,这就是道。“许多已作”:仅就这些来说,就已经对世尊的教法做了许多。在“贤友,内耳”等段落中,也应当依同样的方式理解。巴利
Yaṃ tathābhūtassātiādīsu dvāravasena cattāri saccāni dasseti. Tattha tathābhūtassāti cakkhuviññāṇena sahabhūtassa, cakkhuviññāṇasamaṅginoti attho. Rūpanti cakkhuviññāṇassa na rūpajanakattā cakkhuviññāṇakkhaṇe tisamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ, tadanantaracittakkhaṇe catusamuṭṭhānampi labbhati. Saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti gaṇanaṃ gacchati. Vedanādayo cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāva. Viññāṇampi cakkhuviññāṇameva. Ettha ca saṅkhārāti cetanāva vuttā. Saṅgahoti ekato saṅgaho. Sannipātoti samāgamo. Samavāyoti rāsi. Yo paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passatīti yo paccaye passati. So dhammaṃ passatīti so paṭiccasamuppannadhamme passati, chandotiādi sabbaṃ taṇhāvevacanameva , taṇhā hi chandakaraṇavasena chando. Ālayakaraṇavasena ālayo. Anunayakaraṇavasena anunayo. Ajjhogāhitvā gilitvā gahanavasena ajjhosānanti vuccati. Chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānanti nibbānasseva vevacanaṃ, iti tīṇi saccāni pāḷiyaṃ āgatāneva maggasaccaṃ āharitvā gahetabbaṃ, yā imesu tīsu ṭhānesu diṭṭhi saṅkappo vācā kammanto ājīvo vāyāmo sati samādhi bhāvanāpaṭivedho, ayaṃ maggoti. Bahukataṃ hotīti ettāvatāpi bahuṃ bhagavato sāsanaṃ kataṃ hoti, ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, sotantiādivāresupi eseva nayo.
不过,在意门这里,所谓“内意”,指的就是有分心。它虽然灭去了,却没有能力成为转向心的缘;它只是以微弱的状态在运作,所以叫做“已坏”。而有能力成为转向心的缘的,则叫做“不坏”。“外法”就是指法所缘。“还没有与那相应的”这句话,是就有分心正在发生的那一刻说的。第二种转起方式,则是针对心偏离到别处的情况说的,比如熟练地观察禅那、熟练地作意业处、或者熟练地读诵佛语等。在这种转起方式里,“色”也可以指四种因所生的色法。因为意识能生起色法,受等心所与意识相应,这里的“识”就是意识本身。而这里的“行”,只取触和思这两个心所。其余部分应当按照前面所说的方式来理解。就这样,大长老先前只是简略地观照了一部分,来到这里之后,把前面还没有详细讲的内容,按照一一门类分别开示出来,顺着前后的脉络,把这部经讲完了。巴利
Manodvāre pana ajjhattiko mano nāma bhavaṅgacittaṃ. Taṃ niruddhampi āvajjanacittassa paccayo bhavituṃ asamatthaṃ mandathāmagatameva pavattamānampi paribhinnaṃ nāma hoti. Āvajjanassa pana paccayo bhavituṃ samatthaṃ aparibhinnaṃ nāma. Bāhirā ca dhammāti dhammārammaṇaṃ. Neva tāva tajjassāti idaṃ bhavaṅgasamayeneva kathitaṃ. Dutiyavāro paguṇajjhānapaccavekkhaṇena vā, paguṇakammaṭṭhānamanasikārena vā, paguṇabuddhavacanasajjhāyakaraṇādinā vā, aññavihitakaṃ sandhāya vutto. Imasmiṃ vāre rūpanti catusamuṭṭhānampi labbhati. Manoviññāṇañhi rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, vedanādayo manoviññāṇasampayuttā , viññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇameva. Saṅkhārā panettha phassacetanāvaseneva gahitā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Iti mahāthero heṭṭhā ekadesameva sammasanto āgantvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhatvā heṭṭhā parihīnadesanaṃ sabbaṃ taṃtaṃdvāravasena bhājetvā dassento yathānusandhināva suttantaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
第9篇 大心材喻经注释巴利
9. Mahāsāropamasuttavaṇṇanā
307 “如是我闻”这句,是《大心材喻经》的开头。其中“离去不久”,说的是提婆达多破坏僧团、造下出佛身血的恶业之后,没过多久就离开了,当时他还保持着比丘的外相,但已经成了别住者。巴利
307.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsāropamasuttaṃ. Tattha acirapakkanteti saṅghaṃ bhinditvā ruhiruppādakammaṃ katvā nacirapakkante saliṅgeneva pāṭiyekke jāte.
比丘们,这里说“某位善男子”,虽然并没有指定是哪一家的善男子,但应当知道,这话是特指提婆达多而说的。因为他出生在从未中断的大选王族传承、甘蔗王世系中,所以从出身来说,他是良家出身的善男子。“陷入”:如果一个人的出身已经深入到他内在,就说他“被出身所陷”。对老、病等也是这样理解。对利养、恭敬等来说,“利养”指四种资具;“恭敬”指对这些资具妥善侍奉的状态;“称誉”指赞美之词;“生起”就是产生。“不知名者”:在两人站立之处都不为人所知,连仅足糊口遮身的衣食都得不到。“少势”:随从者稀少,既无前行引导之人,也无后续随行之人。巴利
Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco kulaputtoti kiñcāpi asukakulaputtoti na niyāmito, devadattaṃyeva pana sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. So hi asambhinnāya mahāsammatapaveṇiyā okkākavaṃse jātattā jātikulaputto. Otiṇṇoti yassa jāti anto anupaviṭṭhā, so jātiyā otiṇṇo nāma. Jarādīsupi eseva nayo. Lābhasakkārādīsupi lābhoti cattāro paccayā. Sakkāroti tesaṃyeva sukatabhāvo. Silokoti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Abhinibbattetīti uppādeti. Apaññātāti dvinnaṃ janānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne na paññāyanti, ghāsacchādanamattampi na labhanti. Appesakkhāti appaparivārā, purato vā pacchato vā gacchantaṃ na labhanti.
用树心木来做该用树心木做的东西,比如车轴、车轮、轭、犁等随便什么。他抓取了梵行的枝叶:对于以道果为精髓的教法梵行来说,四种资具就叫作枝叶,而他恰恰抓取了这些。并且他就以此为止步:正因为如此,他想“对我来说,心材已经得到,到此就够了”,于是就停下来满足了。巴利
Sārena sārakaraṇīyanti rukkhasārena kattabbaṃ akkhacakkayuganaṅgalādikaṃ yaṃkiñci. Sākhāpalāsaṃ aggahesi brahmacariyassāti maggaphalasārassa sāsanabrahmacariyassa cattāro paccayā sākhāpalāsaṃ nāma, taṃ aggahesi. Tena ca vosānaṃ āpādīti teneva ca alamettāvatā sāro me pattoti vosānaṃ āpanno.
310 提婆达多具足五神通,而天眼通安立在五种神通的顶端,在这部经里,天眼通就被称为“如实知见”。所谓“住于不知不见”,是说他们对任何微细的色都无所知,甚至连一粒尘埃中的鬼都看不见,就这样安住。巴利
310.Ñāṇadassanaṃ ārādhetīti devadatto pañcābhiñño, dibbacakkhu ca pañcannaṃ abhiññānaṃ matthake ṭhitaṃ, taṃ imasmiṃ sutte ‘‘ñāṇadassana’’nti vuttaṃ . Ajānaṃ apassaṃ viharantīti kiñci sukhumaṃ rūpaṃ ajānantā antamaso paṃsupisācakampi apassantā viharanti.
311 成就非时解脱:就像《无碍解道》里说的:“什么是非时解脱?四种圣道、四种沙门果,以及涅槃,这就是非时解脱。”他就是这样成就、完成、获得这九种出世间法的。因为世间等至只在入定的那一刹那就从对立之法中解脱出来,所以被称为时解脱,也就是经里说的:“什么是时解脱?四种禅那和四种无色界等至,这就是时解脱。”但出世间法不一样,它们时时都能解脱,因为圣道和圣果一旦解脱,就永远解脱了;涅槃则是从一切烦恼中彻底解脱。所以这九种法就叫作非时解脱。巴利
311.Asamayavimokkhaṃ ārādhetīti, ‘‘katamo asamayavimokkho? Cattāro ca ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni, nibbānañca, ayaṃ asamayavimokkho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.213) evaṃ vutte navalokuttaradhamme ārādheti sampādeti paṭilabhati. Lokiyasamāpattiyo hi appitappitakkhaṇeyeva paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanti, tasmā, ‘‘katamo samayavimokkho? Cattāri ca jhānāni catasso ca arūpāvacarasamāpattiyo, ayaṃ samayavimokkho’’ti evaṃ samayavimokkhoti vuttā. Lokuttaradhammā pana kālena kālaṃ vimuccanti, sakiṃ vimuttāni hi maggaphalāni vimuttāneva honti. Nibbānaṃ sabbakilesehi accantaṃ vimuttamevāti ime nava dhammā asamayavimokkhoti vuttā.
不动的心解脱,就是阿拉汉果的解脱。这就是它的目标,所以叫此为目标,也就是说,梵行生活是为了阿拉汉果这个目标。这句话说的就是:这就是它的目标。这是核心,意思是阿拉汉果是梵行生活的核心。这是终点,意思是阿拉汉果是梵行生活的最终归宿,这就是尽头,再没有比这更高的需要证得了。世尊就这样顺着前后的脉络,把开示收尾了。巴利
Akuppā cetovimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Ayamattho etassāti etadatthaṃ, arahattaphalatthamidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ. Ayaṃ etassa atthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Etaṃ sāranti etaṃ arahattaphalaṃ brahmacariyassa sāraṃ. Etaṃ pariyosānanti etaṃ arahattaphalaṃ brahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ, esā koṭi, na ito paraṃ pattabbaṃ atthīti yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
第10篇 小心材喻经的注释巴利
10. Cūḷasāropamasuttavaṇṇanā
312 如是我闻这一句,说的是《小心材喻经》。其中,“黄铜色者”指那位婆罗门,他肤色金黄;“Koccha”是他的名字,所以称为“黄铜色者”。关于“有僧团的”等说法:他们拥有由出家众组成的僧团,所以叫“有僧团的”;同样,他们拥有群众,所以叫“有群众的”。“教团之师”指以教导行为和学处的方式成为那群人的老师。“知名的”指被知晓、出名。“拥有名声的”指他们以“这些少欲知足的人,因为少欲,连衣服都不穿……”这样的方式声名远播,所以拥有名声。“创立教派者”指建立见解宗派的人。“被公认为善士的”指他们被人们这样认可:“这些人是善良的、美好的、正直的人。”“对于广大群众的”指对于无闻、愚昧的凡夫而言。接着为了说明这些人,经文说“即如:布拉纳”等。其中,“布拉纳”是那位自称导师者的名字,“迦叶”是族姓。据说,他出生时,补足了某一户人家原有的九十九个奴隶而使之满一百,因此给他取名叫“布拉纳”。又因为他是个吉祥的奴隶,所以没有人说“他做了坏事”,也没人说“他没做事”。他想:“我何必待在这里?”于是逃走了。随后盗贼抢走了他的衣服。他连用树叶或草遮身都不会,就光着身子走进一个村子。人们看见他,心想:“这位沙门是阿拉汉,少欲知足,没人能跟他相比。”于是拿着糕饼、饭食等前来亲近他。他想:“我因为没衣服穿,才得到了这些。”从那时起,即使得到衣服他也不穿,就把这当作出家。在他那里,另外还有五百人也出家了。针对这件事,经文说“布拉纳·迦叶”。巴利
312.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷasāropamasuttaṃ. Tattha piṅgalakocchoti so brāhmaṇo piṅgaladhātuko. Kocchoti panassa nāmaṃ, tasmā ‘‘piṅgalakoccho’’ti vuccati. Saṅghinotiādīsu pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho etesaṃ atthīti saṅghino. Sveva gaṇo etesaṃ atthīti gaṇino. Ācārasikkhāpanavasena tassa gaṇassa ācariyāti gaṇācariyā. Ñātāti paññātā pākaṭā. ‘‘Appicchā santuṭṭhā, appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsentī’’tiādinā nayena samuggato yaso etesaṃ atthīti yasassino. Titthakarāti laddhikarā. Sādhusammatāti ime sādhu sundarā sappurisāti evaṃ sammatā. Bahujanassāti assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassa. Idāni te dassento seyyathidaṃ pūraṇotiādimāha. Tattha pūraṇoti tassa satthupaṭiññassa nāmaṃ. Kassapoti gottaṃ. So kira aññatarassa kulassa ekūnadāsasataṃ pūrayamāno jāto, tenassa ‘‘pūraṇo’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Maṅgaladāsattā cassa ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti vattā natthi, akataṃ vā na katanti. ‘‘So kimahamettha vasāmī’’ti palāyi. Athassa corā vatthāni acchindiṃsu. So paṇṇena vā tiṇena vā paṭicchādetumpi ajānanto jātarūpeneva ekaṃ gāmaṃ pāvisi. Manussā taṃ disvā, ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo arahā appiccho, natthi iminā sadiso’’ti pūvabhattādīni gahetvā upasaṅkamanti. So ‘‘mayhaṃ sāṭakaṃ anivatthabhāvena idaṃ uppanna’’nti tato paṭṭhāya sāṭakaṃ labhitvāpi na nivāsesi, tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesi. Tassa santike aññepi pañcasatā manussā pabbajiṃsu, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘pūraṇo kassapo’’ti.
玛卡离是他的名字。因为出生在牛栏,所以第二个名字叫牛栏生。据说,他拿着油瓶走在泥泞的地上,主人喊道:“孩子,别滑倒!”他一不小心滑倒摔了一跤,因为害怕主人就起身逃跑。主人追上去,抓住了他衣角。他干脆扔掉衣服逃走,成了裸形外道。其余的事迹和布拉纳的故事一样。巴利
Makkhalīti tassa nāmaṃ. Gosālāya jātattā gosāloti dutiyaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira sakaddamāya bhūmiyā telaghaṭaṃ gahetvā gacchantaṃ, ‘‘tāta, mā khalī’’ti sāmiko āha. So pamādena khalitvā patitvā sāmikassa bhayena palāyituṃ āraddho. Sāmiko upadhāvitvā sāṭakakaṇṇe aggahesi. Sopi sāṭakaṃ chaḍḍetvā acelako hutvā palāyi, sesaṃ pūraṇasadisameva.
阿吉达是他的名字。他披着人发织成的毯子,所以叫“人发毯者”。把这两个名字合起来,就称作“阿吉达·人发毯者”。这里说的“人发毯”,就是用人的头发织成的毯子,再没有比这更下贱的衣服了。正如经中所说:“比丘们,就像各种线织的衣服当中,人发毯被说成是最下贱的;比丘们,人发毯冷的时候冰冷,热的时候灼热,颜色难看,气味难闻,触感粗糙。”巴利
Ajitoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kesakambalaṃ dhāretīti kesakambalo. Iti nāmadvayaṃ saṃsanditvā ‘‘ajito kesakambalo’’ti vuccati. Tattha kesakambalo nāma manussakesehi katakambalo, tato paṭikiṭṭhataraṃ vatthaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ, kesakambalo tesaṃ paṭikiṭṭho akkhāyati, kesakambalo, bhikkhave, sīte sīto uṇhe uṇho dubbaṇṇo duggandho dukkhasamphasso’’ti (a. ni. 3.138).
巴咕特是他的名字,迦旃延是他的族姓。把名字和族姓合在一起,就称为“巴咕特·咖佳亚那”。这个人拒绝用冷水,就算大便之后也不用冷水清洗,只有拿到温水或米汤时才清洗。每当他要过河或越过路上的积水,就会堆起一个沙堆,认为“我的戒破了”,然后重新决意持戒,才继续走。他就是这样一个没有福运、持邪见的人。巴利
Pakudhoti tassa nāmaṃ. Kaccāyanoti gottaṃ. Iti nāmagottaṃ saṃsanditvā, ‘‘pakudho kaccāyano’’ti vuccati. Sītudakapaṭikkhittako esa, vaccaṃ katvāpi udakakiccaṃ na karoti, uṇhodakaṃ vā kañjiyaṃ vā labhitvā karoti, nadiṃ vā maggodakaṃ vā atikkamma, ‘‘sīlaṃ me bhinna’’nti vālikathūpaṃ katvā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gacchati, evarūpo nissirikaladdhiko esa.
散若耶是他的名字。他是贝拉塔的儿子,所以叫贝拉塔之子。他们宣称“我们没有结缚的烦恼,没有缠缚的烦恼,我们是远离烦恼结缚的人”,因为这样说,就得到了尼干陀这个名称。他是那塔的儿子,所以叫那塔子。“他们都证知了”的意思是:就像他们自己所承诺的那样,他们确实都证知了。这里说的是——如果他们的承诺能导向解脱,那他们就全都证知了;如果不能,他们就没有证知。因此,他们的承诺到底能不能导向解脱?这就是这个问题的含义。接着,世尊因为他们的承诺没有实质内容、不能导向解脱,就以“够了”否定它,转而用譬喻来说明义理,要开示法,说道:“婆罗门,我将为你开示法。”巴利
Sañjayoti tassa nāmaṃ. Belaṭṭhassa puttoti belaṭṭhaputto. Amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso palibujjhanakileso natthi, kilesagaṇṭharahitā mayanti evaṃ vāditāya laddhanāmavasena nigaṇṭho. Nāṭassa puttoti nāṭaputto. Abbhaññaṃsūti yathā tesaṃ paṭiññā, tatheva jāniṃsu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace nesaṃ sā paṭiññā niyyānikā sabbe abbhaññaṃsu. No ce, na abbhaññaṃsu. Tasmā kiṃ tesaṃ paṭiññā niyyānikā na niyyānikāti, ayametassa pañhassa attho. Atha bhagavā nesaṃ aniyyānikabhāvakathanena atthābhāvato alanti paṭikkhipitvā upamāya atthaṃ pavedento dhammameva desetuṃ, dhammaṃ, te brāhmaṇa, desessāmīti āha.
320 在这其中,“为了作证”的意思是:为了亲自体证。“不产生欲”的意思是:不发起想要去做的欲求。“不精勤”的意思是:不付出努力,不奋力前进。“陷于消沉的状态”是指:内心退缩、意志低沉。“懈怠者”是指:松垮地执取教法的人,他把教法弄得松松垮垮地执取,不能坚固地执取。巴利
320. Tattha sacchikiriyāyāti sacchikaraṇatthaṃ. Na chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāchandaṃ na janayati. Na vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ parakkamaṃ na karoti. Olīnavuttiko ca hotīti līnajjhāsayo hoti. Sāthalikoti sithilaggāhī, sāsanaṃ sithilaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, daḷhaṃ na gaṇhāti.
323 婆罗门,在这里,比丘远离感官欲乐……:为什么这些初禅等法,比智见更超胜?因为是以灭尽定为基础。要知道,下面的初禅等法是以观为基础,而这里的这些法是以灭尽定为基础,所以变得更超胜。世尊就这样顺着经文的脉络,把这部经讲完了。开示结束时,那位婆罗门安立在皈依中。巴利
323.Idha, brāhmaṇa bhikkhu, vivicceva kāmehīti kathaṃ ime paṭhamajjhānādidhammā ñāṇadassanena uttaritarā jātāti? Nirodhapādakattā. Heṭṭhā paṭhamajjhānādidhammā hi vipassanāpādakā , idha nirodhapādakā, tasmā uttaritarā jātāti veditabbā. Iti bhagavā idampi suttaṃ yathānusandhināva niṭṭhapesi. Desanāvasāne brāhmaṇo saraṇesu patiṭṭhitoti.